No.

SD201-322ED

TRAINING TEXT FOR Xvision

 .

No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: FEATURES OF Xvision

The most recent Toshiba Xvision is a high-performance and compact helical scanner which
incorporates the high-speed scanning functions and helical scanning techniques originally
developed for the Xpress continuous rotation CT scanner.

1. Compact configuration and an installation area of

’ / less than 20 m2
Employment of the innovative small-sized and lightweight slip ring has enabled the high-
voltage generator to be installed completely within the gantry. As a result, the system
configuration includes only three units; the gantry, the patient couch, and the Navistation.
The area required for installation is thus 20 m2 or less, making this the most compact
helical scanning system developed so far. An existing CT scanner can therefore be
replaced with a helical scanner without enlarging the room or building a new room.

2. Super-wide patient environment in spite of

compact configuration
The size of the overall gantry is compact but the diameter of the opening is 72 cm and the
couch top is 47-cm wide. These dimensions are almost as large as those of the highest-
grade model. Xvision is an innovative CT scanner which has achieved compactness while
maintaining a comfortable patient environment.

3. Various helical scanning techniques available as

standard
Helical scan offers a wide-range continuous volume data in a short time. Five helical
scanning techniques, including multiphase helical scanning (GO & GO, GO & RETURN)
which generates both arterial and venous phase images with a single injection of contrast
agent, zooming helical scanning, and multi-helical scanning etc., are provided for use
according to the purpose of examination.

-l-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

t SUBJECT: FEATURES OF Xvision

4. Large-capacity and high-cooling-rate X-ray tube

supports powerful helical scanning
An X-ray tube with a large capacity (2000 kHU) and high cooling rate (340 kHU/min) is
installed to ensure efficient helical scanning. This X-ray tube enables continuous helical
scanning of up to 50 s, and largely reduces the waiting time after a helical scan. In
addition, when an optional 3500~kHU X-ray tube with a cooling rate of 735 kHU/min is
installed, continuous helical scanning for 30 s at 300 mA is possible, and the waiting time
after a helical scan is further reduced.

5. High-speed rapid sequence scanning with 2.5-s

Scan cycle I
The minimum scan cycle time including scan time and couch top feed time has been
reduced to 2.5 s. The accelerated rapid sequence scanning has further improved the
performance of contrast-enhanced studies.

6. High-density and multi-channel high-performance

detector generates high image quality
By offsetting the 896-channel high-density detector, an 1800-channel-equivalent detector
has been realized and a spatial resolution of 0.35 mm has been achieved. In addition, the
wide-range detector has achieved a density resolution 2 mm,(0.5%).

7. Various types of artifact suppressic?-I software

available as standard
The standard Xvision system is provided with various types of artifact suppression
software. These allow significant suppression of artifacts that have been adversely
affecting image quality in the past. BHC, which has been made possible by the two-path
method developed by Toshiba, suppresses head beam hardening artifacts and enables
observation of the region from the temporal to parietal area with the same window
settings. RASP suppresses shoulder and pelvic file artifacts and APMC suppresses
abdominal gas artifacts.

-2-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: FEATURES OF Xvision

I-8. ~~~operability
Excellent using touch panel
A touch panel has been employed in the operating terminal.

9. Full-automatic CT scanner performing concurrent

processing for all the functions
The 32-bit computer system and 160~MB memory system enable all the functions
including scanning, image reconstruction, display, image processing, transfer, and filming
to be performed concurrently. It is possible to perform image reconstruction during
helical scanning.

In addition, all these procedures can be preset in 72 types of exam Plan, into which know-
how of experts can be incorporated freely.

10. Remote-controlled patient couch and gantry,

maximum tilt angle +_30*
Xvision allows remote control operations from the Naviport for the gantry tilting as well
patient- couch movement. During examination of the corpus vertebrae, for example, you
need not enter the scanning room for every slice. In addition, the gantry can be tilted up
to +30°.

II. Multi-purpose CT scanner combining

compactness and high performance
As a result of its compactness and high performance, Xvision is expected to have
applications in other fields and other modalities. For example, Xvision can be used for
IVR and operation simulation, and can be mounted on a vehicle for mass chest screening.
These applications would have been impossible for CT scanners with inferior performance
or compactness.

-3-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SPECIFICATIONS OF Xvision

1. Scanning method Continuous R/R method

2. Scan time Half scan 1s

Full scan 1.5 s, 2 s, 4 s, 6 s

3. Slice thickness 1mm,2mm,3mm,5mm,7mm, 10mm

4. Scan cycle time S&S mode 2.5 s (rapid scan)

S&V mode 6.5 s

5. Spatial resolution 0.35 mm

6. Density resolution 0.5% (2 mm)

7. Tube capacity 2000 kI-IU (3500 kHU option)

8. Tube voltage 120 kV, 130 kV

9. Tube current 50 mA to 300 mA (can be set in steps of 10 mA)

10. Detector Xe detector, 896 channels

11. View rate 600 views/s

12. Maximum scanning field $500 mm

13. Gantry opening diameter $720 mm

14. Gantry tilt angle -30” to +30” (can be changed by remote control from the
Navistation)

15. Reconstruction matrix 512x512

16. Reconstruction time 5s

17. Computer system Distributed control by Z-bit and 16-bit microprocessors

18. Memory size 160MB

19. Magnetic disk capacity 1.8 GB Image data of 1400 slices and raw data of
200 slices

20. Magneto-optical disk capacity

(option) 600 MB Image data for 2400 slices or raw data
for 600 slices

-4-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SPECIFICATIONS OF Xvision

2 1. Couch top width 470 mm

22. Couch top movement speed 100 mm/s maximum

23. Couch top stroke 1820 mm

24. Minimum couch top height 300 mm

25. Reproducibility +0.25 mm

26. Three-dimensional image Option

processing

27. Artifact suppression software APMC, BHC, RASP

28. Helical scan

Continuous scan time 50 s

Couch top feeding speed 0.5 to 30 mm/s (can be set in steps of 0.1 mm/s)

Reconstruction position Can be specified in steps of 0.1 mm (minimum).

Reconstruction mode No interpolation, 360” interpolation, and opposed-beam

interpolation

Reconstruction time 8 s for all modes

29. Interaction English

30. Number of units 3

3 1, Installation area Standard: 25 m2 or less

Minimum possible: 20 m2 or less

32, Line capacity %phase, 200 V, 75 kVA. Grounding must be provided in

accordance with all applicable legal requirements for
medically used electrical equipment.

-5-
 Specitication Xvision/GX 1 XvisionBP I Xvisiofleal I Xvigor fV5) I Xvirror/Real cl9
Scan time 1, 1.5,2, 3,4 1, 1.5,2, 3,4 .I, 1.5,2, 3,4 1, 1.5,2, 3,4 1, 1.5,2, 3,4 c
Helical scan time 50 s 100 s 100 s 100 s 100 s ar
(maximum) cm
Helical scanning tield 5oornnl I 1ooomrn I 1ooomm I 1ooomm I 1ooomm m
Reconstruction time 5s I 5s I 5s 5s I 5s I 2s I 2s I 2s c)
Helical reconstruction 8s 8s 8s 8s GS 3s 3s 3s =I n m

time I I
S&S cvcle 2s I 2s I 2.5 s 2s I 2s I 2s 2s I I 2s
S&V cvcle 6s I 6s I 6.5 s 6s -7 6s I 3.5s 3.5sI I 3.5 s r
Tube cauacitv fMHU) 3.5 (4,6.5) 2 (3.5) 2 (3.5) .2 (3.5) 1 3.5 I 3.5
1 3.5 (6.5) 1 3.5 (6.5) v)
X-ray output (kW) 36 (48) 24 36 36 I 36 I 36I 48 I 48
-I
Tube voltage (kV) 120, 130 120, 130 120, 130 120, 130 120,130 120, 130
80, 100, 120, 80, 100, 120,
I I 135 135 0
Tube current (mA) 50 to 300 *1 1 50 to200 *2 I 50 to 300 *2 50 to300 *2 I 50 to300 *2 I 30 to 300 *2 I 50 to400 *2 I 30 to400 *2 n
Detector 896 Xe 1 640 %e 1 896 Xe 896 Xe 1 896 SSD t 896 SSD 1 896 SSD 1 896 SSD
Spatial resolution 0.35 mm I 0.35 mm I 0.35 mm I 0.35 mm I 0.35 mm xI
I
- Densitv resolution 0.5%/2mm I 0.25W2.5 mm I 0.25YU2.5 mm I 0.250/o/2.5mm I 0.250/n/2.5mm cn
1 Slice thickness I, 2, 3,5,7, 10 1,2, 3, 5,7, 10 1,2, 3, 5,7, 10 1,2, 3,5,7, 10 1,2, 3, 5, 7, 10 m
Maximum scanning
field
500 mm 500 mm 500 mm 500 Inni 500 mm z
Gantrv tilt angle ti5” I +30° I +30° rt30” I +30° I +30° I ti5” I &25” m
Gantrv oneninn diameter -72omm 1 72Omm 1 72Orn.m 720 mm 1 72Omm 1 72Ornrn 1 72Orn.m 1 72Omm cn
Storagecapacity 20001700 1400/200
I
1400/200 1800/550 1800/550 2000/700 2000/700 2000/700 cn
(image/raw) -0
CPU 167 I
I
147SA 1
I
147SA,SC 147SA,SC 167 167 167 167
m
MEM 0v4B)
3D
256
Standard I
64
OPT 1
64/128
OPT
64/128
OPT I
256
OPT I
256
Standard I
256
Standard I
256
Standard
c)
MO OPT 1 OPT 1 OPT OPT I OPT I Standard I Standard I Standard n
--- Z
Real-timehelical OPT OPT OPT OPT 3 ih.nes/s,
standard
OPT 3 tiames/s,
standard
c) 0

CT tluoroscopy OPT I OPT I --- OPT I OPT I OPT I OPT i OPT b

1
Line capacitv 75 kVA (100) 1 50 kVA 1 75kVA 75 kVA ~~I 75 kVA I 75 LVA I 100kVA I 100kVA -

*I1 : 50 mA step “2: 10 mA step 0

2
to
 No. SD20 I -322ED

SUBJECT: LIST OF SYSTEM MODELS iM

X-SERIES <REFERENCE>
Model name System name
TSX-OOlA Xpeed
TSX-OOlA/20 Xpeed/FLASH
TSX-OllA Jtfii@e (24 kWHFG)
TSX-0 1U/20 ,$6&e (36 BWHFG)
‘w-.

TSX-01 W/30 Xfo?ce (36kWHFG, with helical kit installed)

TSX-01 IA/40
TSX-01 IA/‘50 Xvigor for overseas (exported from Japan)
TSX-0 1lA/60 X@c~$p (with V5 installed)
_*
TSX-012A Xvigor
TSX-0 12Af2A Xvigor (with V5 installed, 3.5-M tube)
TSX-0 12N2B Xvigor (with V5 installed, 6.5-M tube)
TSX-002A Xvision
TSX-002A/2B Xvision/GX (3.5-M tube)
TSX-002AI4A Xvision (2-M tube)
TSX-002A/4B Xvision (3.5-M tube)
TSX-002A/4F Xvision (for Taiwan and Korea)
TSX-002A/SA Xvision/GX (2-M tube)
TSX-002A/SB Xvision/GX (3.5-M tube)
TSX-002A/SF XvisionIGX (for Taiwan and Korea)
TSX-002A/7A Xvision/SP
TSX-002A/7B Xvision/Real

-7-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

-“-._
__-

S&y Precautio&
._ .^-_-._
_.--.- - __-*
--.++-+-
Be sure to observe the following precautions in order to ensure the safety of service engineers and
other personnel and safe operation of the system during installation, inspections, and adjustment
procedures.

1. Before starting installation; inspection;ror adjustment procedures; be sure’ to read the

installation manual and service manual carefully and thoroughly.

2. During installation and/or inspection, observe the following precautions.

(1) Confirm that the grounding wires are connected securely to the correct ground in order
to avoid electric shocks and ensure stable system operation.

(2) Do not use a common ground with another device. If a common ground is used, it will
not be possible to ensure stable system operation and electric shocks may also be caused.

(3) Confirm that the line capacity, line frequency, line voltage, and line voltage regulation
meet the specifications of this system.

(4) Do not use flammable or explosive gases near the system.

(5) Make sure that the proper ambient temperature, humidity, and ventilation are maintained
in the installation room, and do not apply unnecessary vibration or shock to the system.

3. During installation, inspection, and/or adjustments, observe the following precautions.

(1) When the gantry front cover is opened, support the front cover using the support rods
(one each for right and left) which are installed at the back of the cover.
Be sure to use the support rods correctly. If they are not set correctly or the cover is
lifted carelessly, the cover will fall as a result of its own weight causing injuries.

(2) Confirm that all the cable connectors are connected correctly and that the cables and oil
hoses are routed correctly.

(3) Confirm that there is no cooling oil leakage, etc.

(4) Before generating X-ravs, confirm that the required protection measures have been
properly performed. (Check that no one is in the scanning room and the doors are
closed, no materials such as films that should not be exposed to X-rays are present, and
there is no X-ray leakage from the scanning room.)
1
(5) When the high-voltage cable is to be disconnected, turn the power OFF, wait at least five
minutes, then, as a general rule, disconnect the bushing at the high-voltage transformer
first.

-8-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

When the high-voltage cable is disconnected, connect two of the three pins at the end of
the bushing simultaneously to the ground. Repeat the procedure at least twice for each
of the three pairs. (This procedure is required in order to completely remove the residual
charge in the high-voltage cable and ensure safety.)

Be sure to turn OFF the breaker of the distribution board and the power of the entire
svstem before starting the work procedures., After completion of the work procedures,
turn OFF the DAS timer in the gantry.

After completion of the work procedures, confirm that all the cover fixing screws are
securely tightened. If the gantry is tilted with the screws loose, the cover will open or
fall causing injuries.

Before working in the gantry, turn OFF the DSW5-2 on the GTS PWB (Gantry Table
Sequencer PWB). This disconnects the mechanical control section from the Navistation.
Do not forget to turn ON the DSW5-2 when the work is completed.

There is a possibility of the gantry rotating unexpectedly. Therefore caution is required

during installation.
(For example, the gantry may rotate when an exam Plan is selected from the Navistation
or when the probe of a measuring instrument comes into contact with a part causing a
short circuit .)

Be sure to turn OFF the circuit protector (CP320) of the servo amplifier before starting
the work procedures, except when the gantry is to be rotated..

There is a danger of electric shock with the LCSR (large-current slip ring).
Be sure to turn the breaker OFF before removing or attaching the rear dome cover.
Do not turn ON the gantry power with the rear dome cover removed.

-9-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(13) To rotate the gantry manually, electricity must be applied to the stationary unit in order
to release the brake.
Be sure to turn OFF the circuit protector CP320 of the servo amplifier before turning
ON the brake release switch SW326. At this time, the rotation unit may start rotating
unexpectedly if its weight is not balanced. Take care to prevent getting your hand
caught in the rotating parts.

(14) Gantry rotation is continued even when the exam Plan is interrupted. Be sure to
terminate the exam Plan to stop the gantry rotation when exchanging the phantom, etc.
with the gantry cover open.

- lo-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: STAND UNIT

I. Functions and Operations
The stand unit tilts the main frame unit relative to the vertical axis of the gantry in order to
scan an oblique section of the patient.

The tilt drive unit is located at the right of the gantry as viewed from the patient couch.
This unit tilts the main frame unit using,a sector gear driven by a motor through the
reducer incorporated in the stand. An encoder is mounted inside the stand on the right in
order to measure tilt angles.

The microswitch dog is mounted on the tilt sector gear at the right, and the microswitches
which turn OFF the power of the motor through the relays are mounted on the stand. The
encoder also sends instructions to the motor to stop tilting, that is, a double safety
function is employed.

The tilt guide unit is located at the left of the gantry, and supports the main frame unit rail
with cam-followers. A gas spring is mounted to the tilt guide unit in order to reduce the
tilt drive torque.

‘The microswitches operate in the following case.

When the stand unit operates normally, the encoder detects the tilt angles +30” and -30”
and sends instructions to the motor to stop tilting. However, when the gantry tilt exceeds
30” due to encoder failure, etc., the microswitch dog presses the microswitch and forcibly
. turns OFF the motor power, If the gantry cannot be stopped by the microswitch because
of momentum, it will bump against the mechanical stopper and stop mechanically.

Mechanical s topper

Microswitch dog

Microswitch
dog

Mechanical
stopper

Sector gear
Encoder

Vi
Pa .tient couch
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: STAND UNIT

Cam-follower

Side fan

Elect]
unit,

Stand unit (Left of the stand as viewed from the patient couch) Stand unit (rear)

Note: 1. The orientation of the gas spring shown in the left figure is opposite for TSX-
002AIl to 3.

2. The side fans shown in the right figure are not installed in TSX-002A/l to 3.

- 12-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: STAND UNIT

2. Tilt Angle Adjustment
The tilt detection unit must be adjusted so that the tilt stop positions conform to the
standards listed in the table below. To measure the tilt angle, set an angle measurement
level on the tube mounting plate as shown in the figure below.
To adjust the encoder, loosen the screw of the encoder mounting plate and manually
rotate the encoder gear.

Adjustment procedure

(1) Using the level, set the gantry to the actual measurement angle 0” position.

(2) Loosen the screw of the encoder mounting plate and manually rotate the encoder gear
so that the angle display on the operating panel is 0.

(3) Return the encoder to the original position and secure it. Tilt the gantry in each
direction until it stops automatically, and confirm that the angle display on the
operating panel is +30 and -30 correspondingly. Also confirm the 0” position. If the
displayed angles do not match the actual angles, the encoder position may have been
shifted. In this case, repeat the procedure from step (1).

(4) Repeat steps (1) to (3) to determine the encoder gear mounting position so that the
following standards are met.

Setting the level

Stop position Standards Adjustment sensor

a +30" +29.590 +30.5"
b 1 +O” (when tilted from +30” to 0’) / -0.2” to +0.2” I Encoder
C I -30" I -29.50 to -30.50 I

d -0” (when tilted from -30” to 0’) -0.2"to +0.2"

e Plus-limit microswitch +30.8" to 31.3” MS31
f (M’ mus-limit microswitch I -30.8" to -3 1.3” I MS 32

- 13 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: STAND UNIT

3. Maintenance of the Tilt Drive Unit
3.1 Lubricating the tilt drive unit

(1) Tools and parts required

0a Standard tools ................................................ : 1 set

@I Grease (Nichimori L grease) ............................ Adequate amount

0c Applicator (for applying grease) .................... : 1

(d) Rags ............................................................... * Adequate amount

(2) Work flowchart
.ght stand cover
1. Set the tilt angle to 0” and
remove the right side cover.

Positive-tilt
overrun microswitch

Negative-tilt

4. Apply grease to the sector

gear. wi3

5. After applying grease:

remount the right stand Motor

cover and the right side

Sector gear
cover, and tilt the gantry Gear
head
several times to spread the
Chain
grease evenly.
Stand
cover

End I I
Encoder
Stand ' -Reducer and drive g.ear

Tilt drive unit

Caution: Be sure to remount the stand cover before tilting the gantry. Otherwise, the
flan mav be damaged.

- 14-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: STAND UNIT

4. Troubleshooting of the Tilt Section

(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) (Countermeasure)

Damaged chain or Replace the chain

Tilting disabled
t
T T- sprocket or sprocket.

_ Microswitch has Reset the

operated. microsn-itch.

Disconnected Connect the

connector connector.
1
The motor does The motor does Replace the
not rotate. not make a Damaged motor motor.
humming sound.

The motor makes Transportation Remove the

a humming sound. jig still mounted transportation jig.

Damaged gear Replace the motor

head and the gear
head.

Replace the cable.

Faulty Adjust or replace

- electromagnetic _ the electro-
brake magnetic brake.
3
Abnormal noise Generated from Insufficient lubri- Apply grease.
during tilt the tilt drive unit cation of the chain -
operation and sector gear

Insufiicient Apply grease.

- lubrication of the I
LM guide

_ External noise Cover interference _Firmly seat the

covers.

Generated from Worn cam- Replace the rail.

the tilt guide unit follolyer running
rail

Damaged gas Replace the gas

spring spring.

- 15 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

The main frame unit consists of the slip ring unit, the optical data transfer unit, the control unit,
and the rotation drive unit. This unit rotates the gantry, and signals and power are
transmitted/received to/from the rotation section and the stationary section.

I. Slip Ring Unit I /

(1) What is a slip ring?

How can a moving object and a stationary object exchange power or signals? The
most familiar example is the relation between a train pantograph and the power line.
Only one contact point between a moving object and stationary object enables the
exchange of power or signals.
The TCT-900s was the first CT scanner to employ a slip ring for data transfer.
It is easy to understand the slip ring conceptually by considering the brush to be
analogous to the train pantograph and the slip ring to be analogous to the power line.

(2) Slip ring section

The slip ring unit supplies power to the X-ray high-voltage generator, etc. of the
rotation section. It consists of the main frame (gantry stationary section), the rotation
base (gantry rotation section), the rotation bearing, the pulley, the slip ring, and the
brush section.
The pulley and the rotation base are supported by the main frame through bearings
and can be rotated freely. The X-ray tube, X-ray high-voltage generator, and X-ray
beam control unit are mounted on the rotation base. The slip ring is fixed to the
pulley. Power is supplied from the brush section mounted on the back of the main
frame unit to the X-ray high-voltage generator through the slip ring unit,

The figure below shows the outline of the slip ring unit as viewed from the side of the
gantry.

The relationships between each slip

Pulley ring channel and the voltage are
shown in the table below.

RING ch I FUNC
RING 1 I 200 VAC

Front of the gantry

3

Main frame 5 I GND

- 16-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

X-ray tube

Control unit

Beam control unit

Rotation base

Detector

Main frame unit (front)

Power unit

Optical data
transfer unit

Brush section

Pulley Main
frame
Sli .p ring section

Main frame unit (rear)

Note: The figures above are for the TSX-002AI4 and later systems.

- 17-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN i=R!AME UNIT -

2. Procedure for Cleaning the Slip Ring

(1) Tools and parts required

(a) Standard tools .... ......... ...... ...... ...... ....... ....... : 1 set
(b) Sandpaper .... ...... ......... ...... ..... ...... ........ ....... *. 1 sheet
(c) Rag . ..... ........ ...... ......... ...... ..... ...... ........ ....... *l
.

(2) Work flowchart

1. Remove the Mylar ring, the rear-upper Caution: Be sure to turn OFF the power of
cover: the rear-under cover, and the the distribution board before
dome coyer. starting this work.

2. Disconnect the brush holder cable When removing the coyer: take
terminal and remove the brush holder.
slip ring or drop an object on it.

3. Clean the brushes and the brush holder. Caution: The brushes are fragile and must Refer to
At this time, check for abrasion of the L”““=1”...;- figure 3-l.
brushes. the burrs on the brushes wth a

4. Clean the slip ring and the slip ring Caution: Do not spill any of the abrasion
holder. residue in the gantry.

5. Remount the brush holder to the bracket Caution: l The brush holder must be
and connect the cable. mounted correctly so that the
brushes do not extend beyond
the ring.
l Confirm that the cable is
connected correctly.

6. Turn ON the power of the gantry and Caution: Never touch the slip ring:
rotate the rotation section by 90’ in brushes: etc. after supplying
local mode from the maintenance panel. power to the gantry.

7. Turn OFF the power of the gantry and

clean the slip ring and ring holder if ICaution: Confirm that the power is OFF.
I
they have not yet been cleaned.

8. Remount the dome co\‘er: the rear-upper

cover, and the rear-under coyer.

I END I

- 18-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

3. Replacement of the Slip Ring Brushes
(1) Tools and parts required

(a) Standard tools ........................................ : 1 set

(b) Low-voltage slip ring brushes ................. : Preset quantity (BSX77-1552-06*E)
(c) Rag ................................................. .:..... : 1
(d) Slip ring brushes.. ................................... : Required number

(2) Work flowchart

1. Remoye the Mylar ring, the rear-upper Caution: Be sure to turn OFF the power of the
cover: the rear-under co\ver, and the distribution board before this Jvork.
dome cover.

-7

2. Disconnect the brush holder cable Caution: When removing the cover: be carefIr not to
terminal and remo1.e the brush holder. apply a force to the ring or to damage it.

t +
3. Clean the brush holder. Caution: l Be careful handling the brushes because
they are fragile.
l Be careful not to damage the brushes.
l Do not spill any of the abrasion residue
in the gantry.
l If the brushes have burrs, remove them
using an emery paper.

Check the brush use-limit line, and Note: Check two limit lines for one brush. If one line
replace the brush on which the line or more cannot be seen, replace the brush.

5. Remove the brush cable and the

terminal plate securing screw.

I- ‘.
6. Remove the terminal plate. 1 /

r
7. Press out the spiral spring using a , ” Do not pull out the spring. Otherwise: the tension will
bladed screwdriver and pull out the t be changed.
brush. \.. __ I +-

- 19-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

.8. Remove the brushes which are set as a

pair.

9. Wipe off the abrasiorr residue from the

brush sliding surface of the brush
/ holder using a ray.

10. Insert the brush into the sliding section Caution: Be careful not to damage or break the
~1 brush.

11. Insert the terminal plate and screw it

with the brush cable.

12. Mount the brush holder to the bracket. Caution: The brush holder must be mounted so that
the brush sliding surface does not extend
beyond the ring.
. *
END

- 20 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

Figure 3- 1

Figure 3-2

Rotate these 90' while

applying a slight downwa ird
force and engage them.

Set so that the slot is not visible.

Figure 3-3

-2l-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

4. Troubleshooting of the Slip Ring Section

(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) (Countermeasures)

1 I 1 I
Sliding surfaces of the 1 Abrasion by flaws or 1 1Flaws on the ring -+ 1
slip ring and brushes - objects on the ring - Remove them using a
piece of sandpaper.
Objects 011 the ring -+
Clean them off.

_ Brush holder mounting - Loose brush holder - Tighten the screw firmly.
section mounting screws

- Brush holder section - Brush movement problem - Clean off the brush holder
section. Sandpaper the
brush holder section.

(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) (Countermeasures)

Excessive noise Sliding surface of the Flaw on the ring Sandpaper the ring.
brushes of the slip ring

Foreign object on the Clean the brush surfaces.

brush surface

Damaged brush 1 I Replace the brush.

;“‘“‘” -1
Badly pitted or morn-out Check the sliding surface
brush of the brush and replace it
if it is badly pitted or worn
H out.

Brush movement problem - Clean off the brush and

I 1 I
file it. I

I I 1
LI Brush mounting section u Loose brush holder u Tighten the screws firmly. 1
1 1 1 mounting screws I I I
Loose brush mounting - Tighten the screw firmly.
screws

(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) (Countermeasures)

Discharge between Brush holder and ring If there are traces of
the high-voltage spacer strength due to brush discharge, contact Nasu
section and GND, or powder or metallic objects Works.
interphase discharge on the insulating ring If foreign object or stains
in the high-voltage are found, remove them.
section

I
Ring surface Interference with objects Remove traces of
L
such as a screw discharge using a piece of
sandpaper and check that
no screws have fallen out.

- 22 -
 No. SDZOl-322,ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

5. Rotation Drive Unit
The rotation drive unit rotates the gantry rotation section at a maximum speed of 1
rotation per second. This unit is comprised of a motor, a small pulley, a timing belt, a
large pulley, and a timing belt-tension adjustment fitting.

The rotation torque generated by the motor located at thelower left (ascviewed form the
gantry front) is transmitted from the small pulley directly connected to the motor to the
large pulley through the timing belt to rotate the rotation section. In addition, mechanical
rotation stoppers are mounted to prevent rotation of the rotation section during
replacement of heavy components (such as the X-ray tube).

The gantry rotation section rotates only in the clockwise direction as viewed from the
gantry front.

When the rotation motor brake is released, however, free rotation is allowed and the
gantry rotation section can be rotated manually in the counterclockwise direction also.
When manually rotating the rotation section, extra care is required to avoid being caught
by the rotating parts.

-23 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

The figures below show the parts of the rotation drive unit viewed from the rear of the
gantry.

Tension adjustment
bolt

Main frame L- Metal fitting

Mechanical rotation Mechanical stopper/
stopper bolt Tension adjustment bracket

Figure 5-l Rotation drive unit (for TSX-002A/4 to 6) Current-type gantry

nical stopper
Tension adjustment bolt

Motor

Belt

Small pulley

Metal fitting

Mechanical rotation
I Tension
stopper
adjustment
bolt
bracket

Figure 5-2 Rotation drive unit (for TSX-002Nl to 3) Old-type gantry

- 24 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

6. Troubleshooting of the Rotation Section

(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) (Countermeasures)
The rotation The motor Broken belt Replace the belt.
dritre section - rotates.
does not rotate.

Motor does not _ Damaged motor Replace the motor.

whine. t

{,I Damaged servo

amplifier
- Replace the servo
amplifier.

Worn-out or Replace the

- broken bearing - bearing (replaced
(Main bearing) at the factory).

The rotation Remoye the

- stopper has been - stopper.
attached.

Interference Adjust the

_ between mounted installation of
components and components.
the frame, etc.

Faulty brake - Replace the motor

or the brake.

Replace the cable.

(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) (Countermeasures)

- Contact with the coyer . Fix and adjust the cover.
m

- Cables touching a Repair and reclamp the

stationary section cables.

Damaged motor Replace the motor.

- Noises from the belt Uneven contact or -’ Apply poiyder to the belt.
insufficiently smooth
sliding between the belt
and the groove in the
pulley.

- Loose screws for parts Tighten the screw firmly.

of the rotation unit

- Noises from the bearing Bearing abnormality --’ Call the Toshiba engineer-
ing personnel in charge.

- 25 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) (Countermeasures)

Abnormal sounds 1 Remoye the object from
when the gantry
rotates I the gantry.
I

Repair the cable and fix

it with cable ties.

- Insufficient lubrication -
of the rotation bearing

- Improper timing belt - Adjust the tension of the

tension timing belt.
r 1 I 1
- Electronic parts coyer, - Rattling coyer - Seat the cover firmly.
etc.

Gantry coyers t--+ Rattling cover

- Slip ring unit - Scratches on the ring - Repair them according to

surface the manual.

Brush movement - Clean the brushes

problem according to the manual.

(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) (Countermeasures)

I I
Uneven rotation of - Rotation timing belt - Improper belt tension - Adjust the tension of the
the rotation section timing belt according to
the manual.

- Rotation balance - Unbalanced rotation -’ Adjust the tension of the

(checked on the torque timing belt according to
monitoring terminal of the manual.
the servo-package)

L Torque (checked on the - Too much bearing -’ Call the Toshiba engineer-
torque monitoring torque ing personnel in charge.
terminal of the servo-
package)

The o\.erload relay - Torque - Same as above - Same as above

of the rotation servo
unit is activated.

- 26 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

7. Rotation Adjustment
7.1 Rotation speed adjustment
Refer to “GANTRY ROTATION SYSTEM”.

7.2 Rotation belt tension adjustment

(1) Measuring instruments and tools required

(a) Sonic belt tension gauge : 1

Model : STM303
Manufacturer : Unitta Co., Ltd.

If a sonic belt tension gauge is not available, follow the procedure described in
(3) “Adjustment procedure using a push-pull gauge”.

(b) Standard tools : 1 set

- 27 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

(2) Adjustment procedure using a sonic belt tension gauge

1. Remove the rear covers (upper and under) and open the front cover. Turn OFF the
circuit protector CP320 of the servo amplifier.
4
2. Loosen the screws for securing the belt-tension adjustment bracket.

I3. ‘Loosen the motor securing bolts from the front cover side. I

/5%il&l adjustment
bracket

- Mechanical rotation

Motor securing metal

Belt tension gauge

Figure 7-l Tension adjustment section (for TSX-002A/l to 3) .

Tension adjustment

Mechanical rotation

Belt tension gauge

Figure 7-2 Tension adjustment section (for TSX-002A/4 to 6)

- 28 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

4. Mark the center of the belt span.
(Approx. 400 mm from the pulley)

5. Enter the data required for the sonic belt I

tension gauge.
i) Weight M = 0.55 gf/cm2
ii) Width W = 30 mm
iii) Span S = 790 mm
Figure 7-3
6. Place the sensor of the sonic belt tension
gauge near the belt, and pluck both edges
of the belt with your fingers to measure
the tension. Perform three measurements
each on the left and right sides, and
calculate the average tension.
Standard: 596 to 674 N
(60.8 to 68.8 kgf)

Q” - Sensor

-Belt

/ \P’ Be sure to pluck both edges of the belt.

7. If the belt tension does not meet the Note: 1. To increase the tension of
standard, move the belt-tension the belt, rotate the tension
adjustment bolt clockwise.
adjustment bracket and measure the belt To decrease the belt
tension again using the sonic belt tension tension, rotate the bolt
gauge. After moving the belt-tension counterclockwise and push
adjustment bracket, be sure to rotate the the belt in the direction of
rotation unit more than ten rotations at the arrow in figure 7-3.
1.5 s per rotation from the GTS and then 2. Be sure to retighten the
measure the belt tension again using the loosened screws before
above procedures. rotating the rotation unit.

3. When the rotation unit is

8 Turn ON circuit protector CP320 of the rotated with the cover
/pli fier. removed, release the
interlock of the cover
9. Remount the rear covers (upper and switch.
under) and close the front cover.

- 29 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: MAIN FRAME UNIT

(3) Adjustment procedure using a push-pull gauge

1. Remove the rear covers (upper and

under) and open the front cover.
* Adjust to the largest value not
exceeding the standard range.
V

2. Turn OFF the circuit protector CP320 of

the servo amplifier.

3. Push the center of the belt 120 mm above

the small pulley with the push-pull gauge.
Bend the belt 7 mm and confirm that the
gauge reads 34 to 49 N (3.5 to 5 kgf).
Belt pulley
Standard: 34 to 49 N (3.5 to 5 kgf)

Figure 7-4
V

4. If the belt tension does not meet the Note: 1. To increase the tension of
standard, move the belt-tension the belt, rotate the tension
adjustment bracket and measure the belt adjustment bolt clockwise.
tension again. After moving the belt- To decrease the belt
tension adjustment bracket, be sure to tension, rotate the bolt
turn ON the circuit breaker CP320 of the counterclockwise and push
servo amplifier, rotate the rotation unit the belt in the direction of
more than ten rotations at 1.5 s per the arrow in figure 7-4.
rotation from the GTS, and then measure
the belt tension again using the above 2. Be sure to retighten the
procedures. loosened screws before
rotating the rotation unit.

5. Turn ON circuit protector CP320 of the 3. When the rotation unit is

servo amplifier. rotated with the cover
removed, release the
interlock of the cover
6. Remount the rear covers (upper and
switch.
under) and close the front cover.

- 30 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

I. Outline
The function of the X-ray beam control unit is to control the dose and quality of X-rays
generated from the X-ray tube. The unit includes the wedge filter unit for limiting X-rays
to the appropriate level before they reach the patient, and the slit unit for setting the slice
thickness of the object (patient). The wedge filter unit and the slit unit are incorporated
into one housing. (Refer to the figures below.)

The beam trimmer also is mounted to control the slice thickness of the object (patient)
with the slit unit.

In addition to the X-ray beam control unit, the X-ray tube, the oil cooler, the reference
detector, internal and median line projectors, the controller for the X-ray beam control
mechanism, the main-detector array, the DAS and the DAS power supply are also
mounted at the front of the rotation unit (rotating frame) of the gantry, and are rotated
together in the clockwise direction at high speed.

\ I-Median-line
projector

X-ray tube

Re
de tectors 10 ' unit '
T-
! -Slit
unit
-Internal
projector

Beam '
trimmer

Controller for the I

Main-dete ctor array
X-ray beam control DAS
mechanism
DAS power supply

-3l-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

2. X-ray Tube Mounting Unit
The X-ray tube is mounted on a stage which can be moved in the X and Y (near/away,
right/left) directions for position adjustment. The tube is fixed at the X-ray beam port
with four bolts and is also held by wire ropes. This ensures safety even in the unlikely
event of the breakage of the bolts.

X-ray tube wire

Adjus
screw -Ml2 bolt

mounting plate

alignment guide
Adjustment
screw
X-ray shutter

Median line projector

X-ray tube mounting unit (for TSX-002N4 to 6)

Current-type gantry

- 32 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

- Ml2 bolt

Tube mounting plate

Adjustment
screw

X-ray shutter -

X-ray tube mounting unit

- Median line
lvlculall 111 projector (for TSX-002A/l to 3)
Old-type gantry

In addition, the collimator (see figure shown to

the right) is mounted at the bottom of the X-ray
tube so that generated X-rays are converted to
appropriate fan beams to eliminate scatter lines
and penumbra effects.

The collimator is made of lead and is designed

so that fan beams from the collimator have the
correct angle. Take extreme care not to
damage this part because it limits the X-ray
beam. The reference detector is attached to the
port which is tilted relative to the vertical axis.

-33 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

3. Wedge Filter Unit
(1) Outline of operation

The wedge filter unit is placed between the patient and the X-ray tube to limit the X-
rays which pass through the patient. It also ensures that excessive exposure does not
interfere with processing:,,

Three different types of wedge filters, one for the head region (field sizes SS and S),
one for the abdominal region (field sizes M and L), and one for a field size with a
diameter of 500 mm, are used because the X-ray transmission rate differs depending
on the scanning field size. (For the TSX-002A/7, the calibration data acquisition
wedge is added.)

The wedge filter motor is a stepping motor. This motor rotates to set the appropriate
filter position when it receives the corresponding number of pulses.

The wedge drive section incorporates a photosensor for origin detection. The wedge
filters return to the origin and move to the preset position each time an instruction is
received in order to avoid cumulative positioning errors.

l What is a stepping motor?

In contrast to DC motors and AC motors, connection to a power supply is not

enough to rotate a stepping motor. It requires a control drive circuit. When a
pulse is input to the control drive circuit, the motor rotates by the specified angle
and stops.

- 34 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

direction (same in the

figure on the next page)

Wedge filter unit (TSX-002N4 to 6)

-35-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

Correction data
acquisition wedge

Wedge filter unit (TSX-002N7)

-36-
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

(2) Troubleshooting of the wedge filter unit
(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) (Countermeasures)
The wedge section 1-1 - Incorrect wiring or Check the power cable.
does not operate. t disconnection Connect the cable firmly.

4 Object jammed in the H Remove the object.

1 to;qumtransmission j / / /

- Locked at the stroke - Replace the sensor.

end due to damaged
origin sensor

-f Damaged motor Replace the motor

- The motor rotates. Loose pinion cap screw - Tighten the pinion cap
screws.

Replace the pinion.

1 I I- _ 1 1 1
- . . -
Abnormal noises - The whole unit - Foreign objects in the - Remove the objects.
unit

- Faulty motor operation - Incorrect miring or - Wire correctly and firmly.

disconnection

L Unstable wedge block - Large backlash of the - Adjust the motor position.
pinion & rack

L Loose wedge fixing - Tighten the bolts firmly.

bolts

- 37 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

4. Slit Unit
(1) Outline of operation

The slit unit controls the width of X-ray beams passing through the patient according
to the selected slice thickness. Six types of slice thickness are available: 1, 2, 3, 5, 7,
and 10 mm. For l-mm, 2-mm, and 3-mm slice thickness, the X-ray beam cannot be
narrowed using only the slit unit, therefore the beam trimmer (described later) also is
used. The slit width is changed by rotating the link mechanism shaft using the
stepping motor to move the slit plates.

The slit drive section incorporates a photosensor for origin detection.

The slit unit returns to the origin and moves to the preset position each time an
instruction is received in order to avoid cumulative positioning errors.

Five slit widths are available, and they are set as listed in the table below.

Slit link mechanism

SLIT

Slice thickness 1 Slit width

10 mm 3.58 +0.3
7mm 2.50 +0.2
5mm 1.79 +o. 1
3mm 1.20 +o. 1
2 mm and 1 mm 0.96 +O. 1

-38-
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

Slit unit Current-type gantry

Relationship between motor rotation direction and slit movement

Clockwise motor rotation makes the slit width narrower’ and counterclockwise motor
rotation makes the slit width wider.

.
- 39 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

Slit unit (TSX-002Nl to 3) Old-type gantry

Relationship between motor rotation direction and slit movement

Clockwise motor rotation makes slit width narrower and counterclockwise motor
rotation makes slit width wider.

- 40 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

(2) Troubleshooting of the slit unit

(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) f Countermeasures) ,

I
The slit section does
not operate. t
/ ;i’hnotor does not / - Damaged worm wheel
I I I
Replace the worm wheel.
I

1 Damaged motor H Replace the motor.

- Incorrect wiring or - Wire correctly and firmly.

discomlection
7

- Rust or insufficient - Grease the rotating parts.

lubricant
I - _ I I - 1
The slit does not ’ Incorrect wiring of the u Correct the problem.
return. origin point sensor or
I disconnection

L Replace and acljust the

, sensor.

- The motor rotates. - Loose worm wheel - Tighten the setscrews

setscrews firmly.

- Loose worm setscrews - Tighten the setscrews

firmly.
I 1 I 1 I - 1

Abnormal noise - The slit unit operates - Broken blade spring - Replace the spring.
from slit section normally.

Tighten the nuts firmly.

-41-
 No. SD201-322ED

S UBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

5. Beam Trimmer Unit
(1) Outline of operation

The beam trimmer is located just in front of the main-detector array to control the
width of the X-rays passing through the patient according to the selected slice .
thickness, as does the slit unit.

This trimmer is used only when a l-mm, 2-mm, or 3-mm slice thickness is selected.
In other cases, the trimmer is opened so that X-ray beams are limited only by the slit
unit.

The trimmer movement motor is a stepping motor. This motor rotates to set the
appropriate slit when it receives the corresponding number of pulses.

The beam trimmer drive unit is equipped with an origin detection photosensor. When
an instruction is received, the trimmer plates are returned to the original positions and
then are moved to the appropriate positions. This avoids cumulative positioning
errors.

* For the TSX-002A/7 (Xvision/SP), the relationship between the slice thickness and
the trimming width is different.

Beam trimmer unit

- 42 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

(a) Relationship between motor rotation direction and blade movement

The relationship between the motor rotation direction and blade movement
direction is opposite for the right and left motors.

When the right motor rotates clockwise (as viewed from the side where the
motor shaft is visible)J, the, blades are moved closer. When it rotates
counterclockwise, the blades are opened wider. For the lefi motor, the above
relationship is opposite.

The clearances between blades are shown below:

TSX-002A/4 and later

Blade clearance
311U.5 LIlIC;KIl~:SS
TSX-002A/4 to 6 1 TSX-002AI7
OPEN 22.7 kO.5 22.7 +0.5
(10 mm)
7mm I 22.7 3-0.5 I 14.0 rfio.5
5mm I 22.7 +0.5 I 10.0 50.5
3 mm +0.5 +0.5
6.4 o 6.4 o

2mm +0.5 +0.5

4.1 o 4.1 o

1 mm 2 o+o.5 +0.5
- 0 2.0 0

Reference: TSX-002A/l to 3 Old-type gantry

Slice thickness 1 Blade clearance

OPEN I 22.7 +0.5 mm
3 mm I 6.4 +0.2 mm

Caution: Finger injury hazard

Never place your fingers between the blades as this may result in your
fingers getting caught and injured.

-43 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

(2) Troubleshooting of the beam trimmer unit

(Phenomenon) (Check) (Probable cause) (Countermeasures)

Unmovable blades - The motor doesnot Connector pin has - Insert the connector pin.
rotate. fallen out.

Replace the motor.

Replace the chain I

- Locked at the stroke - Replace the sensor.

end due to broken
origin sensor

- Improper blade - Mount the blades

installation and correctly and acijust their
resulting overload movement.

- The motor rotates. Loose sprocket setscrew - Tighten the setscrew

firmly.

Replace the chain.

- Motor mounting - Loose motor-mounting - Tighten the screw firmly.

screw screw

- Faulty motor operation Incorrect wiring or - Wire correctly and firmly.

disconnection

Chain tension Improper chain tension Adjust the chain tension.

Asynchronous left - Left and right drive - Operation failure of - Acljust so that the blades
and right blade system operation either drive system move with opposite sides
movements parallel.
(“n”-shaped blade
movement)

- Origin sensor plate - Deformed origin sensor - Re-acljust the sensor

plate position.

- 44 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAiU’l CONTROL UNIT

6. Procedures for Removing the Optical System
(1) Optical system of the TSX-002A/4 to 6

I Set the X-ray tube to the 180” position. I

I Turn OFF the breaker (NFB2) of the rotation section. 1

1 Separate the optical system shielding cover and the X-ray 1

system cables. (Figure 6-1)

system shielding cover (front cover

Remove the sensors of the slit and wedge (1 each) and the
connectors of the motor (2 each).

Remove the slit and wedge base-plate bolts (M6 x 4) and

remove the optical system together with the base.

(2) Optical system of the TSX-002N7

1 Set the X-ray tube to the 180” position. I

I Turn OFF the breaker (NFB2) of the rotation section.

Separate the optical system shielding-cover and the X-ray

system cables.

Remove the mounting bolts (M8 x 8, M6 x 4) of the

rotation base reinforcement rib. (Figure 6-2)
I

rRemove the optical system shielding cover (front cover

only).

Remove the sensors of the slit and wedge (1 each) and the
connectors of the motor (2 each).
I
Eve the optical system together with the base.

-45 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

Note: 1. AfIer removing the optical system of the TSX-002A/7, projector
readjustment must be performed.

2. When the rotation base reinforcement rib of the TSX-002A/7 is remounted,

use a torque wrench to tighten the M8 bolts to 18 N.m (180 kgf-cm)

Optical system
shielding cover

X-ray system
cables

6-l Removing the optical system

- 46 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

Reinf orcement rib

rcement

Opt ical shielding cover

Figure 6-2 Removing the optical system (TSX-002Pd7)

- 47 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

7. Procedure for Checking the Optical System for
Image Abnormality
If image abnormality due to the X-ray optical system (ring artifacts, CT number shifting,
image SD deterioration, etc.) occurs, check as follows.

(1) Check the operation of the wedge filter, slit, and beam trimmer. In particular, check
whether or not the opening between trimmer blades is even.

(2) Check the wedge filter for scratches. Also, check the lead section of the slit and beam
trimmer for scratches.

(3) Check the X-ray tube alignment (front/back in particular) using the film method.

(4) Check the beam trimmer alignment.

Check whether or not the X-ray beam path aligns with the center of the opening
between trimmer blades.

* Basically, alignment adjustment is possible for the X-ray tube only.

However, adjustment of beam trimmer alignment may be required after the tube
focus is shifted.

The beam trimmer is not provided with adjustment bolts, etc., adjust the number of
washers at the fixing bolts.

* The detailed procedures are described in the subsequent pages.

7.1 Beam trimmer alignment

(1) Set the X-ray tube position to 0”.

(2) Turn ON GTS SW31-1 and SW32-4. (The beam trimmer is opened.)

Align this end to the gantry side. ._...._....._.._____-.--.......-..--.--.---.-----.....-----.---.......

For the 2.0 MJXU tube, perform
adjustment when the tube
temperature is 50” k5”.
._._..__.___.........-..--.--.--..-.--..--.--..-...-.--.-.....--......
For the 3.5 MHJJ tube. perform
adjustment when the tube
temperature is 40” W.
....._...________.__.---.--.-...-----.-....-.--..-..--....--..-....--.

- 48 -
 No. SD201-322ED

S UBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

(4) Using the dedicated jig, set the alignment film between the beam trimmer and the Xe
detector. (Place an object to block the X-rays.)

(5) Use the If setting program and generate X-rays under the following conditions.

120 kV, 300 mA, and 0.2 s

(6) Turn ON GTS SW31-4 and SW32-4. (Beam trimmer: 1 mm)

(Remove the object blocking the X-rays.)

(7) Generate X-rays under the same conditions as in (5).

120 kV, 300 mA, and 0.2 s

(8) Develop the film and adjust the beam trimmer so that the exposed line width is the
same on both sides of the 52-cm mark.

Gantry side Gantry side

52
------- ------a
-----“a
*---.A.”

7
Couch side Couch side

Adjustment impossible Adjustment possible

(9) In case of 2, insert the required number of dedicated spacers between the beam
trimmer and the gantry for adjustment.

(10) After adjustment, turn OFF GTS SWlO-1 and SWlO-2. Turn ON CP320 of R-
SERVO and turn OFF SW326.

- 49 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

7.2 Checking for damage of the opticaLsystem
Check the following sections for flaws (holes, dents, chipping, scratches, etc.) and foreign
objects (burrs, adhered contrast agent, etc.).
r -------------------------------------------------------- 1
( Flaws on the beam trimmer cause serious ring artifacts in thin-slice images (2 mm, for I
I example). Even a slight dent which-can-barely be,felt with the fingertip can result in a ring i
I artifact.
L-----,-------------,_,,,,__,,_,_,_,,___-----------------~ I

(1) Wedge filter (2) Upper slit

X-ray mtting plane

Chipping

w
1
? BUT

(3) Beam trimmer

X-ray cutting plane

Lead

(4) X-ray entrance plane of the detector

X-ray entrance plane

P
/

~~~~~~

I
Contrast agent I-Idle
Scratch

- 50 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

7.3 Procedure for checking the detector and beam trimmer front/back
alignment

7.3.1 Purpose

This subsection describes the procedures for checking the detector and beam trimmer
front/back misalignment, which is one of the causes of the ringL,artifacts

7.3.2 Items and tools required

(1) X-ray film (Polaroid)

(2) Ruler (graduated to 0.5 mm or less)

(3) Adhesive tape for securing the film

(4) Plate for fitting ‘the film (approx. 150 x 100 mm)

(5) Needle (for piercing the film)

(6) General tools

7.3.3 Procedure for checking front/back misalignment

(1) Using a pen or pencil, mark a reference line 52 mm from the end as shown in the
figure below.

Gantry side Needle hole Film Reference line

// ld/ /
A
td Note: Fit the film end onlv
52
..-_-_-_-_-_-.-----.- (avoiding the metal
stopper) against the plate

Couch side\ Metal stopper

Figure 7-l Reference line position

-5l-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

(2) Set the X-ray tube to the 0” position. Open the front cover and the rear covers
(upper and under), and turn OFF the breaker CP 1. Remove the dome cover, and then
turn CPl ON again.

Warning: After this step, do not touch the slip ring and the brushes. High voltage
(200 V) is present on the slip ring and the brushes and there is a danger of
electric shock.

(3) Set the GTS to the local control mode, and set the slit and the beam trimmer as
follows.

Slit : 5mm .. ... (SW3 1-2, SW32-3 >

B earn trimmer : 2mm..... (SW3 1-3, SW32-4)

- 52 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

(4) Set the film on the detector as shown in figure 7-2.

Beam trimmer

X-ray film -
Shielding plate Beam trimmer
\ I
X-ra> film Fihn fitting plate
I
lz!¶sm P
4
I Note: Securelv fit the X-ray film against the
r+- fihn fitting plate and the film fitting
plate to the rear of the detector. Fit
A the film end onlv (avoiding the metal
stonper) against the plate.

Rotation base surface

Figure 7-2 Film setting position

(5) Start the “If setting” program in the “System maintenance” menu.

(6) In the If adjustment mode, generate X-rays under the following conditions. Refer to
subsection 7.1.3 “If adjustment” in the service manual (2D201-03 5E) for the
procedure.

Tube voltage : 120 kV

Tube current : 300 mA

Focus size : Large

Exposure time : 0.2 s

- 53 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CQNTROL UNIT

(7) Pierce the film on the reference line and develop the film.

(8) Referring to figure 7-3, measure the offset of the beam trimmer.

Needle hole

/ , Needle hole

Beam trimmer center

(Center line of the exposed area)
Exposed area limited by the
beam trimmer
side ’ \ Developed X-ray f&n

Example: This figure shows that the beam trimmer is offset toward the couch
relative to the detector.

Figure 7-3 Offset measurement

The criteria for determining whether or not the offset is acceptable is:

-0.3 mm 2 6 5 0.3 mm.

- 54 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY BEAM CONTROL UNIT

(9) The required actions corresponding to the offset direction are shown in table 7-l.

Table 7-l Offset direction and required action

Offset direction Adjustment Action

Toward the couch Possible Adjust the number of spacers
(figure 7-4).
Toward the rear of the gantry Impossible Contact Nasu Works.

Figure 7-4 shows the beam trimmer mounting section. The beam trimmer can be
shifted toward the rear of the gantry by removing the required number of spacers. If
the specified alignment cannot be achieved by adjusting the number of spacers,
contact Nasu Works.

Spacer .
Spacer

Figure 7-4 Beam trimmer mounting section

(10) When the alignment check is completed, return the gantry to the original status.
Be sure to turn OFF the breaker CPl before mounting the dome cover.

- 55 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

FLOWCHART
1. X-ray tube replacement - -- - - - - -- - - -- Refer to the next page.

2. If adjustment for 80 kV and ------ ----- --. “If setting” in the “System Maintenance” menu
loo kV /

3. Tube aging .~~-.~-~~~---- “Seasoning” in the “System maintenance” menu

Waiting (approx. 1 hour) - - - -- - - -- - - -- - s Cooling the tube (with the power ON)

1
r-
4. If check for 80 kV and 100 --------------a
kV
After adjustment, save the data on a floppy disk.

If adjustment for 120 kV

and 130 kV

..mw.--m--e--m Front/back alignment Film method

5. Tube alignment
Left/right alignment “Alignment” in the
” System maintenance”
menu (Pin phantom is
used.)

6. NRA acquisition . ..__ - -.-- ----. “NRA acquisition” in the “System maintenance”
menu
After NRA acquisition, save the data on streamer
tape. (“NRA tools” in the “System maintenance”
menu)

I 7. Test scan and image check I

*** Refer to the service manual, etc. for the software use procedures. ***

- 56 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

1. Tube Replacement Procedure
(1) Tools and parts required

(a) Phillips screwdrivers : Large and small (1 each)

(b) Metric Allen wrenches ~ : 1 set

(c) Inch-size Allen wrenches : 1 set (for VARIAN tube) (3/16 inch)

(d) Nipper : 1

(e) Ratchet-type chain block : Lifting capacity of 100 to 250 kg is required

for lifting the tube and the oil cooler.

(f) Cabling materials (cable bands) : Large, middle, small (10 each)

(g) Stepladder : 1

(2) Work flowchart (two persons required)

1. Set the gantry tilt angle to 0”. Caution: If the gantry tilt angle is other than
O”, the tube replacement jig can run
out of control.
2. Lower the couch to the
DOWN limit.

3. Turn OFF all the power

L supplies.

4. Remove the Mylar ring and

open the front cover.

5. Remove the right side cover,

rear-upper cover, and rear-
under cover.

6. Remove the median line Note: Together with the projector, remove
projector. the plate engaged with the localization
pin in order to ensure reproducibility.

Continued on thz next page.

- 57 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

7. Remove the bands and Refer ,tQjgpf~slLzi~ee --- -.. - . . ..._ ~,
clamps fixing the tube cable, Caution: Be sure to remember each cable
the oil cooler cable, and the position and clamping position ,,l’
oil hose. , before disconnecting the cables:
“-_ --.---.- - .- --.
----________

8. Disconnect the high-voltage Caution: Be sure to connect the

cable from the tube. disconnected bushing to the
ground. After that, apply a cap and
plastic cover to the bushing for
protection.

9. Remove the four Ml2 bolts Caution: The tube can move to the front and
from the tube mounting plate. back, therefore caution is required.

lO.Turn ON the power of the Caution: Do not turn ON the breaker NFB2
gantry stationary unit only. of the rotation unit.

11. Release the brake of the Caution: The rotation unit may rotate
rotation motor. unexpectedly if its weight is not
balanced. Be sure to hold the
rotation unit by hand.

12. Manually rotate the rotation

unit at a slow speed and
position the tube directly
below the replacement jig.

13 .Put on the rotation motor Caution: When attaching the mechanical

brake again and attach the stopper, insert the bolts completely
mechanical stopper. in the hole and tighten the securing
nuts.

14.Attach the ratchet to the tube Caution: Make sure that the bolt for the jig
replacement jig. brake is securely tightened.

Continued on the next page.

- 58 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: .X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

15. Wind the lifting wire around Caution: Make sure that the wire does not
the tube and lift the tube interfere with other components.
using the’ ratchet handle. The maximum lifting load of the
tube replacement jig is 70 kgf. Do
not lift an object weighing more
than 70 kgf, as this may result in
damage of the system or the jig.

V I
16.Release the brake of the jig Caution: Hold the tube firmly by hand so that
and gently pull up the tube. it does not swing when the
mounting plate comes out of the
guide.
17. Put on the brake of the jig,
and then gently lower the
tube by manipulating the
ratchet handle.

18. Remove the oil cooler Caution: Hold the oil cooler firmly by hand
mounting screws. so that it does not swing when the
bolts are removed. 1

19. Remove the oil cooler and

place it on the floor.

Refer to figure l-l.

72 1.Remove the tube fixing bolts.

Caution: For the VARIAN tube, use the l/4”

UNC, 19-mm long bolts.
Drawing No.: AYSO13-02

23. By reversing steps 1. to 22., Caution: For fixing the oil cooler, use the
mount the oil cooler and then l/4” UNC, 16-mm long bolts.
the X-ray tube on the rotation Drawing No.: AYSO13-01
base.
_..
Caution: Be sureto clamp the cables near the tube and the oil cooler in the same
manner as before replacement. In particular, note that the yellow cables for
the inverter system must not be clamped together with other cables.
In addition, the cables for the inverter system must be separated from the
signal cables as far as possible.

- 59 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

Current-type gantry

At.!! A--- X-I-SIT tube wire

I\/- X-ray tube

Adjust merit /i-II I -Ml2 bolt

screw I I: I I&

,/I X-ray tube

I mounting plat e

ide

Adjustment
screw

Median line projector

Figure l-l X-ray tube mounting unit (for TSX-002A/4 to 6)

- 60 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

Old-type gantry

+------ X-ray tube wire

X-ray tube
AdJustment scren

aMl2 bolt

Tube mounting
plate

bolt

screw

Median line projector

Figure 1-2 X-ray tube mounting unit (for TSX-002A/l to 3)

-61 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

Oil cooler mounting

plate

a Rubber damper
f
0 0 0 0

p O -- -. -- ac -- -I-
00 07

Oil cooler mounting

\ --;~zLx o o \ - plate
-- --

0 0 4
Oil cooler

I I

I
I

+b
0 00

0 !o 0 0
I I

.- i

Figure l-3 Oil cooler and mounting plate

When removing the oil cooler, it is recommenhed that the cooler mounting screws (inch-sized
screws) be removed.

- 62 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

2. Tube Alignment
2.1 Front/back tube alignment
Perform checking and positional adjustment for X-ray tube front/back alignment using the
X-ray film (mammography or Polaroid).

(1) Items required

l X-ray film (mammography or Polaroid)

l Packing tape
l Needle (used for piercing the X-ray film)
l Lead plate (20 to 30-mm wide)
l Dial gauge

(2) Remove the screws and the Mylar ring at the bottom of the front cover, and open the
front cover.

Figure 2-l

(3) Generate X-rays according to the corresponding X-ray conditions until the OLP
waiting status is established in order to-warm up the X-ray tube. (Refer to the next
page.)

- 63 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(4) Place the X-ray film on the gantry dome, place the lead plate at the center of the film,
and then secure the plate and the film using packing tape.

9 “dl
I
Lead

X-ray
Dome

plate

film
n
3 n
Dome

X-ray path

Figure 2-2

(5) Set the X-ray tube at 0” (top position) and the slit slice width to 2 mm. Confirm that
the OLP is within the range 50% HO%, and generate X-rays without rotating the
tube.

** It is recommended that DCA be used. **

Note: X-ray conditions

1. Repeat X-ray generation at 400 mAs (200 mA x 2 s) irrespective of the

corresponding OLP and warm up the tube until the OLP waiting status is
established.

2. Cool the X-ray tube down to 50% OLP.

3. Generate X-rays at each measurement point at OLP 50% HO%.

- 64 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(6) Manually rotate the X-ray tube and set it to the 180” position.

Figure 2-3

(7) At the 180” tube position, generate X-rays.

(8) Pierce the front side of the X-ray film (couch side) and develop the X-ray film.

Hole

Figure 2-4

-65 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(9) On the developed film, measure the offset crl between X-ray generation at the 0” and
180” positions, and then calculate the tube offset X1 using the formula below.

When X-ray exposure is performed

at the 180" position

When X-ray exposure

is performed at the
0' position

Developed film

Hole

Figure 2-5

Formula

215
XI = (a + r-p) x
360+ 385
25
q2 = Xl x 215

215
Xl = -
720 a

- 66 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(10) Adjust the X-ray tube position in the front/back direction according to the calculation
results. Repeat steps (5) to (9) until the X1 is less than 0.1 mm.

Figure 2-6

- 67 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEIMENT

(11) Adjust the tube position in the front/back direction

Attach the dial gauge to the rotation base and press the pick-up of the dial gauge
against the front of the tube mounting plate as shown in figure 2-7. Then, loosen the
fixing bolts to make the tube mounting plate free. Turn the adjustment bolts by the
required number of turns calculated in step (9) to adjust the tube position in the
front/back direction.

Fixing bolts (outer bolts)

Figure 2-7 Adjustment bolts

l After adjustment, tighten the fixing bolts.

- 68 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(Reference)

Fixing bolts (outer bolts)

Figure 2-8 Adjustment bolts (for TSX-002A/l to 3)

l After adjustment, tighten the fixing bolts.

2.2 Left/right tube alignment

* Items required

l Pin phantom

l Dial gauge

- 69 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(1) Mounting the pin phantom

The left/right tube alignment requires a pin phantom. Mount the pin phantom on the
phantom holder as shown in figure 2-9.

Phantom holder

Figure 2-9 Mounting the pin phantom

(2) Adjusting the tube position in the left/right direction

Attach the dial gauge to the tube mounting plate and press the pick-up of the dial
gauge against the tube as shown in figure 2- 10. Then, loosen the fixing bolts to make
the tube mounting plate free. Turn the adjustment bolts by the required number of
turns indicated by the software to adjust the tube position in the left/right direction.

gauge
' Adjdstment bolts

Figure 2- 10

- 70 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

2.3 Left/right alignment adjustment using software
(1) Precautions

Caution: Do not turn OFF/ON the power of the system and the gantry during the X-
ray tube alignment procedure. If the power is turned ON, the gantry
position information is cleared and<the ,gantrymayrotateunexpectedly.

(2) Operating conditions

The operating conditions of this program are as follows:

Front/back alignment I _ Left/right alignment

Tools required Standard tool set I Standard tool set
Dial gauge Dial gauge
Devices required Front/back alignment jig Pin phantom
Tube stop position TOP Not specified.
Gantry rotation Not required 1 Required
T

Scan time 1.0 s (HSl) or 1.5 s 1.0 s (HSl) or 1.5 s

Xpress kV/mA 120 kV/50 mA 120 kV/lOO mA
Xpress/HS 1 Scanning field S IS
Scan conditions Slit 10 mm I 2mm
Wedge Wedge for $500 I Wedge for $500
Scan time 2.1 s I 2.7 s
Xpeed kV/mA 120 kV/SO mA I 120 kV/80 mA
Scan conditions Scanning field S I S
Slit 10 mm I 5mm
Wedge Small wedge 1 Small wedge
Scan time 2.0 s I 2.0 s
Xpeed II kV/mA 120 kV/80 mA I 120 kV/80 mA
Scan conditions Scanning field S I S
Slit 10 mm I 5 mm
Wedge Small wedge 1 Small x-edge
Scan time 1.0 s (GX) or 1.5 s or 2.0 s (a20) 1 1.0 s (GX) or 1.5 s or 2.0 s (0.20)
Xvision series kV/mA 13fI kV/SC)
a-v s- ,,I_
m A
-*-^ ^ 1 13.1) kV/lOO mA
^__ _^ . , ^ - - ---- -

Scan conditions Scanning field S I S

Slit 10 mm I 2mm
Wedge Wedge for $500 I Wedge for $500

-7l-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(3) Starting the alignment program

Before starting the program, set the pin phantom about 2 or 3 mm away from the
rotational center of the gantry.

Starting procedure

1. Press the right mouse The menu for system maintenance is

button, drag the mouse to displayed.
“System Maintenance”, and
release the button.

2. Move the mouse cursor to

“System Backup” of the
menu, and click it with the
left mouse button.

3. Enter the password. The detailed system maintenance program

I menu is displayed.

4. Move the mouse cursor to

“Alignment” of the menu,
and click it with the left
mouse button.

5. Enter the gantry type. GANTRY TYPE [OLD (SER No. l-57)
= l/NEW (SERNo..58-XX)
=2/END=E]

******cl*** &I(-jNM)-ZNT ******e*****

6. The menu shown on the
“I: F/B ALIGNMENT PROCESS *
right is then displayed on
*2: L/R ALIGNMENT PROCESS *
the monitor. *
*3: OFFSET PROCESS
*4: GTS CONTROL PROCESS *
*5: L/-R ALIGNMENT CORRECTION *
- I DATA REGISTRATION *
*e: END *
*************************************
SELECT - >

- 72 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

Caution: When alignment process is terminated and then started again, the previous
data is cleared. (Offset data is saved and remains until the power is turned
OFF.)

* Execute “3 : OFFSET” before starting “2 : L/R ALIGNMENT”.

Left/right alignment

d**tct;fe*c**fc*f &IGmNT **********

1. Set the pin phantom at the
rotational center of the gantry. * 1: F/B ALIGNMENT PROCESS *
* 2 : L/R ALIGNMENT PROCESS *
(The pin phantom should be 2 or *
* 3 : OFFSET
3 mm away from the rotational * 4 : GTS CONTROL *
center of the gantry.) * 5 : L/R ALIGNMENT CORRECTION *
Move the couch top out and * DATA REGISTRATION I
*e: END *
check that nothing is in the X-
***********************************
ray path.
SELECT ?

2. Enter “2” from the keyboard. *** L/R ALIGNMENT PROCESSING ***
* SCAN TIME 11.0S *
(“L/R ALIGNMENT * *
VOLTAGE 120 kV
PROCESS” is selected and * *
CURRENT 100 mA
executed.) * FOV s *
* WIDTH 2mm *
* FOCUS Small *
***********************************

(Left/right alignment start message)

uf
3. Select the focus size for SELECT FOCUS SIZE
left/right alignment acquisition. (Large: 1, Small:2)? 2(CR)
Usually, Small:2 should be (or CR)
selected.

Continued on the next page

- 73 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

I (Data acquisitioncount and

f phantom setting message) I
The air is scanned. I
LCOLLECT GICF DATA READY? I
--------------B-B--------- J
I

(Checking whether acquisition of

left/right alignment data is ready
[Yl : Starts data acquisition.
En1 : Waits for data entry.
[Ir : Starts RETRY processing
from air data acquisition.
[e&J] : Ends left/right alignment
processing.)

1
-------m-_-------------m--

I-DATA COLLECT PROCESSING I

l- -------------------------- J

When an abort or error occurs during

data acquisition, the message “RETRY”
is displayed on the monitor. 1

(Retrying data acquisition

Checking whether data acqusition is
repeated if an interrupt or error occurs
during data acquisition.
RETRY?
EYI : Executes the previous data
acquisition.
[n1 : Ends data acquisition
J, processing.)
5. When the green LED of the
[START] button on the
operating panel lights, press the
[START] button to scan data.

Continued on the next page

- 74 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

------------------________
1
I 6. Enter “y”. ~DATA~~LLECTENDOK?
I- -------------------_______
I
J

(Checking left/right alignment acquisition

data ‘%
EYI : Starts processing of acquisition
data.
r
[I : Starts RETRY processing from
air data acquisition.
E1
n : Executes the previous .data
acquisition.
[e&J] : Ends left/right alignment
processing.)

-----w-----------------e--
kONSTANTCALCULATEPROCESSING :
l- --------_----------------- J
----------------------w--m 1
hEANCALCULATEPROCESSING
I- -------------------------w :
1
----------------------m-w- 1
7. Move the couch top in, and set ~DATA~~LLE~TC~IJNT:~
f SETPINPHANTOM 1
the pin phantom in the X-ray I
I COLLECTGKFDATAREADY? I
path. IL--------------------------~ I
The pin phantom (metal pin) is [ENTER] : Acquisition is started.
scanned. [Ie : Left/right alignment is
terminated.)

-----------------------mm- 1
~DATA~~LLE~TPROCESSING I
I- ------------------------w- J
V

8. When the green LED of the

[START] button on the
operating panel lights, press the
[START] button to scan data.

Continued on the next page

- 75 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

-----------_-_--_--________
I
1 9. Enter “y”. :DATA COLLECT
L- ---------------------------
END OK? I
I

----------a--------------m-
kONSTANT CALCULATE PROCESSING I
I- --------------------------- I

(Message display during calculation of

offset calibration)
------_-------------------- I
:MEAN CALCULATE PROCESSING
I- ---------_____------------- i

(Message display during mean value

calculation)
--------me___-------------- I
KC~NSTANT CALCULATE PROCESSING I
l- --------------------------- I

---------------------m-m---
[MEAN CALCULATE PROCESSING I
-----w------w-------------- i

1
lO.Move the tube to the left or right *******X-My TUBE fiIGN&fENT *******
according to the displayed 896CH L/R ALIGNMENT
message. MOVE X-RAY TUBE TO XXXX Y.YYYY MM
CENTER-CHANNEL ZZZ.ZZZZ CH

: RIGHT or LEFT
Y.YYYY : X-ray tube movement distance
(mm>
z.zzzz : Center channel
Standard : 0.1 mm or less (for 5 12 ch)
0.05 mm or less (for 896 ch)
------------------------m-B
FATA COLLECT PIN PHANTOM I
V ----_-__--____------------- I
Continued on the next page

- 76 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

r ----------------m--w------ 1
11.Is L/R Alignment OK? ! L/R ALIGNMENT PROCESS END ? I
L-----,,-,,,,--------------J

(Ending left/right alignment data

acquisition

Checking that processing ends if the shift

from the center channel reaches 0.1 mm
or less.

[Yl : Ends left/right alignment

processing
[n1 : Continues left/right alignment
processing.)

If the standard is not met, return to the step of air data acquisition and repeat the
procedures.

2.4 Left/right alignment correction

(1) The left/right alignment correction is the procedure for correcting misalignment in the
CH direction depending on focus size. Aver conducting the tube left/right alignment
process (small focus is used), register the left/right alignment correction data
according to the following procedures.

Startup

Select “Alignment” in the “System Backup” menu.

The interactive screen below is displayed.

**fc*t***fe*** ALIGNMENT **********

* 1:F/B ALIGNMENT PROCESS *
* 2:L/R ALIGNMENT PROCESS *
* 3:OFFSET *
* 4:GTS CONTROL PROCESS *
* 5:L/R ALIGNMENT CORRECTION *
* DATA REGISTRATION *
*e: END *
***********************************

- 77 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(2) Acquisition of left/right alignment correction data

Carry out the left/right alignment processing at the large focus to acquire correction
data. The acquisition method should be the same as that of the ordinary left/right
alignment. Record the center channel displayed as the left/right alignment result. (Do
not move the tube at this time.)

The alignment procedure is as shown below:

(a) Select 2 : L/R ALIGNMENT PROCESS.

(b) Set Large : 1 as the focus size.

* * * L/R ALIGNMENT PROCESSING ***

SCAN TIME 1.5 s
VOLTAGE 120 kV
CURRENT 100 mA
FOV S
WIDTH 2mm
FOCUS Small

SELECT FOCUS SIZE

(Large : 1, Small :2) ?l(CR)
SCAN TIME 1.5 s
VOLTAGE 120 kV
CURRENT lOOmA
FOV S
WIDTH 2mm
FOCUS Large
DATA COLLECT COUNT : 1
WITHOUT PIN PHANTOM
COLLECT G/CF DATA READY?

(c) Acquisition of air and pin phantom is started just like the ordinary left/right
alignment.

- 78 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(d) If the data is valid, the result will be displayed. Record the center channel
displayed as the result.

*** X-RAY TUBE ALIGNMENT ***

???CH L/R ALIGNMENT
MOVE X-RAY TUBE TO XXXX Y.YYYY MM
CENTER-CHANNEL ZZZ,ZZZZ CH
lr
Record this value.

??? : Number of sensor channels

xxxx : Direction to move the tube (RIGHT, LEFT)
Y.YYYY : Tube movement distance
zzz.zzzz : Current center channel

(e) Terminate the processing.

(3) Registering left/right alignment correction data

Register the correction data according to the center channel recorded in (2). The
registered data will be passed to AFRU as a parameter for actual reconstruction.

(a) Select 5: L/R ALIGNMENT CORRECTION DATA REGISTRATION.

The following menu will appear.

Select 1. DATA SET OF LARGE FOCUS to register the large focus correction
data.

* * * L/R ALIGNMENT CORRECTION DATA REGISTRATION ***

1. DATA SET OF LARGE FOCUS

2. DATA SET OF SMALL FOCUS
d. DISPLAY CURRENT DATA
e. END
SELECT ? l(CR)

- 79 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(b) Register large focus correction data.

The system will wait for the entry of the center channel data. Enter the channel
data recorded in (2).

The entered channel data will be displayed along with the data to be actually used
for correction. Check the data. If it is correct, enter “y(CR)” to register the
correction data.

SELECT LARGE FOCUS

INPUT CHANNEL DATA
(CENTER-CHANNEL : [???. ????]CH / end : e) ?xxx.xx(CR)
,I-
Enter the recorded channel data.

INPUT DATA : [xxx.xxxxxx] CH ---+ Entered channel data

CORRECTION DATA : [Z!ZX.XXXXXX] CH -+ Correction data to register

(-: RIGHT, +: LEFT) (Offset from the center point
detected by the sensor)

DATA SET OK (y/n)?=)

CORRECTION DATA SET NORMAL END

0C Currently registered data display

This is used to display the data registered currently.

Select d. DISPLAY CURRENT DATA. The data will be displayed in the

following format.

*** CURRENT DATA ***

LARGE FOCUS
CENTER CHANNEL (CORRECTION DATA) : xxx.xxxx (kx.xxxx)
SMALL FOCUS
CENTER CHANNEL (CORRECTION DATA) : xxx.xxxx (x.xxxx)

-8O-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE REPLACEMENT

(4) Notes on use

0a The initial value of correction data is “0.0.” Reconstruction is carried out

assuming that no offset of the focus is detected.

Go Left/right alignment correction data should be acquired after the tube alignment is
finished.

0C Registered data is valid until the system is initialized (installed). When the system
is initialized, data must be registered again. So, be sure to record the left/right
alignment correction data before the initialization.

(d) The left/right alignment correction data is registered on raw data as additional
data.

-81 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PROJECTORS
1. Replacement of the Projector Lamp
(1) Replacement of the median line projector lamp

Caution: Use gloves or cloth when handling the lamp. Never touch it with bare
hands. Doing so will shorten the service life of the lamp.

Median line projector

- 82 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PROJECTORS
(2) Replacement of the internal projector lamp

Caution: Use gloves or cloth when handling the lamp. Never touch it with bare
hands. Doing so will shorten the service life of the lamp.

Internal projectors

- 83 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PROJECTORS
2. Projector Adjustment Procedure
(1) Procedure for adjustment of the internal projector

(a) Set the’water phantom in the phantom holder. Tape

After confirming that the phantom does not
sag, align the phantom with the center of the-
scanning area. Solder

(b) Use adhesive tape to attach strips of solder m

along the slice line and the image center line of
the water phantom.

(c) Verify that the solder is set correctly, using a

scanogram image.

(d) Turn ON the internal projectors and adjust the

right and left projector positions so that the
light beams from the projectors are aligned
with the solder.

(e) Move the couch top to a position where the

light beams from the projectors do not hit it.

(f) Turn ON the internal projectors to project the

beams onto a paper and verify that there is no
misalignment between the beams. If there is
misalignment, repeat steps (d) to (f) until the
beams are aligned.

c--b?+j=
Incorrect
I
! I

Incorrect c
I
I
: _ I
Correct

There should be no misalignment at any position.

- 84 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PROJECTORS
(2) Adjustment of the median line projector

0a Move the head-side of the couch top (portion

Couch top
with the gray spots) so that it is below the
median line projector, and raise the couch to
the UP limit.

@I Align the light beam pattern from the median

line projector with the gray spots.

0c Without changing the couch top position,

lower the couch to the HEIGHT-1 position.
At this time, make sure that the light beam
pattern from the median line projector is
aligned with the gray spots on the couch top.

w If the light beam pattern is not aligned with the

gray spots, perform adjustment as shown
below.

UP limit position HEIGHT-l position

Light
r beam pattern !i . rGray spots

4
1

P l’
t- Gray spots
i - -“i
Make the amount of
deviation the same on
I Light beam
pattern
both the left .and right.

- 85 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: OUTLINE OF THE PATIENT COUCH

I. Outline of Patient Couch Operation
The patient couch is used to support and position the patient for scanning Positioning is
performed by SLIDE (IN/OUT) and HEIGHT (UP/DOWN) operations.

The patient couch includes the SLIDE and HEIGHT sensor interface PWB (SI PWB) and
the mechanism which supports the *drive units”

Operating
panel
+

Patient couch Gantry

Figure l-l Block diagram of the patient couch

* Two operating panels are installed on the gantry, one each on right and left of the
opening. They cannot be operated simultaneously.

- 86 -
 No. SD201-322ED

7SUBJECT: OUTLINE OF THE PATIENT COUCH

2. Structure of the Patient Couch Main Unit

Upper frame Couch top

Longitudinal movement

Vertical Vertical movement

movement
mechanism

Figure 2-1

Figure 2-2

-87-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: COUCH TOP LONGITUDINAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
I. Outline of Operation
The longitudinal movement drive unit rotates the slide motor (Ml 1) CW and CCW to
move the couch top in the TN/OUT direction by supplying 200 VAC power.
The power supply is controlled by theJGTS onthe gantry and>the slide servo amplifier
under the couch vertical movement mechanism.

Motor rotation and couch top movement direction

MOTOR (Ml 1) Couch top

CW I IN
ccw I OUT

Engagement and release of the brake and clutch

Operation status I Brake I Clutch

Power OFF 1 Engaged 1 Released
Power ON (couch top not free) I Released I Engaged
Power ON (couch top free) 1 Released 1 Released

- 88 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: COUCH TOP LONGITUDINAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
The longitudinal movement drive unit is responsible for linear movement of the couch top.
It is comprised of a motor, reducer, clutch brake, encoder, drive sprocket, and chain.

Motor rotation is transmitted via the reducer and the clutch brake to the drive sprocket.
Then, rotation of the drive sprocket is transmitted to the chain to move the couch top
linearly through the metal coupler. The tension of the chain can be set by adjusting the
tension sprocket on the main frame unit on the gantry side with the tension adjustment bolt.
When the chain is slack, the pitch feed error is increased.
When the chain is too tight, free feeding becomes difficult.

The accuracy of the linear movement of the couch top is detected by the encoder:

The rated load of the encoder shaft is 20 N (2 kgf) in the radial direction and 10 N (1 kgf)
in the thrust direction. The encoder should be handled with care.

Clutch brake (CBUl 1)

Overcurrent relay (CP3)

1 Motor (Mll)
tp

8 LEncoder (ENC 11)

I r Metal coupler Tension sprocket
I

I
L Drive sprocket l- Chain TPncinn adirrctmrwt bolt

Figure 1- 1 Longitudinal movement drive unit

- 89 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: COUCH TOP LONGITUDINAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT -
2. Couch Top Movement Frame
The couch top movement frame is driven by the longitudinal movement drive unit,
It is moved horizontally along the U-shaped rails and the stabilizing rails in the main frame
unit by a chain.

The couch top is secured to the couch top movement frame with bolts. The couch top can
be made horizontal using the four setscrews that are tightened from above, and can be
stabilized in the lateral direction by tightening the two setscrews on the side of the couch
top movement frame.

Couch top movement frame

Frame movement stopper
--

- 90 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CQUCH TOP LONGITUDINAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
3. Troubleshooting of the Longitudinal Movement
Drive Unit
(Phenomenon) (Ch xk) (Countermeasure)
ghellaugh?-JL Move up the couch to the upper limit.
Y

Check whether the connector of the

Y: Yes N: No IN-limit sensor is disconnected or
whether there are obstacles in the
beam emitting/receiying section of the

Check whether the overcurrent rela!

Is the motor in motion?

(Is an error message issued for the

vertical movement mechanism?)

Is the belt properly Adjust the tension of the belt

tensioned? ’ (to 2.3 mm kO.2 mm/7 N (0.7 kgf)).

Is the pulley rotating?

Is the clutch shaft rotating? N

-N
Are the gears rotating? ) Tighten the screw of the ETP bushing
to fix it to the shaft.
Y

N
Does the chain rnol,e? A ) Fix the couplings of the chain.

Is the couch top coupled to

the chain?

-9l-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: COUCH TOP LONGITUDINAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
(Phenomenon) (Check) (Countermeasure)
The couch top does not ]-~~” Check whether the connector of the
go out of the gantry OUT-limit sensor is disconnected or
opening.
beam emitting/receiving section of the

+ Check whether the overcurrent relay

is operating.

Check the motor circuit electrically.

(Is an error message displayed for the
slide servo amplifier mounted under
the couch vertical movement
mechanism?)

~ Adjust the tension of the belt

(to 2.3 mm +0.2 mm/7 N (0.7 kgf)).

+ Tighten the screw of the ETP bushing

to fix it to the shaft.

llK
Is the clutch shaft rotatmg?

Are the gears rotating?

+ 1Replace the clutch brake.

Tighten the screw of the ETP bushing

to fix it to the shaft.
IY

Does the chain move’?

I , Fix the couplings of the chain.

Is the couch top coupled to

the chain?

-N
Poor stop accuracy ) Are belt tension and gear ? Adjust the belt tension and the gear
backlash OK? backlash.
IY

- 92 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: COUCH TOP LONGITUDINAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
(Phenomenon) (Check) (Countermeasure)
7
The couch top rides oyer - Adjust the height of the rollers.
the roller.

‘N
Heavy idle movement of ___j Is the chain tension OK? > Adjust the chain tension
the couch top (10 mm deflection with
Y
I20 +2N (0.2 kgf)).
V

, T’YI’ prry’ Tighten the bolts firmly.

I 1
Are travel frame rollers N Correct the eccentricity and fix them
fixed firmly? ’ tightly.
IY
+
Are anti-sway rails fixed N > Fix them correctly.
I I
tightly?
IY
Y
Is the couch top deformed? > Replace the couch top.

Y , > Go to “Adjustment for Heavy Idle

Noises in the motor?
drive unit Movement of Couch”.

+ Check whether the parameters for the

slide serso amplifier are set correctly.

L Perform the electrical check

(on the clutch, supply voltage, etc.).

Clutcltirake clashing ) Adjust to provide a clearance of

noises? 0.1 mm to 0.15 mm.

- 93 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: COUCH TOP LONGITUDINAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
4. Adjustment of Couch Top Longitudinal Motion
Speed
Longitudinal movement of the couch top is performed with an AC servo motor, Its speed
is controlled by the slide servo amplifier under the couch vertical movement mechanism.
The parameters for the servo amplifier are already set. In most cases, the servo amplifier
does not need to be adjusted. For the setting values of each parameter and check
procedures, refer to the subsection describing the couch slide servo amplifier.

- 94 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: COUCH TOP LONGITUDINAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
5. Replacement of the Rolled Cover
The rolled cover must be replaced when the rolled cover sheet is damaged or the roller
cannot take up the rolled cover sheet.

(1) Remove the rolled cover sheet.

Move the couch top toward the OUT limit manually and remove the separate end cover.
Insert a screwdriver from the foot end of the patient couch and loosen the M4 screw on
the travel frame side. Then, the rolled cover sheet can be removed.

(2) Remove the rolled cover assembly.

Remove the horizontal drive unit cover (figure 5-2), then remove the rolled cover
assembly.

Attach the sheet to the fitting

with double-sided tape.
I Smooth side of the sheet
1
I
Metal fitting 1 4
Cloth side of the sheet Take-up direction

Rolled cover fitting

Wind the sheet one or two turns

L--- Attach the sheet to the roll

Sheet’drum
with double-sided tape.

Figure 5-l

- 95 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

s UBJECT: COUCH TOP LONGITUDINAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
(3) Replace the sheet.

Install the new sheet correctly, paying particular attention to the sheet side, winding
direction, and orientation of the fitting.

Before pulling out the sheet along the guide of the rolled cover mounting plate, wind
the sheet one or two turns with no load in the direction of the sheet drum shown in
figure 5-1. This gives an initial winding force to the roller.

Rolled cover

Figure 5-2

(4) Reverse the above steps (2) and (1) to remount the rolled cover assembly on the
upper frame.

’ To insert the sheet between the couch top rear cover and the chain cover guide with
ease, move the couch top to the OUT limit.

- 96 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH VERTICAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
I. Outline of Operation
The patient couch vertical movement drive unit moves the patient couch vertically under
hydraulic power. The patient couch is moved upward by the ram of the single-action
cylinder, which pushes the internal arm upward., A 300-W‘motor and>gear pump supply oil
from the oil tank to the cylinder.
The patient couch is moved downward by actuating two solenoid valves to release the oil in
the single-action cylinder. Therefore, the speed of descent varies depending on the weight
of the patient and the oil temperature.
Figure l- 1 shows the structure of the vertical movement drive unit. Figure l-2 shows the
hydraulic circuit diagram.
An overcurrent relay (CP5) is mounted on the power line of the motor with the gear pump.
When an overcurrent (more than 5 A) flows, the relay operates to turn the power OFF and
prevents the motor from smoking and burning.

Motor with gear pun ‘P

Single-action cylinder Oil tank

Figure l-l

- 97 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH VERTICAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT

Cylinder

Check

- Throttle valve

Figure l-2

- 98 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH VERTICAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
2. Lowering the Patient Couch
If a failure occurs when the patient couch is at a raised position (for example, a fuse in the
gantry blows out and no power is supplied to the patient couch), lower the patient couch
as specified below.

Caution: During this procedure, 200 VAC is supplied directly to the connector.
Take care to avoid electric shock. In addition, avoid getting your hand or
head caught when the patient couch is moving down.

(1) Remove the device cover between the gantry and patient couch so that the connector
on the front of the patient couch can be seen.

Figure 2-l

- 99 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH VERTICAL .

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
(2) When 200 VAC is applied between pins 8 and 10 of CNNl and between pins 9 and 10,
the solenoid valves for down movement are opened and the patient couch moves down.
(There are two solenoid valves provided and pin 10 of CNNl is a common pin.)

Note: It is recommended that .a device such as that shown .belo.w be made for
lowering the couch safely and correctly.

Connector type
Japan AMP350736-1

- 100 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH VERTICAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
3. Adjustment of Vertical Motion Speed
The couch lowering speed can be controlled by solenoid valves L21 and L24.
Their openings must be identical. First, loosen the locking nut of each solenoid valve,
fully close the valves; mark the fully closed positionon each valve,, and open the valve at
the same rate.

Solenoid valve
(L2 1: L24)

Locking nut

knob will come off after being turned about nine times.’
The couch top lowering speed is actually increased only for the first two turns
of the knob. Therefore, do not turn the knob more times than necessary.

Figure 3-l

Caution: The couch lowering speed depends on the temperature of the oil in the
hydraulic system (20 mm/s at a room temperature of ZOOC).
When taking measurements, take particular care to avoid getting crushed by
the upper frame.
Do not leave the knob detached from the valve. If the solenoid valve is
opened in this status, oil will leak from the knob hole. Be sure to tighten the
locking nut of the knob after adjusting the speed.
(Turn the nut clockwise to tighten.)

- 101 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH VERTICAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
4. Changing the Vertical Stop Position
If the vertical stop positions of the patient couch should be changed due to safety
considerations, etc., adjust the positions of the photosensors.

(1) Remove the top base cover of the patient couch and locate the vertical stop
photosensors. The couch top heights are initially determined by these photosensors as
shown below.

Photosensor

PHCZI UP-LIMITr--&
PHC26 HEIGHT-ON
PHC23 HEIGHT-L---fi=
PHC24 HEIGHT-2+

PHC25 AUTO-STOP

PHC22 DOWN-LIMIT
Floor

Figure 4-1

- 102-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH VERTICAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
(2) The photosensors are arranged as shown below. Loosen the fixing screws and move
the photosensor in the indicated directions to change the corresponding stop position
(downward stop positions when the couch top is in the gantry; position at which the
couch top IN movement is inhibited because the couch top is too loti; UP limit, and
DOWN limit).

Never move the sensor in the opposite direction. Otherwise, malfunctions or other
problems may occur.

DOWN-LIMIT iAUTo-SToP

HEIGHT-2
HEIGHT-l

Figure 4-2

- 103 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH VERTICAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
5. Troubleshooting of the Vertical Movement Drive
Unit
(Phenomenon) (Check) (Countermeasure)
The patient couch does ) Is the hydraulic pump in
not go up. motion?

-+ Check whether the overcurrent relay

is operating.

Is the hydraulic pump B Add oil to the hydraulic system.

making normal operating
noises?
Check the solenoid valves electrically.

Go to “Oil Leakage”.

r/ , fist: room temperature Y ) Move the couch up and down

repeatedly to warm the oil.

,
Y
Is the couch top inside the B Move the couch top to the OUT limit.
gantry opening?

Is the gantry tilted in the Y Tilt the gantry to 0” or in the minus

plus direction? ’ direction.

Is the tilt meter on the Replace the tilt meter.

gantry normal?
Replace the solenoid yahve.

Check the electric circuit. I

Oil leakage Replace the whole hydraulic system.

~GzG--g+ Troubleshoot again in detail.

-~

- 104-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH VERTICAL

MOVEMENT DRIVE UNIT
6. Resetting the Overcurrent Relay
When an overcurrent flows, the overcurrent relay prevents the motor from smoking or
burning. When the overcurrent relay functions, reset it as described below.
-. “-” .“__
Before resetting the overcurrent relay, check whether the circuit is shorted or the drive
unit is locked (a foreign object is caught, etc.). It is dangerous to reset the overcurrent ;
, relay without determining and correcting the cause of the overcurrent.
- _. _ _ __ . _._..
.- .
(1) Overcurrent relay for the longitudinal drive motor

(a) Remove the longitudinal drive unit cover so that the unit can be seen from below.

(b) Turn the switch of the overcurrent relay mounted to the longitudinal drive unit
base to the ON side to reset the relay.

Base

Reset t4,

Motor - O\-ercurrent relay

6? TP /
A

(c) After reset is performed, check the longitudinal movement operation. If the
overcurrent relay is not triggered again, attach the cover.

- 105 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH VERTICAL

MOVEMENT ‘DRIVE UNIT
(2) Overcurrent relay for the UP movement drive motor

(a) Remove the check window cover of the lower cover (cap and M4 screw) so that
the overcurrent relay can be seen.

Upper cover

Check window cover

Overcurrent relay

Figure 6-l

(b) Turn the switch of the overcurrent relay to the ON side through the check
window to reset the relay.

< 0

LL
Reset

Figure 6-2

(c) After reset is performed, check the UP movement operation. If the overcurrent
relay is not triggered again, reattach the check window cover.

- 106-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: DIMENSIONS OF GANTRY AND

PATIENT COUCH

Weight approx. 1300 kg

Gantry

--__I--

-pm-..--

-----

Weight approx. 300 kg

Patient couch

- 107-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: POSITIONAL RELATIONSHIP

BETWEEN GANTRY AND PATIENT
COUCH

115 ~~13001) FROU X-RAY PLANE

I

PETAL l A’ (1 : 4)

I-
Y ANCHOR (1 :2)

Gantwkouch contact area and anchor locations

3880

I
‘;.. --._ +---
:
..-- L.-j.-

----
\ *: i
.-e--e +.-- !.-
.;..----+-.

---I ~
I--
tezo
COUCH TOP STROKE
1030 OR MORE RIO
100 OR MORE : USING LONG ’
HEAD REST , MODEL CTA-HRO)

Gantry/couch layout plan

- 108-
 No. SD201-322ED
SUBJECT: POSITIONAL RELATIONSHIP
BETWEEN GANTRY AND PATIENT
COUCH
- 109-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

1. Functions of the Gantry Stationary Section
(1) Gantry rotation , *. 1, 1.5, and 2 s, continuous rotation, slow rotation, freely-
selectable stop angle position, and home position

(2) Gantry tilt : +3 0” through -3 O”, remote-controlled operation

(3) Patient guide : Turns the process display lamps ON/OFF

(orange, green, yellow)

(4) Data acquisition : Control signals (view trigger, BGN, X-ray ON/OFF)
Data (gantry position, rotation speed, acquisition’ view
count, and patient couch position)

(5) Operating panel : Operating instructions, display of positional information

(6) Maintenance panei : Operating instructions

(7) Optical transmission

error detection : Two types of error detection

(8) Communication
with the console : Control commands, response, status; uses an RS422
serial interface

(9) External projector

(option) : +30” through -3O”, ON/OFF, auto-OFF setting after
2 minutes, and simultaneous ON setting for horizontal
position

2. Functions of the internal Units of Gantry Rotation

Section
(1) Wedge filter : Normal (L/M), Small (S/SS), Step (LL), Air calibration

(2) Slit : 2, 3, 5, 7, and 10 mm

(3) Beam trimmer : 1, 2, 3, (5, 7,) and open

(5 and 7 are available for the V5 specifications only.)

(4) DAS test : Gain, test mode, test pattern

(5) Internal and median-line

positioning projectors : ON/OFF, auto-OFF setting after 2 minutes, and
simultaneous ON setting for horizontal position

- llO-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS

3. Patient Couch
(1) Couch vertical movement: UP and DOWN movements, remote-controlled
movements, auto-stop function

(2) Couch top longitudinal

movement : IN and OUTS movements; motion speed setting from
0.5 mm/s to 100 mm/s, auto-sliding, free operation,
remote-controlled operations, and display clear

Note: Gantry rotation speed (for till scan)

Xvision : 1.5 sand2s

Xvision/GX and /SP : 1 s and 1.5 s
For 2-s scan, l-s rotation is performed twice.

- lll-
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: COMPOSITION OF THE GANTRY

The gantry/couch control section is mainly composed of six different types of PWBs, consisting of
an actuator, detection elements, power elements, relay elements, as well as cables, etc.

I. GTS PWB (Gantry Table Sequencer PWB)

The GTS PWB plays a central role in the gantry/couch control units. This PWB is
equipped with the maintenance panel.

(1) The GTS PWB receives operation requests from the SS, the operating panels, and the
maintenance panel, and checks the contents of the operation requests and the status of
the gantry and couch. It then controls the gantry stationary unit and the couch and
requests the SGOCP to operate the rotation unit of the gantry.

(2) The GTS PWB receives and processes position information coming from the
actuators and the status information of the inside rotor coming from the SGOCP.
It then sends gantry/couch information to the SS and position information to the
operating panel.

2. GTS Power Unit

This unit is comprised of the GTS power PWB and the SSR.

(1) The GTS power unit converts control signals (TTL level) output from the GTS PWB
to power signals for each actuator and outputs the power signals to the actuators.

3. Servo Amplifier Unit

(1) The servo amplifier unit receives speed signals from the GTS PWB and it outputs
power proportional to the speed signals to the rotation AC servo motor in order to
rotate the gantry. At this time, this unit receives tachogenerator signals from the AC
servo motor, compares these signals with speed signals and controls the rotation
speed of the gantry. (Rotation speed is controlled so that it always follows speed
signals sent from the GTS PWEK)

(2) The servo amplifier unit sends information about the servo amplifier status to the GTS
PWB.

- 112-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: COMPOSITION OF THE GANTRY

4* SGOCP PWB
(Gantry Optics Control & Power PWB)
This PWB is used to control gantry optics and positioning projectors in the gantry rotation
section.

(1) The SGOCP PWB receives operation requests (serial data) for the X-ray beam
control units from the GTS PWI3 through the optical transmission system and it
controls these units according to the contents of the requests.

(2) Information from the wedge filters and other control components in the rotation unit
is sent as serial data to the GTS PWB.

5. Operating Panels
These panels are located at the right and left of the front gantry cover and are used to
operate the gantry and the couch.

6. SI PWB (Sindai Interface PWB)

This PWB is located under the rear base cover of the couch.
It converts couch sensor information to drive signals and outputs the signals to the GTS
PWB.

- 113 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GANTRY/COUCH BLOCK DIAGRAM

Xvision gantrv (TSX-002N4, 5, 6, and 7) block diagram

X-RAY IUBt HEAT EX It. I. TRANS

L 1

!8 :I
p-.-JI
Ii ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ....tI i t
CONSOLE i
1 !
f
I ... ......*.... .. ...*..
,................ 4i
“.....I..,..-...,................_.....
.*....I...*. ..... ...,..-.*..,.... -.t
tI f
1 I
i
i
f. . . ... ... ...I....... COUGH,
,..,.....“. ._......,.................,..........,,...........,...........,.

. .. ... ... *.,... . .. ... . .. ....,,. . ... . . ._...,,t.i

.. . .. . .. .. . ...*............................. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. ..**.*..*... . . . . ... . ..

GANTRY

- 114-
 Gantry/couch control section block diagram (TSX-O02A/4, 5, 6, and 7)
Lamp (24 v-50 w x 2) Pulse motor
~""...."....".~"

Reference position information

/Response and GTS information (S

Tilt axle information

.(X-ray
*-..s unit)
....-..I..-..s..w.*-..e..a f
.. ..-..s..-.
* Mdntcnnnce
(inside the p%?%iB)
1
Gantry
stationary Ip \

Refer to the service manual for.the gantry/couch block diagram for TSX-OOZA/l to 3.
 No. SD201-322Eti

SUBJECT: LAYOUT OF MAJOR PARTS AND

THEIR DRAWING NUMBERS

‘1/u SGTS
SOIF

Drawing number

SGTS : PX74-73 100 XC : PX71-05683 Gr 2

SOIF : PX73-15755 m : PX71-05613
ROIF2 : PX73-15754 XID : PX71-05614
GOCP : PX77-68802 Gr 3 XT : PX77-68803
GTSP : PX77-68801 G-Amp: PX77-61751

- 116-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: FLOWCHART OF DRIVE UNIT

CONTROL

-----m-m---- . 7 1
I I
I I Maintenance
Operating Operating panel
I Console I panel panel (inside the
I I (left) (right) GTS PIJB)
I I 1
I ----- m-w-- l
\
I SW information

eration request

Response

Iop

Control signal
Responser__L_I*&~&~~,
I I
II 1 iOptical I
ltransmission
Control signal!-~~--+--__--~

v I - V 1
Servo GTS power
amplifier section
section

itransmission I

Flowchart of drive section operation control

- 117-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: FLOWCHART OF DATA

ACQUISITION CONTROL

Console

Res ponse Acqui sition request

V
GTS PWB
1

(1) V.TRIG [Acquisition pulse]

(2) BGN ON/OFF [Acquisition start/end]

X-RAY ON/OFF
(1) Gantry position data (K&bit parallel)
(2) Gantry speed data (16-bit parallel)
(3) Acquisition projection data (li-bit parallel)
(3)' Couch position data (16-bit parallel)

Optical transmission

-----------------------------------------

Extra data
(1) Gantry position (896 ch)
(2) Gantry speed (897 ch)
(3) Acquisition projection (898 ch)
(3)' Couch position (898 ch)

el Console

Flowchart of data acquisition control

- 118-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: LIST OF FUSES USED FOR THE

GANTRY
Gantry stationary section fbses

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used hlounting location hlodel
1 Flll 3A 250 v Time lag DC power supply (PS 111) 1 ‘UFO41 *3A
2 F112 1.4 2.50 v Time lag X-ray ON lamp (supplied at the hospital)
3 F113 1A 250 V Time lag Timer
<l> in the drawing
4 F114 5‘4 250 V Time lag DC power supplies 1 iUF041 * 5~1
“Fuse mout~ting
5 F115 5A 250 V Time lag DC power supplies locations on the
Xvision gantry”
G F116 8.4 250 V Time lag Couch vertical movement and tilt motor
7 F117 8.4 250 V Time lag Couch vertical movement and tilt motor
8 F118 8.4 250 V Time lag Couch. vertical movement and tilt motor
9 F324 5A 250 V Time lag Rotation servo <2> in the drawing
10 F325 5.4 250 V Time lag Rotation servo “Fuse momlting
locations on the
11 F326 1.4 250 V Time lag Rotation brake Xvision gantry” ASF041* 1.4
12 F327 IA 250 V Time lag Rotation brake

Gantry rotation section fhes

No. Fuse No. Rating TYPO Line used hlounting location I hIode 1
1 F741 4X 250 V Time lag DC polyer supplies

2 F742 4.4 250 V Time lag DC power supplies

3
4
5
F743
F744
F745
5X 250 V
5X 250 V
3.~1250 V
Normal
Normal
Time lag
Temperature
Temperature
Transformer
controller
controller
(TR740)
and solid state detector
and solid state detector
<3> in the drawing
“Fuse mounting
locations on the
llzz--I
. Xvision gantrp”
G F746 3.4 250 V Time lag Transfomler (TR740)
7 F747 1‘4 250 v Time lag
8 F748 12.4 250 V Slow-blow Inteinal positioning prqjector

GTS power PWB fuses

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used hlounting location hIode
1 Fl 2.4 250 V Time lag Tilt motor and brake ASFO41 * 2.5
2 F2 2A 250 V Time lag Tilt motor and brake <4> in the drawing ASF041 * 2A
3 F3 LA,250 V Time lag Couch DOWN movement “Fuse mowting ASF041 * It-1
locations on the
4 F4 1.4 250 V Time lag Couch DOWN movement XGsion gantry” ASF041* lil
5 F5 lA250 V Time lag Patient guide ASF041 * 1X
6 FG 211250 V Time lag Couch brake and clutch ASF041* 2A

- 119-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: LIST OF FUSES USED FOR THE

GANTRY
SGOCP PWB f&es

No. Fuse No. Rating TYPO Line used hfounting location hlodel
1 Fl . 3A 250 v Time lag Wedge slit motor ASF041 *3X
2 F2 3A 250 v Time lag Beam trimmer motor ‘UFO41 *3X
’ <5> in tile drawing
3 F3 4A 250 v Time lag Internal positioning projector _ “Fuse mounting ASFO41 * 4.4
4 F4 4.A 250 V Time lag Internal positioning projector locations on the ASFO41 * 4X
Xvision gantry”
5 F5 4‘4 250 v Time lag Internal positioning projector
G FG 4.4 250 v Time lag Internal positioning prqjector
7 F7 2.4 250 V Time lag Intenral positioning projector (laser projector)

x2> Fuses in the servo xl> Fuses at the gantq

amplifier of the gantq I stationary section 1
stationary section (Fill to-Fll8)
(F324 to F327) 1 Front views of the gantry Rear \+ew of the gantry
\I

x5> Fuses on the <3> Fuses at the gantq

SGOCP PWEI I I rotation section
(Fl to F5) (F741 to F748)

Fuse mounting locations on the Xvision gantry

- 120-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GANTRY POWER-SUPPLY

SEQUENCE
The gantry power-supply sequence is as follows:

(1) When the internal power-supply ON LED is lit, this indicates that power is supplied to some
parts of the gantry. In this status, the console can be turned ON and the DAS timer
operates.

(2) When the DAS timer in the gantry is ON

Power is supplied only to the gantry rotation section (MC5 is turned ON).

(3) When the power switch of the console is turned ON

Power is supplied to the entire gantry (rotation section and stationary section).
(MU, MC1 11, and MC1 12 are turned ON.)

(4) When the power switch of the console is turned OFF

The gantry stationary section is turned OFF simultaneously (MC 111 and MC 112 are turned
OFF).

The gantry rotation section is turned OFF after one hour (power is supplied for one hour by
the off-delay timer).

If the DAS timer is ON, however, the power of the rotation section remains ON.

(5) When the emergency switch is pressed

The power of the entire gantry is turned OFF (MU, MC1 11, and MC1 12 are turned OFF).

This status is retained until the power switch of the console is turned OFF.

(The emergency status is released by turning OFF the power switch of the console.)

- 121-
 No. SD20 1-322ED
SUBJECT: GANTRY POWER-SUPPLY
SEQUENCE
i
ii
ii
i
i
i
i
:
i
i
i
i
i
.i . -. -.T _.
*C--.--m.
: *.
: -0 ::
1c=
: aa :
:= =Y=:
:oooo:
t................... 0 ..,. ..... .... ...... .
az
Ei
aI..““,..
*...
... B
vi
:---------•
‘.
i gg t
: :
i rrr:
:= 000;
:onnn:
i; - .- .-
I
- 122-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS (SGTS) SWITCH SETTINGS

The GTS switch settings are as shown below.

I Caution: Do not change the settings of DSWl 1 and DSW4 (for system setting) unnecessarily. 1

LEDG7 LEDGG
SW1

SW3 1 SW32

EE2!m
DSWll
E!!!cEM
DSWl

DSW4

Switch 1 Settings during normal use Description

DSWl 1, 3, 6, 7 ON Setting the ports CN404 and CN402
(for servicing and for SS simulator)
DSW4 1 1,3,6 ON Setting the system
DSW5 20N Switching the communication destination between SS
(2 is ON) and T3 100 (1 is ON)
DSWlO 40N For servicing the gantry rotation section
(When 1 and 2 are ON, the gantry rotation is turned OFF.)
DSWll 1,6,7ON Setting the system (Xvision: 1, 5 s)
(4 6, 8 ON) (Xvision: 1 s)
SW1 I Set to upper position Set to power position for using the maintenance panel.
SW21 1 Press this switch to reset the GTS.

SW1 1, SW12, SW3 1, and SW32 are used for operating the maintenance panel.

- 123 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: LAYOUT OF CONNECTORS AND

LEDS ON THE GTS (SGTS) PWB
The layout of connectors and LEDs on the GTS (SGTS) PWE! is as shown below.

1
CN406 (Mght

1
operating panel)
amplifier)

CN407 (Left operating panel)

(For mainterqemn
LIQL+L= ngnal\
JfC*LIL--L,

- (Projector 59
If-l
:!6 (Footswitch) angle)
16711

(FF is set when GTS power

3
62 LPANERR
81 RPANERR
is turned ON.

For the GTS message output port /

/ Ffgiij
For setting the O-clear time: /
auto-sliding distance: etc.

BCN
XRAYOy
VTRlG
6s) u
INT6 26
R-ENCODER
El39

The LEDs listed below blink in the idling status.

LED 3, 7, 8, 20, 27, 37, 38, 41, 48, 64, 65, 69, 70, 71, and 73

For details, refer to the SGTS LED list on the subsequent pages.

- 124-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: LISTS OF GTS (SGTS) LEDS

Lists of GTS LEDs (l/7)

TPage in wiring diagram list

In idle TSX- TSX-
LED Name Meaning/operation Remarks
status 002A/l: 2, 002A4 5,
and 3 6: and 7
I RESET GTS PWB reset signal: o OFF The LED 6 4
When resetting is performed: the should not
LED lights. remain lit.
2 HALT Communication CPU (280) halting: o OFF The LED 6 4
When the CPU is halted, the LED should not
lights. remain lit.
3 DTR GTS communication enabling *ON 4
(DATA TERMINAL READY):
Communication is enabled when the
LED is lit.
5 LOCAL Local mode signal from the operating o OFF 4
panel (after gating):
When the system enters local mode,
the LED lights.
6 PANEL Maintenance panel switch ON o OFF 6
(after gating):
When the maintenance panel witch
is turned ON, the LED lights.
7 DPINTL Access of 68K to DPRAM *ON G 4
(unused address):
When DPRAM is accessed, the LED
lights.
8 STATUS Status display signal from GTS to SS: * Blinking 6 4
When the LED is blinking, status
signals are being transmitted.
9 TILT-ON Output of - tilting operation signal: o OFF 20
When the LED is lit: the operation
signal is being output.
10 TILT+ON Output of + tilting operation signal: o OFF 20
When the LED is lit: the operation
signal is being output.
11 TILT ON Output of tilting operation signal o OFF 20
(output of master phase):
When the LED is lit, the operation
signal is being output.

- 125 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED’

SUBJECT: LISTS OF GTS (SGTS) LEDS

Lists of GTS LEDs (2/7)

I I Page in miring

r
diagram list
In idle TSX- TSX-
LED Name Meaning/operation Remarks
status 002A4 2, 002A/4, 5.
and 3 6: and 7
12 T-BRK Tilt motor brake releasing: o OFF 31 20
OFF When the brake is released, the LED is
lit.
13 TILT STOP Tilt stop signal (0” step tilt): o OFF 31 20
Stop signal output when the LED is lit
14 TENPLS Tilt encoder pulse signal: Depends 30 19
When the LED is blinking, pulses are upon the
being output. status I I
15 HI- Output of upward and downward o OFF 33 20
MASTER mo\rement signals (output of master SSR):
When the LED is lit: the operation
signal is being output.
16 DOWN 1 Output of downward movement signal o OFF 33 20
(Yalve 1):
When the LED is lit: the operation
signal is being output.
17 DOWN 2 Output of downward movement signal o OFF 33 20
(valve 2):
When the LED is lit: the operation
signal is being output.
18 UP Output of upward movement signal: o OFF 33 20
When the LED is lit: the operation
signal is being output.
19 THERR Step tilt and vertical movement error o OFF The LED
(the movement is not stopped within should not
4.5 seconds): remain lit
Error indicated n-hen LED is lit.
20 200 VAC 200 V power line *ON When an 34 21
ON (HARD-ERR, power supply to the motor error
is interrupted using SW4): occurs,
When 200 V power line is connected, the LED
the LED lights. goes out.

- 126 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: LISTS OF GTS (SGTS) LEDS

Lists of GTS LEDs (3/7)

T
Page in xiring diagram list
In idle xx- TSX-
LED Name Meaning/operation Remarks
status ,02A/l, 2, 002A4 5,
tnd 3 6: and 7
21 INT 1 Interruption of le\-el 1 o OFF The LED 19 16
(GNS, used for maintenance): should not
An interruption is output when the remain lit.
LED lights.
22 INT 2 Interruption of level 2 (sensor, interlock): o OFF The LED 19 16
An interruption is output when the should not
LED lights. remain lit.
23 INT3 Interruption of level 3 o OFF The LED 19 16
(local control system timer, GA): should not
An interruption signal is output when remain lit.
the LED lights.
24 INT 4 Interruption of level 4 (DP RAM: 280): o OFF The LED 19 16
When an interruption is output, the should not
LED lights. remain lit.
25 INT 5 Interruption of level 5 (DAS: rotation): o OFF The LED 19 16
When an interruption is output, the should not
LED lights. remain lit.
26 INT 6 Interruption of level 6 (system clock): o OFF The LED 19 16
When an interruption is output, the should not
LED lights. remain lit.
27 100 kHz 100 kHz clock signal: * Blinking 22 19
When the LED is blinking, clock
signal are being output.
28 ORANGE Output to orange lamp 1 of the patient o OFF 54
1 guide (during scan):
The orange lamp 1 is lit when the LED
is lit.
29 ORANGE Output to orange lamp 2 of the patient o OFF 54
2 guide (during scan):
The orange lamp 2 is lit when the LED
is lit.
30 ORANGE Output to orange lamp 3 of the patient o OFF 54
3 guide (during scan):
The orange lamp 3 is lit when the LED
is lit.
31 GREEN Output to green lamp of the patient guide Depends 54
(for information “please relax”): on setting
When the green lamp is lit, the LED is
lit.

- 127-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: LISTS OF GTS (SGTS) LEDS

Lists of GTS LEDs (4/7)

In idle
r
Page in wiring diagram list

rsx- TSX-
LED Name Meaning/operation Remarks
status >02A/l, 2: 002A/4, 5:
md 3 6: and 7
32 YELLOW Output to yellow lamp of the patient guide 3 OFF
(during longitudinal movement:
horizontal movement or tilting
movement):
When the yellow lamp is lit: the LED
is lit.
33 BRK OFF Servo motor brake OFF signal: D OFF 61 29
Break is OFF when the LED is lit.
34 X4 GAIN Servo voltage DAC gain change o OFF 61
(Not used):
When x4 gain is output, the LED
lights.
35 SPEED Output of voltage (for speed) to servo o OFF 61 29
ON amplifier:
When the LED is lit: voltage is being
applied.
36 SERVO Output of servo system ON signal 3 OFF 61 29
ON (ON: rotation, OFF: stop):
When ON (rotation) signals are output,
the LED lights.
37 CONDI. Servo unit condition status: *ON 61 29
OK When the conditions are acceptable,
the LED lights.
38 POWER Power input status of the seno unit: *ON 61 29
ON When the LED is lit, power is ON.
39 R- Pulse input of the rotation encoder: Uncertain 62 30
ENCODER When the LED is blinking, pulses are
input.
40 POSI-PLS Input of rotation position sensor: o OFF 62 30
When the LED is lit, the sensor is
being interrupted.
41 GVSEL A Gantry VTRIG generation mode selection *ON 63 30
LED-1 1: OFF, LED-l2: OFF = Pulses
for 1.j-second rotation has been
selected. (12 E-PULSE 1 GVTRG)
42 GVSEL B LED-4 1: ON, LED42: OFF = Pulses for o OFF 63 30
2.0-second rotation has been selected.
(9 E-PULSE 1 GVTRG)

- 128 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SlJBJECT: LISTS OF GTS (SGTS) LEDS

Lists of GTS LEDs (5/7)

T
Page in wiring diagranl list
In idle rsx- TSX-
LED Name Meaning/operation Remarks
status )02A/l, 2: 002A4 5:
urd 3 6: and 7
43 MAT DN Status of the tape snitches at the lower o OFF 41
section of the gantry:
When the LED is lit: the slide servo
motor is ON.
MAT UP Status OFthe mat switches at the upper o OFF 41
section of the gantry
When the LED is lit: the slide servo
motor is ON.
OUT SIDE Output of ON signal of the external o OFF
projector:
When the projector is turned ON: the
LED lamp lights.
46 SIDE CW Angle control motor CW rotation output o OFF 54
of external projector:
When the LED is lit, the CW rotation
signal is being output.
47 SIDE Angle control motor CCW rotation output o OFF 54
ccw of external projector:
When the LED is lit, the CCW rotation
signal is being output.
48 SLIDE IN Output of couch top imvard movement *ON 51 25
pulses:
When the LED is blinking, pulses are
being output.
49 LOCAL 2 Local control signal from the operating o OFF 55 28
panel (2nd line):
When local mode signals are input, the
LED lights.
50 TILT Tilting movement signal from the o OFF 55
operating panel (for double safety):
When tilting movement signals are
input, the LED lights.
51 SLIDE Couch top longitudinal movement signal o OFF 55
from the operating panel
(for double safety):
When longitudinal movement signals
are input, the LED lights.

- 129-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: LISTS OF GTS (SGTS) LEDS

Lists of GTS LEDs (6/7)

In idle
T
Page in wiring diagram list

LED Name Meaning/operation Remarks I-SX- TSX-

status 302A/l: 2, 002A/4. 5.
and 3 6, and 7
52 HEIGHT Couch vertical movement signal from the o OFF 55
operating panel (for double safe@):
When vertical movement signals are
input, the LED lights.
54 HARD Error detection status of the safety circuit 55 28
ERR (100 V: 200 V line OFF):
When an error occurs: the LED lights.

55 T+ LOCK + tilting interlock status: Depends 41 22

When + tilting operation is disabled, on the
the LED lights. status
56 T- LOCK - tilting interlock status: Depends 41 22
When - tilting operation is disabled, on the
the LED lights. status
57 IN LOCK Couch top inward movement interlock Depends 41 22
status: on the
When inward movement is disabled, status
the LED lights.
58 OT LOCK Couch top outward movement interlock Depends 41 22
status: on the
When outward movement is disabled, status
the LED lights.
59 UP LOCK Couch top upward movement interlock Depends 41 22
status: on the
When upward movement is disabled: status
the LED lights.
GO DN LOCK Couch top downward movement interlock Depends 41 22
status: on the
When downward molrement is status
disabled, the LED lights.
61 PSEL A VT-RIG selection o OFF 65 31
LED6 1: OFF, LED62: OFF = Internal
clock pulses are used as VTRIG.
62 PSEL B LED61: ON, LED62: OFF = GantQ o OFF 65 31
pulses are used as VTRIG.
LED61: OFF. LED62: ON = Couch
pulses are used as VTRIG.

- 130 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: LISTS OF GTS (SGTS) LEDS

Lists of GTS LEDs (7/7)

TPage in miring diagrm list

In idle TSX- TSX-
LED Name Meaning/operation Remarks
status 302A/l, 2, OOZAh, 5,
jnd 3 6: and 7
63 BGN Output of BGN (acquisition start) signal: o OFF 65 31
When the BGN signal is output, the
LED lights.
64 VTRIG Output of VTJUG (VIEW-TRIG): * Blinking 65 31
When the LED is blinking, pulses are
being output.
65 XRAY ON Output of X-RAY ON signal to XC: *ON 65 31
When the LED is lit, the system is in
X-RAY OFF status.
69 SLIDE Output of couch top outward movement *ON 51 25
OUT pulses:
When the LED is blinking, pulses are
being output.
70 FINISH Slide operation: *ON 51 25
The LED lights when the operation is
completed.
71 ALAERM Output of a slide servo error: *ON 51 25
The LED is lit when the slide servo
motor is normal.
72 SPLSEI PC clear (The counter for the slide servo o OFF 51
motor is cleared.):
When the LED is lit, the counter is
being cleared.
73 SSERVON Output indicating that the slide servo *ON 51 25
motor is turned on (Operable when the
slide servo motor is ON):
When the LED is lit: the slide servo
motor is ON.
81 RPANERR Not used 22
82 LPANERR Not used / 22
83 OPTSH Tilt, slide, and vertical movement signals o OFF 1 28
from the operating panel (for dual
protection):
When the LED is lit, thke signals given
on the left are entered.

- 131-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: VRS AND TEST PINS ON THE GTS

PWB
Layout of variable resistors (VR) and test pins (TP)

OTP4 TPI I

OTP7 ElTP8

OVR7 m/R6
CIVR4
OVR5 UVRl
I TP9
TP41 I
TP40 I
OTP3
CNN404 I]

CNN402 0

I TP46

Circuit
VR No. NAME Function
I diagram
VRl ) ROTA SPEED I Rotation speed adjustment I 29
vR4 PROJ/OFFSET Offset adjustment of the projector angle display 23

v-R5 . PROJ/GAIN Gain adjustment of the projector angle display 23

VR6 HEIG/OFFSET Offset adjustment of the couch height display 23

VR7 1HEIG/GAIN I Gain adjustment of the couch height display I 23

Note: VR4 and VR5 are not used for the Xvision (no external projectors): Provided for indent.

- 132 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: VRS AND TEST PINS ON THE GTS

PWB

Circuit
TP No. NAME Function
diagram
TPl OV Power supply 0 V (DC power supply) 26
TP2 IOV I Power supply 0 V (DC power supply) .I 26
TP3 1’0 V 1 Power supply 0 V (DC power supply) I 26
TP4 IOV I Power supply 0 V (DC power supply) I 26
TP5 IOV I Power supply 0 V (DC power supply) I 26
TP7 +5 v Power supply +5 V (DC power supply) 26
TP8 +15 v +15 V (DC/DC power supply output) 26
TP9 I-15V I -15 V (DC/DC power supply output) I 26
TP40 1(SPEED DATA 0 V) 1 Rotation speed voltage I 29
TP41 I (SPEED DATA V) I Rotation speed voltage 0 V I 29
TP43 1R-ENCODER I Rotation encoder pulse I 30
TP46 1POSI-PLS I Rotation reference sensor signal I 30

- 133 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED
SUBJECT: GOCPlSGOCP PWB
- 134-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: LEDS AND TEST PINS ON THE

GOCPISGOCP PWB
LEDs, displays (DISP), test pins (TP), and DIP switches

LEDNo. NAME Function Circuit

diagram
LED 1 I RESET I The PWB is being reset. ---1-----T-
LED2 I HALT 1ZSO status (being halted) I 7
LED3 I PERIINT I Interrupt signal to 280 I 7
LED4 SERIAL I Interrupt signal of serial communication 1 7
LED5 I SLTINT I Interrupt signal of slit control LSI I 7
LED6 WEGINT I Interrupt signal of wedge control LSI I -- 7
LED7 BTRINT Interrupt signal of beam trimmer control LSI (Right) 7
LED8 I BTLINT 1 Interrupt signal of beam trimmer control LSI (Left) I 7
LED9 SLTSEN I Slit reference position sensor signal I 7
LED10 WEGSEN Wedge reference position sensor signal 7
LED11 1BTRSEN 1Beam trimmer reference position sensor signal (Right) I 7
LED12 1BTLSEN 1Beam trimmer reference position sensor signal (Left) I 7
LED13 SLTPLS Pulse motor control pulse (Slit) 7
LED14 1WEGPLS 1Pu1se motor control pulse (Wedge) I 7
LED1 5 1BTRPLS 1Pulse motor control pulse (Beam trimmer) (Right) I 7
LED 16 1,BTLPLS I Pulse motor control pulse (Beam trimmer) (Left) I- 7
LED17 1IFPAGO 1DAS control check LED I 6
LED18 I IFPAGl I DAS control check LED I 6
LED19 I IFPAG2 I DAS control check LED I 6
LED20 1LUMP-C ( Median line projector ON/OFF signal I 11
LED21 ILUMP-R jIt n ernal projector (right side) ON/OFF signal I 11
LED22 1LUMP-L I Internal projector (left side) ON/OFF signal I 11
LED23 1LUMP-S 1Internal projector (oblique) ON/OFF signal I 11
LED24 1LUMPON 1L aser projector ON/OFF signal I 12
LED25 1(NA) I Not used I 6

- 135 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: LEDS AND TEST PINS ON THE

GOCPlSGOCP PWB

Circuit
DISP No. NAME Function
diagram
DISPl 1DISPl 1Displays motor control pulse counts. I 7
DISP2 1DISP2 1Displays motor control pulse counts. I 7
DISP3 DISP3 Displays motor control pulse counts. , 7

Circuit
TPNo. NAME Function
diagram
TPl +5 v For checking +5 V side of the 5 VDC power supply 5
TP2 +24 V For checking +24 V side of the 24 VDC power supply 5
TP3 GND For checking 0 V side of the DC power supply 5
TP4 GND For checking 0 V side of the DC power supply 5
TP5 GND For checking 0 V side of the DC power supply 5
TP6 GND For checking 0 V side of the DC power supply 5
TP7 6Mhz For checking clock 6 Mhz 4
TP8 SLIT Sl For checking pulse motor drive pulse (Slit) 9
TP9 IWEDGES~ JF or checking pulse motor drive pulse (Wedge) I 9
TPlO BT-R Sl For checking pulse motor drive pulse (Beam trimmer) 10
2 -1 @kht)
TPll BT-L Sl For checking pulse motor drive pulse (Beam trimmer) 10
WV
TP20 1LASER-V ) F or checking laser projector drive voltage I 12
TP2 1 LASER-O V For, checking 0 V side of the laser projector drive voltage 12

Circuit
DSWNo. NAME Function
diagram
DSWl / TEST IF ] Communication line selection switch (for maintenance) 1 6
DSWlO SYSTEM Applicable system selection switch 1
SW

- 136 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: SWITCH SETTINGS AND DISPLAY

ON DISP I TO 3 ON THE
GOCPKGOCP PWB
Applicable systems can be changed by the DIP switch setting (DSWlO) of the SGOCP PWEK

Type 1: For Xvision Fast Package

Type 2: For Xvision/GX fluoroscopy system
Type 3: For Xvision/SP standard system

DSWlO
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Type 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Type 2 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 Type 3 - 1 OFF ( ON ( OFF 1 OFF 1 OFF 1 OFF OFF OFF

- 137-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: SWITCH SETTINGS AND DISPLAY

ON DISP I TO 3 ON THE
GOCPISGOCP PWB
The values below are the numbers of pulses output from the GOCP/SGOCP PWB
(displayed on DISP 1 to 3).

Function GOCP SGOCP

(reference) Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
Wedge Normal 053 053 057 057
Small 0 standard 0 standard 0 standard 0 standard
Step 106 106 106 106
Air-calibration - - 164 164
DAS For existing DAS This setting This setting This setting
Auto mode
Test mode
GO0
GO1
GlO

For D-DAS / / This setting

GO00
GO01
GO10
GO11
GlOO
GlOl
Test mode
Test pattern

Slit 1Omm 169 169 169 169

7mm 080 080 080 080
5mn.l 040 040 040 040
3rm.n 011 011 011 011
2mm 0 standard 0 standard 0 standard 0 standard
Beam --I Open 0 standard 0 standard 0 standard 0 standard -
trimmer 7nu.n - 038 038 038
5mm 056 . 056 056
3mm 072 072 072 072
2mm 083 083 083 083
1 mm 092 092 092 092
Internal For laser Not Supported Supported Supported
projector . supported
One projector is Not Supported Supported Supported
added supported

- 138 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: USE OF THE GTS MAINTENANCE

PANEL ~~~~

I. Important Notes for Use

(1) When the panel switch (SW 1) is set to ON, the GTS maintenance panel cannot be
operated from the operating panels or from the Navistation.

(2) When the panel switch is turned ON while the gantry or couch is in motion, the gantry
or couch stops.
The gantry stops rotating at the tube home position (tube position is -15”).

(3) When you try to slide the couch top outside the PRE. H. CUT position, the safety
function shuts off the 200 V power system.

(4) After using the maintenance panel, be sure to reset the GTS.

2. Procedures for Use of the Maintenance Panel

(1) Set the panel switch (SWl) on the GTS PWB to the lower position (PANEL ON).

(2) Using switch SW32, select the desired function. Refer to the list of maintenance
panel functions.

Every time this switch is pressed, the display on LED66 changes to show the number
corresponding to the selected function.

(3) Using switch SW3 1, select the desired mode. Refer to the list of maintenance panel
functions.

Every time this switch is pressed, the display on LED67 changes to show the number
corresponding to the selected mode.

(4) Press SW11 (SET) and/or SW12 (SCAN) to operate the system to confirm that the
settings specified using SW32 and SW3 1 are carried out correctly.

For the operation of each switch, refer to the list of maintenance panel operations.

(5) When confirmation is completed, set the panel switch (SWl) to the upper position
(OFF).

On LED66 and LED67, “F” is displayed.

(6) Press the RESET switch (SW21) or turn OFF the power.

The displays on LED66 and LED67 change to “8”.

- 139 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: USE OF THE GTS MAINTENANCE

PANEL

witches on the maintenance panel]

I> SW1 Panel switch:

Turns ON the maintenance
panel.

!> SW32 Function setting:

Selects the desired function.

I> SW3 1 Mode setting:

Selects the desired mode for the
function selected using SW32.
PANEL ON
P- SW11 SET:
Starts operation.

;> SW12 SCAN:

cl
SW2 1
tl
SW12
0
SW11
RESET SCAN SET
For gantry rotation, press this
switch in addition to the SET
switch.
SW3 1 SW32

(TSX-002A/4 to TSX-002A/7)

L-,=

- 140-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: FUNCTION SETTING USING THE

GTS MAINTENANCE PANEL
List of maintenance panel functions

Operation Mode (Setting on SW3 1)

1 2 3 4 5 6
Function 1 WEDGE NORMAL SMALL STEP Air-
calibration
2 DAS TEST AUTO TEST GAIN 00 GAIN 0 1 GAIN 10
(GOOO) (GOOl) (GOlO) (GOll) (GlOO)
3 SLIT 10 5 3 2 7
4 BEAM OPEN 3 2 1 5 7
TRIMMER
5 TILT +
(Setting on 6 T-ROTA 60 set
SW32) ROTATION
7 SCAN0 O0 90” 180” 270”
8 SCAN 2 set 1.5 set 1 set
9 LIGHT ON OFF
A LIGHT +
ANGLE
B SLIDE SLOW-IN SLOW-OUT FAST-IN FAST-OUT AUTO SLIDE
C HEIGHT UP DOWN
D SLIDE CLEAR
DISPLAY
E SLIDE IDLE REMOTE
F ROTOR RELEASE LOCK
BRAKE

The following switches are used for safety circuit check, too.
[I] SW32 setting of “5 TILT”: when tilting is continuously performed for 4.5 seconds or more,
the safety circuit is actuated, then the power is turned OFF.
[2] SW32 setting of “C HEIGHT” (couch vertical movement): when vertical movement is
continuously performed for 4.5 seconds or more, the safety circuit is actuated and the power
is turned OFF.
[3] SW32 setting of “B SLIDE” (couch top slide): when sliding is performed to a position past
the [PREHCUT] sensor, the safety circuit is actuated and the power is turned OFF.
[4] l-second gantry rotation is possible only for the l-second system.

1Note: (GOOO) to (GlOO) of 2. “DAS TEST” are for the TSX-002A/7. I

- 141-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: MAINTENANCE PANEL

OPERATIONS
List of maintenance panel operations

Setting Start Operation (when the related switch If the panel is turned
Function
on SW32 switc n is turned ON or OFF) OFF during operation
1 Wedge SET The wedge moves until it reaches Keeps on moving till it
the end once the SET switch is reaches the end.
pressed.
SET Starts when the SET switch is Stops in the current
pressed. status.
SET The slit moves until it reaches the Keeps on moving till it
end once the SET switch is pressed. reaches the end.
4 Beam SET The beam trimmer moves until it Keeps on moving till it
trimmer reaches the end once the SET reaches the end.
switch is pressed.

I
SET Tilting is carried out while the SET Immediately stops.
switch is pressed. (Tilting stops
when the SET switch is released.)
6 Test SET & Tilting is carried out while these Rotates at 1 rpm.
rotation SCAN switches are pressed. (Tilting stops
when the switches are released.)
7 Scan0 SET & The scano moves until it reaches the Keeps on moving till it
SCAN end once these switches are pressed. reaches the end.
8 Scan SET & Scanning is carried out while these Keeps on rotating at a
L--z SCAN switches are pressed. When the preset speed. _
switches are released, the gantry
rotation slows down and the gantry
stops at the TUBE TOP position.
9 Light SET Lights when the SET switch is Remains in the current
pressed. lamp status.
A Light SET M,oves while the SET switch is Immediately stops.
angle pressed. Stops immediately when
the SET switch is released.

- 142-
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: MAINTENANCE PANEL

OPERATIONS

Setting Start ~Operation (when the related switch If the panel is turned
Function
on SW32 switch is turned ON or OFF) OFF during operation
B Horizontal SET Moves while the SET switch is Gradually reduces
movement pressed. Stops gradually when the speed and stops.
SET switch is released.
C Vertical SET Moves while the SET switch is Immediately stops.
movement pressed. Stops immediately when
the SET switch is released.
D Slide SET Starts when the SET switch is Remains in the current
display pressed. status.
E Free SET Starts when the SET switch is Remains in the current
sliding pressed. status.
F Rotor SET & Starts when the switches are Remains in the current
brake SCAN , pressed. status.

* 1 Do not change the setting of switch SW32 while a selected function is carried out.

*2 Do not turn OFF the panel switch before the SET switch (and the SCAN switch) is released.

*3 Be sure to reset the GTS after using the maintenance panel.

i 143 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
I. GTS Messages
1.1 Outline
The GTS PWB sends a status message to the T3 100 personal computer when detecting an
error, scanning, or checking the rotation speed of the gantry.

1.2 Tools required

(1) T3 100 personal computer

(2) Service cable (GR-1, as standard)

(3) Programs: TERMCOM and MTERM.BAT

1.3 Procedures to collect messages

(1) Connect the T3 100 computer to connector CN404 of the GTS PWB.

(2) Start the TERM program on the T3 100 computer.

Enter “MTERM [CR]“.

To terminate the TERM program, enter “CTRL C”
(press the [C] key while holding down the [CTRL] key).

1.4 Message output timing

The GTS outputs an error message only when detecting and recognizing an error.
Almost-all error messages (except a Servo Amplifier error and a 200 V OFF error) are
displayed temporarily.

When you connect the T3 100 computer to the GTS PWB after an error occurs, check the
content of the error according to section 2.

- 144-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
1.5 Typical error messages
The error message format is shown below.

XXXX:YYYYYYYYY

where XXXX is the name of a function.

XXXX Description

INIT GTS initialization

MAIN Main
GNS GNS control
SLIDE Horizontal couch movement control
TILT Gantry tilting control
HITE Vertical couch movement control
DAS DAS control
ROTE Gantry rotation control
LITE Projector control
DISP Operating panel display control

- 145 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
1.6 Example of GTS status messages
Messages displayed from the start of GTS till end of scan

GTS boot VO.05

vector table initialized.

configuration table initialized.
timer check start . .. ... . If timer check error occurs, a message
timer check done “INIT : XXTimer Fail” is displayed.
DAS: initialize
DAS: Ready. port status 0x1008
GNS: initialize
GNS: Ready
Xvision (TSX-002A/4A, TSX-002AIGA) GTS V5.1 B (95/07/04) ready

*** H command preset data ***

auto slide = 0620 .*..... Couch auto-sliding distance (620 mm)
0 clear time = 0020 . .. ... . O-clear time (2 s)
DAS: View rate 0 .*..... Start of warm-up process
ROTE: current speed: 0x066~ std speed: 0x0680 . .. ... . Gantry rotation speed 66C
DAS: View rate 0
ROTE: current speed: Ox066b std speed: 0x0680
DAS: E cmd DAS status 0x1008
DAS: View rate 990 . .. ... . Start of scan
ROTE: current speed: Ox066d std speed: 0x0680
DAS; -View rate 990
DAS: offset number of view 1024
ROTE: current speed: Ox066e std speed: 0x0680
DAS: offset done Ll 3 L2 1027 VIEW 1024
DAS: View rate 990
ROTE: current speed: Ox066b std speed: 0x0680
DAS: View rate 990 ’
DAS: offset number of view 1024
ROTE: current speed: Ox066b std speed: 0x0680
DAS: offset done Ll 3 L2 1027 VIEW 1024
DAS: scan done Ll 62 L2 1052 VIEW 990 ... . .. . End of scan

- 146
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
2. Detailed GTS Status Codes
(including Error Codes and Interlock information)
2.1 Outline
GTS detailed status data indicates the current status of the GTS.

The GTS supports two kinds of status data: cyclic status data and return status data.

(1) Cyclic status data (GTS status is cyclically sent to the SS)

@I), (W : Running status of the GTS

0C DAS offset status

Cd) Operating status of the gantry
0e X-RAY ON status
(X-RAY ON signal sent from the GTS to the XC)
(0 Couch status
(9) SGOCP status
(hl) to (h4) : Outline of error (indicating the function which caused the error)
(i) to (k) : Interlock status
(11) to (12) : Rotation information of the gantry
(ml) to (m4) : Position information of the X-ray tube
(r&p0 (n6) : Position information of the couch top (Horizontal)
(01) to (04) : Position information of the couch top (Vertical)

(Pl) to (P4) : Tilt angle information of the gantry

(9) Gas pressure of the gas container

0r Idle status and projector ON/OFF status
0S Status of the preheat cut sensor
(2) Return status (More detailed information)

(4 to(0 : Functional status of the inside of the rotation section of the gantry
(g> to ci) : Functional status of the stationary section of the gantry
(kl) to (k6) : Sensor information

- 147-
 No. SD20L322ED

S UBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
(11) to (14) : Information of the external projector angle

(ml) to (m16) : Details of error (Details of each function)

0n : Information of rotation speed of the gantry

(0 > : Angle information of the tilt encoder

2.2 Tools required

(1) T3 100 personal computer

(2) Service cable (GR-1, as standard)

(3) Programs: TERM.COM and MTERM.BAT --

2.3 Procedures to collect status data

(1) Connect the T3 100 computer to connector CN404 of the GTS PWB with the service
cable.

(2) Start the TERM program on the T3 100 computer.

Enter “MTERM [CR]” in the directory containing TERMCOM and MTERM.BAT.

(3) Set bit 8 of DIP switch DSW4 on the GTS PWB to ON to see the status.

ON
OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12345678
2.-=
When bit 8 of DSW4 is set ON, the status data is displayed at an interval of 6 seconds.

To stop displaying the status data, set bit 8 of DSW4 to OFF.

Caution: Do not leave bit 8 of DSW4 ON. If the GTS is operated in this status, an
error occurs. Set bit 8 of DSW4 OFF after reading the status data.

- 148 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
2.4 Explanation of errors
(1) Error status data preceded by an asterisk (return status data ml to m16)

When this kind of error occurs, a retry is inhibited. The error will not be reset by an
operation request. Carry out GTS resetting to reset the error.

Other errors can be reset by an operation request and the operation starts. If the same
error occurs again, the GTS sets the error and sends it to the SS.

(2) Slide error (ms), Tilt error (m7) and Vertical Movement error (m12) preceded by an
asterisk

When a switch on the operating panel is pressed for this kind of error, the error
message on the display blinks and the operation stops.

If the message on the display blinks when a switch is pressed while the switch lights
(in the non-interlock status), read the content of the error from this detailed status
table.

<I> * * * dualport RAM cyclic status * * * (Cvclic status)

done-sts 5252(RR) off-st s=5 2(R) rote_sts=52(R) x_ray_sts=52(R)

4 -L A -.l L
w W) 0C (4 0e

bed_sts=52(R) gns_sts=52(R) err sts=3 0303 03 O(OOO0)

4 A 4
- ,I 03 (g) (hl) to (h4)

slid-inter=3 O(0) hitejntre=3 O(0) tilt-inter=3 O(0)

-L 4. -l-
0i 0) (k)
r_spd=3030(00) .x_ray_pos=3163 3 166( 1c 1f) sld~dsp=2b3030303030(+0000)
-If A 4 -4 -J J
(11) (12) (ml) to (m4) (nl) to (n6)

hite_dsp=2b3 13432(+142) tilt_dsp=2d3 03 030(-0000) bombe=30(0)

4 4. ‘-1 df k
(01) to (04) (Pl) to (P4) ((1)
free_lgt_sts=30(0) preheat_cut=30(0)
A -L
0r 0S

-149- .
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
<2> * * * dualport RAM return status *** (Return status)

weg_rst=3 O(0) das_rst=3 l(1) s1t_rst=3 O(0) bmt_rst=3 03 O(O0)

-J . J 4 J -L
0a (b) 0C (4 (e>

gt_rst=3 O(0) sld_sts=30(0) hite_sts=30(0) tilt_sts=30(0) lite_sts=30(0)

A -Jf L -4 -L
.
(0 (9) (h) 0i 0)
sen~chk=303032303030(00200~) lgt_deg=2b3 03 03 O(+OOO)
4. 4
(kl) to (k6) (11) to (14)

mes_beam=40(@) mes_slit=40(@) mes_mode=40(@) mes_wedge=40(@)

J- 4 -b J
( m 1) (m 2) m
( 3) m
( 4)
mes_slide=40(@) mes_rote=40(@) mes_tilt=40(@) mes_lite=40(@) * When one of
4 -If -If 4. the errors ml
to ml6
WI (m 6) (m-3 (m8)
occurs, “4x”
mesgns=40(@) mes_main=40(@) mes_das=40(@) mes_hite=40(@) appears in
A L -L -L place of “40”.
(m9> NW (ml 1) (mm
mes power=40(@) mes mudat=40(@) mes gns count=40(@)
4. 4. J
b-m> (ml5> b-w
speed data=Ox3d84 tilt data=OxOOOO
\1 -L
0n (0 >

All values shown in the previous section are expressed in hexadecimal. Values
enclosed in parentheses are the corresponding ASCII characters.

- 150-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
(3) Cyclic status

(bl), (b2) -- GTS running status

The GTS returns its status to the SS in response to a command sent from the SS.

w w Content
R R Ready
P B PAS Busy
D (X> PAS DONE [ID (X)]
S B SCAN Busy
S T SCAN TABLE moving
S D SCAN DONE
U B UNIT Busy
M (W UNIT DONE [ID (X)]
A B ABORT Busy
A D ABORT DONE
B B BREAK Busy
B D BREAK DONE
E B END Busy
E D END DONE
H B HEAD Busy
N (X) HEAD DONE [ID (X)]

(c) -- DAS offset status

This data indicates the offset status of the DAS

R (Ready) : Offset data can be acquired

B (Busy) :. Acquiring offset data
D (Done) : End of offset acquisition
E (Error) : Offset acquisition error

(d) -- Operating status of the gantry

This data indicates the operating status of the gantry (excluding the GNS).

R (Ready) : The gantry is ready to rotate.

B (Busy) : The gantry is rotating.

- 151-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
(o 1) to (04) -- Position information of the couch top (Vertical)

This data indicates the vertical position of the couch.

(01): Couch height code
+: Plus position (Ox2B) including the 0 position
- *, Minus position (Ox2D)
(02) to (04): Couch height (in millimeters) formatted
(02) (03) (04) mm

(pl) to (~4) -- Tilt angle information of the gantry

_ This data indicates the tilt angle of the gantry.

(~1): Tilt direction code
f: Plus position (Ox2B) including the 0 position
- *. Minus position (Ox2D)
(~2) to (~4): Tilt angle (in degrees) formatted
(P2) (P3), (P4) degrees

(q) -- Gas pressure of the gas container

This data indicates the gas pressure in the gas container,
0: Normal gas pressure (SF6, 1470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2) or more)
1: Gas container empty (SF6, 1470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2) or less)
Normal setting for Xvision is 0.

(r) -- Idle status of the couch and projector ON/OFF status

- -=0: Couch Not Idle, Projector Off
1: Couch Idle, Projector Off
2: Couch Not Idle, Projector On
3: Couch Idle, Projector On

(s) -- Preheat sensor

This data indicates the status of the preheat sensor (in the couch slide section).
0: Preheat Sensor Off
1: Preheat Sensor On

- 152-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
(4) Return status

These arguments (a) to (f) indicate the detailed status of each function.
-
(a) @> w 03 03 VI
Wedge DAS test Slit Beam trimmer 1 Beam trimmer 2 Projector
-
Reference Reference Reference Reference OFF
position position position position
1 Normal Auto mode 10 Open Open Internally ON
(GOOO)
2 Small Test mode 3 3 Externally ON
(GOOl)
3 Step Gain 00 2 2 Internally/
(GO10) externally ON
4 Air calibration Gain 01 1 1
(GOll)
5 Gain 10
(GlOO)
6
7
8
9
A Unknown -
B Busy -
C Multiple -
D Limit -
E
J 5 5
N 7 7 7

Note: (GOOO) to (GlOO) for (b) DAS test are for TSX-002A/7.

(g) to (j) -- Functional status of the stationary section of the gantry

(g) (W (0 0)
Slide Vertical mo\*ement Tilt External projector
0 (Zero) Read) >
B Busy >

- 153 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
(kl) to (k6) -- Sensor information

This data indicates information of each sensor.

D3 D2 Dl DO
Argument \
/ ,
w Mat switch on the Mat switch on Mat switch on Mat switch on the
bottom rear of the the bottom front the top rear top front of the
gantry of the gantry of the gantry
Gantry J

w TILT +LIMIT I TILT +30” TILT +O” I TILT t-position

0-w i -TILT -LIMIT I TILT -30” I TILT -0” I
I I HEIGHT0 I I Position sensor
(9 I AUTO STOP I HEIGHT2 HEIGHTI I UP LIMIT
w I IN LIMIT OUT 1 OUT LIMIT I DOWN LIMIT

When a sensor is actuated, the corresponding bit is set to ” 1I’.

Status data format

The high-order four bits are always “3” and the low-order four bits
(D3 to DO) indicate error status.

3 D3 D2 Dl Do
L--=

(11) to (14) -- External projector angle

This data indicates the position angle of the external projector.

. +: Plus angle (including 0)

-: Minus angle

(12) to (14): Angle, formatted

(12) (13) (14) degrees

- 154-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
DETAILS OF ERRORS

Error messages preceded by an asterisk cannot be corrected by an operation request to

retry. Other errors are reset by an operation request and the requested operation starts.

(ml) -- Beam Trimmer

1 D7 1 D6 1 D5 1 D4 t D3 1 D2 1 D1 1 Do t

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
D5:
D4:
D3: Stepping motor trouble
D2: Software error
Dl: Input parameter error
DO: Operation timeout

(m2) -- Slit

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl DO

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
D5:
D4:
D3: Stepping motor trouble
-,= D2: Software error
Dl : Input parameter error
DO: Operation timeout

(m3) -- DAS Test Mode/Lamp

D7 D6 ‘D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl DO

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
D5:
D4:
D3:
D2:
Dl:
DO:

- 155 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
(m4) -- Wedge

D7 D6 Ds D4 D3 D2 Dl Do

D7: Not used

D6: Always I
D5:
D4:
D3: Stepping motor trouble
D2: Software error
Dl : Input parameter error
DO: Operation timeout

(m5) -- Couch slide control

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Do

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
*D5: Slide overrun or slide servo amp trouble
(Retry inhibited)
D4: Stop position error
“D3: 100 ms interval error (Operating panel) (Retry inhibited)
*D2: Slide timeout (Retry inhibited)
0 Dl: Data error (illegal amount of movement, illegal auto slide value), speed
error
DO: Interlock break (by a request from the SS)
L-Z
(m6) -- Gantry rotation control

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl Do

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
D5: Illegal gantry stop position
D4: Illegal gantry speed
*D3: Servo motor trouble (Retry Inhibited)
D2: Position pulse timeout
D 1: Ll and L2 timeout
DO: Other errors

- 156-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
(m7) -- Gantry tilt control

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl Do

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
*D5: Tilting in the reverse direction (3” or more) or display angle data error
(Retry inhibited)
D4: Tilt limit sensor
*D3: 100 ms interval error (Operating panel) (Retry inhibited)
*D2: Tilt timeout or encoder timeout (Retry inhibited)
D 1: Data error (illegal tilt angle)
DO: Interlock break (by a request from the SS)

(m8) -- Projector control

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl Do

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
D5 to DO: Not used

(m9) -- SGOCP control

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl Do

r--= D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
D5: Communication error with the SGOCP firmware
D4: SGOCP Task startup error (Software error)
D3: SGOCP operation error (The SGOCP does not stop on the specified
position.)
D2: No SGOCP response (no status data)
Dl: NAK received
DO: Too many communication retries (more than the preset number of
retries)

- 157-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
(ml0) -- Main (GTS system control)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl Do

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
D5: Not used
D4: Not used
D3: Not used
*D2: Hard-timer check error (initially checked) (Retry inhibited)
D 1: Message queue declaration error (Software error)
DO: Task start error (Software error)

(ml 1) -- DAS/X-Ray Task (Data Acquisition/X-Ray Control)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Do

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
D5: X-ray system error (The X-RAY ON and BGN signals are on when the
X-ray system aborts operation.)
D4: Rotation system error
D3: Initialization error (Gate array)
D2: Timeout (including the HHS standards)
D 1: Interrupt sequence error (L 1 and L2 interrupts)
DO: Software error or interrupt by a mat switch (before data acquisition)

(m12) -- Vertical Motion Task (Vertical Couch Motion Control)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl Do

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
*D5: Sliding in the reverse direction (10 mm or more) (Retry inhibited)
D4: Not used
*D3 : 100 ms interval error (Operating panel) (Retry inhibited)
*D2: Vertical motion timeout (Retry inhibited)
D 1: Data error (Illegal amount of movement)
DO: Break of interlock (by a request from the SS)

- 158 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
(m13) -- GTS Power Off

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl Do

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
*D5: 200 V Off (Retry inhibited)
*D4: 100 V Off (Retry inhibited)
D3: Not used
D2: Not used
Dl: Not used
DO: Not used

(ml 5) -- MUDAT Errors

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl DO

D7: Not used

D6: 1
D5: Not used
D4: Not used
D3: Not used
D2: Not used
Dl : One LED is damaged (warning)
DO: Inoperable error

(m16) -- Count of SGOCP Communication Errors

2,=

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 m Do

D7: Not used

D6: Always 1
D5 to DO:’ Number of GNS communication errors (0 to 63)

- 159-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS STATUS MESSAGES AND

CODES
2.5 Example of GTS cyclic and return status
Cyclic status

*** dualport RAM cyclic status ** *

done-sts = 4544 (ED) off-sts = 44 (D) rote-sts = 52 (R) x-ray-sts = 52 (R)
bed-sts = 52 (R) gns-sts = 52 (R) err sts = 30303030 (0000)
slid-inter = 3 1 (1) bite-inter = 32 (2) tilt-inter = 30 (0)
r-spd = 3030 (00) x-ray-pos =31613630 (la60) sld-dsp = 2b3030303030 (+OOOOO)
bite-dsp = 2d333732 (-372) tilt-dsp = 2b303030 (+OOO) bombe = 30 (0)
free-lgt-sts = 30 (0) preheat-cut = 30 (0)

Return status

* * * dualport RAM return status * * *

weg-rst A 32 (2) das-rst = 31 (1) sit-rst = 31 (1) bmt-rst = 3131 (11)
gt-rst = 30 (0) sld-sts = 30 (0) bite-sts = 30 (0) tilt-sts = 30 (0) lite-sts = 30 (0)
sen-chk = 303230383e35 (0208>5) lgt-deg = 2b363335 (+635)
mes-beam = 40 (@) mes-slit = 40 (@) mes-mode = 40 (@) mes-wedge = 40 (@)
mes-slide = 40, (@) mes-rote = 40 (a) mes-tilt = 40 (a) mes-lite = 40 (a)
mesgns = 40 (@) mes-main = 40 (@) mes-das = 40 (a) mes-hite = 40 (@)
mes-power = 40 (@) mes-mudat = 40 (@) mesgns-count = 40 (a)
L-e= -
speed data = Oxb88 tilt data = 0x201
slide speed data = 0x0
fluoroscopy slide speed data = 0x0

- 160-
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: GANTRY ROTATION

Caution: 1. The servicing of the gantry rotation section is always accompanied with dangers
and requires extra caution.

2. Before working on the gantry, be sure to turn OFF breaker CPl at the rear bottom
right of the gantry to cut off power to the gantry, or turn OFF breaker CP320 at
the front of the servo amplifier to cut off power to the servo motor.

3. When rotating the gantry with the front cover opened, be careful with regard to the
MS321. The MS321 may come off due to vibration.

4. When disabling gantry rotation while using DCA, etc., be sure to set bits 1 and 2 of
DIP SW 10 to the ON position and turn OFF the breaker of the servo motor.
(This is required because the gantry can rotate even if “Rotation Disable” is
specified in DCA.)

5. Do not perform continuous scanning (repeating start/stop continuously) exceeding

10 stops and starts.

I. Stop Position and Methods forBrake Release

1.1 Xvision stop position
There are five stop positions of the Xvision gantry rotation section:

(1) Top (0”)

(2) Right side (90”)

(3) Bottom (180’)

270"-
(4) Left side (270”)

(5) Home position (- 15”)

.
180"

l The X-ray tube is stopped at the home position (-15’) after continuous rotation of
the gantry.
At this position the positioning projector can be accurately aligned with the patient.

l If the X-ray tube is not at the home position during scanoscopy or if any problem
occurs, the tube can be moved to the home position by holding the home position
key on the operating panel pressed for two seconds or more. The tube moves at a
speed of two seconds per rotation. (This function, however, is only available when
the console is active).

- lGl-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: GANTRY ROTATION

1.2 Brake release method

The gantry rotation motor is provided with a brake; therefore, the rotation section cannot
be normally be turned by hand.

To turn the rotation section manually, release the brake as described in the steps below:

(1) Set breaker CPl at the rear lower right of Rear of the gantry
the gantry to ON (the power is fully
supplied).

(2) Set servo amplifier breaker CP320 to OFF

(power supply to the motor is disabled).

l - If it is not necessary to supply power to

the inside of the rotor (HFG, DAS,
etc.), be sure to set breaker NFB2 at N-F.B2 CPl
the rear lower left of the gantry to OFF.

Step (2) is mandatory to ensure safety. Front of the gantry

(3) Set the brake release switch SW326 at the SW
servo amplifier section to the upward
position. The brake is then released and
the rotation section can be turned
manually.

After all procedures are completed, set

SW326 downward and reset the brake to
the lock position.
- ,=

- 162-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GANTRY ROTATION

2. Gantry Rotation Interlock (When the Gantry Cover

is Opened)
When any one of the front cover, left side cover (viewed from the front), or rear upper
cover of the gantry is opened, the cover switch is set to OFF and gantry rotation is
disabled.
To rotate the gantry with a cover opened, set the “Enable” switches to ON (upward). The
corresponding rotation warning lamp is then lit.

Front of the gantry

<<

Cover SW: MS321'

&able SW: SW321 s
-30 '
over SW: MS320
Enable SW:

Note: 1. If a servo error detected by the GTS, the status of that error is retained as is,
and the gantry cannot be rotated by operation from the Navistation even if the
rotation enable status is entered.
This error is resolved by resetting the GTS or rotating the gantry once using
the maintenance panel on the GTS PWB.

2. Be sure to set all enable switches (SW320 and 321) to downward when the
gantry covers are closed. If the cover is closed with any one of these switches
set to the upward position, the gantry cannot be rotated.

- 163 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF GANTRY

ROTATION SYSTEM
1. Offsets and Rotation Speed of the Gantry Servo
Motor
1.1 Offset and speed checks
The offset and speed of the gantry servo motor must be checked and adjusted in the
following cases:

(1) Offset check and adjustment

When the system is installed, when the GTS PWB is replaced, or when the servo
amplifier is replaced, perform offset check and adjustment.

(2) Check and adjustment of rotation speed of the gantry

When the system is installed, when periodic maintenance is performed, when the GTS
PWB is replaced, when the servo amplifier is replaced, or when a speed error or a
stop position error occurs, check and adjust the rotation speed.

The procedures to adjust the rotation speed of the gantry are given below.

(a) Check and adjustment of offsets

(b) Check of servo voltage on the GTS PWB

This check is always required when a servo error occurs or when the GTS PWB
is replaced.

(c)
- -7Adjustment of rotation speed of the gantry by the servo amplifier

- 164-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF GANTRY

ROTATION SYSTEM
1.2 Check and adjustment of the rotation speed of the gantry
The GTS has a function to check and adjust the rotation speed of the gantry. After the
gantry starts to rotate and acceleration to the specified rotation speed is completed, the
GTS checks its rotation speed and performs the following according to the speed:

(1) When the rotation speed is within 23%

of the specified speed : Normal The GTS allows the gantry to
continue rotating.

(2) When the rotation speed is more than

10% higher or lower than the specified
speed : Speed error. The GTS stops the gantry.

(3) When the rotation speed is 3% to 10%

higher or lower than the specified
speed : The GTS corrects the rotation speed.
After a delay of 1.5 seconds, the GTS
checks the rotation speed again.

If the rotation speed

error is within &3% of
the specified speed,
V ./ the GTS allows the
First speed check Second speed check gantry to continue
\/ \/ rotating. If the
(only when the rotation speed is more
rotation speed error than 10% higher or
is between 3% and lower than the
10% of the specified speed, the
specified speed)
GTS stops the gantry.

Gantry rotation speed curve

- 165 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF GANTRY

ROTATION SYSTEM
2. Gantry Rotation Speed Check
2.1 Outline
This section describes procedures to check the rotation speed of the gantry. The rotation
speed of the gantry at the start-up of the gantry, speed data and required speed correction
can be obtained by executing a speed check.

Caution: Be careful when rotating the gantry.

2.2 Tools required

(1) T3 100 personal computer

(2) Service cable (GR-1, as standard)

(3) Programs: TERJSJ.COM and MTERM.BAT

- 166-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF GANTRY

ROTATION SYSTEM
2.3 Procedures to check the rotation speed of the gantry

1 Connect the T3 100 computer to

connector CN404 of the GTS I
PWB with the service cable. r
;CN404
a GTS PWB
2 Start the TERM program on the
T3 100 computer.
Enter “MTERM [CR]” in the
(11
directory containing TERM.COM
and MTERM.BAT.
I

3 Enter as needed from the maintenance panel (or the Console) to rotate the gantry at a
speed of 1.5 seconds per rotation.

(1) Set the lever of the panel switch (SW 1) to ON (downward).

(2) Set “8” (SCAN) on switch SW32.

(3) Set “3” (1.5 seconds per rotation) or “4” (1 second per rotation) on switch SW3 1.

(4) Press the SET switch (SW1 1) and the SCAN switch (SW12) at the same time and
hold them down. The gantry starts to rotate.

(5) Release the SET switch and the SCAN switch to stop the gantry from rotating.

Caution: 1. After using the maintenance panel, be sure to set the panel switch
(SWl) OFF (upward) and reset the GTS.

2. Do not perform continuous scanning (that is, a set of start and stop
operations performed consecutively) more than ten times.
Doing so may damage the servo-amplifier. If repetitions of
continuous scanning are required, stop for two minutes after
scanning is performed ten times.
Note that when a twenty-second pause time is taken each single
scan, scanning can be repeated as many times as required.

4
4 5 seconds after the gantry starts to rotate, read the GTS message on the T3 100
personal computer.

- 167-
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF GANTRY

ROTATION SYSTEM
(1) If the error of the rotation speed of the gantry is +3% or less

Read the current gantry speed and the standard gantry speed on the T3 100 and
compare them. When the error is +3% or less, the GTS allows the gantry to keep on
rotating.

ROTE : current : OxAAAA std : Standard rotation speed

&
Current rotation speed of the gantry
(Should be as close to the standard rotation speed as possible)

Standard rotation speed

(1) l-second rotation system (2) 1.5- or Zsecond rotation system

l l-second rotation : Ox 0455 l 1.5-second rotation: Ox 0680
l 1.5-second rotation: Ox 04E0 l 2-second rotation: Ox 0680

(2) If the error of the rotation speed of the gantry is between 3% and 10%

A message indicating that the rotation speed is being corrected by the GTS is
displayed. (Two speed check messages are output.)

If the error of the corrected rotation speed of the gantry is not corrected to within rt
3%, the GTS stops the gantry from rotating.

ROTE : current : OxAAAA std : Standard rotation speed

4.
L-,- Rotation speed measured by the first speed check

ROTE : current : OxO0iXl std : Standard rotation speed (adjust)

i-
Rotation speed after correction

- 16%
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF GANTRY

ROTATION SYSTEM
(3) If the error of the rotation speed of the gantry is 10% or more

The GTS outputs the following message and stops the rotation of the gantry.

ROTE : speed error : OxAAAA std : Standard rotation speed

Rotation speed of the gantry

Gantry rotation speed data: 1 S-s, 2-s system

+lo% Ox 0727 The current rotation speed of the gantry is 10%
slower than the standard speed.
t-3% Ox 06B2 The current rotation speed of the gantry is 3% slower
than the standard speed.
Standard Ox 0680 The current rotation speed is exactly equal to the
standard speed.
-3% Ox 064E The current rotation speed of the gantry is 3% faster
than the standard speed.
-10% Ox 05D9 The current rotation speed of the gantry is 10% faster
than the standard speed.

- ,-

- 169-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF GANTRY

ROTATION SYSTEM
Gantry rotation speed data: l-s system
+10% Ox 04C3 (1 .O s) The current rotation speed is 10% slower than the
standard.
ox 055c (1.5 s)
+3% Ox 0476 (1 .O s) The current rotation speed is 3% slower than the
standard.
ox 0505 (1.5 s)
Standard Ox 0455 (1 .O s) The current rotation speed is exactly equal to the
standard speed of 1.O second per rotation or 1.5
seconds per rotation.
Ox 04E0 (1.5 s)
-3% Ox 0433 (1 .O s) The current rotation speed is 3% faster than the
standard.
Ox 04BA (1.5 s)
-10% Ox 03E6 (1 .O s) The current rotation speed is 10% faster than the
standard.
Ox 0463 (1.5 s)
Note: When the rotation speed for the 1.5-s rotation setting is exactly equal to
the standard (Ox 04EO), the value for the 1.0-s rotation setting is Ox 045C
for convenience of l-s rotation control.
(The gantry rotates at 1.007 s per rotation for the l-s rotation setting.)
Therefore, the l-s rotation speed should be adjusted to the standard.
- ,-

- 170s
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF THE GANTRY

SERVO AMPLIFIER
I. Adjustment of the Gantry Servo-Amplifier Offset
I .I Preparation
(1) Turn OFF the breaker CP 1 beneath the rear right of the gantry.

(2) Open the gantry front cover. Turn OFF the servo amplifier breaker CP320.

(3) Open the gantry right side cover.

(4) Turn ON the breaker CPl .

(5) Turn ON the servo amplifier breaker CP320.

(6) Confirm that each unit of the gantry is powered ON.

(7) Set the rotation enable switches SW320 and SW321 to ON (upward).
The rotation warning lamp lights.

1.2 Offset verification

(1) Turn OFF the servo amplifier breaker CP320.

(2) After the breaker CPl is turned OFF beneath the rear right of the gantry, change the
GTS PWB DSWlO setting as follows:

DSWlO

The DSWlO
ON/OFF position
usually set

DSWlO
TSX-002AI4
TSX-002A/5 The DSW 10
TSX-002A/G ON/OFF position
TSX-002AI7 set after offset
verification

- 171 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF THE GANTRY

SERVO AMPLIFIER
(3) Turn ON the breakers CPl and CP320 in order. Be careful, the gantry may rotate
accidentally.

The panel display “u urun” will then appear.

Leave the display for one minute as is and verify, that the rotation section does not
move.

If the rotation section moves in the positive or negative direction, it is assumed to be

incorrect.

(4) Turn OFF the breakers CP320 and CPl in order.

(5) Restore the GTS PWB DSWlO setting to normal status.

(6) Turn ON the breakers CPl and CP320 in order. The panel display
“-.uubb” will then appear.

Note: If offset is incorrect, perform offset adjustment again, as described in subsection

1.3.

1.3 Speed command offset adjustment

(1) Press SW4 to display Cn-00. If the setting is not Cn-00, follow the procedures in
subsection 7.8. I1
-.~^
““___-- i
(2) Press SW4 while holding down SW1 to display 00-00.

(3) Press SW2 to change the display to 00-01.

(4) Press SW4. The panel display disappears instantaneously and then 00-01 is displayed
again. (Offset adjustment is completed.)

(5) Press SW4 while holding down SW 1. Cn-00 is displayed.

(6) Press SW4 twice. ‘I-. uubb” is displayed again. End.

- 172-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF THE GANTRY

SERVO AMPLIFIER
2. Adjustment of Gantry Rotation Speed by the
Servo-Amplifier
2.1 Adjusting the rotation speed

Note: The rotation speed is monitored in the same manner as previously by connecting
the cable between the GTS PWB and T3 100.

(1) Use T3 100 to check the rotation speed at 1.5 seconds.

(2) When the rotation speed setting is incorrect, rotate the variable resistor VRl on the
GTS PWB and adjust the rotation speed.

I -a.-
CTS *..+a
PWR
l7cl~i-o
Slower
I

(3) Repeat the speed adjustment in step (2) until it is within the specified range.

- -=

- 173 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF THE GANTRY

SERVO AMPLIFIER
3. Checking the Rotation Speed Voltage Sent from
GTS PWB to the Servo Speed Amplifier
3.1 Outline
This section describes procedures to check the voltage value corresponding to the rotation
speed of the gantry. The voltage is sent from the GTS PWB to the servo amplifier.

3.2 Tools required

(1) T3 100 personal computer

(2) S&ice cable (GR-1, as standard)

(3) Programs: TERMCOM and MTERM.BAT

(4) Digital tester

- ,-

- 174-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF THE GANTRY

SERVO AMPLIFIER
3.3 Procedures to check the servo amplifier voltage

1 Turning OFF the power to the gantry (CPl OFF)

(a) Turn OFF the circuit breaker CP320 for the servo amplifier.

(b) Unplug the servo cable connector from connector CN43 1 on the GTS PWB.

(c) Set both bit 1 and bit 2 ofDIP switch DSWlO on the GTS PWE! to the ON
position. (Bits 1, 2, and 4 of DSW 10 are ON.)

2 Connect the T3 100 personal computer to connector CN404 of the GTS PWB with the
service cable, and execute MTERM.

&I Disconnect this cable

1 I
CN43 1
CN40d

DSW4
I

DSWlO

INote: For TSX-002A/4 to 6, the locations of connectors and DIP switches differ.

3 Turn ON the power to the gantry.

- 175 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT OF THE GANTRY

SERVO AMPLIFIER

4 When the GTS starts up, set bit 1 of DIP switch DSW4 OFF, and press the RESET
switch (SW2 1, white).

An asterisk ‘I*” appears on the T3 100.

V

5 Type the following (with lowercase characters) from the T3 100 personal computer.

fbu934001u934001u03 [CR]
fbu938001u938001~BC [CR] (u : space [CR]: Press the return key)

6 Measure the voltage between test points TP41 (Servo Output) and TP40 (0 V) on the
GTS PWB and make sure that the voltage is -2.90 V.

If the voltage does not meet the requirements specified above, adjust it using VRI.
V

7 Press the RESET switch SW21 on the GTS PWE3.

8 Turn OFF the power to the gantry and make the initial setting on the GTS.
(This operation is always required.)

(a) Reconnect the servo cable to the connector CN43 1 on the GTS PWB.

(b) Set the lever of switch SW4 on the GTS PWB to AC ON (right).

(c) Set both bit 1 and bit 2 of DIP switch DSWlO on the GTS PWB to the OFF
position.
DSWlO

1234 1234

(d) Set bit 1 of the DIP switch DSW4 ON.

12345678 12345678

- 176-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT AFTER GTS PWB

REPLACEMENT
1. Setting the Amount of Automatic Couch Top
Sliding
[Outline]

This section describes procedures to register the amount of automatic couch top slide to
the GTS. The registered value is stored in the GTS.

Note: “3 10” must be set even for the standard Xvision system which does not support
the auto slide function.

[Tools required]

(1) T3 100 personal computer

(2) Service cable (GR-1, as standard)

(3) Programs: BASIC and AUTO.BAS (runs in BASIC)

[Procedures to register the automatic slide amount]

1 Turn OFF the power to the gantry.

2 Connect the T3 100 computer to connector CN402 of the GTS PWB with the service
cable.

3 Set bit 1 of the DIP switch DSWS on the GTS PWB ON and bit 2 of DSWS OFF.
DSWS

4 Turn ON the power to the gantry and start up the GTS. The data on the 7-segment
display turns from “FF” to “88”.

- 177-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT AFTER GTS PWB

REPLACEMENT

5 Start the Auto Slide program on the T3 100 personal computer.

l Enter “BASIC uAUT0 [CR]” in the directory that contains BASIC and AUTO.
BAS. (u: Space, [CR]: Press return key)

The T3 100 personal computer displays the following message:

** TSX-01 1A SETTING OF AUTO SLIDE AMOUNT ***

The program starts. /

I6 Press the RESET switch on the GTS PWB. I

\L

7 Enter the auto slide amount in the following sequence:

(a) Enter [1] (START).

(b) Enter [l] (CHANGE OF AUTO SLIDE VALUE) and [CR].

(c) Enter a new auto slide value (3 digits).

Examples : [3] [l] [0] [CR] for 3 10 mm

[3] [l] [0] [.] [5] [CR] for 310.5 mm

The entered value is shown in the “current value = ” field.

Caution: The digit immediately to the right of the decimal point must be a 0 or 5.

(d) Enter [2] (REGISTER) and [CR]. The entered auto slide value is registered and
stored in the GTS.

(e) Enter [Q] and [CR] to end the program.

(f) Enter “SYSTEM” and [CR] to return control to DOS.

- 178-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT AFTER GTS PWB

REPLACEMENT

8 Set bit 1 of the DIP switch DSWS on the GTS PWB to OFF and bit 2 of DSWS to
ON.

9 Reset GTS using the GTS reset switch (SW21).

- 179-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT AFTER GTS PWB

REPLACEMENT

2. Setting the Zero Clear Time for Couch Top Slide

Display
[Outline]

To perform O-clear for couch top slide, the O-clear switch must be pressed and held down
on the gantry operating panel for a specified time. The procedure for setting the O-clear
time is described here.

[Tools required]

l T-3 100 personal computer

l Service cable (GR-1, as standard)
l Programs: BASIC and ZEROE.BAS (runs in BASIC)

[Setting procedure]

1 Turn OFF the gantry power supply.

I 2 Connect GTS CN402 and T-3 lOO.COM via the service cable.

3 On GTS DIP switch DSWS, set 1 to ON and 2 to OFF.

I DSWS

4 Initiate the program for O-clear time setting on T-3 100.

Enter BASIC ZEROE [CR] in the directory in which BASIC and ZEROE.BAS exist.
The following message is displayed on the T-3 100 and the program is initiated:

* * * * TSX-0 11A ZERO CLEAR TIME SETTING ** * *

 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT AFTER GTS PWB

REPLACEMENT

5 Proceed as follows to set the O-clear time

(a) Enter 1 ....Select (1): START.

(b) Enter 2 [CR]. The O-clear time is set to 0 on the GTS (Refer to Note.).
(The default setting is 0.)

(c) Enter Q [CR] to exit the program.

Note: 1. Set the O-clear time according to the version of the software system:
0 = V2.OF or V2.1F
2 = V3.2 or subsequent

2. Enter 1 [CR] to change the O-clear time. --- (1) CHANGE OF ZERO
CLEAR TIME
Zero clear time value = ? 20 l$R] Enter as shown left to set 2 set as
the O-clear time.

6 On GTS DIP switch DSWS, set 1 to OFF and 2 to ON.

1
DSW5

7 Reset the GTS using the GTS reset switch (SW21).

/BEND ]

- 181-
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT AFTER GTS PWB

REPLACEMENT
Procedure for verifying the couch top auto slide distance and O-clear time settings

[Tools required]

l T-3 100 personal computer

l Service cable (G&l, as standard)
l Programs: TERM and MTERM

[Checking procedures]

r 1 Turn OFF the gantry power supply.

2 Connect the GTS CN404 and T-3 lOO.COM via the service cable.

\1---
3 Initiate MTERM on the T-3 100.

4 Turn ON the gantry power supply to boot GTS (I-/-segment display changes from 00
to 88).

The following message is displayed on the T-3 100:

GTS boot V 0.05

*** H command data ***

auto slide = 0620 +- (a)
0 clear time = 0020 t (b)

(a) Indicates the couch top auto slide distance (displayed value x 0.5 mm is the set
distance). ,

(b) Indicates the O-clear time (displayed value is the set value).

Confirm that the values displayed for (a) and (b) coincide with the set values.

Note: If the values displayed on the T-3 100 differ from the set values, set the couch
top auto slide distance and O-clear time again.

- 182-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: ADJUSTMENT AFTER GTS PWB

REPLACEMENT

3. Adjustment of Couch Height Displays

[Outline]

This section describes procedures to adjust the couch height data displayed on the
operating panel.

[Tools required]

(1) Screwdriver for adjustment

[Procedures to adjust the couch height data display]

1 Move down the couch top to the HEIGHT-l position. I

Move the couch top 222 mm or more from the OUT LIMIT position (at the IN
position). The couch top stops at the HEIGHT-l position.

2 Turn the control vR6 on the GTS PWB so that the display of couch height data
displays 0.

3 Move up the couch top to the UP LIMIT position.

4 Turn the control VR7 on the GTS PWB so that the display of couch height data
displays +2 lo.

- 183 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GTS ACQUISITION SYSTEM EXTRA

DATA CHECK
* These checks are important for the identification of the cause of abnormal images, etc.

Method for Checking Extra Data of the GTS Acquisition System

[Description]

Method for checking data (gantry rotation speed, gantry X-ray tube position information, and
projection data) which the GTS sends to the PIKE.

[Tools required]

. DCA (896 ch to 898 ch)

[Checking procedures] -y

Perform acquisition by means of the DCA and check the channels as described below (refer to the
appropriate software service manuals for DCA operation).

(I) Gantry rotation speed (897 ch)

Gantry rotation speed is assumed to be normal when all the data is within the range from
64E to 6B2 during 1.5 s and 2.0 s scans (680 is the best, 64E is 3% fast, and 6B2 is 3%
slow).

(2) Gantry X-ray tube position information (896 ch)

(a) 1.5 s scan: Normal when data increments for each projection, wraps to 0 after reaching
383 (H), then counts up again.

(b) 2.0 s scan: Normal when data increments for each projection, wraps to 0 after reaching
-c
4AF (H), then counts up again.

(The X-ray tube position information is for reconstruction during 1.5 s and 2 s scans. For
the relationship between the X-ray tube position and the data, see “Gantry X-ray Tube
Position Information”.)

(3) Projection data (898 ch)

Projection data is assumed to be normal when it starts with 1 and increments for each
projection.

- 184-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: CHECKING THE PATIENT GUIDE

Checking the Patient Guide
This subsection describes the procedures for controlling the patient guide using the T-3 100.

1. Tools Required
(1) T-3100

(2) Service cable (standard: GR-1)

(3) Program: BASIC, Look.BAS (This runs in BASIC)

2. Checking Procedures
1 Turn OFF the power of the gantry. I
4
2 Connect the service cable between the T-3 100 COM port and GTS CN402.

I3 Set bit 1 of GTS DIP switch to ON and bit 2 to OFF. I

:,:::::::::::
:::::::::::::
y::::::.:::
::::::::::::
::
y:::::::
DSWS

:.;.:.;+:*
EiiiEb
.l 2

4 Turn ON the power of the gantry and initiate GTS. (“FF” is replaced by “88” on the 7
segment display.)

15 Execute the patient guide control program of the T-3 100. I

l Type BASIC I-I LOOK [CR] in the sub-directory containing BASIC and
LOOK.BAS. ( L-I : Space, [CR]: Press return key)

The T-3 100 personal computer displays the following message:

* * * TSX-0 11A PATIENT ‘GUIDE CONTROL ***

The program starts.

- 185
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: CHECKING THE PATIENT GUIDE

I6 Control the patient guide by the following operations. I

(a) Enter [l] [CR]: START

(b) Select patient guide lamps to be lit by entering [2] to [5] [CR].

Examples: [2] [CR]: Lights one orange lamp.

[3] [CR]: Lights two orange lamps.
[4] [CR]: Lights three orange lamps.
[5] [CR]: Lights the green lamp.

(c) Enter [l] and [CR]. Check that all lamps go out.

(d) Enter [Q] and [CR] to end the program.

(e) Enter “SYSTEM” and [CR] to return control to DOS.

I7 Reset bit 1 of the GTS DIP switch to OFF and bit 2 to ON. I
DSWS

1 2 1 2

-l-

8 Reset GTS using the GTS reset switch (SW21).

1END I

- 186-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: CHECKING THE COUCH TOP

SPEED (DURING HELICAL
SCANNING)
Checking the Couch Top Speed during Helical Scanning

(I) Tools required

. T-3100
l Service cable (standard GR-1)
l Programs: BASIC, HSPEED.BAS (running in BASIC)
l Measuring tape
l Stopwatch

(2) Check procedures (require two persons)

1 Attach the measuring tape to the couch. Use tape to attach a cable tie to the couch top
as a measurement marker.

Attach a cable tie so that the scale

of the measuring tape can be used for
measurement

* The couch top is moved farther inward than the preheat cut. Be careful when attaching
the cable tie and the measuring tape.

I2 Turn the power to the’gantry OFF. I

13 Connect the service cable between GTS CN402 and T-3 100 COM port. 1

]4 For DIP switch DSWS on the GTS turn bit 1 ON and turn bit 2 OFF.~
DSWS

- 187-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CHECKING THE COUCH TOP

SPEED (DURING HELICAL
SCANNING)

5 Turn the power of the gantry ON to start the GTS. (The seven-segment display changes
from FF to 88.).

16 Execute the couch top moving program in the T3 100. 1

l Enter BASIC u HSPEED [CR] in the directory containing BASIC and

HSPEED.BAS. ( I-I : Space, [CR]: Press the return key.)

The following message is displayed on the T-3 100:

*** TSX-01 IA SS simulation ***

Then the program starts.

-L
7 Set couch top movement data using the following procedure:

(a) Press [ 11. --- (1) Select START.

(b) Enter the desired couch top movement speed in 0.01 (mm/s) units.

Examples -

To enter 10 (mm/s), press [l] [0] [O] [0] [CR].

To enter 0.66 (mm/s), press [6] [6] [CR].

* The possible range of couch top movement speeds is 0.5 (mm/s) to 30 (mm/s).

(c) Enter [l] or [2] to specify the direction of movement.

To specify the IN direction, enter [l] [CR].

To specify the OUT direction, enter [2] [CR].

- 188-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CHECKING THE COUCH TOP

SPEED (DURING HELICAL
SCANNING)
(d) Enter the amount of movement multiplied by two.

Examples

To move the couch top 100 mm, enter [2] [0] [0] [CR].
To move the couch top 5.5 mm, enter [ 1] [l] [CR].

* The settable movement range is 0.5 (mm) to 600 (mm).

Reference: In steps (b), (c), and (d) above, to use the previous value without
alteration, just press [CR].
YI
(e) To move the couch top as indicated in the above steps, press [E] [CR].

(f) To return to the screen in step (b) on which couch top movement data can be entered,
press [C][CR].

(g) To stop the couch top, press [S][CR].

(h) To end the program, press [Q][CR].

I8 For DIP switch DSWS on the GTS turn bit 1 OFF and turn bit 2 ON. I
DSWS

-a
-- i

-
9 Reset the GTS with the reset switch (SW21) on the GTS.
&

- 189-
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: CHECKING THE COUCH TOP

SPEED (DURING HELICAL
SCANNING)

Speed Amount of movement Measurement Limit

0.5 mm/s 15 mm (OUT) 15 mm 30+1s
15mm(IN) 15 mm 30~1s
5 mm/s 120 mm (OUT) 100 mm 20 I!I 0.5 s
120 mm (IN) 100 mm 20 AI 0.5 s
*lOmm/s 340 mm (OUT) 300 mm 30 I!I 0.5 s
340 mm (IN) 300 mm 30 * 0.5 s
30 mm/s 500 mm (OUT) 450 mm 15 f 0.5 s
500 mm (IN) 450 mm 15 rt 0.5 s
AlOO mm/s 600 mm (OUT) 400 mm 4 rt 0.5 s
600 mm (IN) 400 mm 4 * 0.5 s

* Check 10 mm/s and 100 mm/s with both operation on the T3 100 and local operation on
the operation panel.

lOmm/s : Couch top speed when H or H is pressed

100 mm/s : Couch top speed when q and m are pressed together or q and Fi are
pressed together.

- 190-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GANTRY X-RAY TUBE POSITION

INFORMATION
* This information is important for the identification of the cause of abnormal images.

Gantry X-ray Tube Position Information

The following X-ray tube position information is available in the Xvision:

(1) Gantry encoder data for rotation control

(a) The data can be seen under “X-ray-pos” in GTS status.

(b) Slowdown and stop position of the gantry is controlled.

(c) The data is incremented for each gantry encoder pulse.

... IO, 800 pulses per rotation

(2) Position information for 1-second rotation reconstruction

(a) The data can be seen on DCA 896 ch (l-s scan).

(b) The data shows the position of the X-ray tube for projection when scanning with 1-s
rotation is performed.

(c) The data increments by 1 for every 12 pulses of the gantry encoder.
... 900 views per rotation

(3) Position information for 1.5second rotation reconstruction

(a) The data can be seen on DCA 896 ch (1.5-s scan).

(b) The data shows the position of the X-ray tube for projection when scanning with 1.5-s
rotation is performed.

(c) The data increments by 1 for every 12 pulses of the gantry encoder.
... 900 views per rotation 1(1.5-s system)

(d) The data increments by 1 for every 9 pulses of the gantry encoder.
*a. 1,200 views per rotation (l-s system)

(4) Position information for 2%second rotation reconstruction

(a) The data can be seen on DCA 896 ch (2.0-s scan).

(b) The data shows the position of the X-ray tube for projection when scanning with 2.0-s
rotation is performed.

(c) The data increments by 1 for every 9 pulses of the gantry encoder,
... 1,200 views per rotation

- 191-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: GANTRY X- Y TUBE POSITION

INFORMATION
In the Xvision, the above data is cleared (set to zero) when the tube position is 120”.

o” A position pulse sensor is provided to

detect when the tube position is 120”.
When this sensor is triggered the data
is cleared. I

Therefore, these data count up again after being O-

cleared at the tube position of 120 degrees.

Data is cleared to 0
at this tube position.

- 192-
 No. SD20 1-322ED
SUBJECT: GANTRY X-RAY TUBE POSITION
INFORMATION
7
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: WEDGE, SLIT, AND BEAM TRIMMER

OPERATIONS
I. Operations
(1) Each of these units first returns to its home (start point sensor) position, then moves
to the selected target position.

(2) If the current positior is specified as a target position, the unit does not move.

2. Functions and Positions

(1) Wedge
-y
(Start point sensor position)
Air-
calibration Step Normal Small
10mm(SGoCPtype 1)
10.75 mm (SGCICP tpe 2 and 3)
3

20 mm
< 3
30.73 mm (SGOCP type 2 and 3) .
I‘ ‘1
(2) Slit
*- -.
Width 0.95
V-V 2 111111
(Start point sensor position)
v 1.20
v 3m
1.79 -a
v 5ne --
.z

2.50
v 7mm
Width 3.58 mm
VV 1Omm

- 194-
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: WEDGE, SLIT, AND BEAM TRIMMER

OPERATIONS
(3) Beam trimmer

Trimmer operation is controlled by motors on each side.

Start point 7 nnn 5 mm 3 nm 2 nun
r 1 mm l Beam trimmer width within
Open point Y parentheses ( ), in mm.
(22.7)
(14.0) l The start point and the
/\ open point are the same.
(10.0)
/\ ,
.,
,.
(6.4)

(2.05)
,\

Beam trimmer moves to the target position after it is moved to the start point.

3. Timeout Error
A timeout error occurs in the following cases:

(1) When the starting point is not passed by for a preset time period (3 seconds for the
wedge, the slit, and the beam trimmer)

(2) When the starting point is specified as a target position although the wedge, slit, or
beam trimmer did not pass by the starting point sensor

(3) When any point other than the starting point is specified as a target position and-the
-
wedge, slit, or beam trimmer already passed by the starting point sensor

- 195 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: PATIENT COUCH SLIDING SERVO

AMPLIFIER
Flow of corrective measures against a servo error during sliding

Check the description of the The previous examples of errors

error can be referred to as required.

* Refer to “Error code list”.

* The indicator blinks if an error has occurred in the servo

driver. YI

According to the contents ------+ Perform resetting as required.

of the error, check whether
the parameter value is set as
the list specifies.
\ * Refer to “Parameter setting values”.

Write the set data on the

EEPROM to record it.

. --
---*
-
Reset the power supply.

”
Check whether an error
occurs.

- 196-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SLIDING SERVO DRIVER

I. Sliding Servo Driver Operating Procedure
(1) Explanation of the operation indicators

Display'LED (6 digits) -->

III
SHIFT key - DOWN J-Y

[MODElkey

.-I SET Jkey

piq : Used for mode selection

I SET : Used for selection of selection display

and execution display

III4 : Shifts the position to be changed to a

higher-order digit
1 Holding down the key

1
permits fast feeding. -;--.=
IA - : Increases the value or the order
-
I7 : Decreases the value or the order

- 197-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: SLIDING SERVO DRIVER

(2) Mode selection

* When the power is turned ON, the initial display is 71. When the I=[ key
is pressed, IdP-EPS1is displayed.

Selection display Execusion display

1
\L
The display is

* Monitor
mode
The error
viewed.
is
I &When
view
you want
an error,
to [ml key

>
Error which is

--y
Oldest error"-
Errors that occurred
previously can be viewed
by pressingm or q .

tb
The parameter No

* Parameter
setting
, mode I J Parameter No. 00 1-1 key

>
I 01
j Parameter (Example of display)
values are Parameter values are
referred or Parameter No. 31 f set using
set. Irlmm.

I
* EEPROM - Hold down
writing c&l.
[ml key

Parameter
IEEl
values are . IStArt.]
recorded. 4
f
{FInIShI

* Auto gain
tuning
mode
Do not use
this mode. I [-Ikey

- 198-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: SLIDING SERVO DRIVER

2. Viewing Sliding Servo Driver Errors
(Monitor Mode)
(1) When you want to know what kind of error occurred

a. If an error occurs, the servo driver enters the trip status and all digits of the 7-
segment LED on the panel blink.

b. Change the display to that permitting the current error to be viewed referring to (2)
of section 1.

c. The values displayed at the location of ** above indicate the error code NCL, -_
I
permitting you to know what kind of error occurred.

* Refer to (2) of section 5 “Error code list”.

* If no error occurs, “--‘I is displayed at the ** display location.

pKiq --- Error with code No. 12 has been detected.

IErr. --- No Error.

d. When the 1SET 1key is pressed, the screen is changed to the selection display.

(2) When you want to view errors that occurred previously

In the servo driver used here, in addition to the current error, the history data of
errors which occurred previously can also be viewed, going back to the eighth error -a
starting from the current one. i -1

a. Change the display to that permitting the current error to be viewed by selecting
the monitor mode screen referring to (2) of section 1.

b. Up to eight errors that occurred previously can be viewed by pressing m or I.

ljl m --- Current error

I I pi?q p?q --- History 0

’!
IA ***I
--- History 1

--- History 7 (oldest error)

* If an error was detected, the error code No. displayed for the current error is the
- same as that for History 0.

- 199-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SLIDING SERVO DRIVER

3. Viewing or Changing the Set Parameter Values of
the Sliding Servo Driver (Parameter Setting Mode)
a. Press the IMODEl key and change the display to the selection screen for the parameter
setting mode.

* If the selection screen is not selected in monitor mode, the selection screen does not
appear even if the m key is pressed.

]I is displayed.

b. The values displayed at the * * position indicate the parameter No.

ppA_.----- Parameter No. 00 Y z-

c. Press the wl key and change the display from the selection screen to the execution
screen.

1 0 I----- The set value of the parameter No. specified in b. is

displayed.
* Refer to (2) of section 5.

d. If the set value differs from the value on the list, reset the value. The m and m keys
are used to determine the numerical value and the m key is used to shift the digit.

e. Press the ml key and change the display from the execution screen to the selection
screen.

IpA_.---- The parameter No. set in b., c., and d. or being referred
to is displayed. -- e

-
f. Change the parameter No. Using the q or m key.

1 PA-. 01 I----- The No. 01 parameter is selected.

g. Repeat from c. to f. to check all parameters from No. 00 to r29 referring to the list.

h. If resetting is performed, perform the procedure in section 4. “Writing to the

EEPROM”.

If resetting is not performed, reset the power supply.

- 200 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SLIDING SERVO DRIVER

4. Writing to the EEPROM (EEPROM Write Mode)
If parameters are reset in section 3, write the data to the EEPROM following the
procedure described in this section.

a. Press the [*I key and change the display to the selection screen of the EEPROM
write mode.

-1 is displayed.

b. Press the lm key and change the display from the selection screen to the execution
screen.

71 is displayed.

c. Hold down m until -1 is displayed. Writing data to the EEPROM is started.

IStArt.] is displayed.

d. Data writing is completed.

1x1 is displayed.

e. If the parameter NOS. r27, r28, and r29 are set, the following is displayed without
displaying IFInISh when writing is completed, because these settings become valid
after the power supply is reset,

-1 is displayed.
Reset the power supply.

* If a writing error occurs, write data again. If the error occurs every time data writing
is attempted, there may be a malfunction.

pGq----- A writing error occurred.

-2Ol-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SLIDING SERVO DRIVER

5. List of Parameter Setting Values and Error Codes
(1) Xvision parameter setting values list

Parameter No. Parameter value Remarks

03 I 270 I

OB
oc 2500
OD 0

20 I 100 I
21 I 10 I
22
23 -
24
25

r27 4 Valid after resetting the power supply

r28 0 Valid after resetting the power supply
r29 1 Valid after resetting the power supply

- 202 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: SLIDING SERVO DRIVER

(2) Error codes list

) Error code No. 1 Error contents Remarks

12 ] Overvoltage
13 ] Shortvoltage
14 Overcurrent Check the motor connection U, V,
W, and ground. If the code is
displayed again after resetting, a
malfunction may have occurred.
Turn OFF the power supply
immediately.
16 I Overload
22 Abnormal encoder Possible connection failure be-en
signal the driver and the encoder.
24 Excessive position
deviation
r-- 26 / Excessive speed
* 27 Abnormal frequency
division of the
instruction pulse
*I 29 I Deviation counter over
38 Abnormal input of the Input of the drive inhibit signal to
drive inhibit signal the motor is turned OFF for both
the CW and CCW directions.
* 36 Abnormal EEPROM
parameter -a

I 23 1DSP abnormality If the code is displayed again a&r

resetting, a malfunction may have
I 30 1 CPU abnormality
occurred. Turn OFF the power
84 Abnormal receiving supply immediately.
parameter
I 98 * I System abnormality
I 99 1Other abnormalities

* Indicates the necessity of checking the set parameter value when an error occurs.

- 203 -
 No. SDZOI-322ED

SUBJECT: SLIDING SERVO DRIVER

6. Precautions
(1) Never change any parameter other than the parameters on the list of parameter setting
values in (1) of section 5.

(2) Never change the auto gain tuning mode during mode change using the -1 key.
m is displayed.

*: If (1) and (2) are not observed, the system may maltinction.

--

i
5

- 204 -
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: IMAGE ABNORMALITY DUE TO

FAULTY GANTRY ROTATION
SYSTEM
1. Image Abnormality Due to Abnormal Gantry
Rotation Speed
The sinogram shows slanted lines running from the top left toward the bottom right. This
is caused by incorrect rotation speed. When the lines run from the top left toward the
bottom right, increase the rotation speed. When the lines run from the top right toward
the bottom left, decrease the rotation speed.

The rotation speed should be adjusted within a range of &3% of the standard value.

- 205 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: IMAGE ABNORMALITY DUE TO

FAULTY GANTRY ROTATION
SYSTEM
2. Image Abnormality Due to Abnormal SGTS, Servo
Amplifier, or Rotation Motor System
The sinogram shows that data after the abnormal projection is shifted to the channel
direction. The speed data value for this abnormal projection (extra data 897CH) is
approximately 80% of that of the other channels. In addition, a 1 bit error and a 2 bit
error have occurred in this projection only. The speed data is output from the rotation
motor and input to the SGTS. Decreased rotation speed indicates that the VT (view
trigger) has also become shorter.
-
In this case, the extra data should be checked carefully together with the projection%ta.

- 206 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OUTLINE OF MUDAT

MUDAT (Multi-Data Transmitting system) uses non-contact optical communication to perform
data transfer between the rotation section and the stationary section in the gantry in place of the
low-voltage slip-ring, which is used for continuous rotation CT systems such as the TCT-900s
and Xpress.

All data (high or low electric signals) are converted into lighting/non-lighting of optical signals for
communication.

The MUDAT is composed of eight sub-units, four each are provided in the rotation and stationary
sections and perform data communication between them.

The transmission data is roughly categorized as follows:

l Signals which control units (control signals)

l X-ray transmittance data (DAS signal) ---zy
;
The control signals are transmitted in both directions, and the DAS signal is transmitted from the
rotation section to the stationary section.

l Rotation section -> stationary section: DAS signal, control signals

* Stationary section -> rotation section: Control signals

The transmission frequency from the rotation section to the stationary section is 25 MHz. In the
opposite direction, the transmission frequ.ency is 20 MHz.

Data transmission from the rotation section to the stationary section takes place as follows:

The control signals from GOCP and XC and the DAS signal from DAS are input to the ROIF
PWB. These data are put together in the ROIF PWB and transmitted to the RPRT PWB, and the
RPRT PWB transmits the data to each ROT PWB. (The ROIF PWB also converts the parallel
data into serial data.) --
-
Then, the LED on the ROT PWB transmits the data. The light emitted from the LED is received
by the SPD PWB in the stationary section. The SPD PWB transmits the received data to the
SPRT PWB then to the SOIF PWB. The SOIF PWB separates the combined data into two data
sets and also converts serial data into parallel data.

The steps outlined above are reversed for data transmission from the stationary section to the
rotation section.

Control PWB Transmitting PWB Receiving PWI3 Relay PWB

Stationary section SOIF SOT SPD SPRT
Rotation section ROIF ROT RPD RPRT

- 207 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: C0I’MPOSlTlON OF MUDAT

Composition

Four units each are provided in the rotation section and the stationary section.

The name and a brief description of each unit are given below.

1. ROIF (Rotational ODT I/F unit)

ODT: Optical Data Transmission

PWB name : ROIF2

Drawing No. : PX73-15754*E Grl
Number ofPWBs : 1

l I/F unit for the ODT and other units of the rotation section
l P/S conversion of DAS data (data output from the detector)
l Multiplexing control data transmitted to the stationary section
l Demultiplexing multiplexed control data transmitted from the stationary section
l Coding signals transmitted as optical data
l Decoding signals received as optical data

2. RPRT (Rotational PaRenT unit)

PWB name : PRT-BIG

Drawing No. : PX73-15847 Grl
Number of PWBs : 1 (used in common for the rotation section and the stationary section)

l Distributing data transmitted as optical data at the rotation section

l Adding signals received as optical data at the rotation section

3. ROT (Rotational .ODT unit)

PWB name : LPB-BIG (Y Le ) (used in common for the rotation section and
the stationary s
Drawing No. : PX73-15844*A Grl
Number of PWBs : 6 (ROT0 to ROT5)

l Optical data transmission unit of the rotation section (5 LEDs per PWJ3)

- 208 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: COMPOSITION OF MUDAT

4. RPD (Rotational PhotoDiode unit)

PWB name : RPD-BIG (used only for the rotation section)

Drawing No. : PX73-15845 Grl
Number of PWBs : 2 (RPDO, RPDI)

l Optical data receiving unit of the rotation section (2 PDs per PWB)

5. SOIF (Stationary ODT I/F unit)

PWB name : SOIF

Drawing No. : PX73-15755*B Grl (for Xvision, /GX)
PX73-15755*C Gr2 (for Xvision/SP)
Number of PWBs : 1

l I/F unit for the MUDAT and other units of the stationary section
* S/P conversion of DAS data (data output from the detector)
l Adding extra data to DAS data
l Multiplexing control data to the rotation section
l Demultiplexing the multiplexed control data transmitted from the rotation section
l Coding signals transmitted as optical data
l Decoding signals received as optical data
l Transmitting test data to PRE

6. SPRT (Stationary PaRenT unit)

PWB name : PRT-BIG

Drawing No. : PX73-15847 Grl
Number of PWBs : 1 (used in common for the rotation section and the stationary section)
---;?
l Distributing signals transmitted as optical data at the stationary section
-
l Adding signals received as optical data at the stationary section

7. SOT (Stationary ODT unit)

PWB name : LPB-BIG (= Le PwB (used in common for the rotation section and
the stationary setQ ’
Drawing No. : PX73-15844*A Grl
Number ofPWBs : 6 (SOT0 to SOT5)

l Optical data transmission unit of the stationary section (LED, 5 LEDs per PWB)

- 209 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: COMPOSITION OF MUDAT

8. SPD (Stationary PhotoDiode unit)

PWB name : SPD-BIG (used only for the stationary section)

Drawing No. : PX73-15846 G-1
Number of PWBs : 2 (SPDO, SPDl)

l Optical data receiving unit of the stationary section (PD, 2 PDs per PWB)

--i
-=

- 210 -
 No. SD201-322ED
SUBJECT: SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
a--------t ,--------I r-------1 a--------,
0 X X
a a
ilk
ul n 2
/ 7 f ’ I
1 _ v 1
2 2 4
a -3 3rd
cn 2 2s
tar
‘ A I
t 1. ,
I- t- I- I-
O 0 0 0
v) m v) co
--r----r
v v v v
I \(0I
-2ll-
 Rotation section Stationary section

5 LEDs x 12
RPRT
CN102 q’ln

CN103
1--+f=yb ROT-O
SOIF

ROT- 1 .
SPRT
m
CN104 0
ROIF Error monitoring
-I
I.

Zontrol signa
CN202 /c ROTSOT ERR n n

!k DAS data CN607

\ CN105 CN20 1 / LEDlLC&lf
CN905 During DAS data
Control ’ communication, n
signal & CN106 -4 LED1% CN203
SINGLE ERR and r
DAS data ROT-4 MULTI ERR are 0
CN107 >t LED I+
ROT-5
also detected.
* Forced detection
z
SOT-O is possible using 0
“tlp=JJ- CN102 SWl-2. ‘11
SOT- I CJ
r/p+- CN103 D
SOT-2 Control -1
Control CN203 0

For %( LED k CN104 /

signal D
c signal . CN606
CN906 . CN20 1 communi-
c
/cation CN105
LED5&6 z CN202 SOT-4
~1 LED k CNlO6
\ SOT-5
Error monitoring qJ-Eq+- CN107
SOTROT ERR

* Signals from LED5 and LED6

are transmitted to SOIF.
LED5 --+ LED16
LED6 + LED17
I
I ‘I;“\ I.,!1 ’

TSX-002A/4 to 6
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: LOCATIONS OF PWBs

ROIF2 is mounted next to the GOCP PWB in the PWB chassis on the left of the DAS unit in the
gantry rotation section. (The PWB chassis is covered. To access the PWEksin the chassis, rotate
the rotation section so that the PWB chassis is positioned at the left side or right side of the
gantry and remove the cover. According to subsection 6.4.2 of the service manual, “The LEDs
on the ROIF PWB can be seen through the front metal mesh part of the PWB chassis.” It is,
however, diffkult to do this unless you are familiar with the LED layout.)
SOIF is mounted next to the SGTS on the upper right side of the gantry.

r- Median-line
projector

Internal
projector

Main detector
I
DAS power supply

PWB chassis

- 213 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: LOCATIONS OF PWBs

MUDAT rotation section (as viewed from the rear)

-214-
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: LOCATIONS OF PWBs

MUDAT stationary section (as viewed from the rear)

-215 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPERATING PRINCIPLE

I. Light Emitting Section
The five LEDs are turned ON and OFF by transistors and light beams are output.

2. Light Receiving Section

Each PD consists of a pin PD. The very small current generated by the light entering the
PD is amplified by an amplifier. The outputs from two PDs are both amplified and are
combined at the adder. The outputs from two PD PWBs are combined again at the adder
inside the PRT PWB. The outputs are combined to generate the final output of the
receiving section, -
A hood is attached to the receiving section in order to block external light and imp&e the
efficiency of light reception from the LEDs.

3. 1/F Section
The I/F section can be divided as follows:

l Portion related to control signals (MPX, DMPX)

l P/S and S/P conversion sections (P/S, S/P)

l Portion related to transmission of DAS data (PSC, SPC)

The operating principles are described below: ----_

-
(1) Control signal I/F

There is MPX section which multiplexes two or more signals on the side from which a
control signal is transmitted, and the multiplexed signal is coded by an encoder. The
signal received by the reception side is decoded by decoder, and it is separated into
the original signals &t the DMPX section.

The MPX section and the DMPX section are provided as a pair to the rotation section
(ROIF) and the stationary section (SOIF).

A single transmission error is corrected automatically. In addition, output is stopped

temporarily when a burst error occurs.

Furthermore, if an error occurs over a long time, the output of DMPX is fixed to H
and operation is stopped.

When stable operation continues for two seconds, communication is resumed. .

- 216 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPERATING PRINCIPLE

(2) DAS data I/F

There is the P/S section in the ROIF PW of the rotation section. The P/S section
adds 6 bits of error-correction data to the 16 bits of DAS data. A start bit and a stop
bit are included, and the data is converted into 25bit serial data. After this, the data
is coded by encoder and data is sent out.

On the other side, the received signal is decoded by the decoder on the SOIF PWB of
the stationary section. The decoded data is converted into parallel data and error
correction is performed at the S/P section. In addition, extra data (tube position, etc.)
is added to the end of data for one projection and the resultant data is output to the
console (S S/PIE PWB).

- 217 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR THE LIGHT

EMITTING SECT10 AND LIGHT
RECEIVING SECTION _

4)
/
.
SWITWNC = LED v
i 1
\ t 1

” = 1 SWITCHING ‘/ 2 L ED Q
1
.
.
/ SWITCIIINC = LED AJ

A-890 WI
infrared

Light emitting section block diagram

RPD, SPD
c . t 1
.,
qg P D - Amp. .
l & I I ‘ I

’ 1 ADDER,
f . 4 PRT
./ I ‘-k
q* p D - Amp. - \/
.
1 ou T
RPD, SPD ADDER, .Y
I
. l
,\
,

-M P D ‘--e- Amp. I
I + * ,
1
l 4
1

-LH P D x Amp.
.

Light receiving section block diagram

-218 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: l/F BLOCK DIAGRAM

PSC
t
from/to DAS
3IluFFER )1 ECC 1
f , . P/S

A-Olil
I--
to PRT

-=DMPXI S/P

fra PRT -

(a) RO I F

SPC
*
EX. DATA to PRE I
3 ECC
S/P L
I
DMPX

fromGIsc.sS.XT
etc.

(b) S 0 I F

I/F block diagram

-219-
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: SOIF PWB

Standard settings of the SOIF PWB
(1) SWI AllOFF
(2) SW2 All OFF
(3) SW8 TSX-002Ai4 to 6: All OFF
TSX-002A/7 : AllON

POWERSUPPLY
XT

CN607 SPRT
CN606 SPRT

SW8

# .

SS/PRE
SGTS CN604 CN602

CN603
00000000000000000000
00000000000000000000
“&I * l m-m
Y

SMEX
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: DETAIL OF THE SOIF PWB

c 9

0 0 10 10
0 0
0 0
00 0
0 10 3
7c -
LED6 LED7 LEDB LED9
liIlm33ma

SEt

ROTSOT ‘scmoT

A
El3 n“a3
ERR :: ERR
w m3J
3 fAIL

Detail (SOIF PWB)

-221-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: ROIFZ PWB

Standard settings of the ROIF PWB
(1) SWI AllOFF
(2) SW2 All OFF

I<
RPRTCX$---[~~ CN906
m ! CN904 GOCP
RPRT CN905

rc I
*
J l
00 I . .
l *
::

::
.
::

lz : : ::

I::
t. :. 00
l a
00
r.. : :
. .
. .
DAS CN902 CN903 l b

*::
l o
. .
l *
l .

‘1
a. i

bS

t :
l .
0

e
4
I’
K

POWERSUPPLY

- 222 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR COUNT (S

Error count

(1) Description

LED6: SINGLE ERR: (=SINGLE ERROR)

This indicates the number of times a l-bit error occurred in the 16-bit packets of DAS data.

This type of error is corrected.

LED7: MULTI ERR: (=MULTIPLE ERROR)

This indicates the number of times an error of 2 bits or more occurred in the 16-bit packets
of DAS data.i -.
LED8: SOTROT ERR: (=SOTROT ERROR)

This indicates the number of times there were abnormalities in the check bits (2 bits) for a 1
block transmission, when control data is sent from the stationary section to the rotation
section.

LED9: ROTSOT ERR: (=ROTSOT ERROR)

This indicates the number of times there were abnormalities in the check bits (2 bits) for a 1
block transmission, when control data is sent from the rotation section to the stationary
section.

Operation method

The lit position changes am.ong LED6 to LED9 every time the “SELECT” switch (SW3) is
pressed, and the value shown by the 7-segment display changes according to which LED is
lit,
The T-l-segment display shows the number of errors for the item represented by the lit LED.

l When the “RESET” switch (SW4) is pressed, the displayed error number can be forcibly
reset to 00. Only the displayed error is cleared; the other 3 types of errors (not being
displayed) are not reset.

(3) Standards

l When an error count value changes from 00, the change indicates the number of errors
generated since power was supplied or since the last forced reset.

l When the value displayed looks like “88” and forcible reset is not made, the subsequent
error occurrence will result in communication not being performed at all.

0 When a numerical value changes, a communication error has occurred. Check how many
digits of the 2-digit display show a changed value. This is a basic method for determining
the frequency of the errors.

- 223 -
 No. SD20L322ED

JECT: ER OR COUNT (SOIF)

(4) Note

l SINGLE ERR and MULTI ERR operate only when scan and scanoscopy are performed.
To force operation in order to perform check, turn ON SWI-2 (T. BGN). Be sure to turn
OFF SWl-2 after use. (If scan is performed with the switch turned ON, an abnormal
image will be generated.)

l SINGLE ERR and MULTI ERR are also recorded to channel 899 and channel 900 as raw
data.

l All values are cleared when power is turned ON.

l Values are displayed in hexadecimal.

i

-224-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR DISPLAY (SOIF)

Error display

(1) Description

LED14: ROTSOT ERR

When an error occurs during control data communication from the rotation section to the
stationary section, this LED lights.

(Visual check is impossible for a single error.) Usually, the ROTSOT FAIL LED lights at
the same time.

LED15 ROTSOT FAIL

When contFo1 data communication from the rotation section to the stationary section is-.
abnormal and the data communication stops, this LED lights. At this time, the operation
display LEDs 1 to 3 and LED 5 related to SOTROT ERR, SOTROT FAIL, and XC go off,
regardless of operation status.

LED16: SOTROT ERR

When an error occurs during control data communication from the stationary section to the
rotation section occurs, this LED lights.

(Visual check is impossible for a single error.) Usually, the SOTROT FAIL LED lights at
the same time. In addition, this LED indicates ERR on the ROIF PWB.

LED17: SOTROT FAIL

When control data communication from the stationary section to the rotation section is
abnormal and the data communication stops, this LED lights. At this time, the SWs (SW&
SW7) related to XC are ignored. In addition, this LED indicates FAIL on the ROIF PWB.

(2) Warning

l Be sure to check the ROIF PWB when this LED is lit because FAIL (ROTSOT FAIL,
SOTROT FAIL) is displayed when there are serious abnormalities in the communication
system. Communication system abnormalities affect the operation of the entire system.

l Errors which cause ROTSOT ERR to light when ROTSOT FAIL does not light may
adversely affect the system. Check the SOIF PWB immediately.

l Errors which cause SOTROT ERR to light when SOTROT FAIL does not light may
adversely affect the system. Check the LEDs on the LEDs on the ROIF PWB
immediately.

- 225 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: ERROR DISPLAY (SOIF)

(3) Note

l When the communication status becomes stable for about 2 seconds, FAIL display goes
off automatically. (Communication is resumed.)

l Scanning is impossible when FAIL is lit.

- 226 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: STATUS DISPLAY AND OPE

CHECK MODE (SOIF)
Status display

(1) Description

LED 11: ODT NORMAL:

This LED is lit when the optical data transmission unit (stationary section) is working. (This
is usually lit.)

LED13: PCB RESET

This LED lights at the time the optical data transmission unit (stationary section) is reset.
(Only when power is supplied) --

When this LED is lit continuously, the set value of DC voltage is low.

Mode for operation check

SOIF-PRE communication check

(1) Description

LEDlO: COMM TEST:

This LED is lit when the test pattern is forcibly output from the SOIF PWB as DAS data.

This can be. set by turning ON SW 1-4.

(2) Operation method

l Turn ON SW l-4 to light this LED.

When scanning is performed in this status, the test pattern is output,. Check the
transmitted data using the DCA test program.

l When SWl-4 is turned OFF, the LED goes out and the system returns to normal mode.

(3) Note

l Extra data and error data are not added.

l This data is not reconstructed to a meaningful image.

l Be sure to confirm that the LED is off after using this function. Data acquisition cannot
be performed with the COMM TEST LED lit.

- 227 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: DIP SWITCHES (SOIF)

DIP switch

(1) SW1

SWl-1: VT

When this switch is turned ON, a VT signal is generated on the SOIF PWB and the
generated signal is transmitted to the rotation section.

(Turn ON this switch when data is output from the DAS without connecting the SGTS
PWB.)

SWl-2: BGN

When this switch is turned ON, the DAS data receiving system is forced to operate. -.
SINGLE ERR and MULTI ERR are counted at this time.

SWl-3: LOCAL

Be sure this switch is OFF. (It is not supported.)

SWl-4: COMM TEST

When this switch is turned ON, the test pattern is output from the SOIF PWB to the PRE
PWB.

(2) SW8

Change the system settings. Be sure to fix the settings as follows:

TSX-002A/ 4, 5, and 6: Set SW8-1 and SW%2 to OFF.

TSX-002A/7 : Set SW%1 and SW%2 to ON.

System name Xvision, Xvision/GX Xvision/SP

Drawing No. of applicable PX73-15755 Gr.1 PX73-15755 Gr.2 “2)
SOIF PWB
ROM (location: 7F) C30027-00 c30034-00
PLD (location: 4F) LX73-0171 LX73-0192
Setting of DIP SW8 on the SW%1: OFF, SW%2: OFF SW%1: ON, SW8-2: ON
SOIF PWB * 1)

* 1): The settings of the ROM and PLD are changed using SW8 on the SOIF PWB.

*2): When the SOIF PWB of Gr.2 is installed, both Xvision and Xvision/GX can be
supported by changing the setting of SW8. (With the SOlF PWB of Gr. 1, this is not
possible.)

- 228 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: LEDs AND SWITCHES RELATED TO

HFG (SOIF)
Description

LEDl: SYS READY

When scanning preparation is completed, this LED lights.

LED2: XRAY ON

When X-ray exposure is being performed, this LED is lit.

LED3 : COUNTER ON

When the slice counter is operated, this LED lights.

LED4: (No display)

Not supported.

LED? XC NORMAL

When the XC PWB is working normally, this LED lights.

(This is usually lit.)

sw2-2: xc LOCAL

Turn ON this switch when connecting a terminal to CN608 on the SOIF PWB.

SW2-3 : CLR ERR

Turn ON this switch when clearing the error status of XC.

(Reset by software)

(Operation is usually performed at the console.)

SW7: XC RESET

Turn ON this switch when resetting the XC forcibly.

(Reset by hardware)

(Error status is not cleared.)

(2) Note

l SW2-1 and SW2-4 are not set.

- 229 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: STATUS AND ERROR DISPLAY

(ROIF)
Status display

(1) Description

LEDl: VT

This LED lights according to the VT signal.

LED:!: NORMAL

When the optical data transmission unit (rotation section) is operating, this LED lights.
(This LED is usually lit.)
z
LED4: RESET

When the optical data transmission unit (stationary section) is reset, this LED lights. (Only
when power is supplied) r

When this LED is lit continuously, the set value of DC voltage is low.

Error display

(1) Description

LEDS: ERR

When a communication error of control data from the stationary section to the rotation
section occurs, this LED lights.

(Visual check is impossible for a single error.) Usually, the FAIL LED lights at the same
time.

LED6: FAIL

When control data communication from the stationary section to the rotation section is
abnormal and the data communication stops, this LED lights.

(2) Warning

l When ERR lights but FAIL does not light, the error may adversely affect the system.
Check the ROIF PWB immediately.

l Be sure to check the ROIF PWB because FAIL is displayed when there are serious
abnormalities in the communication system. Communication system abnormalities affect
the operation of the entire system.

- 230 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: STATUS AND ERROR DISPLAY

(ROIF)
(3) Note

l When the communication status becomes stable for about 2 seconds, FAIL display goes
out automatically. (Communication is resumed.)

l Scanning is impossible when FAIL is lit.

-231 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: DIP SWITCHES (ROIF)

DIP switch (SWl)

(1) Description

SWl-2: N0RMAL.M:

This is used to specifjr the DAS data mode in local operation.

L (low) output is sent to DAS when this is ON, and H (high) output is sent when this is
OFF. (For details, refer to the corresponding section about the DAS.)

SWf-3: T.MODE:

This is used to specify the method for setting the DAS data mode.

Local operation is specified when this is ON. The mode can be set using SWl-2. -

(2) Note

SW14 and SWl-4 are not set.

- 232 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE

LUMINESCENCE
Procedure for Checking the Luminescence

The light of the communication LED is not visible to the eye because it is in the infrared region.
Therefore, convert the infrared rays to visible light (red) using an IR converter and visually check
whether light is emitted.

Bend about here to use

the IR converter.

Plastic IR cdnverter l ..
cover This part emits red
light when exposed to
infrared rays.

IR converter (Drawing No. BSX77-2088)

- 233 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PROCE RE FOR CHECKING THE

LUMINESCENCE
Remove the covers indicated with I in the figure and perform luminescence checks following
the procedures described below.

L indicates a connector cover

- 234 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE

LUMINESCENCE
(1) ROT side

1f..rgve the c;ector 1

Rotate the gantry rotating 1+ Because the LEDs located at SPD-1 and SPD-0 are not
unit so that the ROT is
aligned with the notch.
I visible in this position, the luminescence check is
performed by shifting the position in a later step.

’ 1Check the luminescence. 1

Rotate the gantry rotating

unit by 60”.

1
Check the remaining LEDs. -+ This permits all the remaining LEDs (30) to be checked.

-235 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE

LUMINESCENCE
Luminescence check of the ROT

converter ROT

can be seen.
-ROT mounting
emits red plate

SOT mounting
plate

Caution: 1. Never rotate the gantry rotating unit with the IR converter inserted in the
notch. (Doing so may result in interference with the hood of the rotating unit,
damaging the system.)

2. Never remove the dome cover.

(Touching the LCSR will result in electric shock.)

3. Do not remove the inside cover of the ROT.

(This cover cannot be removed when the dome cover is mounted.)

4. For luminescence check, check only whether or not light is emitted.

5. Use the cover switch or CP320 to prevent the gantry from rotating during the
work.

- 236 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE

_-
LUMINESCENCE
(2) SOT side

1R.;;;ye the connector /

I Check the luminescene. I

Luminescence check of the SOT

Hole

Notch

/
//
\Ih ’
Red light
can be seen. /
)------- SOT mounting plate

(Procedure)

l Since a hole indicating the SOT LED location is provided in the SOT mounting plate,
observe the IR converter through the notch using the hole as a guide to locate the LED.

l If the hood of the RPD blocks the view, slightly rotate the gantry rotating unit to change
the hood position.

Caution: 1. Never remove the dome cover.

(Touching the LCSR will result in electric shock.)
2. Do not remove the inside cover of the ROT.
(This cover cannot be removed when the dome cover is mounted.)

3. For luminescence check, check only whether or not light is emitted.

4. Use the cover switch or CP320 to prevent the gantry from rotating during the
work.

5. Be extremely careful not to hit your head or any other part of your body
against peripheral parts when looking into the IR converter through the notch.

-237-
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUIBJECT: POSITIONAL RELATIONSHIPS

BETWEEN THE OPTICAL DATA --
TRANSMISSION AND RECEIVING
PWBs AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
Positional relationships between the optical data transmission PWB and the optical data receiving
PWB and their functions

The figure on the next page shows the positional relationships between the optical data
transmission PWB and the optical data receiving PWB. The figure indicates the communication
status from the rotation section to the stationary section. It also indicates the communication
status from the stationary section to the rotation section when ROT and SPD are replaced with
SOT and RPD, respectively.

The abscissa indicates the rotation position of the X-ray tube. In the upper part, the position of
the X-ray tube when viewed from the front is indicated in degrees. In the lower part, the tube
position is indicated using the tube position number added to extra data. The tube position
number differs depending on the model and conditions.

The ordinate indicates the position of the optical signal transmission PWB (ROT) of the rotation
section. The portion marked wd in the figure indicates where the PWB is located, and
horizontal dotted lines indicate where the LEDs are located.

When rotation is performed, movements of the reception sections SPD-0 and SPD-1 of the
stationary section, as viewed from the ROT section, are indicated by oblique lines in the graph.
For example, SPD-0 is directly in front of ROT-2 when the tube is located at the 120” position.
When the tube is rotated to the 180” position, SPD-0 is moved to a location in front of ROT-3
accordingly.

Because one optical data receiving PWB has two optical data reception units and a hood is
provided for each unit, the area at which actual optical data are received has a finite width as
shown in the figure. Since two optical data receiving PWBs are provided, data reception is
performed within four areas, and each area has a finite width. Optical signals are actually received
at the locations shown in black in the graph. The system is designed so that signals are always
received at two or more reception units when the tube is located at any position.

For example, when the tube is at a location slightly beyond the 0” position, optical signals are
received at the two reception elements on SPD-0 but no optical signal is transmitted to the
reception elements on SPD-1.

-238-
 No. SD20b322ED

SUBJECT: POSlTlONAL RELATIONSHIPS

BETWEEN THE OPTICAL DA
TRANSMISSION AND RECEIVING
PWBs AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

Tube 'bos-itioti

md rotation>
/GX 500
200 800 1100 <1.5-see0 bnd rotation>
Other 150 375 800 825 <1.5-seca Ind rotation>
than 200 500 800 1100 <Z-second rotation>

Tube position No.

-239-
 No. SD20L322ED

SUSJECT: EXTRA DATA

@ Extra data check using the DCA test program

When an abnormal image (streak image, etc.) is generated, the raw data should be checked to
determine whether the cause lies in the data transfer system or in another section.

Composition of raw data (for 1 projection)

Channel No. 1 Contents

0 I Reference data
1
to Image data
895
896 Tube position t Generated on GTS
897 Gantry rotation speed
898 Projection No.
899 Number of single errors t ROIF to SOIF
900 Number of multiple errors
901
to Area not used (normally “FFFF”)
908
909 “5555” t Generated on SOIF
910 Check data ”AAAA” SOIF to SS/PRE
911 “FFFF”

When a single error or multiple errors occur, the data transfer from ROIF to SOIF in the
optical transmission system may be abnormal.

When abnormal check data is generated, data transfer from SOIF to SS/RRE may be abnormal.

DAS SOIF SSIPREZ

GTS
‘- RolF +LzF

- 240 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: EXTRA DATA

l Extra data

1. Tube position: channel 896

(a) 1.5-s scanning (1.0-s scanning for Xvision/GX and /SP)

Normally the data increments by a count for every projection. After it has reached 383
(H), it returns to 0 and starts incrementing again.

383 (H) = 899 (D) 900 views/rotation

(b) 2.0-s scanning (1.5-s scanning for Xvision/GX and /SP)

Normally the data increments by a count for every projection. After it has reached 4AF
(H), it returns to 0 and starts incrementing again,

4AF(H)=1199(D) 1200 views/rotation

2. Gantry rotation speed: channel 897

(a) 1.5-s system

Normally data falls in the range between 64E and 6B2 for both 1.5-s scanning and 2.0-s
scanning. (%3% of the standard 680).

(b) 1.0-s system (Xvision/GX, /SP)

For 1.0-s scanning, data normally falls in the range between 433 and 476. (&3% of the
standard 45 5)

For 1.5-s scanning, data normally falls in the range between 4BA and 505. (&3% of the
\
standard 4EO)

3. Projection No. : channel 898

Normally the data increments by one count for every projection, starting from 1.

4. Number of single errors:. channel 899

This indicates the number of times a I-bit error occurred in a single DAS data set (16-bit
packets). This error will be corrected.

5. Number of multiple errors: channel 900

This indicates the number of times an error of 2 bits or more occurred in a single DAS data
set ( 16-bit packets).

-241 -
 No. SD20 1-3 22ED

SUBJECT: EXTRA DATA

6. Check data: channels 909 to 9 11

These data are generated on the SOIF PWB.

Channel 909: 5555

Channel 910: AAAA

Channel 9 11: FFFF

- 242 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: PROCEDURE FOR ERROR .-

IDENTIFICATION
Procedure for identifying optical transmission errors (MUDAT errors)

l MUDAT errors ) <I> Error in the control data system (X-ray and GTS systems)
) <2> Error in the DAS data (raw image data)

<I> Error in the control data system ..... “Data transmission section is abnormal. ”

Rotate the gantry in the

CTS local mode.

Check LED 15 and

LED17 on SOIF.

--------------
unit other than
1 I
I MUDAT is abnormal. i

-+ Refer to the service manual for further identification

/AAT is abnormal. / procedures
..,... ROIF or SOIF is abnormal in the most cases.

<2> Error in the DAS data (raw image data) .. ... Abnormal images

Are the raw data channels 899 and 900, or the 7-segment
displays of LEDs 6 and 7 on SOIF incrementing?

; A unit other than ;

MUDAT is abnormal.
I 1
( MUDAT is abnormal.
L--------------d
!

+
Refer to the service
manual.

- 243 -
 No. SD201-322ED

I SUBJECT: RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MUDAT

AND IMAGE ABNORMALITIES ---
Relationship between MUDAT and an abnormal image

A communication error of DAS data results in an abnormal image.

An abnormality in the ODT section appears as streak or ring artifacts.

Data corruption by an single communication error becomes a streak artifact.

If the frequency of errors becomes high, the number of streak artifacts will increase. If this
communication error occurs during offset acquisition, an image with ring-shaped artifacts appears
because offset data of the channel is corrupted. The ring-shaped artifacts appear at random
locations on the image, permitting them to be distinguished from those due to malfunction of the
DAS or detector.

On the other hand, the abnormalities in the I/F section make the image meaningless.

Note that very frequent errors at the ODT section are recognized as a control system data
communication error.

[DAS data flow]

MUDAT
Gantry
rotation
section
.--.---

Gantry
SW - SPRT 4 m SPD stationary
/"
I SOIF-PRE test /
.-.-.-.-.-.---.-.-.-.-.-.---.-.--- I
I ‘ .
.-.-.-_-.-.-.---.-.-.-.---.-.-.---.-----.-.-.-.-.-.-.
section
.--.---
. . .
WPRE c IM * RTRU
Console
.

CTV

- 244 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: TEST MODE

Check procedure in the test mode

The DAS test mode and SOIF test mode are available with the Xvision as methods to locate the
cause of image abnormality in the DAS system or the optical transmission system.

1. DAS test mode

The data pattern written on the ROM of the CONT PWB in the DAS is output to check
whether or not the data transfer from CONT to SS/PRE is performed correctly.

2. SOIF test mode

The data pattern written on the ROM of the SOIF PWI3 is output to check whether or not the
data transfer from SOIF to SS/PR.E is performed correctly.

CONT + ROIF--+-+ SOIF + SS/PRE

DAS test procedure

(1) Select the “a” command in the DCA test program.

(2) Set the parameter for DAS mode to Test Mode and perform scanning.

(3) Select the “c” command and specify the correction method to be “none”.

(4) Using the “m” command, check the data of each channel. The test pattern differs depending
on the system.

SOIF test procedure

(1) Set SWl-4 of SOIF to ON. (LED10 (COMM TEST) lights.)

(2) Execute command “a” in the DCA test program. (Conditions do not matter.)

(3) Using the “m” command, check the mean value of each channel and compare it with the
pattern.

(4) Set SWl-4 of SOIF to OFF. (LED10 (COMM TEST) goes out.)

- 245 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: DAS TEST PATTERN

(TSX-002Ai4 TO 6 WITH GANTRY---
MODEL CGGT-OIOB)

ch 0 1 2 3 4 5, 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0000 86iii OOOi 0001 0002 8602 0083 0803 0004 0004 0005 0005 0006 0006 0007 0007
16 0008 0008 0009 0009 OOOAOOOAOOOBOOOBOOOCOOOCOOODOOODOOOE OOOE OOOF OOOF
32 0010 OOlO* 0011 0011 0012 0012 0013 0013 0014 0014 0015 0015 0016 0016 0017 0017
48 0018 0018 0019 0019 OOlA OOlA OOlB OOlB OOlC OOlC OOlD OOlD OOlE OOlE OOlF OOlF
64 0020 0020 0021 0021 0022 0022 0023 0023 0024 0024 0025 0025 0026 0026 0027 0027
a0 0028 0028 0029 0029 002A 002A 002B 002B 002C 002C 002D 002D 002E 002E 002F 002F
96 0030 0030 0031 0031 0032 0032 0033 0033 0034 0034 0035 0035 0036 0036 0037 0037
112 0038 0038 0039 0039 003A 003A 003B 003B 003C 003C 003D 003D 003E 003E 003F 003F
128 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 004A 004B 004C 004D 004E 004F
144 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 005B 00X 005D 005E 005F
160 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 006A 006B 006C 006D 006E 006F
176 0070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 007A 007B 007C 0071) 007E 007F
192 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 00aA 00aB ooac 00aD 00aE 0oaF
208 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0099 009A 009B 009C 009D 009E 009F
224 OOAOOOAl OOA2 OOA3 OOA4 OOA5OOA6 OOA7 OOA8 OOA9 OOAAOOAB OOACOOADOOAE OOAF
240 OOBO OOBl OOB2 OOB3 OOB4 OOB5 OOB6 OOB7 OOBa OOB9 OOBAOOBB OOBCOOBD OOBE OOBF
256 ooco OOCl ooc2 OOC3 OOC4 OOC5 OOC6 OOC7 OOCB OOC9 OOCA-OOCB OOCCOOCDOOCE OOCF
272 OODOOODl OOD2 OOD3 OOD4 OOD5 OOD6 OOD7 OOD8 OOD9 OODAOODB OODCOODDOODE OODF
288 OOEO OOEl OOE2 OOE3 OOE4 OOE5 OOE6 OOE7 OOEa OOE9 OOEAOOEB OOECOOED OOEE OOEF
304 OOFO OOFl OOF2 OOF3 OOF4 OOF5 OOF6 OOF7 OOFa OOF9 OOFA OOFB OOFC OOFD OOFE OOFF
320 0000 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070 0080 0090 OOAOOOBO OOCOOODOOOEO OOFO
336 0100 0110 0120 0130 0140 0150 0160 0170 0180 0190 OlAO OlBO OlCO OlDO OlEO OlFO
352 0200 0210 0220 0230 0240 0250. 0260 0270 0280 0290 02A0 02B0 02CO 02DO 02E0 02F0
368 0300 0310 0320 0330 0340 0350 0360 0370 0380 0390 03A0 03B0 03CO 03DO 03E0 03F0
384 0400 0410 0420 0430 0440 0450 0460 0470 0480 0490 04A0 0480 04CO 04DO 04E0 04F0
400 0500 0510 0520 0530 0540 0550 0560 0570 0580 0590 05A0 05BO 05CO 05DO 05E0 05F0 .
416 0600 0610 0620 0630 0640 0650 0660 0670 0680 0690 06A0 06BO 06CO 06DO 06E0 06F0
432 0700 0710 0720 0730 0740 0750 0760 0770 0780 0790 07A0 07BO 07CO 07DO 07E0 07F0
448 0800 0810 0820 0830 0840 0850 0860 0870 0880 0890 OaAO OaBO 08CO 08DO OBEO OaFO
464 0900 0910 0920 0930 0940 0950 0960 0970 0980 0990 09AO 09BO 09CO 09DO 09EO 09FO
480 OAOOOAlO OA20 OA30 OA40 OA50 OA60 OA70 OA80 OA90 OAAOOABO OACOOADOOAEO OAF0
496 OBOO OBlO OB20 OB30 OB40 OB50 OB60 OB70 OB80 OB90 OBAOOBBO OBCOOBDO OBEO OBFO
512 ocoo OClO oc20 OC30 OC40 OC50 OC60 OC70 OC80 OC90 OCAOOCBO OCCOOCDOOCEO OCFO
528 ODOOODlO OD20 OD30 OD40 OD50 OD60 OD70 ODaO OD90 ODAOODBO ODCOODD0 ODE0 ODFO
544 OEOO OElO OE20 OE30 OE40 OE50 OE60 OE70 OE80 OE90 OEAOOEBO OECO OEDO OEEO OEFO
560 OF00 OF10 OF20 OF30 OF40 OF50 OF60 OF70 OF80 OF90 OFAO OFBO OFCO OFDO OFEO OFF0
576 0000 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800 0900 OAOOOBOOOCOOOWO OEOO OF00
592 1000 !lOO 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 PA00 lBO0 lCO0 1DOO lEO0 lFO0
608 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 2AOO 2BOO 2CO0 2DO0 2EOO 2FOO
624 3000 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 3900 3AOO 3BOO 3CO0 3DO0 3EOO 3FOO
640 4000 4100 4200 4300 4400 4500 4600 4700 4800 4900 4AOO 4BOO 4CO0 4D50 4EOO 4FOO
656 5000 5100 5200 5300' 5400 5500 5600 5700 5800 5900 5AOO 5BOO 5CO0 5DO0 5EOO 5FOO
672 6000 6100 6200 6300 6400 6500 6600 6700 6800 6900 6AOO 6BO0 6CO0 6DO0 6EO0 6FOO
688 7000 7100 7200 7300 7400 7500 7600 7700 7800 7900 7AOO 7BO0 7CO0 7DO0 7EO0 7FOO
704 8000 al00 8200 8300 8400 8500 8600 8700 8800 8900 8AO0 8BO0 8CO0 8DOO 8600 8FOO
720 9000 9100 9200 9300 9400 9500 9600 9700 9800 9900 9AOO 9BOO 9COO 9DOO 9EOO 9FOO
736 A000 Al00 A200 A300 A400 A500 A600 A700 A800 A900 MOO ABOO AC00 ADO0 AEOO AFOO
752 BOO0 BlOO B2OO B300 EM00 B500 B600 B700 BaOO B900 BAOOBBOO BCOOBDOO BE00 BFOO
768 coo0 coo0 Cl00 Cl00 c200 c200 C300 c300 c400 c400 c500 c500 C600 C600 C700 C700
784 caoo caoo c900 C900 CA00 CA00 CBOOCBOOCCOOCC00 CD00 CD00 CEO0 CEO0 CFOO CFOO
a00 DO00 DO00 DlOO DlOO D200 D200 D300 D300 D400 D400 D500 D500 D600 D600 MOO D700
816 D800 0800 D900 D900 DA00 DA00 DBOODBOODC00 DC00 DDOODO00 DE00 DE00 DFOO DFOO
a32 EOOO EOOO El00 El00 E200 E200 8300 E300 8400 E400 ES00 E500 E600 E600 E700 E700
a48 EaOO E800 E900 E900 EAOOEAOOEBOO EBOO EC00 EC00 ED00 ED00 EEOO EEOO EFOO EFOO
864 FOOO FOOO FlOO FlOO F200 F200 F300 F300 F400 F400 F500 F500 F600 F600 F700 F700
a80 FaOO F800 F900 F900 FAOO FAOOFBOO FBOO FCOO PC00 FDOO.FDOOFE00 FE00 FFOO FFOO

- 246 -
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: DAS TEST PATTERN

(TSX-002Al4 TO 6 WITH GANTRY
MODEL CGGT-01 OC)
ch 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0 000 OOF; OOFF OOFF F'FOO FFOO 0000 0000 FFFF FFFF AAAA AAAA 5555 5555 FE-IT F$
16 001 a001 2004 2004 0810 0810 0240 0240 4020 4020 1008 1008 0480 0480 0102 0102
32 FF'T= 7FFF DFFF DFFF F7FF F7t;F FDlT FDFF FF7F FF7F FFDF FWF FFF7 FFF7 FWD FFFD
48 1Ff22 m f$FF &n mb;F mm @J.-F f;EFI: m)f; 1qxF kI;EF Ilm ml‘13 FFfTT 1wE fin
64 1000 0000 OOn; OOFF WOO FFOO 0000 0000 FIW FIW AAAA AAAA 5555 5555 FFFF FFFF
a0 ,001 8001 2004 2004 0810 0810 0240 0240 4020 4020 1008 1008 0480 0480 0102 0102
96 'FIT 7FI;1; DIW DFFF F7FF F7FF FDFF FDFF FF7F FF7F iTl)F FFDF FFF7 FFF7 FFI;D FFFD
112 1T;1;FBI;w EFf;F El'ZF mm mFF Fm fwF FfziF FF'OF FFEF Fm i:FI;n t;lm) FFf;E f;Ff;E
128 1000 OOFF IT00 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
144 'FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FHFF FEFF I'FBF FFEF FFFB ITFE
160 1000 OOFF f;FOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
176 'FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF W7F FFDF FFF7 Ff;FD BFFF EWF FBFF FEFT I:FBF FlTf FFFB 1TFE
192 1000 OOlF ITOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
208 'FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF I;E'?F FFDF FFb7 FFTD BITF EFFF FBW FEFF FFBI; FFEF FFFB FFFE
224 1000 OOFF FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
240 'FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FIT7 FFFD BITF EWF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF WB FFFE
256 1000 OOFF FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
272 'FIT DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FWD BFFF EFFF FBW FE@ FFBP WET; FFFB FFFE
288 1000 OOFF FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
304 'FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFF'D BITF EITF FBlT: FEW FFBF FFEF FFF;B FFFE
320 1000 001;1; FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
336 'FFF DWF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFB BFFF EFFF FBFF ITIFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
352 1000 OOFF FFOO 0000 ITFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102'
368 fFFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FF'DF FFF7 FFFX BFFF EFFF IWF FEW FFBF FFTf FFFB FFFE
384 1000 OOlT FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
400 fFFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF F'FF7 ITFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFET FFFB F-FEE
416 1000 OOFF FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
432 lFFF DFFF MFF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFW FBW FEFF FFBF FIW FFFB JiTFE
448 1000 OOFF FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF a001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
464 IFFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFT FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
480 1000 OOFF F-F00 0000 FlTF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 .0480 0102
496 IFFF DFFF F7f;F FDPF FNF FFDF FFF7 FFFD BH-F EFFF FBFT FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
512 0000 OOW FFOO 0000 FFfF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
528 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDPT FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FkTF FFFI FFFE.
544 0000 OOFF FFOO 0000 FfW AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
560 7FFF DFFT F7ET FDFF FF7F FFDF FbT7 RFD BFFF EFFt HWF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
576 0000 OOJTFFFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 04aO 0102'
592 7FFF DHT F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
608 0000 OOFF FFOO 0000 FFT'F AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
624 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF IT+'F FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF IW'B FFFE
640 0000 OOFF FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFTF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
656 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF eFF7F FFDF FIT7 WF'D BFFF FJFF FBFF FEW FITIF FFEF FFFB FIT-E
672 0000 OOFF FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF a001 2004 0810 0240 4020 loo8 0480 0102
688 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDm FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD RFFT EFFT IWF FEFF FFBF FFEF FlTB FFFE
704 0000 OOkT FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
7211 7f;f;E: DrlTlT F7FF IQFF f;FvT; FT;DI; I;l;f;7 f;T;FD BfTFF j-ifiy ]qc;T; F@f; Flq]F Fl;I;f; I;'I:i;B m
736 0000 OOW t-.-O0 0000 'FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
752 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FE;7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBI:F FEFF FFBF FFW FFFB FFFE
76a 0000 0000 OOFF OOFF FFOO FFOO 0000 0000 FFFF FFFF AAAA AAAA 5555 5555 WFF FWF
784 8001 8001 2004 2004 0810 0810 0240 0240 4020 4020 1008 1008 0480 0480 0102 0102
800 7FFF 7FFF DFFF DFFF F7FF F7FF FDFF FDFF FF7F IT7F FFDF FFDF FFF7 FW7 FWD FTFD
ale BFFF BFFT EFFF EFFF FRFT FBFF FEFF FEFF FFBF FFBF ITEF FFEF FFFB WI33 FFFE FFFE
832 0000 0000 OOFF OOFF FFOO FFOO 0000 0000 FFFF f;t;FF AMA AAAA 5555 5555 FIW FFFF
848 a001 8001 2004 2004 0810 0810 0240 0240 4020 4020 1008 1008 0480 0480 0102 0102
864 7PT-F 71W DFFT DIN' F7F; F7FF FDFF FDW FF7F FF7F WDF FFDF FFF7 FFF7 FFFD FFFr)
sac BFFF BFFF EFFF EFFF FBFF FBf;F FEFF FEW FF;I)F FFBF FFEF FFEF FFFB F'FFB FFFE IWE

- 247 -
 . cll 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 260 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400
-ii 0 5 10 15, 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Si 60 65 70 73 88 91 101 118 123 138 148 156 163 178 133 1911 203 213 223 233 248 25: 263 278 288 296 301 313 323
I 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 3S 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 79 89 99 109 119 129 139 I46 159 169 It9 169 199 209 219 229 239 249 259 269 279 239 299 309 319 329
2 I 6 11 16 21 26 31 36 41 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 130 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330
46 51 56 61 66 71 80
3 1 6 Ii I6 21 26 31 -36 41 46 51 56 61 66 71 81
91 101 111 121 131 141 151 161 171 131 191 201 211 221 231 241 251 261 271 211 291 301 311 321 331
4 2 7 12 17 22 21 32 31 42 41 * 52 51 62 67 72 82 92 102 112 122 132 142 152 162 172 182 192 202 212 222 232 242 252 262 272 232 292 302 312 322 332
5 2 7 12 It 22 27 32 37 42 47 52 57 62 67 13 83 93 103 113 123 133 143 153 163 173 133 193 203 213 223 233 243 253 263 273 233 293 303 313 323 333
6 3 1 13 18 23 22 33 31 43 48 53 51 63 68 74 84 94 104 114 124 134 144 154 164 it4 134 194 204 214 224 234 244 254 264 274 284 294 304 314 324 334
t 3 I 13 18 23 28 33 36 43 48 53 51 63 68 75 15 95 105 115 125 135 145 155 165 175 185 195 205 215 225 235 245 255 265 275 285 295 305 315 325 335 -4
a
9
4
4
9 14 19 24 29 34 39 44 49 54 59 64 69 76 86 96 106 116 126 136 146 156 166 176 186 196 206 216 226 236 246 256 266 276 286 296 306 316 326 336
9 14 19 24 29 34 39 44 49 54 59 64 69 77 81 St 107 111 127 137 147 1st 167 111 181 1st 201 211 227 237 241 257 267 271 287 297 307 317 321 331
m

ii cb 110 420 430 440 iSO 460 470 43O 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 610 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 300 810 320 8.30 840 150 660 870 880 890
I 346 353 966 St; 362 3% 408 41: 42: 438 448 45t 46: 478 486 496 5011 513 523 531 548 558 563 St8 588 598 606 618 628 631 641 658 661 678 688 697 702 707 712 717 722 127 132 737 T4? 747 ‘152 751
349 359 369 379 389 399 409 419 429 439 449 459 469 4tS 489 499 509 519 529 539 549 559 569 St9 5119599 609 619 629 639 649 659 669 679 689 ‘69t 702 tot 712 711 722 72t 132 137 742 747,752 IS7
350 360 310 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 510 550 560 St6 536 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 698 703 IO8 713 718 723 728 733 738 743 748 753 156
351 361 371 331 391 401 411 421 431 441 451 461 471 481 491 501 511 521 531 541 551 561 571 561 591 601 611 621 631 641 651 661 671 681 691 698 703 701 713 716 723 728 733 738 743 I48 753 758
352 362 312 312 392 402 412 422 432 442 452 462 412 482 492 502 512 522 532 542 552 562 512 532 592 602 612 622 632 642 652 662 672 682 692 699 704 109 714 719 724 729 734 739 I44 149 154 759
353 363 373 383 393 403 413 423 433 443 453 463 413 483 493 503 513 523 533 543 553 563 513 583 593 603 613 623 633 643 653 663 613 633 693 699 104 709 714 119 I24 729 734 739 744 749 154 760
354 364 314 364 394 404 414 424 434 444 454 464 It4 484 494 SO4 514 524 534 544 554 564 St4 584 594 604 614 624 634 644 65j 664 614 634 694 700 tO5 710 t15 ‘120 725 130 135 ‘140 t45 150 755
355 365 375 335 395 405 415 425 435 445 455 465 475 415 495 505 515 525 535 545 555 565 St5 585 595 605 615 625 635 645 655 665 615 685 695 700 705 710 715 720 725 730 735 740 745 750 755
356 366 376 336 396 406 416 426 436 446 456 466 476 436 496 506 516 526 536 546 556 566 576 586 596 606 616 626 636 646 656 666 676 686 696 701 706 711 716 721 726 731 736 741 746 751 756
351 36t 317 361 391 407 4lt 427 431 44t 451 461 4tt 467 491 507 517 527 531 541 557 561 St1 Sat 597 607 617 621 637 641 657 667 617 68t 696 701 706 711 716 121 726 731 736 741 146 751 756
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: DAS TEST PATTERN

(TSX-002AIl AND 3)
ch 0123456789 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 OOOAOOOBOOOCOOODOOOEOOOF
16 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 OOlA OOlB OOlC OOlD OOlE OOlF
32 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 002A 002B OOZC002D OOZE0021:
48 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0039 003A 003B 003C 003D 003E 003F
64 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 004A 004B 004C 004D 004E 004F
80 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 005B 005C 005D 005E 005F
96 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 OOBAOOGBOOGCOOGDOOGE006F :
112 0070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 007A 007B 007C 007D 007E 007F
128 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 008A 008B 008C 008D 008E 008F'
144 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0099 009A 009B 009C 009D 009E 0091:
160 0lOA OOAl OOAZOOA3OOA4OOA5OOA6OOA7OOA8OOA9OOAAOOABOOACOOADOOAEOOAF
176 0iOB0 OOBl OOBZOOB30084 OOB5OOB6OOB7OOB8OOB9OOBAOOBBOOBCOOBDOOBEOOBF
192 0IOCOOOCl OOCZOOC3OOC4OOC5OOC6OOC7OOC8OOC9OOCAOOCBOOCCOOCDOOCEOOCF
208 0lODOOODl OODZOOD3OOD4OOD5OOD6OOD7OOD8OOD9OODAOODBOODCOODDOODEOODF
224 0IOEOOOEl OOEZOOE3OOE4OOE5OOE6OOE7OOE8OOE9OOEAOOEBOOECOOEDOOEEOOEF
240 (ItOF0 OOFl OOFZOOF3OOF4OOF5OOFGOOF7OOF8OOF9OOFAOOFBOOFCOOFDOOFEOOFF;
256 (1,000 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070 0080 0090 OOAOOOBOOOCOOODOOOEOOOFO
272 c1100 0110 0120 0130 0140 0150 0160 0170 0180 0190 OlAO OlBO OlCO OlDO OlEO OlFO:
288 c1200 0210 0220 0230 0240 0250 0260 0270 0280 0290 02A0 02BO OZCO02DO 02EO OZFO;
304 f 1300 0310 0320 0330 0340 0350 0360 0370 0380 0390 03A0 03B0 03CO 03D0 03E0 03PO
320 t1400 0410 0420 0430 0440 0450 0460 0470 0480 0490 04A0 04B0 04CO 04D0 04E0 04F0
336 (1500 0510 0520 0530 0540 0550 0560 0570 0580 0590 05AO 05B0 05CO 05D0 05E0 05F0
352 (1600 0610 0620 0630 0640 0650 0660 0670 0680 0690 06A0 06B0 06CO OGDOOGEO06F0
368 (1700 0710 0720 0730 0740 0750 0760 0770 0780 0790 07AO 07BO 07CO 07DO 07EO 07FO
: 384 (1800 0810 0820 0830 0840 0850 0860 0870 0880 0890 08A0 08B0 08CO 08D0 08E0 08F0
400 I1900 0910 0920 0930 0940 0950 0960 0970 0980 0990 09AO 09BO 09CO 09DO 09EO 09Ftl
416 IIA00 OAlO OA20 OA30 OA40 OA50 OA60 OA70 OA80 OA90 OAAOOABOOACOOADOOAEOOAF0
432 1IBOO OBlO 0820 OB30 OB40 OB50 OBGO0870 0880 OB90 OBAOOBBOOBCOOBDOOBEOOBFO
448 IICOO OClO OCZOOC30 OC40 OC50 OCGOOC70 OC80 OC90 OCAOOCBOOCCOOCDOOCEOOCFO
464 I)DOO ODlO OD20 OD30 OD40 OD50 OD60 OD70 OD80 OD90 ODAOODBOODCOODD0ODE0 ODFO
4801 I3EOOOElO OE20 OE30 OE40 OE50 OE60 OE70 OE80 OE90 OEAOOEBOOECOOEDOOEEOOEFO
4961 I3FOOOFiO OF20 OF30 OF40 OF50 OF60 OF70 OF80 OF90 OFAOOFBOOFCOOFDOOFEOOFF0
512: IDO00 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800 0900 OAOOOBOOOCOOODOOOEOOOF00
523, 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 lAO0 lBO0 lCO0 lDO0 lEO0 lFO0
544: I#2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 ZAOOZBOO2CO0 ZDOO2EOOZFOO
56CI :3000 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 3900 3AOO3BOO3CO0 3DOO3EOO 3FO0
576i 14000 4100 4200 4300 4400 4500 4600 4700 4800 4900 4AOO4BOO4CO0 4DOO4EOO4FOO
5921 5000 5100 5200 5300 5400 5500 5600 5700 5800 5900 5AOO5BOO5CO0 5DOO5EOO5FOO
608i 6000 6100 6200 6300 6400 6500 6600 6700 6800 6900 6AOO'6BO0 6CO0 6DOO6EOO6PO0
624I 7000 7100 7200 7300 7400 7500 7600 7700 7800 7900 7AO0 7BOO7COO7DOO7EOO'IF00
64(1 8000 8100 8200 8300 8400 8500 8600 8700 8800 8900 8AOO8BOO8CO0 8DOO8EOO8FOO
65fi 9000 9100 9200 9300 e9400 9500 9600 9700 9800 9900 9AOO9BOO9COO9DOO9EOO9FOO
67:! A000 Al00 A200 A300 'A400 A500 A600 A700 A800 A900 AA00 ABDOAC00 ADO0 AEOOAi:00
681l BOO0BlOO 132008300 I3400 B500 8600 B700 3800 B900 BAOOBBOOBCOOBDOOBE00 BP00
701I COO0Cl00 C200 C300 C400 C500 C600 Cl00 C800 C900 CA00 CBOOCC00 CD00 CEO0 CFOO
72(I DO00 DlOO D200 D300 D400 D500 D600 D700 D800 D900 DA00 DBOODC00 DDOODE00 DFOO
7313 EOOOEl00 E200 E300 E400 E500 EGO0El00 E800 E900 EAOOEBOOEC00 ED00 EEOOEPOO
75:1 FOOOFlOO F200 F300 F400 F500 F600 F700 F800 F900 FAOOFBOOFCOOFDOOFE00 FFOO
761s 0001 0002 0004 0008 OOlb' 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 040b 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
7814 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FFDT:FFBF FF7F FEFF FDFF FBFF F7FF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
801D 0000 1555 ZAAA 3FPF 4000 5555 6AAA 7FFF 8000 9555 AAAABFFF COO0D555 EAAA FFFI:
8113 0000 1555 ZAAA 3FFF 4000 5555 SAAA7FFF 8000 9555 AAAABFFI' COO0D555 EAAA FFW
8312 0000 1555 ZAAA 3FFF 4000 5555 BAAA7FFF 8000 9555 AAAABFFF COO0D555 EAAA FFFF
8418 0000 1555 ZAAA 3FFF 4000 5555 BAAA7FFF 8000 9555 AAAABFFF COO0D555 EAAA FFFF
86e4 0000 1555 ZAAA 3FFF 4000 5555 6AAA 7PFP 8000 9555 AAAABPIT COO0D555 EAAA FWIZ
8810 0000 1555 2AAA 3FFF 4000 5555 6AAA 7FFF 8000 9555 AAAABFFF COO0D555 EAAA FFFF

- 249 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SOIF TEST PATTERN

CH +I +2 +3 +4 *5 +6 +I +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +I3 +I4 +15

--if I;;, 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
16 ?FFE FFFD FFFB FFM FFEF FFDF FF5F FF7F FEFF FDFF FBFF MFP EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
32 1001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
48 )FFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FIIIF FFBF FF7F FEFF FDFF FBFF MFF EPFF DFFF BFFF IFFF
64 1001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
80 :FFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FF7F FEFF FDFF FBFF F7FF EFFF DFFF 5FFF 7FFF
96 1001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 '0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
112 :FI:E FFIQ FF]ZB FFF7 FFEF PjTDl? FFBF FFIF FEFF FDFF FBFF MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
128 1001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
144 'FFE FFFD FFFB FFM FFEF FPDF FFBF FF7F FEFF FDFF F5FF F7FF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
160 1001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
176 :/?l:E FI:kJ) FF]:B 1'1?F7FFEF FFDF FFBF FFIF FEFF FDFF FBFF F7FF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
192 3001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
208 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FF7F FEFF FDFF FBFF MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
224 1001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
240 WE FFFD FFFB FFFI FFEF FFDF FFBF FF7F FEFF FDFF FBFF F7FF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
256 3001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
272 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FF7F FEFF FDFF F5FF MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
288 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
304 I?FFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FMF FEFF FDFF F5FF F7FF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
320 DO01 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 4000 8000
336 FFFE FFFD FFF5 FFM FFEF FFDF FFBF FMF FEFF FDFF FBFF- MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
352 DO01 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
368 FIVE WFD FFFB FFFI FFEF FFDF FFBP FF7P FEFF FDFF F5FF MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF IFFF
384 DO01 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
400 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FMF FEFF FDFF F%FF F7FF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
416 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
432 PFFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FFIF FEFF FDFF FBFF F7FF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
448 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
464 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FFlF FEFF FDFF FBFF MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
480 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
496 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBP FFlF FEFF FDFF FBFF MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
512 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 4000 8000
528 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFM FFEF FFDF FFBF FMF FEFF FDFF FBFF F7FF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
544 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
560 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFF? FFEF Pf%F FFBP FF7F FEFF FDFF F5FF F7FF EFFF DFFF 5FFF 7FFF
576 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
592 FFFE FFFD FFF5 FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FMF FEFF FDFF F5FF MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
608 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020' 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
624 FFFE FFl'D FFF5 FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FMF FEFF FDFF FBFF MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
640 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
666 FFFE FFFD FFF5 FFF7 FFEF FFDF FF5F FF7F FEFF FDFF FBFF MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
672 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
688 FFFE l:l:I:D I>+'[:5 FI3p7 FmF QI:DP PpBp PPlF WFP FDPP PBFF FlPF EFFF DFPF 5PPF 7PFF
704 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
720 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFE7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FF7F FEFF E'DFF FBFF F7FF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
736 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
752 Fl?I:[; Fj?FD I?[:j?B FFF7 l'I;'EF pjzl)p pfq')p PFIF FEFF FDI’F PBFP MFF EFFF DFFF BFFF IFFP
768 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400. 0800 1000 4000 8000
784 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FF7F FEFF FDFF FBFF FlFF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
800 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
816 I:PPE FI:\Q PF[:B PPP7 lZF[{P [!I"Dp j?mp PPlF IZEFP FDPF FBPP P7PF Elw DFPP BFFF 7FPP
832 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
848 FFFE FFFD FFF5 FFF7 FFEF FFDF FFBF FF7F FEFF FDFF FBFF F7FF EFFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
864 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
880 FFFL? FFFD FFFB FFF? FFEF FItDF FFBI’ FF7F FEFF FDFF FBFF F7FF EFFF DFFP BPFP 7FFF
896 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 5555 AAAA FFFF

- 250 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: OUTLINE OF THE X-MY SYSTEM

I. Composition
The X-ray high-voltage generator is divided into the following 3 sections: (Refer to figure
l-l.)

(1) Converter section

(2) Inverter section

(3) High-voltage transformer section

X-ray tube unit

Inverter section X-ray tube heat

Converter transforme

Figure 1- 1 X-ray high-voltage generator

-251-
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: OUTLINE OF THE X-RAY SYSTEM

Outline of the inverter unit

High-voltage
transforme -r Rectifier I
nnnnr-== rl

c+.---Rectifie; ‘Chopperf 1 Filter )Inyertel

-T-t-f-I-T=--
3-phase 50/60 Hz Several tens of kHz Several tens of kHz T
Sizeand weight
V
Size and weight The waveform becomes flat
are small due to are small due to because only voltage for the
high frequency. high frequency. distributed capacity of the
high-voltage cable is present
due to the high frequency.

The inverter section is divided into blocks as shown above.

The power is controlled by the chopper according to the output (tube voltage and tube
current) after it has been rectified by the rectifier. The frequency of the controlled power
is raised by the inverter, and the voltage is increased by the high-voltage transformer. The
high-voltage power is then supplied to the X-ray tube.

\
Chopper
Ch? coii
.:1 /,-,,+l.:,,\
~siwu~~~~i~~;I
cn-
011 toothing
Rectification I
A, I

I 1

L-w< >
Rectifier Chopper Filter Voltage-resonance imerter
(push-pull type)
High-yltage trarx$ormer

Main circuit ’ Rectifier ’

- 252 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OUTLINE OF THE X-RAY SYSTEM

The block diagram of the X-ray system is shown below. High-voltage generation, tube
voltage control- tube current control- rotor control. and oneration control circuits are
descrybed later.’

3-phase, 200 VAC,

50160 Hz

Linenoise 1
filter I

I
C- Door switch
---+ External lamp
B Slice counter if
I Converter
To each
transformer f-lRectification
I section

Smaothine I I
I

- Lhoppet feedback LhOpper

A-1---- Chopper
>I . control urxver
t il J
I
I
I *.-*.-.7 i
Interlock - ..a*
..-*.-- ’ fI Inserter
--- -----------y-L--
Tube voltage :
_.a* i Smoothing
:; I , 1section
feedback
i I I
I
I> Inverter . I>
Inverter
- I
1
driver I
.1 I. i ' I
I
fLLG+izt
; *.--
..-’
:
i
1 ..** ..’ I I
#mm--- 1 .----

v i

Tube current t""' I Filament High-voltage

, i
i

b
feedback i transformer transformer i
I
i I I 0

-I I i
I i
Rotor control ! ectif ication i
I i
I I

X-ray tube

- 253 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: CONVERTER SECTION (XC PWB)

I. Control PWB
There are 2 PWBs: XC PWB and XP PWB.

(1) xc PWB

l Mounting position : Within the converter section

l Parts list drawing number : PX71-05683

1 Tube current 1 OLP 1 ROM

GR-1 50 to 300 mA 90% c10010-xx
GR-2 50 to 300 mA 100% C10018-xx
GR-3mto 3OOmA 1 90% I C10021-xx
GR-4 I.30 to 300 mA I 100% I C10022-xx
xx: Revision mark

l PWB drawing number : YWA3007

l Connection diagram drawing numbers : 3XW71-1251 to 3XW71-1259

l Functions:

Communication control
Output of basic control signals
Monitoring of internal status
Selection of output voltage and current
Control of OLP
Holding of power supply for cooling the X-ray tube
Backup of the basic information memory
Control of the slice counter

- 254 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CONVERTER SECTION (XC PWB)

Setting of each part

Switch number Setting Remarks

SWl-1 ON
-2 ON Memory mapping setting
-3 OFF
-4 ON (Used in the factory)
sw2-1 ON
-2 *1 * 1 (2 MI-W: ON, 3.5 MHU: OFF)
-3 OFF (Used in the factory)
-4 OFF (Used in the factory)
-5 OFF (Used in the factory)
-6 OFF (Used in the factory)
SW3 Hardware reset
SW4 l-2 Set to the side of the display direction.
(Used in the factory)
JPl l-2 Set the short connector at the display side.
(Used in the factory)
J-P2 l-2 Set the short connector at the display side.
(Used in the factory)

Names and contents of LEDs

LED number Name Remarks

LED 1 XC-NORM Lit : Indicates that the XC control is in
normal status.

(If a request to turn ON the power of

the main circuit is not issued, this LED
is out because it is not a normal status,)
LED2 X-STS Blinking: This LED is blinking when internal
status data is being transmitted to the
console side.
LED3 X-POW Lit : Indicates that power is supplied to the
control system, but no request to turn
ON the main circuit was issued from the
console.
LED4 XP-NORM Lit : Indicates that XC control and the XP
control are in normal status.

- 255 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: CONVERTER SECTION

(REPLACEMENT OF THE BATTERY
ON THE XC PWB)
1. Procedure for Replacing the Battery on the XC
PWB
(1) Outline

This section describes the procedure for replacing the back-up battery mounted in the
xc PWB.
Although the battery is designed to be charged while power is supplied, the.
performance may deteriorate after long usage.
A faulty battery disables back-up of the memory of If and mA data and operation of
the built-in clock, and also causes failure of the XC PWB. Therefore, periodic
replacement of battery is required.

(2) Battery to be used

Parts drawing number Item Q’ty Location

AxPo3 l-02 BATTERY, NI-CD 1 Bl or B2

(3) Items required

If data back-up file (floppy disk used exclusively for the system)

(4) Replacement procedure

0a Mount a new battery to Bl or B2 (whichever is

available) and solder, taking care not to cause short
with the patterns around. Take care for the polarity.

(b) Cut the legs of the old battery using nippers, taking
care not to come in contact with the patterns around,

0C Remove the lead,and solder remaining on the PWB

using the soldering iron and desoldering tool.

(4 When the XC PWB is started up directly after the

battery replacement, the XC PWB detects the back-
up data error and stops. Press the [RESET] button
after turning ON the power to clear the error.

0e Set the XC PWB in the Ready status and confirm the normal If value. If the If
and mA data is lost, write the If and mA data using the back-up file. (Refer to “If
adjustment”.)

- 256 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: CONVERTER SECTION

(REPLACEMENT OF THE BATTERY
ON THE XC PWB)
Caution: Do not use any battery other than that specified for replacement.
Dispose of the used battery according to the disposal instructions
of the manufacturer.

- 257 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: CONVERTER SECTION (XP PWB)

XPPWB

8 Mounting position : Within the converter section

l Parts list drawing number : PX71-05613

GR-1: XC PWB for GR-1 and GR-2

GR-2: XC PWB for GR-3 and GR-4

Note: If the combination is different, the tube current cannot be adjusted to a value within the
standard range. Therefore, check the GR at the time of replacement.

l PWB drawing number : YWA2969

l Connection diagram drawing numbers : 3XW7 1- 1228 to 3XW7 1- 1247

l Functions:

Receives control signals from the XC PWI3

Generates control signals of the inverter
Feedback control of output voltage and current
Heating of the filaments
Detection and protection functions of the output

- 258 -
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: CONVERTER SECTION (XP PWB)

Test points

Number Name Remarks

TPOA ov
TPOB ov
TPl KVS Tube voltage standard value
TP2 MIAS Tube current standard value
TP3 IFS If standard value
TP4 INV-v Inverter operation voltage monitor
TP5 INV-c Inverter current monitor
TP6 INV-V-DET Inverter operation voltage monitor
TP7 OV TH Inverter section overvoltage detection level (+6.3 V)
TP8 INV-C-DET Inverter section current monitor
TP9 OC TH Inverter section overcurrent detection level (+4.4 V)
TPlO Bl
TPll B2
TP12 KV-DET Tube voltage detection
TP13 OKV-TH Over kV detection level (-8.8 V)
TP14 DKV Tube voltage differential
TP15 ARC-TH ARC detection level (+2.7 V + +O.5 V): After FM03 16
TP17 MA-DET Cathode side current detection
TP18 MA- Cathode side current detection
TP19 MA+ Anode side current detection
TP20 OMA-TH Over mA detection level (-7.2 V)
TP2 1 MA-DET-TH Anode side current detection level (-7.2 V)
TP23 IFOC-TH Overcurrent of the filament-heating circuit (+lO V)
TP24 FIL-CHP-OSC Emission waveform of the filament-heating circuit chopper section
TP35 FIL-INV-OSC Emission waveform of the filament-heating circuit inverter section
TP26 INV-osc Inverter section emission waveform
TP27 INV-CLK Inverter section clock
TP28 CHP-FB Feedback pulse
TP29 CHP-DRV Chopper drive
TP30 INVA-DRV Inverter drive
TP3 1 INVB-DRV Inverter drive
TP4 1 +10 v Standard voltage
TP42 -10 v Standard voltage

- 259 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: CONVERTER SECTION (XP PWBI

TP25

/ TPOA

TPG

TP4 1
/TP26 ;
TP20
/ TP8
TP42
TP27 / TP3

TP23 / TP1

TP2 1 Y TP14

TP24

TP29
TP2
TP30
TPlG
TP3 1
TP15

Figure 1 Xl? PWB

- 260 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CONVERTER SECTION (XP PWB)

Waveform of each TP terminal on the XP PWB

Test point Setting Adjustment

l TP24 Chopper operation cycle of the filament-
heating section

IlY= 16.7 ps Ix>vR4

~~v=3.1v
(16.3 to 17.0)
Cited from manual.

l TP25 Inverter operation cycle of the filament-

heating section

I’ = 25 ps vR5
c24.5 to 25.5)
Cited from manual. I

l TP26 Emission waveform of the inverter section

T = 67.6 ys
Confirmed using actual system.

. TP27 Inverter operation cycle of the main circuit

T = 67.6 ~1s V-R6

(67.5 to 68.5)
Cited from manual,

-261 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CONVERTER SECTION (XP PWB)

Test point Setting Adjustment
* TP28 Feedback pulse

T = 67.6 ~1s
Confirmed using actual system. I

0 TP29 Chopper drive

T = 67.6 ~1s

14 v

~
P V = 12.6 V Confirmed using actual system. I

l TP30 Inverter drive A

TP3 1 Inverter drive B

T = 67.6 1~s
Confirmed using actual system. I

- 262 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: CONVERTER SECTION (XP PWB)

Checking the filament heating

Using the oscilloscope, measure the filament-heating voltage at TR3 and TR4 of R264 (0.15 a)
on the XP PWB.

.05 to 0.15 V 1Cited from manual. I

4.0~kl3z (25~ps cycle) contixkous rectangular mxe

Confirmed using actual

system. I

cl> The waveform above appears when the X-ray READY switch is pressed.

<2> The enlarged waveform did not show any square wave.

<3> Changing mA setting did not cause significant changes in the waveform.

Confirmed using actual

svstem. I

- 263 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: INVERTER SECTION

1. Inverter Section
The inverter section consists of the IGBT unit which is the main circuit, the drive circuit of
the IGBT unit, and the rotor drive circuit.

1.1 IGBT unit

This consists of the chopper, the IGBT stack which is the switching section of the inverter,
the snubber resistance, and the cooling fan.

1.2 Drive section .

This is the drive circuit PWB (XID) which drives the switching transistor of the main
circuits. It has 1 circuit for the chopper and 2 circuits for the inverter. Driving power is
supplied from transformer T3 1. It receives the driving signal from the XP PWB of the
converter section.

Since this circuit is directly linked with the main circuits, be sure to observe the
precautions described in the Repair volume when connecting the circuit to the test points.

(1) XID PWB

l Mounting location : In the inverter section

l Parts list drawing number : PX71-05614

l PWB drawing number : yWA2968

l Connection diagram drawing numbers: 3XW71-1225 to 3XW71-1227

l Function : Driving the transistors (IGBT)

- 264 -
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: INVERTER SECTION

(2) Test points

No. Name Remarks

TPlA +16V Power supply for inverter A driver
TP2A -16V Power supply for inverter A driver
TP3A IN Inverter A driver signal input
TP4A OUT Inverter A driver signal output

TPlB +16V Power supply for inverter B driver

TP2B -16V Power supply for inverter B driver
TP3B IN Inverter B driver signal input
TP4B OUT Inverter B driver signal output

TPlC +16V Power supply for chopper driver

TP2C -16V Power supply for chopper driver
TP3C IN Chopper driver signal input
TP4C OUT Chopper driver signal output

1.3 Rotor drive

This is controlled by the signal from the XP PWB, and consists of the relay for switching
the start-up output and the constant speed output, the SSR for opening/closing the output,
and the phase-splitting capacitor.

- 265 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: XT PWB
XT PWB

l Mounting location : Upper rear of the gantry stationary section

l Parts list drawing number : PX77-68803
l PWB drawing number : YWA3123
l Connection diagram drawing numbers : 3XW77-4140 to 3XW77-4141

l Functions : Driving the slice counter

Output for external lamp
Detection of the door switch status

Settings

Switching of the external lamp control

Any one of the following output modes can be selected:

No. 1 Setting 1 Remarks If the message “Door is

open” is issued during
JPl I-2 Lit in READY scanning, etc., the +24-V
3-4 Lit in X-RAY power supply, SOIF, ROIF,
5-6 Lit when the power is ON XC, or door switch may be
7-8 No external lamp control signal is output. faulty.

CNN151
(APSOW07) I=?
.-
CNN153
(APS05.7 ‘4) “Occupied” lamp
0’ 2-I
lo of hospital facility
1A h LAMP
AC *2
I TBl l-2
V+24

SOIF JPl
~

CNNI 56
506;

lo
“X-RAY” lamp on the
gantry cover
ro
-

V+24 v+24 CNN155

Door switch of hospital

facility TBl 3-4

- 266 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: OVERLOAt9 PROTECTION (OLP)

I. Overload Protection Management Functions
This section outlines the overload protection (OLP) management functions of the X-ray
tube system.

I .I Functional description
The X-ray tube system supports the OLP management functions for:

(1) Calculation and monitoring of the anode heat capacity for protection

(2) Short-term monitoring of the rating for protection of the focus

(3) Short-term monitoring of the nominal rating for protection of the focus

(4) Power maintenance for continuous cooling

Items (1) to (3) are calculated continuously to check the required radiation conditions.
If the radiation conditions exceed the calculated OLP, the system is notified and
radiation is halted. These three items are calculated, managed, and controlled by the
XC PWB micro-computer. The following subsections give details of items (1) to (4).

Note: OLP is set to 100% for TSX-002A/4A and later. For the models before
TSX-002A/4A, OLP is set to 90%.

1.2 Calculation and monitoring of the anode heat capacity

The function is used to protect the anode from overheating.
The current anode heat capacity is calculated from the cooling curve data of the X-ray
tube stored in memory, the anode heat capacity value obtained during the last exposure,
and the elapsed time after radiation.
The anode capacity is calculated when the currently required radiation conditions are used,
and is compared with the calculated limit.
If the calculated anode capacity exceeds the limit, the required waiting time is calculated
and communicated to the system, and SET UP processing is inhibited.
The anode heat capacity and time are retained in memory when the power is turned OFF,
The residual heat capacity is calculated from backup data and is used as the initial value of
the anode heat capacity when the power is turned ON.

1.3 Short-term monitoring of the rating

This function is used to protect the focus from overheating during continuous radiation.
The radiation limit is obtained from the radiation conditions required from the data
concerning “output vs continuous radiation limit” stored in memory.
If the required radiation time exceeds the limit in REMOTE mode, the required radiation
conditions are assumed to be invalid and the system returns a negative response.

- 267 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: OVERLOAD PROTECTION (OLP)

CXB-200B/AKXE3-350A cooling curve

60

50

40

30

20

1 CXB-2OOB/A

I I I I I

0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
min.

(1) Maximum continuous scan time (short-term rating) With the 2.0 MHU tube

50mA 100 mA 150 mA 2OOmA 250mA 300mA

120 kV 1, 2, 3’ 50 50 19 6 - +-Small focus
3’1, 5, 7, 10 50 50 31 15 6 is used

130 kV 1, 2, 3’ 50 50 13 3
3”, 5, 7, 10 50 50 26 9 5

With the 3.5 MHU tube

a=:-*50 mA 100 mA 150mA 200mA 250mA 300mA

120 kV 1, 2, 3’ 50 50 50 6 - - +--Small focus
3”, 5: 7, 10 50 50 50 38 32 30 is used

130 kV 1, 2, 3’ 50 50 15 4 - -

3”, 5, 7, 10 50 50 50 36 31 -

(9
3’: 3-mm slice for S and SS
3”: 3-mm slice for L and M

- 268 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: OVERLOAD PROTECTION (OLP)

1.4 Short-term monitoring of the nominal rating
This function is used to protect the focus from overheating during continuous radiation
and is applied to a radiation interval of less than 5 seconds using the same kV and mA.
When kV and mA are set, the cumulative limit is obtained during repeated exposures from
memory data.
If the next exposure is performed less than 5 seconds after the previous exposure, the
cumulative radiation time is added. If the elapsed time after the previous exposure is 5
seconds or more, the cumulative time is cleared.

When “cumulative time + required radiation time” exceeds the cumulative limit less than 5
seconds after the previous exposure, the residual time is calculated for communication
with the system. During this period SET UP processing is inhibited.

(Example)

3 seconds 3 seconds seconds 3 seconds 3 seconds

L.- Less than 1

5 seconds

Figure l-l Short-term monitoring of the nominal rating

Scan A calculated during a radiation time of 3 seconds

Scan B calculated during a radiation time of 3 seconds
Scan C calculated during a radiation time of 6 seconds
Scan D calculated during a radiation’time of 9 seconds
Scan E calculated during a radiation time of 12 seconds

- 269 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OVERLOAD PROTECTION (OLP)

1.5 Power maintenance for continuous cooling
This function is used to continue operation of the X-ray tube cooler until the X-ray tube
has cooled after the power switch has been turned OFF on the console.
When a request is made to turn OFF the power switch on the console, power discharge of
the smoothing capacitor starts and cooler is operated until the anode heat capacity falls to
the required value.

Note: 1. The oil cooler operates continuously 24 hours a day at sites where power is -
supplied to the DAS timer for 24 hours a day.

2. At sites where the DAS timer is turned ON/OFF, power is supplied to the oil
cooler for one hour after the power supply to the DAS timer is turned OFF.
(The oil cooler is powered while the DAS timer is ON.)

- 270 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-F!AY TUBE

I. Outline of the X-ray Tube System
This section describes the configuration and specifications of the X-ray tube system.

I .I Configuration
The X-ray tube system comprises the X-ray tube unit and the heat exchanger, which are
connected via the cooling oil circulating hose. The X-ray tube is mounted on the gantry
rotation section. They cannot be separated because of air-tight structure.

Hose

X-ray tube unit

Heat exchanger

Figure 1-l.

1.2 Specifications

CXB-2OOB/A CXB-350A
Model
Varian GS-2078 Varian GS-3 078
Anode heat capacity (kJ!KJ) 2000 3500
Anode cooling rate (kHU/min) 250 285
(maximum)
Maximum tube voltage (kV) 140 140
Dimensions of the focus (mm) Small: 0.9 x 0.9 Small: 0.9 x 0.9
Large: 1.5 x 1.0 Large: 1.5 x 1.0
Heat exchanger capacity (kW) 3.2 4.0
X-ray tube weight (kg) 35 35
.
Heat exchanger weight (kg) 17 17

-271 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE

1.2.1 X-ray tube aging

Perform the aging operation from the console.

(1) Perform If adjustments at 80 kV and 100 kV.

(2) Select the aging menu and perform it at the console. +

4
(When the X-ray tube type is changed, change the Submenu
settings in advance.)
System backup
(3) Stop 30 or more minutes after exposure is performed. -L
(Leave the system with the power turned ON.) Enter the password.
Jr-
(4) Perform If adjustment of the remaining conditions. Aging

Xpress HFG: 36 kW Tube: 2.0 MHU Double

Scan conditions
Slice No.
Tube voltage Tube current Exposure time Pause time before scanning Focus size
1 100 150 6.0 0 Large
2 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
3 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
4 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
5 I 100 I 150 I 6.0 I 15.0 I Large
G 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
7 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
8 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
9 100 150 6.0 15.6 Large
10 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
11 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
12 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
13 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
14 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large
15 100 150 6.0 15.0 Large

16 100 150 6.0 45.0 Large

17 100 150 6.0 45.0 Large
18 100 150 6.0 45.0 Large
19 100 150 6.0 45.0 Large
20 100 150 6.0 45.0 Large
21 100 150 6.0 45.0 Large

- 272 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: X-RAY TUBE

Xpress HFG: 36 kW Tube: 3.5 MHU

a**
3nce \T
1~0. I Scan conditions
Tube voltage 1 Tube: current Exposure time Pause time before scanning Focus size
1 100 250 4.0 0 Large
2 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
3 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
4 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
5 100 250 1.0 6.0 Large
6 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
7 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
8 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
9 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
10 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
11 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
12 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
13 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
14 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
15 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
16 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
17 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
18 \ 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
19 100 250 4.0 6.0 Large
20 100 230 4.0 6.0 Large

21 100 250 4.0 30.0 Large

22 100 250 4.0 30.0 Large
23 100 250 4.0 30.0 Large
24 100 250 4.0 30.0 Large
25 100 250 4.0 30.0 Large
26 100 250 4.0 30.0 Large
27 100 250 4.0 30.0 Large
28 100 250 4.0 30.0 Large
29 100 250 4.0 30.0 Large
30 100 250 4.0 30.0 Large

- 273 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CABLE CONNECTION TO THE

X-RAY TUBE

m HOUS ING GROl

l , WHITE I I CC%4
BLACX
2 I I i
GREEN 1
3
WHITE
_---- II I[ CENTER SECTION
14t 1 1 rOUNGE/ 1 I
0
5 mITE/BLACX Q(NC)

6 BLUE
DT *nT7
IuI THERMAL SWITCH
X-FLAY TUBE
I I ,
GREEN/YELLOW
9 / , , ]
f
GREEN/YELiOi
I n
lo /RED,’
I FLOW SWITCH
I BLACK 1
I1 RED I

TB

c
I HEAT EXCHANQER

Between 4 and 7 on the terminal block

115 V for the CXB-200B

220 V for the CXB-350A

Between 1 and 2 on the terminal block

220 V during boosting .

65 V during running

- 274 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: REPLACEMENT OF X-RAY TUBE

FROM THE CXB-ZOOBIA TO THE
CXB-350A
Connection and operation check

The connection of CXB-2OOB/A and CXB-350A is shown on the previous page. It is necessary
to change the settings of the X-ray high-voltage generator depending on the connected X-ray
tube, as described below. When the X-ray tube type is changed, proceed as follows:

(1) Changing the power-supply voltage of the heat exchanger (oil cooler)

Change the wiring marked 115 V connected to transformer T3 1 in the inverter unit.

CXB-200B/A Connect to 115 V of the transformer.

CXB-350A Connect to 220 V of the transformer.

(2) Changing the focal selection

Change the connection of cable RXPl 1 connected to the XP PWB in the converter unit as
follows:

Cable side
CXB-2OOB/A CNSA t CN5S
CNSB t CNSL

Filament transformer
Negative side of the

focus is selected

CXB-350A CNSA t CNSL

CNSB t CN5S

- 275 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: REPLACEMENT OF X-RAY TUBE

FROM THE CXB=200B/A TO THE
CXB-350A
(3) XC PWB setting change

Since the XC firmware recognizes the type of X-ray tube, change the settings of DIP SW2
on the XC PWB in the converter unit as follows:

sw2-1 sw2-2
CXB-200B/A ON ON
CXEb350A ON OFF

(4) Operation check

0 When the power is ON : Check the operation of the heat exchanger.

l Rotor drive : Confirm by touch or hearing whether the rotor rotates when the
system is in set-up status using the warm-up scan plan, etc.

- 276 -
 No. SD20 l -322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR DISPLAY ON THE MONITOR

Errors with the X-ray high-voltage generator

Err-No. Meaning Presumed cause

EOO Backup memory error Low battery on the XC PWB
E02 X-ray exposure time excess 110% of setting time was exceeded.
error Abnormality of control or transmission at the gantry
side
E03 Exposure waiting time Abnormal control or communication from SS
excess error
E04 Preheating time excess error Abnormal control or communication from SS
E05 Heating time excess error Abnormal control or communication from SS
E06 Starter output time excess Abnormal control or’communication from SS
error
E08 OLP 110% excess error Related to E02.
El2 Over kV Abnormal main circuit control
Electric discharge of the X-ray tube or the high-
voltage section
El3 Arching Electric discharge of the X-ray tube or the high-
voltage section
E25 Overvoltage Abnormal main circuit control
Abnormal high-voltage transformer secondary circuit
Electric discharge of the X-ray tube or the high-
voltage section
E27 Overcurrent Abnormal main circuit control
l The cause of overcurrent during high mA setting
is improper If adjustment.
Faulty main circuit elements (IGBT, etc.)
Abnormal high-voltage transformer secondary circuit
Electric discharge of the X-ray tube or the high-
voltage section
E36 Driver error Faulty main circuit elements (IGBT, etc.)
Blown fuse on XID PWB ,
E43 Inverter thermal error Abnormal heat generation in the inverter unit
The cooling fan is faulty.
The cooling fan of the gantry is faulty.
E45 High-voltage transformer The cooling fan is faulty.
thermal error
ES1 DOOR Door switch detection
E52 SHUTTER The X-ray shutter is not fully open.
(TSX-002A/4A and later are not equipped with the
X-ray shutter.)
E54 X-ray tube thermal error Abnormal heating of the X-ray tube
The heat exchanger is faulty.
The cooling fan of the gantry is faulty.
Excessive temperature around the gantry

- 277 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR DISPLAY ON THE MONITOR

Err-No. Meaning Presumed cause
E55 X-ray tube flow error Abnormal X-ray tube heat exchanger operation
Abnormal circulation of cooling oil of the X-ray tube
E62 Over mA- Electric discharge of the X-ray tube or the high-
voltage system
E63 Over mA+ Electric discharge of the X-ray tube or the high-
voltage system
E64 Low mA Abnormal X-ray output
Abnormal main circuit (element breakage, blown
f&e)
Abnormal filament heating circuit
Disconnection of the high-voltage system
Disconnection or cup touch of the X-ray tube
filament
E66 MAC error Trouble of the filament heating circuit
E67 Abnormal focus selection Abnormal control circuit
E81- Fixed starter control relay Abnormal control circuit
boost
E82 Fixed starter control relay Abnormal control circuit
run
E83 Abnormal main coil current Disconnection of the rotor output circuit
at the time of boost Blown fuse
Abnormal X-ray tube stator coil
E84 Abnormal sub-coil current at Disconnection of the rotor output circuit
the time of boost Blown fuse
Abnormal X-ray tube stator coil
E85 Abnormal main coil current Disconnection of the rotor output circuit
during running Blown fuse
E86 Abnormal sub-coil current Disconnection of the rotor output circuit
during running Blown fuse
E90 Test mode . Set to test mode.

- 278 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: IF ADJUSTMENT
1. If Adjustment
Normally, If adjustment is performed while monitoring the tube current waveform (TP 18
on the Xp PWB). The If value remote adjustment explained below is carried out to
smooth out the leading edge of the tube current.

If the mA waveform on the oscilloscope does not match the If value shown in figure 1- 1,
adjustment is performed automatically.

The smallest overshoot is considered O.K. condition.

Small
4
Value decreases,,,,, Value increases

Pay attention to these parts.

Figure l-l

(1) Starting the If value remote adjustment function

Select [If Setting] from the <<System maintenance>> menu by clicking the mouse, to
carry out the remote exposure adjustment of the If value from the Navi-port. The If
value remote adjustment program will start up.

‘$.-.,&.~iA:..:.
&..~ I.. ‘.: .:... :. .: .I :.. ;. ..:.:

_. .,_ : :,

.
.
.
.
..
. .
. .

:. :.: >>.::.&
~..&.$.~~.&..&.~gj
.
.

+.‘. .:.: .i . . . . . . . . . . ., ._
.
. + I Password entry 1 +
.
‘. .. . . . ,._
,., ,.,...,.,.,...,.,.....~. ::.:.:.:.:.:...> ,.._.., .

,. : .,,.,..,.,.,.,. : .. .. . .._., .:.,..,,

. @..&....$.$&~$.w
.
_.,. _.: . . . . ,. .,__...: :: _. . .,. .,‘.’ _._: . . :

.
. Quit

ICANCEL I

(The first page)

Refer to the service manual for the detailed adjustment procedures.

- 279 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PRECAUTIONS FOR CHECKING

THE X-RAY SYSTEM
1. Checking the X-ray System without Applying a
High-voltage to the Secondary Side
Set SW21 located on the front of the X-ray converter to “TEST”. Ry MC is turned OFF
and-voltage application between P2 and N2 in the inverter is stopped. Voltage remains
present in the control side allowing checking.

2. Precautions for Connecting the Oscilloscope, etc.

to the Gantry Rotation Section for Checking the
X-ray System
When connecting the oscilloscope, etc. to the gantry rotation section for checking the
HFG, extra caution is required to prevent rotation of the gantry.

cl> Set DIP SWlO-1 and 2 on the GTS to ON.

<2> Turn OFF the breaker (CP320) of the rotation servo amplifier.

<3> Perform a test and confirm that the gantry does not rotate.

<4> Connect the measuring instrument to the gantry rotation section,

* * * The gantry can rotate directly after the power is turned ON, even if “Rotation
Disable” is specified in DCA. ***

- 280 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING FOR X-RAY

SYSTEM
Service manual for Xvision X-ray system (troubleshooting) (tentative)

I. Checking of the High-voltage Transformer

* Checking of the high-voltage transformer should be performed in DCA test mode with
the gantry rotation stopped.

* It is recommended that the tester be placed so that it can be seen from the console
position to avoid irradiation.

* The yellow thick power cables Tl to T4 to the transformer should, as far as possible, be
tied separated from the signal cables of the transformer to prevent noise from affecting
the signals.

* When checking the cause of LOW mA error, disconnect and connect CNX22 and
CNX23 of the transformer to check for contact failure.

(1) Using the digital tester, check the DC voltage at the following TP terminals on the XP
PWB in the converter section.

TP8 (to check the current flowing in the primary coil in the
transformer) (Reference value)
120 kV, 50 mA, large focus, 2 s TP8 (TPO - TP8) V (0.8 to 1.0)
TPlO (to check the kV output between A and E on the positive side)
120 kV, 50 mA, large focus, 2 s TPlO (TPO - TPlO) v (7.5 to 8.1)
TPll (to check the kV output between C and E on the negative side)
120 kV, 50 mA, large focus, 2 s TPll (TPO-TPll) v (-7.5 to -8.3)

(2) Check the output of the current transformer.

From the voltage measured at TP8 using the

digital tester, the operating status of currents in
the chopper and inverter, and the primary current il
of the high-voltage transformer can be inferred.

The graphs describing the relationships between the voltage at TP8 (V) and the
current (A) in the transformer primary coil and between the voltage at TP8 (V) and
the mA value (50 to 300 mA) at 120 kV are shown later in this section. If the voltage
measured at TP8 deviates significantly from the value indicated in the graph, the
system is abnormal and further checks are required.

Note: If the cable connections around the IGBT are incorrect, the tester reads the
voltage with the opposite polarity. Refer to the attached sketches.

-281-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING FOR X-RAY

SYSTEM
(3) Monitor the kV output from the bleeder in the transformer.

(Difference between absolute

A voltage values at TP 11 and TP 10)
(Sum of absolute voltage values = kV unbalance in the high-voltage
at,TPll and.TPlO) transformer .< 0.04 (less than 4%)

E <Example of normal case>

(-8.18)-(7.63)
= 0.55B5.81 = 0.0347 (kV unbalance of 3.47%)
(8.18)+(7.63)
C By measuring the kV outputs from the bleeder in the
transformer at TP 10 and TP 11 on the Xl? PWB using the
digital tester, the high-voltage outputs (kV) between the
anode and earth and between the cathode and earth are
obtained. From these measured values, calculate the kV
unbalance to check for abnormality of the high-voltage
transformer. The graphs describing the relationships between
the tube voltage and voltage at (TP lo), (TP 1l), and
(TP lO+TPl 1) are shown later in this section. . .

Note: It is recommended that a digital tester be used so that

the measured values match the high-voltage meter
(kVP meter) values.

- 282 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING FOR X-RAY

SYSTEM
(4) Change the X-ray conditions to 120 kV, 300 mA, large focus, and 2 s, and check the
DC voltage at the same test points.

(Reference value)
TP8 (TPO - TP8) v (3.5 to 4.0)
TPlO (TPO - TPlO) v (7.5 to 8.1)
TPll (TPO - TPll) v (-7.5 to -8.3)

Calculate the kV unbalance

(TPl l)-(TPlO)
=( ) < 0.05 (less than 5%)
(TPl l)+(TPlO)

Note: If an error occurs with a tube voltage of 120 kV, change the setting to 100
kV or 80 kV. Even when the tube voltage setting is 80 kV or 100 kV, the
graph of the relationship between the voltage at TP8 (V) and the mA value
(50 to 300 mA) at 120 kV is still valid and can be referred to.

* Example of problems

(a) Voltage at TP8 is 4.3 V or more with 100 kV/300 mA settings.

(b) kV unbalance is 9% or more with 80 kV/200 mA settings.

(5) Check the external view of the high-voltage transformer. Check for air bubbles
through the oil injection port (round acrylic window), loose screws, oil leakage, etc.
For this procedure, tilt or rotate the gantry to a position convenient for checking the
high-voltage transformer.

2. Checking of the Converter and Inverter Units

The converter and invei-ter units should be checked when low mA error occurs, X-rays are
not generated, or errors occur frequently, etc.

(1) Check whether or not 290 VDC is output between P2 and N2 in the inverter unit.
(The power must be turned OFF for this check.)

If 290 VDC is not output, check F28 (100-A fuse). Also check D2 1, D22, and D23.

(2) Check the driver (XID PWB) section.

Check for blown fuses on the XID PWB. (The power of the X-ray system must be
turned OFF for this check.)
- 283 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING FOR X-RAY

SYSTEM
(3) Check the IGBT. (The power of the X-ray system must be turned OFF for this
check.)

Chopper
Set the tester to diode check mode
and check at the following points.
0 C-E---- 0.32O/OL (V)
B-E-- 0.96/0.86
B-C----- 1.23/OL

D62 ----0.010 (10 n> ~

D56 ---- 0.32/OL

Im-erter

3. XP PWB and XID PWB Operational Check in Test

Mode
(1) Checking tl-te modification of the XP PWB (with the power turned OFF)

(a) Confirm that the discharge detection circuit has been improved ‘according to
2H210-1llE.

(D35;D37, C26, C27, and R84 have been removed. R129 has been changed
from 14.7 kfl to 130 klR. Both ends ofD34 have been shorted.)

(b) Confirm that location of C 130 has been changed according to 2H2 lo- 113E.

(c) With the X-ray tubes CXB-200B and CXB-350A, confirm that the focus is
connected correctly.

Note: (a) and (b) are for checking that FMO-03 16 has been performed.

- 284 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING FOR X-RAY

SYSTEM
(2) Checking XID PWI3 operation (in test mode)

(a) Set the test mode. Set SW21 to test mode and confirm that 290 VDC is not
present (the tester should read 0 V) between P2 and N2 in the inverter unit.

(b) Confirm that the voltage at the following test points lie within the standard range.

TPlA-TPOA(14to 17V)
TP2A - TPOA (-14 to 17 V)
TPlB - TPOB (14 to 17 V)
TP2B - TPOB (-14 to 17 V)
TPlC - TPOC (14 to 17 V)
TP2C - TPOC (-14 to 17 V)

(c) Check the output waveform of the XID PWB.

If the output waveform is abnormal, check the output of the XP PWB.

If the output waveform of the XID PWB is normal, check the waveform at the
gate of the IGBT.

Note: 1. Make sure that the test mode is set.

2. When an oscilloscope with a 3-pin type connector with a grounding

terminal is used, float the grounding terminal using a 2-pin adapter.
Take care to avoid getting an electric shock or damaging the
measuring instrument.

TPK-TPOC TP-CB-TPOB

- 285 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING FOR X-RAY

SYSTEM
I I D64 ---- 0.010 (10 sl)
N2 01 D54
D54 ---- 0.26/OL

C-E-- 0.32O/OL
B-E-- 0.8 1WO.72
B-C ____l.l6/OL

** The above checks can be performed without

TR53
removing the XID PWB.

The check procedures for D55, D66, TR55, and

TR5-t TR56 are the same as for D54, D64, TR53, and
TR54 respectively.

(3) If an abnormality is found in the IGBT unit

(a) Disconnect the shorting plate and cables, and check each component.

(b) Replace the abnormal component and reconnect the cables and shorting plate.

(c) Also check the resistors and capacitors.

(d) Refer to the attached sketch for cable connection around the IGBT unit
(especially cable connection to the current transformer).

Checking the IGBT unit

Set the tester in diode check mode and check the IGBT unit. If checking is conducted
incorrectly, the IGBT may remain ON (due to floating capacity between B and E) and
incorrect result may be obtained. Be sure to proceed as follows.

(a) Turn the power OFF and remove the IGBT. Since the IGBT is easily affected by
static electricity, handle it in the same manner as a C-MOS IC.

(b) Apply the negative lead rod of the tester to B (gate) in the figure below and the
positive lead rod to E. Check that the tester detects an overload in diode check
mode.

(c) Apply the negative lead rod of the tester to E and the positive lead rod to C.
Check that the tester detects an overload in diode check mode.

- 286 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING FOR X-RAY

SYSTEM
(d) Apply the negative lead rod of the tester to C and the positive lead rod to E.
Check that the tester reads approximately 340 mV. (In diode check mode, tl
tester operates as a constant current source and displays the voltage value
required to allow the specified current to flow. In this check, a tester with a
specified current of 1 mA should display a value of approximately 340 mV.)

(e) If an overload is not detected in step (a) or (b) or the tester reads an abnormally
small value in step (c), the IGBT is faulty. It is recommended that it be compared
with the other IGBTs (there are six IGBTs) to determine whether or not it is
faulty.

The rank is shown here with

r white paint.
the rank is D.)
(In this example,

(Gate) Perform check at the

I B shaded part
plate,
of the
not at the
screw in the center
\\
Parasiticy4 of the hole.
capacitance
-Connected inside
*MG3OOQlUSl

- 287 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING FOR X-RAY

SYSTEM

From converter

* Route the lead from

L31 from the top to
the bottom of the
current transformer.

\I 4 IL
Tl HT1 TR T4
T2

Drawing No.
IGBT TR51 to TR56 *MG300QlUSl
Diode D62,64,66 AWOOG-0 1
Diode D56 AVE002-0 1
Diode D54, 55 AVEOO4-0 1
Capacitor c53,54 BSX71-0218
Capacitor C51,52 BSX71-0336

- 288 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING FOR X-RAY

SYSTEM

Overcurrent at 4.4 V
XVISION
1 1
(CXXG-OOSA)
I I I I
d
Relationship between the voltage at TP8 (V)
and the mA value (50 to 300 mA) at 120 kV

350 -

300

150 mA

100 mA
100
Inserter curren
(A)
50 mA
50

0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5

Current TR output at TP8 (measured using a digital tester)

- 289 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING FOR X-RAY

SYSTEM
Relationship between the tube voltage (kVp) and voltage (measured using a digital tester)
at test pins on the XP PWB
(VI
140! 12345678
: 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
II I I , II
II II, It II ,
II 1I s
i I 1 I I ,140

I I I I I
kVP
80

70 -70

GO -GO

50

40 ‘- 40

30

20 -20

10

(I
12345678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1G 17 18
w>

Voltage on the XP PWB TP 10 (A-E), (TP 1O)+(TP 1l)= (A-C), TP 11 (C-E)

(Measured using a digital tester)
- 290 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: XC ERROR OG REFRENCE

PROCEDURES
XC error log reference procedures

I. Outline
The XC PWE3 can store the last 47 error information items in the backup memory.
Although the error information can usually be referred to using the error log function of
the hardware provided in the system, it may be better to refer to the log in the XC memory
for some error statuses.

This subsection describes the procedures for referring to this error log.

.Y

-=x._
-Z

2. PrepSwath ---
-

(1) Items required

0 Personal computer with RS-232C port (9-pin D-sub connector) (e.g., T-3 100)

l “term.com” or Windows terminal

* Maintenance cable (for use with GTS)

(2) Connection

(a) When referring to the error log from the gantry stationary section

Connect the maintenance cable as follows:

--i-
--
T-3 100 H SOIF PWB in the gantry stationary section .-<-
Existing series: CN611
New series: CN608

-291 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: XC ER.ROR LOG REFRENCE

PROCEDURES
(b) When connecting directly to the XC PWB

Connect the maintenance cable as follows:

T-3 100 ++ XC PWB in the converter

cNN3

Then, set toggle switch SW4 on the XC PWB to the side opposite the silk screen.

Caution: When connecting the maintenance cable to the XC PWB, be

extremely careful to avoid having anyone or the cable caught in the
.&. rotation section because the power is turned ON while the
-I- maintenance cable is connected to the rotation section.
_._-
--- -
(3) Starting up the communication program

(a) For DOS system

term coml:9600,e,7,1 [Enter]

(b) For Windows system

Start up the terminal from the accessory group.

Select the communication conditions from the setting menu and perform setting
as follows:

Communication speed : 9600

--Bata length : 7 --
.--<-
Stop bit : 1 _-
Parity : Even
Flow control : None

- 292 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: XC ERROR LOG REFRENCE

PROCEDURES
3. Reading the Error Log
Enter the following command from the T-3 100.

P DAOO[Enter]

When the above command is entered, 80h bytes of data from XC memory address DAOOh
can be obtained. Additional address information can be obtained by simply pressing the
[Enter] key. Obtain information from DAOOh to DFFFh.

Note: The P command is used to read information in the memory.

Because there is a command to rewrite memory data, do not enter any characters
other than those specified.
__.-. -9
Do not use “R” because it overwrites memory contents. --- -_

4. Analysis
Read information following the output example described below.

(1) Data structure

DA00 EO 05 30 FF FF FF 7F BB FF FF FF DF FE FF 33 BB
DA10 DB E2 DF F7 CD 7B C6 El EF 9B 8D CE 3A 2F 4E IF Control area
I
3F 3F 37 3B
DA30 3F 3F 30 33 52 31 31 31 2E 30 32 30 30 30
30 30 Log data 1
DA20 30 30 32 35 30 32 33 36 38 3F 3F 3F I
3F 3B
DA50 3F 3F -: 30 33 52 31 31 31 2E 30 32 30 30 30 30 30 Log ----cc-
data 2
DA40 30 3gz 32 35 30 32 33 36 38 3F 3F 3F 3F 37 l
DA60 30 30 32 35 30 32 33 36 38 3F 3F 3F _=
3F 3F 37 3B
DA70 3F 3F 30 33 52 31 31 31 2E 30 32 30 30 30 30 30 1 Log data 3

1
3F 3F 37 3B
DA90 3F 3F 30 33 52 31 31 31 2E 30 32 30 30 30 30 30 Log data 4
DA80 30 30 32 35 30 32 33 37 38 3F 3F 3F
e l l l l l

DFEO
DFFO
30
3F
32
3F
31
50
34
53
31
52
37
34
35
37
30
32
37
34
37
30
36
33
31;
30
31;
33
31;
36
3F
38
31;
37 1 Log data 47

- 293 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: XC ERROR LOG REFRENCE

PROCEDURES
(2) Calculate the last written data address.

Obtain pointer data from control area data.

DA00 EO 05 30 FF FF FF 7F BB FF FF FF DF FE FF 33 BB
?
05EOh

The last written address is DFEOh from the following formula.

DAOOh + 05EOh = DFEOh

(3) Log.a data analysis

Anal$e the error which occurred last. From DFEOh, the address for the last---wYitten
log is as follows:

DFEO 30 32 31 34 31 37 35 30 37 -37 36 3F 3F 3F 3F 3F
DFFO 3F 3F 50 53 52 34 37 32 34 30 33 30 33 36 38 37

Log contents 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
ASCII code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Bytes I to 8 : Date and time of occurrence “MMDDHHMM”

All data are converted from ASCII code to the corresponding
characters. In this example, it is “02141750”.
Therefore, this is the error log recorded at 17:50 on February 14.

By@
-- 9 to 18: Error code
The indication for the error is as follows. --
(x: 1 = Normal, 0 = Abnormal) .-:-:-
_

9 OOllxxxxb

WARNING (“OR” of the warning conditions)

Door open
Shutter status BO
Shutter status B 1 (always 0)

10 001 lxxxxb

AK

Overvoltage: Inverter overvoltage

Overcurrent: Inverter overcurrent
HFG error (“OR” of all hardware errors)

- 294 -
 ,No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: XC ERROR LOG REFRENCE

PROCEDURES
11 OOllxxxxb

Over mA-
Over mA+

12 OOllxxxxb

(Always 1)
DRIVER error
I -MAC error
L--------Overtime error

13 OOllxxxxb

X-ray tube flow switch error

X-ray tube thermal switch error
High-voltage tank thermal switch error
(Always 1)

14 OOllxxxxb

(Always 1)
Test mode
If current error
LInverter thermal switch error
-4 -

--
15 001 lxxxxb .-;--
_:
X-ray exposure permissible timeout error
Rotor timeout error
Preheat timeout error
XC error

16 OOllxxxxb

Rotor control relay error B

Rotor control relay error A
XC watchdog timeout error
Filament timeout error

- 295 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: XC ER OR LOG REFRENCE

PROCEDURES
17 001 lxxxxb

Run-sub coil abnormal current

Run-main coil abnormal current
Boost-sub coil abnormal current
Boost-main coil abnormal current

18 001 lxxxxb

(Always 1)
Backup memory error
.d OLP limit excess error
-:_- Abnormal focus relay ----
_-_- ---
-.

Bytes 19 to 20: Execution commands

Last received command code, command ID
Exceptions
“01” : Backup memory destruction detection at the time of start-up
of the firmware
“02” : KFG error detection at the time of start-up of the firmware
“03” : Watchdog timeout error
“04” : Excess HU value

Byte 21 : Operating mode

Normally “R” R: Remote
*
Byte 22 : Set tube voltage
If
1 . 80 kV
II .

II
2 . 100 kV
II .

“3” : 120 kV
“4” : 130 kV

- 296 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: XC ERROR LOG REFRENCE

PROCEDURES
Byte 23 : Set tube. current
New series
“A” : 50 mA II
1 . 50 mA
II .

“B” : 60 mA “2” : 100 mA

“C” : 70 mA 3 II .. 150 mA
It

. l “4” : 200 mA
. . “5” : 250 mA
“Y” : 290 mA “6” : 300 mA
.w “2” : 300 mA
-=m
-
__.- For existing models (XC firmware: C 100 10-05)

31h : 50 mA or 210 mA
32h : 60 mA or 220 mA or 100 mA
33h : 70 mA or 230 mA or 150 mA
34h : 80 mA or 240 mA or 200 mA
35h : 90 mA or 250 mA or 250 mA
36h : 100 mA or 260 mA or 300 mA
37h : llOmAor270mA
38h : 120 mA or 280 mA
39h : 130 mA or 290 mA
--i-
3A.h : 140 mA or 300 mA --

-;c -

3Bh : 150 mA
3Ch : 160mA
3Dh : 170 mA
3Eh : 180 mA
3Fh : 190 mA
30h : 200 mA

- 297 -
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: XC ERROR LOG REFRENC’E

PROCEDURES
Byte 24 : Set focus size
It1II .. small

“2” : large

Bytes 25 to 27: Set exposure time

“(25) (26). (27)” seconds

Bytes 28 to 32: Actual exposure time

“(28) (29) (30). (3 1) (32)” seconds

Therefore, this example is indicated as follows:

-rm- -
DFEC). 30 32 31 34 31 37 35 30 37 37 36 3F 3F 3F &3F
DFFO 3F 3F 50 53 52 34 37 32 34 30 33 30 33 36 38 37

Over kV and over mA- errors occurred at 1750 on February 14.

The setting conditions at this time were 130 kV, 110 mA, large focus, and 40.3 seconds.
The actual exposure time was 3687 seconds.

- 298 -
 No. SIIZOL322ED

SUBJECT: DATA ACQUI ITION SECTION,

CONFIGU
Two types of Xvision (GX) systems are available: one type includes the TSX-002A/l, 2, 3, 5 and
the TSX-002A/4, 6 (gantry type of the CGGT-01OB) in which the detectors and DAS are
separate units, and the other type has the detectors and DAS integrated into one unit.

In this manual, the descriptions for the Xvision (1.5-second scan system), the Xvision/GX (1 .O-
second scan system), and the X-vision/a20 (2.0-second scan system) are given at the same time.

Configuration

The data acquisitibn section consists of the following.

For details of configuration, refer to the configuration chart.

Detector L-
-e-s. _
----
Group A B --- -_
System Xvision (TSX-002A.0) Xvision (TSX-002A/4)
Xvision/a20 (TSX-002A/3) Xvisionkx20 (TSX-002A/6)
Xvision/GX

Main detector* 1 ---------_-_-------------- 1 set 1 set

Reference detector------------------------ 1 set 1 set (Common)

DAS
DAS chassis ___________-------------------- 1 set 1 set (Common)
&gyp pm*2 --------------------------- 28 24 (Common)
A-DC pm ---I_-----------_---------------- 2 2 (Common)
CONT pji&j-; ____________________________
1 1 --
.-i- -
BP pm ___________________________________
1 1 (Common)
DAS chassis __------ ~~~~~~~~~
--------- 1 SeT
INTEG PWB ------------------------------ 24
Integrated
FpR/mC pjif/-fJ ______________ 1
L____________

_ TIMING I/O pk;yB _______________________

1 -

Detector control unit ___------------I-------- 1 set 1 set (Common)

- 299 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: DATA ACQUISITION SECT10

CONFIGURATION
Power supply unit

DAf$ power supply ---~------------------- 1 set 1 set (Common)

Detector power supply ------------------- 1 set 1 set (Common)
(hereinafter referred to as “Detector power supply” although it is usually called HV power
supply)
*1: Note that the main detector of the A group differs from that of the B group (no
compatibility).
q. Although the number of C-AMP PWBs used in the A group differs from that used in the B
group, the~PWBs are the same and are compatible.
-z-z.
- .---
_-.--
*3: Note that the CONT PWB of the A group differs from that of the B group (no compatibility).

- 300 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: DATA ACQUISITION SECTION,

CONFIGURATION
(Configuration chart)

Data acquisition
Main detector
section

Reference detector I

DAS chassis BP PWB

*B: CHBl PWB
CHB2 PWB C-AMP PWB A: 28 PWBs B: 24 PWBs

iLB-----
I/O cable --------I

------------ r w-------m---- I
Detector control unit : Thermoregulator I
--------m---4 --------------a
-r -w-B--------- I
1 rSSR I
----------- 1
--w-w--------

l FPower
------------ 1

YPower supply unit I-- supply I

L---,-----,-d L------------A
------------ 1
rAC power cable I
I------------J
------------ --
1
TDC power cab36-
------,,21,--, I

-----------em ------------
1
/-Detector
L--------,----lpower supply i rPower supply
L-------,--,-A I
-T- -w-e--------
L rOutput
L.-.-----------J
coaxial cable
1
I

------------- II
L FDAS
I-------------I
timer

p.-...-.---,
Caution: The items above in the dotted-line boxes ;- i are included in the gantry in the
system configuration. Refer to the section-for-~~~-~antry when looking for the
components of these units in the part list.

- 301-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: DATA ACQUISITION SECTION,

CONFIGURATION
(Configuration chart)

Data acquisition Integrated main

section Xe detector
t detector and DAS

DAS DAS chassis I

INTEG PWB
24 PWBS
FPA/ADC PWB
- Reference detector

,.,._ TIMING I/O PWB 1

----
-_
Power supply-- l

AC power cable

DC power cable

DC fan cable

--------m-_-m ---e---m----

-------.-I---
L rOutput 1
coaxial cable I
L-------,----ml

Detector/DAS
. Mechanical parts
mounting parts
----------- 1 r ---w-w------- l
?Detector
L------------l control unit Thermoregulator
L--------,---,, I
---------me-_ I
T rSSR I
~------.---,-,,I

Caution: The items above in the dotted-line boxes : *--1----*1 :, are included in the gantry in the
system configuration. Refer to the sectio~-foC-~~e-gantry when looking for the
components of these units in the part list.

- 302 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION OF

THE DATA ACQUISITION SECTION
Overall operating principle

X-rays received by the main detector and reference detectors are converted to current signals and
then the signals ar.e integrated by the C-AMP PWB resulting in voltage signals. The voltage
signals at the channels (ch) are amplified by the ADC PWB so that the optimum gain of the
variable gain amplifier is obtained and are then converted to digital data by the ADC
(analog/digital converter).

The digital data is transferred to the ROIF PWB in the data transfer section via the CONT PWB.
The data is converted into serial data, then into an optical signal, and sent to the SOIF PWB in the
data transfer section of the gantry stationary unit. The serial data is converted into parallel data in
the SOIF PWB, and transferred through the cable to the SS/PRE PWB in the Navistation. The
data is pre-processed
- appropriately in the SS/PRE PWB, and reconstructed into the image -3by the
-7-..
fast reconstruction unit. --- -_
The data flow is as shown below.

Data acquisition __I Data transfer section

““............‘.............~ .‘........‘...‘.,
Cl> DATAOO-15 i ’ I ! CDOO-15 I
(( )
896 ch DATCLK ;
: Detector > DAS ; 1) ROF ‘!

~............................... . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . .

~ DDhl, IFPGO-1 /

<l> A group- -systems

--

<2> B group @stems --.-I-

Data flow for integrated type

. . . . . . .Data
. . . . . .acquisition
..‘............... . . . . .Data
. . . . . .transfer
. . . . . . . . .section
. . ..-.---.-.
. DATAOO- 15 i i CDOO-15 .
(( )
: Detector i ; DAS : DATCLK ; ’ CDCK
1) ROIF SOF ; ) ss/PRE
; 896 ch i ; 768 ch : DAThIOD, IFPGO-I, VWTRIG ; n PRETEST

- 303 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION. OF

INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS J
The operating principles of the components are described below. If different PWBs have the
same functions, only one typical PWB is explained as a representative.

“INTEG and C-AMP”, “FPA/ADC and ADC”, and “CONT and TIMING I/O” have the same
functions. The BP PWB is included in BACKPLANE.

Main detector
The main detector is an ionization chamber detector using Xe gas with 895 channels. The signals
are supplied to the C-AMP PWB of the DAS via low-noise coaxial cable.

Main detectors of the A group systems

896-channel output signals including the REF detector output signal via the main detector are
input to the C-&&U? PWB of the DAS by the low-noise coaxial cable. ----
Y_---_
Main detector of the B group systems
896-channel signals (including the REF detector signal via the main detector) are changed to 76%
channel output signals by bundling the channels during transmission in the low-noise coaxial
cable, and the 76%channel output signals are input to the C-AMP PWB of the DAS.
That is, the main detector transfers the 768-channel output signals to the DAS.
The next page shows how the channels are bundled. The channels are bundled at the PWBs for
channel bundling provided at the intermediate point of the low-noise coaxial cable.
There are two types of PWBs* 1 for bundling the channels; four PWBs are used in total.
One PWB can bundle 64 to 32 channels.

Caution* 1: Three CHB 1 PWBs and one CHB2 PWB are used.
The CKBl PWB is not compatible with the CHB2 PWB.
CkjB2 is used in the Refch section.

For the integrated type

Xe Detector
The Xe detector is an ionization chamber detector using Xe gas with 895 channels.
The signals are supplied to the’DAS via BACKPLANE PWB.
Channel bundling is performed in the BACKPLANE PWB to change 896-channel signals
(including the Ref. detector signal) to 768-channel signals.

Ref. detector
The Ref. detector has solid detectors at the sensor section and measures fluctuation of X rays in
the viewing direction. Output signals are input to the DAS via the BACKPLANE PWB of the Xe
detector using the low-noise coaxial cable.

- 304 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: DETECTOR CHANNEL BUNDLING,

B TYPE, INTEGRATED TYPE
Main detector (896 ch) output I) DAS (768 ch) input

REF detector output (0 ch) ) Och

.a Channel bundling
.T

- -_
---

122 ch __F_)
123 61 ch

125 ch :I--+
124 62 ch
126
127 ch
ch /\ 63 ch
128 ch / 64 ch
129 ch ’ 65 ch
130 ch / 66 ch
131ch / 67ch
Main detector .
.
output .
764 ch > 700 ch
765 ch - 701 ch
766 ch - 702 ch
767 ch / 703 ch ._..--
768 ch
769 ch -1- 704 ch
770 ch
771 ch --- 705 ch
772 ch --->
773 ch 706 ch
.
Channel bundling

891
890 cl1 1:
ch 765 ch
892 ch
893 ch - 766 ch
894 ch
895 ch ‘--- 767 ch

- 305 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: INTEG PWB (C-AMP PWB)

DAS

The DAS consists of three types of PWB (four types for A and B types) as described in “DATA
ACQUISITION SELECTION, CONFIGURATION”. It is inserted into the connector on the
detector BACKPLANE PWB. There are 24 INTEG PWBs to which the output current of the
detectors is input, and each INTEG PWB has a 32-channel integrating circuit.
Therefore, the DAS has the integrating circuit network of 24 x 32 Y 768 channels.
The first of these channels is used for the reference detector.
The channels are arranged in ascending order from right to left facing the detector/DA& and the
leftmost channel is 768.
(For the A type, the number of C-AMP PWBs is 28 and the number of channels is 28 x 32 = 896.)

INTEG PWB (C-AMP PWB)

(B-P PWB)

Each INTEG PWB is inserted into the connector on the detector BACKPLANE PWB.
The current input to the C-AMP is integrated for a specified time period by the integrator, and
converted into the voltage signal.
The integrator output signal for 32 channels of each PWB is connected via 16 analog buses to the
FPA/ADC PWB (to one of the two ADC PWBs for the C-AMP PWB).

The integrating circuit consists of an I------.-----..--...-..- *t

operational amplifier Al, an integrating
capacitor Cf, and a reset switch SWl.
The Rl on the input section is a protective
resistance. The SW2 on the output section
switches the channels to send the integrator RI ; I .-
Cf
output signal onto the analog bus. IS SW2i
- ~G+vo
The DC gain of the integrating circuit can be
calculated using the following formula.

Vo : Output voltage
Is : Input current
Is . At
v. = - - At : Integration time 1
Cf
(the time interval when the reset switch SW1 is set to OFF)
Cf : Integrating capacitor capacitance (100 pF)

The integration time At can be calculated by subtracting the reset time from the time for a single
view. For the TSX-002A/4, 6, when the view rate is 600 views/second, the time for a single view
is approximately 1667 its, and the reset time is fixed to 20 11s. Therefore, the integration time is
calculated as follows.

At = (1667 11s- 20 1~s)= 1647 lus

- 306 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: FPAIADC PWB (ADC PWB)

FPAJADC PWl3 (ADC PWB)

The FPALADC PWB is a sampling A/D converter for differential signal, and one FPA/ADC PWI3
is used.

The FPA/ADC PWB has an FPA (Floating Point Amplifier), which is a variable gain amplifier.
The FPA selects the optimum gain from among three types of gain (xl, x8, or x64) according to
the input signal level to amplify the signal. The analog signals amplified with the optimum gain
and the 2-bit gain data which indicates the selected gain type are output.

FPA gain regions and assignments are shown below.

Output 1‘
voltage
+10 v
.=
-_
---

-156.25 mV -1.25 v -101v Input’voltage

Underflow x64 X8 xl Overflow

DATA1 5 1 1 0 0 1
DATA14 1 0 1 0 1

The analog signals amplified by the FPA are sent to the ADC, converted to 14,bit digital data, and
processed as 16;bit data by including 2 gain bits. The data is transferred to the TIMING I/O
PWB (CONT P-W-B). --
_:--
For the ADC PWB, two PWBs are used; one ADC PWB is in charge of even numbered channels of
the DAS (0, 2, 4, ...) and the other is in charge of odd numbered channels of the DAS (1, 3, 5, ...). in
each of which A/D conversion is performed. The two ADC PWBs operate in parallel.

- 307 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: TIMING 110 PWB (CONT PWB)

TIMING I/O PWB (CONT PWI3)

The TIMING I/O PWB functions as an interface with the ROIF PWB in the data transfer section,
and also functions as a controller of the data acquisition sequence of the DAS.
The 16-bit data output from the FPA/ADC PWB is input to the TIMING I/O PWB and then
transferred to the ROIF PWB by the differential driver (RS422).

(1) Interface with the ROIF PWB

No. Signal name Signal flow Function

1 DATMOD s SIPRE L MODE 0 : NORMAL DATA
(DATA MODE) 4 ROIF ACQUISITION MODE
.a GTS 4 MODE 1 : TEST MODE
--- - Jf GOCP (Test patterns are outpa
.-
SOIF --h _---
-Jr, ROIF
-L
T-I/O
2 VWTRIG Servo -4 The data acquisition timing is controlled by
(VIEW TRIGER) (encoder) ROIF this trigger pulse.
\1 -J The DAS control sequence starts on the
GTS T-I/O rising edge of this signal.
Jr- When the gantry is not rotating, including
SOIF when the scan is being performed using
4. DCA with the gantry stopped, the pulses
generated in the GTS are output and the
DAS performs free running.
3 IFPAGQ-+- s SIPRE The gain of the FPA is controlled. _
IFPAGl - A AUTO mode is normally used. --G
GTS The gain of the amplifier is automatically
J changed according to the level of the input
SOIF analog signals. However, these control
4 signals can fix the gain forcibly at a certain
*ROIF level regardless of the input signal level.
4 Selection can be performed in data
GOCP acquisition using DCA.
k
ROIF IFPAGl IFPAGO Gain
4. 0 0 1
T-I/O 0 1 8
df 1 0 64
FPA/ADC 1 1 AUTO

- 308 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TIMING I/O PWB (CONT PWB)

No. Signal name Signal flow Function

4 DATCLK T-I/O This is a clock for latching DAS output
(DATA CLOCK) 4 signals. Data is sent to the ROIF
ROIF synchronized with rise of this signal.
5 DATAOO-DATA15 T-I/O (FPAMDC) 16-bit parallel data is output sequentially
\1 starting from channel 1 to channel 768.
ROIF In the normal data acquisition mode,
& channel 1 is for the reference detector
SOIF output signal.
4 The high-order 2 bits are gain bits, and the
s SIPRE low-order 14 bits are the output of the A/D
converter.

DATA1 5 DATA14 FPA GA%H

0 0 1
0 1 8
1 0 64
1 1 INVAL ID*

* When all of DATA 00 to 13 are ” 1‘I:

Overflow
* When all of DATA 00 to 13 are “0”:
Underflow

(2) DAS sequence control

*
The DAS sequence is started with rise of VWTRIG signal.

Xe detector
section

DAS section

2423--- --- 2 I

IClounting position of each DAS PWB (integrated type)

- 309 -
 Se detector 1 ?ie side connector 1 DAS side connector 1 DAS 1 C-AMP slot
0 to 15ch 1 1 I 1 Oto 31ch 1 Cl
16to 31ch 2
32 to 47ch 3 2 32 to 63 ch c2
48 to 63 ch 4
64 to 79 ch 5 3 64 to 95 ch c3
80 to 95 ch 6
96 to 111 ch 7 4 96 to 127 ch c4
112 to 127ch 1 8 I I I
128 to 143 ch 1 9 5 1 128 to 159 ch 1 c5
144 to 159 ch 10
, 160 to 175 ch 11 6 W fy l’l,.
176 to 191 ch 12
192 to 207 ch 13 7 192 to 223 ch c7
2()8 --
tn ---
371 -_-
ch 13
224 to 239 ch i; 8 224 to 255 ch C8
240 to 255 ch 16
256 to 271 ch 17 9 256 to 287 ch c9
272 to 287 ch 18
288 to 303 ch 19 * 10 288 to 319 ch Cl0
304 to 319 ch I 20 I
320
336
to
to
335 ch
351 ch
1 21
22
11 320 to 351 ch 1 Cl1
z
352
368
to
to
367ch
383 ch
23
24
12 352 to 383 ch Cl2
z
384
400
to
to
399 ch
415ch I
25
26 I
13
II
384 to 415 ch
I
Cl3
m
.+16
432
to
to
4ji ch
447 ch
23
28
14 416 to 447 ch Cl4 r
448
464
to
to
463 ch
479 ch
29
30
15
I
448 to 479 ch Cl5 D
480 to 495 ch 31 16 480 to 511 ch Cl6
496 to 511 ch 32
512 to 527ch 33 A 17 512 to 543 ch Cl7
528 to 543 ch 34
544 to 559 ch 35 18 544 to 575 ch Cl8
560 to 575 ch 36 I I

576 to 591 ch 37 19 576 to 607 ch Cl9

592 to 607 ch 38
608 to 623 ch 39 20 608 to 639 ch c20
624 to 639 ch 40
640 to 655 ch 41 21 640 to 671 ch c21
656 to 671 ch 42
672 to 687 ch 43 22 672 to 703 ch c22
688 to 703 ch -!4
704 to 719 ch 45 23 704 to 735 ch C23
720 to 735 ch 46
736 to 751 ch 47 24 736 to 767 ch C24
752 to 767 ch 48
768 to 783 ch 49 25 768 to 799 ch c25
784 to 799 ch 50
800 to 815 ch 51 26 800 to 831 ch C26
816 to 831 ch 52 a
832 to 847 ch 33 27 83% td,863 ch C27
848 to 863 ch 54
864 to 879 ch 55 28 864 to 895 ch C28
880 to 895 ch 56
 Xc detector Xe side Channel DAS side C-AMP
DAS
connector bundling PWB connector slot
Oto 15ch 1 CHB2 1 Oto 31ch Cl
16to 31ch 1 2 cn
32 to 47ch
48 to 63 ch
1
1
3
4 1
I
I
I
I
I
I c
64 tn 79 rh 1 5 I PFTFtl 3 I 79tn L= -h 1 c2
CD
8I.Ito 95ch
9E; to 111 ch
6
7 cu
112 ! to 127ch
128 11 to 143ch
8
9 3 64 to .95 cl1 c3 m
143 to 159 ch 10 I
I
c)
’ 160 to 175 ch
176 to 191 ch
192 to 207 ch
11
12
13
4

5
96th f”27ch

128 to 159 ch
C4

C5
-4
mm
208 to 223 ch 14
224 to 239 ch 15 6 160 to 191 ch C6
240 to 255 ch 16
256 to 271 ch 17 7 192 to 223 ch C7
_ 272 ,to287ch 1 18 1 I ~-
288 to 303ch 1 19 I 8 1 224 to 255 ch 1 C8
304 to 3 19 ch 20
320 to 335 ch 21 9 256 to 287 ch C9
336 to 351 ch 22
352 to 367 ch
368 to 383 ch
23
24
10 288 to 319 ch Cl0
2
384 to 399 ch 25 11 320 to 351 ch Cl1 m
A()() t,. n 1 5 A.
416 L” r
432
448
to 447 ch
to 463 ch 29 13 384 to 415 ch Cl3 Main detector D
464 to 479 ch 30 r
380
496
to 495 ch
to 511 ch
31
32
14 416 to 447ch Cl4
r
512
528
to 527 ch
to 543 ch
33
34
15 448 to 479 ch Cl5 128 channels are ..a 3 2 1 ( 128 channels 0
544
560
to 559 ch
to 575 ch
35
36
16 480 to 511 ch Cl6
bundled
intermediate
at the
5;“”
as
UY
“gj
.ccc
“U are bundled at 0
point of the (--AMP . . . “2 ;E;n$y;ziate
576 to 591 ch 37 17 512 to 543 ch Cl7 &a f; --* e-u
592 to 607 ch 38 cable. c1
cable.
608 to 623~1 39 18 544 to 575 ch Cl8 ! I
624 to 639 ch 40
640 to 655 ch 41 19 576 to 607 ch Cl9
656 to 671 ch . 42
672 to 687 ch 43 20 608 to 639 ch c20 .
688 to 703 ch 44
704 to 719 ch 45 21 640 to 671 ch c21 For B group systems, the 128 channels at both ends
720 to 735 ch 46
7-w to 751 ch 47 22 672 to 703 ch c22 of the main detector are bundled and therefore, the
752 to 767 ch 48
768 to 783 ch 49 CHBl 23 704 to 735 ch C23
detector channel numbers do not match the DAS
783 to 799 ch 50 channel numbers.
800 to 815 ch 51
816to831ch 1 52 1 Slots C25 to C28 of the DSA chassis are not used
832
848 tn Xd7 rh
IV ” . I -11
1 i;‘? 1 PURl
V.-Y A 24 73f tp 767 ch C24 (free). :,!’ ‘;
to 863 ch I ;;; I I
864 to 879 ch 1 55
880 to 895 ch 1 56
 No. SD201-322ED
SUBJECT: CORRESPONDENCE TABLE OF
DETECTOR CHANNELS TO DAS
CHANNELS (A GROUP)
-312-
 to
c
Ixs
IC PWB
ADCNO FPAch cm
-7 . . ....1..._..___..._.. 1 m
.2. .
3
2
..__.........._._._..__. 1 t)
..-.
4
.__.
..__....._..
......._.._..
1 __..._____.
2
2 _-._-.__...
2 =I
am
5
_.. . _..._.1 .--_.-.._..,
3
.6. . --..---m- .2... .... ..3..
7..
8
----- ._... ._.__.-__. 0 u 0
-__
.---9
:
......-......___-__.._.
...-..-.w
:
=r: m 0
1.....-._.___..
5
10 D -I
m zz
.---_ 2
----.~~~_..~.~~~_.._... 5
11
.._-_
12
1
-.----_.__._.----__-__.6
z
._..
13
__._
2 __...___.
-._...____.._ 6
7 2! 0 m
14
.. . .
.--.-..__._-_.---._-.
;
-... .._.._.._... 7
__._..m II cn
15
..._
16
.....-__
2
8
8
r
1._....... -___. 0 =u
17
. . .. . . .._.1__..........1.. cn 3110
A?
19
.. . .
... .....2.......-.._....
1
........__._._..._____. 2’ t) z
20 2 -..._.-__._.
..._..__._. 2 =r: u
;;
...1_. .. . ._..3.- D m
23
_...
2 ...._.-.3...
......._._.-
1
. .__.........._ 4
___. z 17
24
_.__. -.... ...2...____.._. 4
___. z c-a
25
.._..
g..
......._1_I.-._._..__5_.
2 5 m m
--.e.
.-.......-..._-_....-.
1
--.--.___.._._.____.__. r -I
28
.-...
29
_--.
2
-..-.-_._-._.-_...-_-_. i cn D
1._._._.._.._._.
7
30
-....
..._._._
2 ..__-______.
.---.-em_-. 7 -I tn
31
e..., -...-__.1...-._......8.. 0 r
CY m
32; 2 8.

D 0n
* For B group systems, channels 1 to 3 of the detector are bundled to one channel of the DAS (second channel of the DAS). CID
Two channels in the range from channels 4 tb 83 and from channels 768 to 895 of the detector are bundles to one channel of
the DAS.
 No. SD201-322ED
SUBJECT: CORRESPONDENCE TABLE OF
DETECTOR CHANNELS TO DAS
CHANNELS (INTEGRATED TYPE)
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: BACKPLANE PWB, POWER SUPPLY

(INTEGRATED TYPE)
BACKPLANE PWB

This PWB performs signal transfer from the detector to the DAS and also functions as the
backplane of the DAS. The outputs of the detector can be checked through the connector on the
backplane (on the next page).

I. Power Supply
1.1 Das power supply
The DA’S power supply is mounted on the rear of the DAS main unit as shown in figure 1
(Name of components of the data acquisition system).
The input voltages are single phase, 200 VAC, and +24 VDC (for the DC fan in the power
supply) and this power supply outputs the voltages of H5 V and +5 V required for the
DAS. The DAS power supply incorporates interlock hnctions such as the overcurrent
protection and overvoltage protection.! When an error occurs in any of the outputs, the
output is stopped and the green LED on the power supply goes off.

1.2 Detector power supply

The detector power supply is mounted diagonally to the right in back of the DAS main
unit as shown in figure 1 (Name of components of the data acquisition system). It cannot
be seen when viewed from the front of the gantry.
The input voltage of the detector power supply is single-phase 100 VAC, and output
rating is 200 VDWO mA. This power supply generates high voltage to be applied to the
internal-dectrode
-- plate of the Xe detector.
--
X-ray tube

SW326
(Brake release
switch)

CP320 Ref. detector

(Servo amplifier
circuit detector) Temperature controller
Xe detector section
Detector power supply

DAS power supply DAS section

Figure 1

- 315 -
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR PIN
NOS. AND DETECTOR CH
(CH OF THE DCA)
jr No.,
Jl J2 J3 J4 J5 87 1 Ja J9 JIO ill 112
A
-i 64.65 12a 160 192 224 256 2111 320 352 3a4 416
2 1.2.; 66.67 129 161 193 225 257 289 321 353 315 417
3 4.5 61.69 130 162 194 226 258 290 322 354 316 41a
4 6.7 70.71 131 163 195 227 259 291 323 355 317 419
5 a.9 72.73 132 164 196 22a 260 292 324 356 311 420
6 10.11 74.75 133 165 197 229 261 293 325 357 3a9 42L
7 12.13 76.77 134 166 1911 230 262 294 326 356 390 422
a 14.15 71.79 135 167 199 231 263 295 327 359 391 423
9 16.17 60.61 136 168 200 232 264 296 328 360 392 424
IO 18.19 a2.83 137 169 201 233 265 297 329 361 393 425
11 20.21 14.85 1311 170 202 234 266 291 330 362 394 426
12 22.23 a6.37 139 171 203 235 267 299 331 363 395 427
13 2T. 25 66.69 140 172 204 236 2611 300 332 364 396 42a
14 26.27 90.91 141 173 205 237 269 301 333 365 397 429
15 21.29 92.93 142 174 206 238 270 302 334 366 39a 430
16 30.31 94.95 143 175 207 239 271 303 335 367 399 431
17 32.33 96.97 144 176 201 240 272 304 336 3611 400 432
18 34.35 98.99 145 177 209 241 273 305 337 369 401 433
19 36.37 100. IQ1 146 178 210 242 274 306 333 370 402 434
20 38.39 102.103 147 179 211 243 275 307 339 371 403 435
21 40.41 104.105 148 180 212 244 276 30a 340 372 404 436
22 42.43 106.107 149 181 213 245 277 309 341 373 405 437
23 44.45 106.109 IS0 112 214 246 2711 310 342 374 406 431
24 46.47 110.111 151 113 215 247 279 311 343 375 407 439
25 48.49 112.113 152 la4 216 246 2110 312 344 371 408 440
50.51 114.115 153 1115 217 249 211 313 345 377 409 441
:: 52.53 116.117 154 la6 211 250 2112 - 314 346 371 410 442
28 34.55 lll.119 155 la7 219 251 2a3 315 347 379 411 443
29 56.57 120.121 156 181 220 252 2114 318 348 3110 412 444
30 511.59 122.123 157 119 221 253 285 317 349 311 413 445
31 60.61 124.125 151 190 222 254 286 31a 350 3112 414 446
32 62.63 126.127 159 191 223 255 217 319 351 313 415 447

L
Zotmectf No.
113 114 115 J16 117 Jld 120 121 J22 J23 124
-I
-i 44a 480 512 544 576 606 672 704 736 768.769 632. a33
2 44.g 4a1 513 545 577 609 641 673 705 737 770.771 1134.135
3 436 462 514 546 57a 610 642 674 706 731 772.773 136.137
451- 413 515 547 579 611 643 675 707 739 774.775 a3a.a39
: 452. 414 516 541 510 612 644 676 7oa 740 776.777 140. a41
453 415 517 549 Sal a13 645 677 709 741 771.779 142.143
?” 454 la6 516 550 512 614 646 671 710 742 7ao.711 144.145
a 455 4a7 519 551 533 615 647 679 711 743 782.713 ars. a47
9 456 4aa 520 552 514 616 641 630 712 744 714.7a5 141.649
IO 457 419 521 553 515 617 649 681 713 745 766.717 a5o.a51
11 458 490 522 554 5116 818 650 612 714 746 7aa.7a9 852. a53
12 459 491 523 555 5a7 619 651 613 715 747 790.791 154. a55
13 460 492 524 556 5aa 620 a52 6a4 711 74) 792.793 156. a57
I4 461 493 525 557 519 621 653 6115 717 749 794.795 a5a, 659
15 462 494 526 556 590 622 654 636 71a 750 796.797 a60.361
I6 463 495 527 559 591 823 655 667 719 751 796.799 662,663
17 464 496 32a 560 592 624 656 681 720 752 aoo.ao1 164.a65
465 497 529 581 593 625 a57 a19 721 753 a02 0a03 a66 sa67
t: 466 498 530 562 is4 626 65a 690 722 754 104.105 as:. 869
467 499 531 563 595 627 659 691 723 755 IO6.lO7 a7o.a71
E! 46a so0 532 564 598 62a 660 692 724 756 aoa.109 872, a73
22 469 501 533 565 597 629 661 693 725 757 810.111 874~475
23 470 502 534 566 593 630 aa a94 126 756 112.a13 I76.671
24 471 503 535 567 599 631 663 695 727 759 614.115 (71.179
25 472 504 536 561 600 632 664 696 7211 760 316.117 660,881
473 505 537 569 601 633 665 697 729 761 11a.ai9 aa2.111
:; 474 506 531 570 602 634 666 691 730 762 120. a21 a1141 a15
211 475 507 539 571 603 635 667 899 731 763 822.623 Ias. 181
29 476 501 540 572 a04 636 666 700 732 764 124.125 :11 818
30 477 so9 541 573 SOS 637 669 701 733 765 328, a27 190,891
31 4711 510 542 574 606 638 a70 702 734 789 128.129 392.693
E A&.. 511 5/3 -3l.L 607 1199 a71 193 735 181 130.1131 191c695

-316-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: BP PWB, POWER SUPPLY

1. Power Supply
1.1 DAS power supply
The DAS power supply is mounted on the rear of the DAS main unit as shown in figure 1
(Name of components of the data acquisition system).

The input voltage is single phase, 200 VAC, and this power supply outputs the voltages of
=t15 V, +5 V, and ISO+ V required for the DAS.

The ISO+S V is isolated from the other voltages for data transfer. This power supply also
feeds the +12 V for the DC fan on the DSA chassis. All of these five types of power
supply are generated through the series control method (also referred to as dropper
control method) with small ripple noise.

The DAS power supply incorporates interlock functions such as the overcurrent
protection and overvoltage protection. When an error occurs in any of the outputs, the
output is stopped and the circuit protector in the input stage is shut off to halt all , such as
an operational amplifier, from being operated with a single-polarity voltage.

The output which has caused the circuit protector in the input stage to be tripped OFF is
identified by the corresponding LED on the front panel of the power supply. The LED
corresponding to the output which has exhibited an abnormality first is lit in red. LEDs lit
in green indicate that the corresponding outputs are normal.

Caution: l Once the circuit protector in the input stage is tripped OFF, the output
voltage cannot be activated even if the circuit protector is turned ON again.
--4 To activate the output again, turn OFF the 200 VAC of the power supply,
turn ON the circuit protector, and then turn ON the 200 VAC again. <

l When the circuit protector is tripped OFF during normal operation, check
whether the load is normal and then follow the procedures above to turn ON
the power again. If the circuit protector is tripped OFF again, there is a
possibility that the fuse is blown or there is an abnormality in the circuits of
the power supply.

-317-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJEC SETTING AND CHECKING THE

,
DETECTOR SECTION
Checking the Temperature of the Detector
The check procedures described below must be followed only after the data acquisition
section has been turned ON for more than one hour.

(1) The temperature controller must read as follows:

a Process value indicator 39 to 41

l Set value indicator 40

kProcess value
indicator
Set value
indicator

E5CW IJ

Note: The temperature controller is common in the Xe detector and solid-state

detector.

_-

-318-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: SETTING AND CHECKING THE

DETECTOR SECTION
2. Setting the DAS Timer
Set the DAS timer located at the lower right in back of the gantry as required. For the
data acquisition section (detector, in particular), the heater must be turned ON for at least
2.5 hours to stabilize the temperature in the internal sections, By setting the DAS timer,
the data acquisition section is automatically turned ON without turning ON the system, so
that the system can be used immediately when the power switch on the console is turned
ON.

In the Xvision, the DAS timer causes the rotating unit to be turned ON.

(1) Name and function of each part of the DAS timer

Operation selection Setting

knob with ON/OFF indicators
indicator
I I
Frequency selection switch
Dial
Knob

Mounting
. .
hole
I I
Manual Bay for extra
switch setting indicator
- -* -

-319-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SETTING AND CHECKING THE

DETECTOR SECTION
Name Function
Operation selection knob Indicates the ON/OFF status of the control output.
with ON/OFF indicator Turning this knob clockwise permits the control output
to be switched to ON/OFF.
Setting indicators Two setting indicators are available: one is a setting
indicator ON (gold) and the other is a setting indicator
OFF (silver). These indicators permit the power of the
data acquisition section to be turned ON/OFF at any
time.
Dial Holds the setting indicators and displays the time in 1%
.c
minute increments,
Knob’ This knob permits the dial to be turned manually and
the current time to be displayed in l-minute increments.
Mounting hole For mounting the timer main unit with M3 screws.
Bay for extra setting Accommodates extra setting indicators not used.
indicator
Manual switch AUTO : Turns ON the data acquisition section as set
by the setting indicators to the dial.
ON : Supplies power to the data acquisition
section at all times, regardless of the setting
indicators set to the dial.
OFF : The data acquisition section is turned
ON/OFF together with the ON/OFF
--%
- operation of the power switch on the
console. -

Frequency selection Selects 50 Hz or 60 Hz.

switch

- 320 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: SETTING AND CHECKING THE

DETECTOR SECTION
(2) Setting procedures

0a When the gantry is turned ON for 24 hours

Set the manual switch to “ON”. The factory setting of the manual switch is
“OFF”.

When the power to the data acquisition section is controlled using the setting
indicators

Open the transparent cover and remove the two screws retaining the main unit.
Pull out the main unit, adjust the frequency selection switch (white) on the rear to
%he power frequency used in the local region, and set the arrow indicator to 50 or
60 correctly. After setting, remount the main unit as it was. The factory setting
is 50 Hz.

Set the manual switch to “AUTO”.

Insert the setting indicators ON (gold) and OFF (silver) into the dial slots at
which power should be turned ON and OFF. Note that the setting indicators
must not be inserted into dial slots within -+15 minutes from the current timer
position; turn the knob at the center towards the direction indicated by the arrow
to move it slightly away from the current time position and then insert the setting
indicators. The setting indicators for ON and OFF must be inserted alternately as
a pair.

When the setting of the setting indicators is completed, turn ON the system, turn
the dial at the center towards the arrow by 360” to confirm that the power-ON
-and power-OFF indications are switched as set by the setting indicators. -
:-
Finally, turn the knob at the center towards the arrow and adjust the current time
(minute and second) to the respective mark. Now, start operation.

0C When the timer is not used

Set the manual’switch to “OFF”. Note, however, that when the internal
temperature of the detector is not stabilized, rings and center point artifacts may
appear on the image.

-321 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Tools and Instruments
(1) Digital voltmeter

(2) Oscilloscope

(3) Standard tool set

2. Troubleshooting
2.1 Safety . notices
.Gs-
When troubleshooting the data acquisition system, be sure to open the circuit breakers on
the power board to shut OFF all power to the system.

2.2 Notices on work

Be sure to read this manual before starting work.

(1) Make sure all cables are connected correctly before supplying power.

(2) Do not touch a PWB with bare hands. Always wear clean gloves to handle PWBs. If
handled with bare hands, be sure to clean the PWBs with ethanol.

(3) Insert the PWBs into the slots correctly, seat them firmly, then fix the cover tightly
with screws.

(4) The---z
offset of the reference channel (Channel 0 of the DCA) is 300 to 6000 counts.

(5) Wait at least 1 hour for the offsets of the Xe detector channels (Channel 1 to Chsmnel
895 of the DCA) to stabilize (after the system power is turned ON).

(6) Do not drop any object (tools, screws, washers, etc.) into the X-ray window of the
main Xe detector.

- 322 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING
2.3 Major malfunctions and troubleshooting flows
“Major data acquisition trouble and possible causes” described later shows the relationship
between image errors and error causes. See the related troubleshooting flow for isolation
of errors.

Below are explanations of common check procedures..

(1) Check of the DAS supply voltage

(a) Make sure that the power cable and the I/O cables are connected correctly and
check voltages of h15 V and +5 V on the output TB of the DAS power supply
with the digital voltmeter (DVM).

(b) If the voltages are not within the specified ranges, adjust them with the VR
controls on the DAS power supply unit. (Refer to figure 2.1.)

(c) Check the ripple waveforms of the voltages with the oscilloscope.

Figure 2.1 Positions of the VRs for each output on the DAS power supply

(2) Check of the detector power supply voltage

Measure the voltage on the check terminal of the power supply using the digital
voltmeter. If the measured voltage is not within 200 V %l V, adjust it using the
adjustment VR.

(3) DCA test procedures

See software service manual (2D260-056E) for operation of the DCA.

- 323 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING
(3.1) Check of the X-ray output

GANTRY: INHIBIT, X-RAY: ON

(For gantry inhibition, select “1” (DISABLE) for “Rotation” of the DCA
“acquisition” command.)

(a) Data acquisition

1) Enter the “acquisition” command (OBJECT acquisition).

For Xvision, 1.5 s, 120 kV, 50 mA, S size, lo-mm slice, Large, Pure raw
data, Disable, Auto Mode are used.
.C

For Xvisionla20, 2.0 s, 120 kV, 50 mA, S size, 1O-mm slice, Large, Pure
raw data, Disable, Auto Mode are used.

2) Enter the “offset” command (OFFSET acquisition).

(b) Data output

To average all channel values in the projection direction

Command “change parameter”

PROJ. 1 to 900
CH. 0 to 895 (Channel 0 as the reference channel)
Direction channel
Acquisition data
Decimal
Offset correction
--i- Command “mean”
-
_-
Standards:

1) Xe detector center channels (channels 440 to 455)

2) REF detector (channel 0)

-324-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING
(3.2) Offset data check

GANTRY: INHIBIT, X-RAY: INHIBIT

For gantry inhibition, select ” 1” (DISABLE) for “Rotation” of the DCA

“acquisition” command.

See the description below for procedures to inhibit X-ray generation.

(a) Data acquisition (all by the “acquisition” command)

(b) Data output

Command “change parameter”

., PROJ. 1 to 900
CH. 0 to 895
Direction channel
Acquisition data
Decimal
Decoding only
Command “mean”

Standards:

Mean value 300 to 6000 (0 ch to 895 ch)

SD value 10 or less (127 to 767 ch)

20 or less (0 ch)

_--a <Reference>

SD value 15 or less (4 to 127 ch, 768 to 895 ch)

SD value 20 or less (1 to 3 ch)

- 325 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: CtdECK PROCEDURES IN DAS TEST

MODE
Xvision is provided with two test modes, DAS test mode and SOIF test mode, to help identify the
causes of abnormal images (if any) between the DAS system and optical data transmission system.

(1) DAS test mode _

The test patterns written in the ROM on the CONT PWB .of the DAS are output to check
whether data transfer from the CONT PWB to the SYPRE PWB is performed normally.
To do this, use the ‘a’ command of the DCA to select test mode and perform scan.
Then, use the ‘c’ command to select ‘none’ as the correction method. Finally, use the ‘m
command to check data.

Caution: Even if test mode is selected using the ‘a’ command, Auto mode is displayed due
to software bugs.

(2) SOIF test mode

The test patterns written in the ROM on the SOIF PWB of the DAS are output to check
whether data transfer from the SOIF PWB to the SS/PRE PWB is performed normally.
To do this, set SWl-4 of the SOIF to ON and press SW6 of the SOIF. Perform scan with
the ‘a’ command of the DCA (with any parameters) and check the data with the ‘m’
command.

ICaution: For the test above, also set correction to ‘none’ with the ‘c’ command. I

Test in (2)
I I I1
I I
CONT . > ROIF -----j-i-----+ SOIF . ) SSfPRE
I I A
Optical tr!ansmission
Test in (1)
t

- 326 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: TEST DATA PATTERNS (A GROUP)

ch o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lo 11 12 13 14 i5
0 1000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 OOOAOOOBOOOCOOODOOOEOOOF
16 1010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 OOlA OOlB OOlC OOlD OOlE OOlF
32 1020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0021 0028 0029 002A 00213 002C 002D 002E 002F
48 1030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0039 003A 0033 003C 003D 003E 003F
64 1040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 004A 004B 004C 004D 004E 004F
80 1050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 0058 005C 005D 005E 005F
96 1060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 006A OOGBOOGCOOGDOOGE0061? '
112 1070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 007A 007B 007C 007D 007E 007F
128 1080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 008A OOBB008C 008D 008E 008F
144 1090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0099 009A 009B 009C 009D 009E 009F
160 lOA OOAl OOA2OOA3OOA4OOA5OOA6OOA7OOA8OOA9OOAAOOABOOACOOADOOAEOOAF
176 iOB0 OOBl OOB2OOB3OOB4OOB5OOB6OOB7OOB8OOB9OOBAOOBBOOBCOOBDOOBEOOBF
192 iOC0 OOCl OOC2OOC3OOC4OOC5OOC6OOC7OOC8OOC9OOCAOOCBOOCCOOCDOOCEOOCF
208 lODOOODl OOD2OOD3OOD4OOD5OOD6OOD7OOD8OOD9OODAOODBOODOOODDOODEOODF
224 bOE0OOEl--OOE2OOE3OOE4OOE5OOE6OOE7OOE8OOE9OOEAOOEBOOECOOED.OOEEOOEF
240 bOF0 OOFk-OOF2OOF3 OOF4OOF5OOF6OOF7OOF8 OOF9 OOFAOOFBOOFCOOFDOOFE OOFF
256 IO00 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070 0080 0090 OOAOOOBOOOCOOODOOOEOOOFO
272 1100 0110 0120 0130 0140 0150 0160 0170 0180 0190 OlAO OlBO OlCO OlDO OlEO OlFO
288 I200 0210 0220 0230 0240 0250 0260 0270 0280 0290 02A0 0280 02CO 02D0 02E0 02FO'
304 1300 0310 0320 0330 0340 0350 0360 0370 0380 0390 03A0 03B0 03CO 03D0 03E0 03F0
320 1400 0410 0420 0430 0440 0450 0460 0470 0480 0490 04A0 04B0 04CO 04DO 04E0 04F0
336 1500 0510 0520 0530 0540 0550 0560 0570 0580 0590 05AO 05B0 05CO 05D0 05E0 05F0
352 1600 0610 0620 0630 0640 0650 0660 0670 0680 0690 06A0 OGBOOGCOOGDOOGEO06FO
368 1700 0710 0720 0730 0740 0750 0760 0770 0780 0790 07AO 07BO 07CO 07DO 07EO 07FO.
384 1800 0810 0820 0830 0840 0850 0860 0870 0880 0890 08A0 08B0 08CO 08DO 08E0 08F0
400 1900 0910 0920 0930 0940 0950 0960 0970 0980 0990 OSAOOSBO09CO 09DO OSEO09FO
416 )A00 OAlO OA20 OA30 OA40 OA50 OA60 OA70 OA80 OASOOAAOOABOOACOOADOOAEOOAF0
432 11300OBlO 0820 OB30 0840 OB50 OB60 OB70 OB80 OB90 OBAOOBBOOBCOOkDO OBEOOBFO
448 )COO OClO OC20 OC30 OC40 OC50 OC60 OC70 OC80 OC90 OCAOOCBOOCCOOCDOOCEOOCFO
464 IDO0 ODlO OD20 OD30 OD40 OD50 OD60 OD70 OD80 OD90 ODAOODBOODCOODD0 ODE0 ODFO
480 DE00 OElO OE20 OE30 OE40 OE50 OE60 OE70 OE80 OE90 OEAOOEBOOECOOEDOOEEOOEPO
496 DFOOOF10 OF20 OF30 OF40 OF50 OF60 OF70 OF80 OF90 OFAOOFBOOFCOOFDOOFEO OFF0
512 0000 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800 0900 OAOOOBOOOCOOODOOOEOOOF00
' 528 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 lAO0 lBO0 lCO0 lDO0 lEO0 lFO0
544 2000 210_Oic
2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 2AOO2800 2CO0 2DOO 2EOO2FO0
56C 3000 3106- 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 3900 3AOO3BOO3CO0 3DOO 3EOO3FOO
57e 4000 4100 4200 4300 4400 4500 4600 4700 4800 4900 4AOO4BOO4CO0 4DOO4EOO-:-4FOO
592 5000 5100 5200 5300 5400 5500 5600 5700 5800 5900 5AOO5BOO5CO0 5DOO 5EOO5FO0
60E 6000 6100 6200 6300 6400 6500 6600 6700 6800 6900 6AOO.6BO0 6CO0 6DO0 6EOO6FOO
624 7000 7100 7200 7300 7400 7500 7600 7700 7800 7900 7AO0 7BO0 7COO7DOO 7EOOIF00
64t 8000 8100 8200 8300 8400 8500 8600 8700 8800 8900 8AOO8BOO8COO8DOO 8EOO 8FOO
65f 9000 9100 9200 9300 9400 9500 9600 9700 9800 9900 9AOO9BOO9COO9DOO9EOO 9FOO
67: A000 Al00 A200 A300 Ad00 A500 A600 A700 A800 A900 AA00 ABOOAC00 ADO0 AEOOAI:00
681 BOO0 BlOO B200 B300 B400 8500 B600 B700 B800 B900 BAOOBBOOBCOOBDOOBE00 BFOO
701 COO0 Cl00 C200 C300 C400 C500 C600 Cl00 C800 C900 CA00 CBOOCC00 CD00 CEO0 CFOO
72( DO00 DlOO D200 D300 D400 D500 D600 D700 D800 DSOODA00 DBOODC00 DDOODE00 DFOO
73f EOOOEl00 E200 E300 E400 E500 EGO0E700 E800 E900 EAOOEBOOEC00 ED00 EEOOEFOO
75: 11000 FlOO F200 F300 F400 F500 F600 F700 F800 F900 FAOOFBOOFCOOFDOOFE00 FFOO
761 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
. 784 FFFE FFFD FFFB FFF? FFEF FFDF FFBF FF7F FEFF FDFF PBFF F7FF EPFF DFFF BFFF 7FFF
80( 0000 1555 2AAA 3FFF 4000 5555 6AAA 7FFF 8000 9555 AAAABPFF COO0D555 EAAA FFPF
811: 0000 1555 2AAA 3FFF 4000 5555 6AAA 7PFF 8000 9555 AAAABFFP COO0 D555 EAAA FFI?P
83: 0000 1555 2AAA 3FFF 4000 5555 6AAA 7FFF 8000 9555 AAAABFFF COO0D555 EAAA FFFF
841 0000 1555 2AAA 3FFF 4000 5555 6AAA 7FFP 8000 9555 AAAABFFF COO0D555 EAAA FFFF
861 0000 1555 2AAA 3FFF 4000 5555 6AAA 7PPF 8000 9555 AAAABPFF COO0D555 EAAA FI!I"F
881 0000 1555 2AAA 3FFF 4000 5555 .BAAA7FFF 8000 9555 AAAA BPFP COO0D555 EAAA FFFF

- 327 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: TEST DATA PATTERNS (B GROUP)

0 1 3 3 4 c 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ch J

0 0000 0001 OO;ll 0001 0002 0002 0003 0003 0004 0004 0005 0005 0006 0006 0007 0007
16 0008 0008 0009 0009 OOOAOOOAOOOB OOOB OOOCOOOC OOODOOODOOOE OOOE OOOF OOOF
32 0010 0010 0011 0011 0012 0012 0013 0013 0014 0014 0015 0015 0016 0016 0017 0017
48 0018 0018 0019 0019 OOlA OOlA OOlB OOlB OOlC OOlC OOLD OOlD OOlE OOlE OOlF OOlF
64 0020 0020 0021 0021 0022 0022 0023 0023 0024 0024 0025 0025 0026 0026 0027 0027
80 0028 0028 0029 0029 002A 002A 002B 002B 002C 002C 002D 002D 002E 002E 002F 002F
96 0030 0030 0031 0031 0032 0032 0033 0033 0034 0034 0035 0035 0036 0036 0037 0037
112 0038 0038 0039 0039 003A 003A 003B 003B 003C 003C 003D 003D 003E 003E 003F 003F
128 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 004A 004B 004C 004D 004E 004F
144 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 005B 005C 005D 005E 005F
160 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 006A 006B 006C 006D 006F
176 0070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 007A 007B 007C 0070 007E 007F
192 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 008A OOBB 008C 008D 008E 008F
208 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0099 009A 009B 009C 009D 009E 009F
224 OOAOOOAl OOAZ OOA3 OOA4 OOA5 OOA6 OOA7 OOA8 OOA9 OOAA OOAB OOACOOAD OOAE OOAF
240 OOBO OOH 0082 OOB3 OOB4 OOB5 OOB6 OOB7 OOB8 OOB9 OOBA OOBB OOBC OOBD OOBE OOBF
256 ooco OOCl oocz ooc3 ooc4 ooc5 OOC6 OOC7 OOC8 OOC9 OOCAOOCB OOCCOOCD OOCE OOCF
272 OODOOODl OOD2 OOD3 OOD4 OOD5 OOD6 OOD7 OOD8 0009 OODA OODB OODCOODD OODE OODF
288 OOEO OOEl OOE2 OOE3 OOE4 OOE5 OOE6 OOE7 OOE8 OOE9 OOEA OOEB OOEC OOED OOEE OOEF
304 OOFO OOFl OOF2 OOF3 OOF4 OOF5 OOF6 OOF7 OOF8 OOF9 OOFA OOFB OOFC OOFD OOFE OOFF
320 0000 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070 0080 0090 OOAOOOBO OOCOOODO OOEO OOFO
336 0100 0110 0120 0130 0140 0150 0160 0170 0180 0190 OlAO OlBO OlCO OlDO OlEO OlFO .
352 0200 0210 0220 0230 0240 0250 0260 0270 0280 0290 02A0 02B0 OZCO 02Do 02EO 02F0
368 0300 0310 0320 0330 0340 0350 0360 0370 0380 0390 03A0 03B0 03CO 03DO 03E0 03F0
384 0400 0410 0420 0430 0440 0450 0460 0470 0480 0490 04A0 04BO 04co 04D0 04E0 04F0
400 0500 0510 0520 0530 0540 0550 0560 0570 0580 0590 05A0 05B0 05CO 05Do 05E0 05F0 .
416 0600 0610 0620 0630 0640 0650 0660 0670 0680 0690 06A0 06B0 06CO 06D0 06E0 06F0
432 0700 0710 0720 0730 0740 0750 0760 0770 0780 0790 07A0 07B0 07CO 07D0 07E0 07FO
448 0800 0810 0820 0830 0840 0850 0860 0870 0880 0890 08A0 0880 08CO 08D0 08E0 08F0
464 0900 0910 0920 0930 0940 0950 0960 0970 0980 0990 09AO 09BO 09CO 09DO 09EO 09FO
480 OAOOOAlO OA20 OA30 OA40 OA50 OA60 OA70 OA80 OA90 OAAO OABO OACOOADO OAEO OAF0
496 OBOO 0310 OB20 OB30 OB40 OB50 OB60 OB70 OB80 OB90 OBAO OBBO OBCO OBDO OBEO OBFO
512 ocoo OClO oc20 oc30 OC40 oc50 OC60 OC70 OC80 OC90 OCAO OCBO OCCOOCDO OCEO OCFO
528 ODOOODlO OD20 OD30 OD40 OD50 OD60 OD70 OD80 OD90 ODAO ODBO ODCOODD0 ODE0 ODFO
544 OEOO OElO OE20 OE30 OE40 OE50 OE60 OE70 OE80 OE90 OEAO OEBO OECO OEDO OEEO OEFO
560 OF00 OF10 OF20 OF30 OF40 OF50 OF60 OF70 OF80 OF90 OFAO OFBO OFCO OFDO OFEO OFF0
576 0000 arm 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800 0900 OAOO OBOO OCOOODOO OEOO OF00
592 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 IA00 1BOO lCO0 1DOO lEO0 lFOO--t
608 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 2AOO 2BOO 2CO0 2DOO 2EOO 2FOO
624 3000 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 3900 3AOO 3BOO 3CO0 3DOO 3EOO 3FOO
640 4000 4100 4200 4300 4400 4500 4600 4700 4800 4900 4AOO 4BOO 4CO0 4DOO 4EOO 4FOO
656 5000 5100 5200 5300 5400 5500 5600 5700 5800 5900 5AOO 5BOO 5CO0 5DOO 5EOO 5FOO
672 6000 6100 6200 6300 6400 6500 6600 6700 6800 6900 6AOO 6BOO 6CO0 6DOO 6EOO 6FOO
688 7000 7100 7200 7300 7400 7500 7600 7700 7800 7900 7AOO 7BOO 7CO0 7DOO 7EOO 7FOO
704 8000 8100 8200 8300 8400 8500 8600 8700 8800 8900 8AOO 8BO0 8CO0 8DO0 8EOO 8FOO
720 9000 9100 9200 9300 9400 9500 9600 9700 9800 9900 9AOO 9800 9coo 9Doo 9EOO 9FOO
736 A000 Al00 A200 A300 A400 A500 A600 A700 A800 A900 AA00 ABOO AC00 ADO0 AEOO AFOO
752 BOO0 BlOO B200 I3300 8400 B500 B600 B700 B800 B900 BAOO BBOO BCOO BDOO BE00 BFOO
768 coo0 coo0 Cl00 Cl00 c200 c200 C300 c300 c400 c400 c500 C500 C600 C600 C700 C700
784 C800 C800 c900 C900 CA00 CA00 CBOO CBOO CC00 Cc00 CD00 CD00 CEO0 CEO0 CFOO CFOO
800 WOO DO00 DlOO DlOO D200 D200 D300 D300 D400 D400 D500 D500 D600 D600 D700 D700
816 D800 D800 D900 D900 DA00 DA00 DBOO DBOO DC00 DC00 DDOODDOODE00 DE00 DFOO DFOO
832 EOOO EOOO El00 El00 E200 E200 E300 E300 E400 Ii400 E500 E500 E600 E600 E700 E700
848 E800 E800 E900 E900 EAOO EAOOEBOO EBOO EC00 EC00 ED00 ED00 EEOO EEOO El“00 EFOO
864 FOOO FOOO moo FlOO F200 F200 F300 F300 F400 F400 F500 F500 F600 F600 F-700 F700
880 F800 F800 F900 F900 FAOO PA00 FBOO FBOO FCOO FCOO FDOO FDOO FE00 FE00 FFOO FFOO

- 328 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TEST DATA PATTERNS IN DAS

TEST MODE (INTEGRATED TYPE)
ch 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15
0 3000 OOF; OOFFOOFFFFOOFFOO0000 0000 FFFF FFFF AAAAAAAA 5555 5555 FFFF FFFF
16 3001 8001 2004 2004 0810 0810 0240 0240 4020 4020 1008 1008 0480 0480 0102 0102
32 7FFF 7FFF DFFF DFFF F7FF F7FF FDFF FDFF FF7F FF7F FFDF FFDF FI;F7 FFF7 FFFD FFFD
48 BFFF E3FFF ET’FF EFFF FBFF FBFF FEFF FEW FFBF FFBF FFEF FFTF FFFB FFFB FFFE FFFE
64 3000 0000 OOFFOOFFFFOOFFOO0000 0000 FFFF FFFF AAAAAAAA 5555 5555 FFFF FFFF
80 8001 8001 2004 2004 0810 0810 0240 0240 4020 4020 1008 1008 0480 0480 0102 0102
96 7FFF 7FFF DFFF DFFF F7FF F7FF FDFF FDFF FF7F FF7F FFBF FFDF FFF7 FFF7 FFFD FFFD
112 BFFF BFFF ECFFFEFFFJBFF FBFF FEFF FEFF FFBF FFBF FFEF F-F= FFFBFFFBFFFEFFFE
128 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
144 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FF'FDBFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF ITIF FFEF FFFB FFFE
160 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8002 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
176 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF R7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB HTE
192 0000 OOFFFFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
208 7FFF DFFF-F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE!
224 DO00 OOFi?FFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
240 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FTF7 FFFD BFFF EWF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
256 0000 OOFFFFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA5555 FFR a001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
272 7FFF WF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFTF FFFB FFFE
288 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AMA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
304 7FFF DFFF MFF FDFF J!F7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BF!?F EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
320 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AAAA5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
336 7FET DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
352 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AAAA5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 OlOZ-
368 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
384 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
400 WFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF FmT FBFF FEET FFBF FFEF FFFB HTE
416 0000 OOFFFFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
432 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
448 0000 OOFFFFOO 0000 FFFF AMA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
464 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEf'F FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
480 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FJTF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
496 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFm BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBFFFEFFFFBFFFE
512 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AAAA5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
528 7FFF DFlT.F+
F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
544 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FEW AAAA5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480-0102
560 7FFF DFIT F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF Ff?BFFFEFFFFBFFFE
576 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AAAA5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102'
592 7FFF DFFF MFF FDFF FF7F FFDF kTF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF m FFFEI FFFE
608 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AAAA5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
624 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
640 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102'
656 7FFF DFFF MFF FDFF FF.7FFFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF FFFF FBFF FEFT ETBFFFEFFFFBFFFE
672 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
688 7FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FFYF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
704 0000 OOFFFFOO 0000 FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
720 7FFF DWF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF FR'F FfIFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
736 0000 OOFFFFOO0000 -FFFF AAAA 5555 FFFF 8001 2004 0810 0240 4020 1008 0480 0102
752 ?FFF DFFF F7FF FDFF FF7F FFDF FFF7 FFFD BFFF EFFF FBFF FEFF FFBF FFEF FFFB FFFE
768 0000 0000 OOFFOOFFFFOOFFOO0000 0000 FFFF FlTF AMA AAAA 5555 5555 FFFF FFFF
784 8001 8001 2004 2004 0810 0810 0240 0240 4020 4020 1008 1008 0480 0480 0102 0102
800 7FFF 7FFF DFFF DFFF F7FF F7FF FDFF FDFF FF7F FF7F FFDF FFDF FFF7 FFF7 FFFD FFTD
al6 BFFF BFFF EFFF EFW FBFF FBFF FEFF FEFF FFBF FFBF FFEF FFEF FFFB FFFB FFFE FFTE
832 0000 0000 OOFFOOFFFFOOFFOO0000 0000 FFFF FFTF MA AAAA 5555 5555 FFFF FFFF
848 8001 8001 2004 2004 0810 0810 0240 0240 4020 4020 1008 1008 0480 0480 0102 0102
864 7FFF 7FFF DFFF DWF F?FF F7FF FDFF FDFF FF?F FF7F FFDF FFDF FFF7 FIT7 FFFD FFFD
880 BFFF BFFF-EFFF EFFF fiBFF FBFF FEFF FEFF FITIF FFBF WEF FFEF FFFB FFFD FFFE FFEE
- 329 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: DCA EXTRA DATA

1. Checking Extra Data in the DCA
If abnormal images (such as streak images) are generated, the causes can be identified
between the data transmission system and the other sections using raw data.

Structure of raw data (for one projection)

Channel No. I Description

0 I Reference data
1 - 895 1Image data
896 Tube position
8-Y Gantry rotation speed t Generated on the GTS
898 Projection No.
899 Number of single errors t ROIF to SOIF
900 Number of multi-errors

A single error or multiple errors indicate that there is an error between the ROIF and SOIF
of the optical transmission system.

Abnormal check data indicates abnormalities in data transmission from SOIF to SS/PRE.

<X-RA-YYNHIEUT setting procedures>

Position SW21 on the front of the X-ray converter to the “TEST” side. The main cirduits
are turned OFF to permit a sequence of operation without generating X rays.

Apparently, X-ray control and OLP calculations are performed normally; In fact, however,
X rays are not generated, helping check the control sections and adjust noise in the DAS
in a safe manner. ’

- 330 -
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: SINOGFMM
I. Startup
Select system maintenance from the pop-up menu and select DCA from the submenu.

S .... Sinogram command

Generates/displays a sinogram. The functions are listed below.

* Changing the sinogram display magnification

l Scrolling the sinogram display

l Data dump display

.e
l Data profile display

When this command is started, an interactive sinogram processing screen is displayed on

the MDS.

Projection scale

Sinogram display

Y scroll position indicator

Active ROI

-331-
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: SINOGRAM
(1) ROI manipulation

The ROI can be manipulated using the mouse or the soft keys.

IROI manipulation using soft keys I

By clicking the soft keys,[UP], [DOWN], [LEFT], and [RIGHT], the ROI moves up,
down, to the left, or to the right.

The step movement distance (in units of pixel) of the ROI can be toggled between
[+I] and [+lO].

(2) Changing the sinogram display magnification

When displaying a sinogram, either a sinogram having a l/l magnification ratio

(standard sinogram) or a reduced sinogram, having a l/4 (in area) magnification ratio,
can be displayed.

A reduced sinogram is initially displayed.

ISwitching --I
a standard sinogram to a reduced sinogram

Click the [x l/4] key. A reduced sinogram and a reference point (0, 0) is displayed.

Switching a reduced sinogram to a standard sinogram

-- _
Click the [x I] key. A rectangular ROI to be converted is displayed at the center of
the screen. Move the ROI with the mouse or the soft keys.

When the ROI is moved using the mouse, a standard sinogram is displayed when the
mouse button is released. When the ROI is moved by the soft keys, a standard --
sinogram is displayed when the [EXEC] key is clicked.

- 332 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: SINOGRAM
(3) Scrolling the sinogram

A sinogram is scrolled up, down, left or right.

Scrolling up or down

Click the up-down scrolling position indicator using the mouse. The position
indicator is highlighted and becomes active. When the position indicator is active, the
ROI is inactive and cannot be moved. To make it active, click a region other than the
position indicator.

Drag the indicator towards the center of the screen to the desired display location
using the mouse. When the mouse button is released, the indicator and sinogram are
scrolled towards the center of the screen.

Scrolling to the left or right

Scroll the indicator and sinogram by using the left-right scrolling position indicator.
The operating procedure is the same as that for up-down scrolling.

(4) Data dumping

The sinogram data is dumped.

1Data dumping 1

Click the [DUMY] key. A rectangular ROI (5 by 5 pixels) for data dumping is
displayed at the center of the screen, indicating that the system is in data dump status.

Mo+ the ROI to the analysis location using the mouse or the soft keys. When the
ROI is moved using the mouse, the result is displayed when the mouse button is-
released. When the ROI is moved using the soft keys, the result is displayed when the
[EXEC] key is clicked.

Dump processing can be performed continuously.

To terminate dump processing, click the [QUIT] key.

- 333 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SlNOGF!AM
(5) Profile processing

A sinogram profile is created.

IProfile creation I

Click the [PROFILE] key.

The soft key label is changed to [C/D], indicating that the system is in profile
processing status.

Move the line ROI to the profile analysis location. When the line ROI is moved using
the mouse, the result is displayed when the mouse button is released. When the line
ROIis moved using the soft keys, the result is displayed when the [EXEC] key is
clicked.

Profile processing can be performed continuously.

To terminate profile processing, click the [QUIT] key.

Setting of center value and step-size

When changing the center value and step-size (volume) of the profile, click the [C/D]
key. An interactive screen is displayed for setting them. Enter the center value and
step-size.

Example: When setting the center value to 100 and the step-size to 4000, enter
” 100, 4000”.
The default values are a center value of 0 and a step-size of 2000.
- .-%
--
(6) End sinogram processing

In general processing (other than data dump and profile processing), click the [QUIT]
key.

- 334 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

JECT: DAS, DATA TRANSMISSION

FUNCTION TEST
t ... . DAS data transmission function test command (for the Xvision series only)

Data acquisition is performed, and of the acquired data, the items required for testing the
DAS data transmission function are displayed.

I. Operating Procedures
When the t command is executed, the acquisition parameters are listed for check as shown
below.
--
* * * * * DCA Acquisition * * * * *
Scan Time 1.5s (1.0s or 2.0s)
Voltage 120kV
Correct 5OlllA
FOV LL
Width 1Omm
Focus size Large
Data type Pure raw data
Rotation Enable
DAS mode Auto mode
kV/mA DSP OFF

Then, when the LED of the [Start] button is lit; press the [Start] button to perform data
acquisition. For the acquired data, the contents are listed in the format below.
- .- -x

***** Test ofDAS ***** --

MEAN (Och) 9999
MEAN (438-458 ch) 9999-9999
SD (Och) 99.99
SD (438-458 ch) 99.99
Tube pos.(896ch) XX
Rot.speed (897ch) OXAAA-OXAAA
PROJ DATA (898ch) XX
ERROR ch (899ch) XX (999,999,999, ,,.proj) For 3 or more NGs
ERROR ch (900ch) XX (999,999,999proj) For 3 NGs
Check data (909ch) XX (999,999proj) For 2 NGs
Check data (910ch) XX (999proj) For 1 NG
Check data (91 lch) XX For OK

Sinogram OK (y/n)

- 335 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: DAS, DATA TRANSMISSION

FUNCTION TEST
Press “y” to display the sinogram of the acquired data or “n” to quit.

* 999 is decimal representation, AAA is a hexadecimal representation, XX is OK or NG.

2. Contents Displayed and Judgment

MEAN (ch 0) Mean of all projection data for ch 0

MEAN (ch 438 to 458) Mean of all projection data for ch 438 to 458

SD (ch 0) SD value of all projection data for ch 0

SD (ch 438 to 458) SD value of all projection data for ch 438 to 458

tube pos. (ch 896) Checks the information concerning the tube position (ch
896) for all projections. If all data fall into the range
from 0 to 899 (or 1199) , OK is displayed. If there are
data outside this range, NG is displayed.

Rot.speed (ch 897) Checks the information concerning the gantry rotational
speed (ch 897) for all projections and displays the
minimum and maximum values.

PROJ DATA (ch 898) Checks the information concerning the projection
number (ch 898) for all projections. If all data fall into
the range from 1 to 990 (or 1320) , OK is displayed. If
there are data outside this range, NG is displayed.
--
ERROR ch (ch 899/900) When all projection data for ch 899/900 are 0, OK is
displayed. If there are non-zero data, NG is displayed
with the projection numbers (up to 3).

Check data (ch 909/9 10/9 11) : When all projection data for ch 909/9 1O/9 11 are normal
values, OK is displayed. If there are data which are not
normal values, NG is displayed with the projection
numbers (up to 3).
The normal values for each ch are listed below.

Ch 909 ... ox5555

Ch 910 ... oxAAAA
Ch 911 ... oxFFFF

- 336 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MAJOR DATA ACQUISITION

PROBLEMS AND POSSIBLE
CAUSES
Major data acquisition problems and possible causes

Streak Shifted Large Blurred PIKE

shower CT image streak timeout
value SD error

Xe detector body 0 0 0 0
Reference detector 0 0 0
INTEG PWB 0 0 0 0 0
FPA/ADC Pv\rB 0 0 0 0
TIMING I/O PWB 0 0
DAS power supply 0 0 0 0
Power cable 0 0
Temperature controller 0
Heater 0
Thermal sensor 0
ROIF 0 0 0
GTS 0
s SIPRE 0 0 0
FRU 0 0 0
X-ray optical system 0 0 0
X-ray system 0 0 0 0
Detector power supply 0 0 0 0
Flowchart 338 339 340 341 342 343

- 337 -
 cn
c
II Ring image II
CD
t
m
c)
-I
aI
Defective hea! controller,
heater, or thermal sensor

. z
Check the appearance of slits
(wedge slit, beam trimmer slit,
and main detector slit).
c)
I
Flaw on beam trimmer =
Wedge ‘slit flaw slit or main detector slit
D
I
c)
Trouble in X-ray optical Defective
or beam
main’detector
trimmer m
-I
XJ
I IVES I 0
Exchange the INTEG PWB in
the slot where a defective
Improper connection
cables or connectors
of
of the I c
channel
adjacent
was found with the
normal INTEG PWB
ROIF PWB, TIMING
PWB, and/or units
l/O
I
m
i and compare their data. I r
m
CD
li=
0
0
detector -I
 No. SD201-322ED
SUBJECT: STREAK SHOWER
TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART
 No. SD201-322ED
SUBJECT: SHIFTE 1 CT VALUE
TROUB mESHOOTING FLOWCHART
 f D&dive INTEG PWB 1

FRWSC system
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MOIRE PATTERN

TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART

i&!-kti NG

Defective
!
X-ray tube
OK

NG
t

IAcquire
and record
offset
the
data by the
offset SD.
DCA
I

the INTEG PWB for x

/ a channel whose offset SD
is large with a new one.
hannel moves?'
--yEs

No
“\,

Defective Xe detector

- 342 -
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: PRE TIMEOUT TROUBLESHOOTING

FLOWCHART

NO Check the FRU and SS

light during data )I systems. I

- 343 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING XE
DETECTOR RING IMAGE
The troubleshooting procedures described below apply to ring images at Xe detector sites.
Follow the troubleshooting procedures step by step in order. Note, in particular, that step 0 is
required.

0. Checking Basic Items

1) DAS timer operates normally as set.

2) The heater of the Xe detector is intact and the temperature is as set.

3) Correction data for water (NRA) and air are not old.

4) The HV and DAS power outputs are normal.

5) The DAS and FRU are not defective.

7) The air conditioner in the scan room indicates a temperature within f2”C of the set
temperature.

8) The gas pressure in the Xe detector is within the normal range.

1. Reproduction Test Using a Water Phantom

Check whether the ring images observed in clinical practice are reproduced using a water
phantom. --_ -
--l.--..
- -.
Be sure toaquire this image because it is used as a reference image in subsequent
inspections.

Acquisition parameters : FOV, slice thickness, kV/mA, etc. must be the same as those
used when ring images were obtained. Two to five images .
should be acquired.. The important point is to, determine
whether ring images are obtained under the same acquisition
parameters as those used during clinical examinations.

Object : Object one-size smaller than the scan FOV with a water
phantom

- 344 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING XE
DETECTOR RING IMAGE
2. Reacquiring Correction Data
Changes over time may be the reason for ring images. If correction data is old, reacquire
air calibration or NRA. If this eliminates ring images, the normal range is satisfied. (The
correction data should be reacquired every 2 weeks for air and every 3 months for NRA.)

Be sure to record the previous date of water and air acquisition. This is done to estimate
the length of ti-me for which the correction data is valid. Also record the tube OLP. For
areas in whichring images appear, in particular, perform warm up 3 times (from the status
in which the tube is cooled down sufficiently) and then reacquire NRA or air calibration.

3. Isolating Ring Factors

Perform the following 3 ring tests to isolate the ring factors. Check whether the same
kind of ring images as those obtained during clinical practice or reproduced at step 1
above appear.

Caution: The FOV, slice thickness, and kV underlined in the acquisition parameters
below must be the same as those used when ring artifacts were obtained during
clinical practice. S/10/120 kV used in this manual is only an example.

(1) Test for focal spot motion ring artifact (OLP-dependent ring, continuous-exposure
ring)

Method : Perform scan at least 1 hour after the last exposure,

Acquisitiy-parameters : 100 scans with S/10/120 kW2.0 s/150 mA/FC70. The

_-y7- _..
--. -
object used must be one-size smaller than the FOV.
(SS phantom is used in this example.)

- 345 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING XE
DETECTOR RING IMAGE
(2) Test for size-dependent ring

Method : Scan a water phantom one- or two-sizes smaller than the

FOV (if the FOV is M or larger).

Acquisition parameters :‘ S/10/120 kV/2.@s/tubecurrent as listedpin the table

below/FC70

Table: Optimal tube current (in units of mA.), Caution: 4 120 when a phantom is
available:=-
-:_
Phantom
FOWlice thickness M 1 s 1 ss 1 $120
L/10, 7 250 250 1
M/10,7 I 1 250 1 100 1
M/5 or less I 1 250 1 250 1
s/10, 7 I I 1 150 I 100
S/5 or less I I 1 250 1 200
SW0 or less I I I I
100

:-
-- ---.. -
--- - --

- 346 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING XE
DETEC-iOR RING IMAGE
(3) Test for partial-volume ring

Method : Perform air calibration at S/l O/l 20 kV. Set the edge of the
phantom to the center of the slice (so that the light beam
from the projector runs over the edge of the phantom).

Acquisition parameters : S/10/120 kW2.0 s/150 mA/FC70

Use an object one-size smaller than the FOV. If the
-L phenomenon appears with size S and a phantom in which an
S phantom and SS phantom are integrated is available, set
-.- the object on the border between the S phantom and SS
phantom.

Slice thickness Slice thicyknessvr

Y

X-ray beam X-ray beam

Center Center
Projector Projector
light beam light beam

Phantom Phantom

For -L-
normal
-- phantom For S and SS integrated phantoms
-“,.
_---- _-
-. -
Phantom setting position

4. Checking the Optical System

(1) Check the optical system (wedge, upper slit, beam trimmer, detector X-ray incident
plane) for flaws or foreign matter visually and by touch, while taking care not to
damage the optical system.

(2) Checking the alignment of the optical system

l For the front and rear of the tube, left and right alignment, and the check
procedures, refer to the appendix.

l For the beam trimmer alignment and check procedures, refer to the appendix.

- 347 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING XE
DETECTOR RING IMAGE
5. Filming
(1) Image filming

~1~1~1

1st film .i 2nd film 3rd film

Circles 0 & the 1st film indicate images obtained through reproduction test using a
water phantom.

Triangles A in the 1st film indicate images obtained through reproduction test using a
water phantom after NRA acquisition.

Frames up to the 2nd frame in the 2nd to the 3rd films indicate images obtained
through focal spot motion ring artifact test (every 10 frames)

The 4th and 5th frames in the 3rd film indicate images obtained through size-
dependent ring test.

The 7th frame in the 3rd film indicate images obtained through partial ring test.

Caution: The above is an example in which filming is performed in g-frame format.

For filming in formats other than the g-frame format, an easy-to-understand
format should be used as in the example above.

-L--

-:, -

- -._

---
- --

- 348 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING XE
DETECTOR RING IMAGE
(2) Tube alignment, beam-trimmer alignment film

Be sure to send three tube alignment films: COLD, HOT, and alignment specification
temperature.

For tube COLD

-.- For tube specification
temperature
For tube HOT

Be sure to send a beam-trimmer alignment film which permits the beam trimmer
alignment to be checked and correct projection of the X-ray beam at the center of the
detector to be checked.

Beam-trimmer alignment film

TV _

--A. -

- I.

---
- --

- 349 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

(CURRENT Xvision)

VME I

3.5" HDD I

--- - --iL (IWWIER) j-

-------

l --
----
RSLV -!
L ------(RTRU) j

Figure 1- 1 System block diagram (CKCN-OOGB (1 O-slot type)/2 and 3, when the PSI,
new Naviport is used)

-350-
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTE VI BLOCK DIAGRAM (WHEN

PDl2, C PI, AND ADI ARE USED)

ETHERNET2
-
GANTRY -#lCT-VISION ’ KEY
SOIF ‘-1 RS-422 - (MASTER)
, l

I EL TOUCII 1

i IMACER i
I- ------ -I

---
TKO HDDs are proyided for --- --Ir
CKCN-OOGB/2A and 2B.
OPI f--y y--y;
1 i Ii-1 -; ‘-AL -----
WINDOW_I
! !
1 1w-----m_ i L-i
f )
L ----
KEY 1
LJ 15’ ----
! MON 1 TOR! L--d- . MOUSE 7
L------I L-----J

m----m I

[ RSLV -!
1_--- (RTRU)
--- _f
I- ------ -----

L------ SF1 -j---;“s F I EX p-

------_ --r-------l
~1Pf210MS1
e----wy A40 Dl--- +Si -----
$1/4 i-.-----i
--

_I

Figure l-2 System block diagram (CKCN-006B (Full-slot (16 slot) type)/2 and 3, when
PD12 is used)

- 351-
 c/a
c
cCR
POWERCONT
1 TRAM

m
c)
-I
mm
EIS”
it
d
THERMAL
FILTER
LzFrl++
! TB
CNN,
&J
CHASSIS

MONITOR
x4

WV,,
SENSQR

I is
1COhmOL ,-qLA supplied with the

1 ’ +12Y AD12

JJDDxl -lo
xz
HDDx lor 2
mm
2J

I Caution: Be careti because the AC line is 200 V, unlike the conventional console. I

Figure l-l Schematic of the power supply system

 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: POWER ON/OFF SEQUENCE

Power controller

The power controller controls power ON/OFF and is contained in a box.

The POWER ON sequence is as follows:

Power switch ON

Console PtWER ON
i 1 (Approximately 1 second)
-=-4
GTS POWERGN (Gantry/couch)

The POWER OFF sequence is as follows:

Power switch OFF *

GTS PO&R OFF

I
1 (Timer Ry9 controls the time from GTS POWER OFF
I to Console POWER OFF. Usually 1 second.)
Console POWER OFF

. .
CoNsoLE YaJEK ON CONSOE PowER ol?lT
POWER p(xJElxSUPPLYON
POWERSW

EMERGENCYSW

GTS EMERGENCY -\oFF

\
RY2,RY3

RY4

RYS

RY6

RY7

RY8

RY9

RYlO

RYl,RY12

RYll

RY13 1 I

Figure l-l Timing chart of power ON/OFF sequence ,

-353- \
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: PWB LAYOUT IN THE STANDARD

Xvision CONSOLE
Chassis

The chassis is provided with Kl-size (type 1) PWBs and is referred to as “slot B”.

i
-i

Figure l-l Front view of the chassis

The standard composition of these PWBs is shown below:

Table l-l PWB composition

Slot number PWB name 1 PWB size 1 VME 1 HS 1 Remarks

BOl SM + SMEX I Kl (type 1) I 0 I I Fixed
B02 WPRE Kl 0 0 Fixed
--_- -
B03 -. YPDI2 or PSI IS1 0 0 Fixed
B04 #l CT-VISION (MASTER) 1 Kl 1 0 1 0 1Fixed
B05 IM3 1 Kl IO loI
B06 RMST (RTRU) I Kl IO lol
B07 I Kl I 0 I 0 I Option
B08 I Kl I 0 I 0 I Option
B09 I Kl I 0 I I Option
BlO I Kl I O I I Option

- 354 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: PWB LAYOUT IN THE STANDARD

Xvision CONSOLE
Three types of PWB to be mounted at the rear of the motherboard are given below with their
functional descriptions.

11.417[269.99]

0: 10: :o: :o: :o: :o: :o: :o: :o: :0

C VT3A s
I-a

!-I@!- @h---
! I ! I I
I I I i i
iii i I
iii ii
iii i i:
/-i i ii

HST CLK
r
-I !-! !- i-!,
! ! ! i J!
! ! i ! 1)
1 1 ) f

i i i i i i
iiii iiii ii
-ieii i ii ii ii
I

lIzzzz% Connection port

--
zIf Figure l-2 PWBs at the rear of the motherboard

(1) CLK : System clock generation of the HS bus (can be used only for CKCN-006B/2 and 3)

(2) HST : Termination of the HS bus (can be used only for CKCN-006B/2 and 3)

(3) VT3A: Termination of the VME bus (can be used only for CKCN-006B/2 and 3)

- 355 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PWB LAYOUT IN THE STANDARD

Xvision CONSOLE
Termination of the VME and HS buses other than the daisy-chain line is given below.

Data and address control

Termination of the HS system clock is given below.

HS bus system clock

- 356 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: CONSOLE OF XvisionlSP

I m CKCN-006B14
1 .I Outline
This section describes the units listed below:

cl> Power controller (PC),

<2> Power supply (PS)
<3> Chassis (CHASSIS) ... The PWBs are described in another section.
<4> Magnetic disk drive (HDD)
<5> Connector panel (CNN)
<6> Transformer
<7> Service connector panel (referred to as the “maintenance panel”)

Front view

1- -

_-_

--

--
_-

Rear view

<6>

Figure l-l Internal view of the Navistation

- 357 -
 POWER
CONT
00 00 00 oo-
FILTER w u w 7
200 VAC' 1 1 -1 ’
OUTPUTx4(;;;I, 48;,
1
7 EI-r- 0
6 0
d z

I --.
THERMAL MONITOR
SENSOR
VI
0
r
” I
M
d-!i
i i f MONITOR POWER is
supplied with the
m
1CONTROL I ’
i BLOCK ” o-.-P
0-e...J near TB.
E TT OPI
FER . POWERSUPPLY MOTHERBOARD

HDDXZ or 3

1
Caution: Be careful because the AC line is 200 V, unlike the conventional console.

Figure l-2 Schematic of the power supply system

 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: CONSOLE OF XvisionlSP

VME HS

I,, SM,
I I I .
I
II ), rBCA
J I 1
I I SSB
SIO ---I. I
w-B-- x 2
MOUSE
I
--I-- --- -
11 NCB I
p l/4" MO&---$
w-v-- J
L
----
SF1 --j--- I ’ { WINDOW

DRll x 4
----
i(MASTER)j
I
-- L-,
E T-VISION, am-+ Im(-JER(Note '1
I( DAUGH- t-
l- we- TER&
---- --I 1
.--432 --I- r5-
ICT-VISION1 --1,'MONITOR_:
-----_
---?(MASTER)~---~~-~P~--~
L- ---I
-T “Tl-rIJ r----1

r-- L--l
I I I ~--llMoUSE ;
1 I a---
----
I L---.+/--
CT-VISION, ,WINDOW_I
---
I(DAuGH- i ----
I t ---&EYBOAR~
L --;bi!d I +-.-- --- 1"
f I- -------j PANEL I
L-w-2
----+ ImGER(Note 1)
a----

i----i 1~210s I---- -----

f- L-,-A
1 /--'I--71
"1 IP21OS y- mm--

Note 1: Only one imager

connected for
automatic filming

Figure l-3 System block diagram (CKCN-006B/4A)

- 359 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT:
\ CONSOLE OF Xvision/SP
1.2 Chassis
The chassis has slots A and B in which PWBs of two different sizes are mounted:’

<I> VME size : Slot A

<2> Kl size (type 1) : Slot B

+7l= c7c=2i=kr=w3F-+
III II !llrllIllI~I

7- -- Figure l-4 Front view of the chassis

---.
-.- -- _--

-360-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CONSOLE OF XvisionlSP

The VME bus is connected in slots A and B of the motherboard. The HS bus is connected
in slot B of the motherboard. In addition, the local bus is connected between slots with
the same pair-stitch numbers as slot B.

The standard composition of these Pubs is shown below:

Table 1- 1 PWB composition (CKCN-OOBB/LCA)

Slot number 1 PWB name 1 PWB size 1 VME 1 HS I Pair stitch. I Remarks
A01 I SM _ I VME loI I I
A02 I BCA‘=-. I VME lol I I
A03 (SFI) - VME 0 Option
A04 VME 0
BOl I #l IM3 I Kl we 1) I 0 I O I I
B02 SS/PRE Kl (type 1) 0 0 1
B03 #2 IM3 Kl (type 1) 0 0 1
B04 PSI Kl (type 1) 0 0
B0.5 1 (QUAD-11) I K1@YPe1) I OIOI 2 I Option
B06 # 1 CT-VISION (MASTER) Kl (type 1) 0 0 2
B07 (CT-VISION (DAUGHTER)) Kl (type 1) 0 0 3 Option
B08 1 (#2 CT-VISION (MASTER)) Kl (type 1) 0 0 3 Option
B09 1(#2 CT-VISION (DAUGHTER)) 1 Kl (type 1) ( 0 1 0 1 3 Option
BlO 1RMST (RTRU) I K1(QPe 1) I O IOI I
Bll (RSLV (RTRU)) Kl (type 1) 0 0 4 Option
B12 (RSLV (RTRU)) Kl (type 1) 0 0 4 Option
B13 IP21OMS Kl (type 1) 0 0
B14 (Ipg$ Kl (type 1) 0 0 Option
B15 ($2 10s) Kl (type 1) 0 0 Option
B16 I (IP21OS) Kl (type 1) 0 0 Option

- 361 -
 No. SD201-322ED
SUBJECT: CONSOLE OF Xvision/SP
The layouts of the connectors on the motherboards in slots A and B are s lown below.
” I
1
PI z” 0
*EC=-
VI 1
2s + 0
f”
1
m
0
0 -.-
1
UI I El
& JS 20 L3 0
1
Q
I
0 0
n
z
0
0
>-
f
0
-I:
- 362 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CONSOLE OF Xvision/SP

Six types of Pubs to be mounted at the rear of the motherboard are given below with
their functional descriptions.

131 6 BOl

Cable
. I I , ,

CMB2 CLK

t I I I I I I I I 1

l22kmzl: Connection port

Figure 1-6 PWBs at the rear of the motherboard

(1) VTlA : Termination of the VME bus

(2) VT2 : Termination of the VME bus

(3) CLK :%ystem clock generation and termination of the HS bus (including
-‘Termination of the HS system clock)

(4) VT3A : Termination of the VME bus

(5) HST : Termination of the HS bus (including termination of the HS system clock)

(6) CLT : Termination of the HS system clock

- 363 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: CONSOLE OF XVISIONISP

Termination of the VME and HS buses other than the daisy-chain line is given below.

Data and address control

Termination of the HS system clock is given below.

T 22052

I---T
HS bus system clock

33osz

- 364 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: CLK
CLK

(1) Outline

The PWB for the CKCN-006B/4 generates a system clock for the HS bus and serves as the
termination of the HS bus.

The PWB for the CKCN-006B/2 and 3 generates a system clock for the HS bus.

(2) Functions

cl> Generates a system clock for the HS bus.

<2> Serves as the termination of the HS bus.

l The termination of the HS bus is given below.

--c Data‘and address control

---c Clock

_-
--

-e-

Figure 1

- 365 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: BUS ARBITRATION

PO1 to P90: Jumper pins for VME bus arbitration and interrupt control

The VME buses accommodate a maximum of 20 DTB masters. Arbitration of

VME buses is required during data transfer between the DTB master and slave. For
this arbitration, this unit employs option ONE (single-level method). In this
method, only BG3 of arbitration signals BGO to BG3 is used, and each PWB is
connected in a daisy chain as shown below. The priority of data transfer depends
on the slot position.

SM, SFI, QUAD-l 1, CT-VISION, and AP can be used as master in this unit.

SM (AOl)
--

If a DTB master d&not assert BR3*, BG3OUT* is asserted and conveyed to the board in the
next slot at the time of assertion of BG3IN*.
Actual connections are illustrated below. The jumper pins of the non-master PWBs and BGO to
BG2 are shorted.

A01 A02 A03 B16

+ t 4

------

1BG I----- - 1
?I?-52 2BG P----
P-2 1 3BG ---- ---- 19BG 20BG
Pl to P4 P6 to P9 (NC)

- 366 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: BUS ARBITRATION

For interrupt also, two or more PWBs use the same interrupt request lines and the priority is
determined by configuring a daisy chain. The SFI, SS/PRE, PDI-2, CT-VISION, AP3, aAd IP2 10
PWBs serve as the interrupt generators in this system.

A01 A02 603. 815

System
controller
Interrupt
handler IAC@
7 IACKA
.-I 1
logic
I
' logic

IIACKOW '=- (2 I ACKI N#) 3 I ACKMTf

ISIACKIN
<llACKlik> 2 I ACKOUTI 0 I ACKOU’I
---
I.-...--,
P5 _ ‘Xi’

P91 to P 104: Jumper pins for HS bus arbitration

Like the VME buses, a daisy-chain is configured to determine the priority when
the right to use the HS bus is to be obtained. IM3, AP, CT-VISION (MASTER),
IP210, SWPRE, PD12, and RMST (RTRU) are connected to the HS buses.

BOl , B02 B03 , BlG

--
lJjE&KOT$ ,- - - - - , ZREQACKOT$
,- - - - - , 16REQ
. 1* ........ ........
--w-s 1 e--w- I ACKO'I
P91 ’ P92 (NC)

-367-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: HS-BUS (HIGH-SPEED BUS)

Outline

HS-Bus stands for high-speed bus, which is used solely for data transfer in the console. All data
run on this bus with an instant maximum rate of (64 bits x 4 ways)/320 ns = 100 MB/s (Although
the HS-Bus is a 64-bit bus, data is transferred in units of 32 bytes. To achieve the above
specifications, therefore, 64-bit data is transferred 4 times for 320 ns.)

For full-slot chassis provided with 16 B slots, the right to use the HS-Bus must be obtained to
actually use the HS-Bus. To do this, a daisy chain is configured to determine the priority as with
the VME-Bus.

Because the IM3, SS/PRE, CT-vision, RMST; and PSI’PWBs are connected to the HS-Bus,
shorting pins P91 to 104 on the back panel in the chassis are disconnected. These shorting pins
determine the right to use the HS-Bus.

For chassis provided with only 10 B slots, determination of the priority for the HS-Bus is not
performed. For such chassis, the priority is determined according to the priority for the VME-
Bus.

_-
--

-e-

- 368 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: CONSOLE OF REFERENCE OLD

Xvision

‘STANDARD
r ---
VME ----z OPTION
I SM l- 1
I I -_ R!+232C :
SS/P‘RE I GANTRY
3.5’ FDD I
-I +A SOIF

SIOXZ DAS
-w--e--
; ~THERN~.
L---------l ‘i--a----

-w---w-
y-ji-p-7rT---1r-
1
L-J!!----!d 1 1 SF1 ;
I--
------- I
rL o~---;LJ
12' ‘1 I t
l---------l
c
15'
----w-m -MONITOR
I II
~QUAD~L---
L-------d
i 1 r==J

ld2kii.i3
J= i
--w-w-
r FORAGER
--

---

--w---- ----------

--kT-VISION -i---!-l 5' 1

--1,tjEJpJS),! L 1L----------d
MON.1 TOR 1
Option -4 . I P 2 1 0 I=

VME

Figure l-l System block diagram

-369-
 No. SD201-322ED

-SUBJECT: CONSOLE OF REFERENCE OLD

Xvision
The VME bus is connected in slots A and B of the motherboard. The HS bus is connected in slot
B. In addition, the local bus is connected between slots with the same pair-stitch numbers as slot
B.

The standard composition of these PWBs is shown below:

Table l-l PWB composition

Slot number _=- PWB name PWB size VME HS Pair stitch Remarks
A01 SM VME 0
A02 BCA VME 0
A03 (SW VME 0 Option
A04 VME 0
BOl IM3 Kl (type 1) 0 0
B02 SWPRE IS1 (type 1) 0 0 1
B03 Kl (type 1) 0 0 1
B04 PD12 Kl (type 1) 0 0
B05 (QUAD-l 1) Kl (type 1) 0 0 2 Option
B06 # 1 CT-VISION (MASTER) Kl (type 1) 0 0 2
B07 (CT-VISION (DAUGHTER)) Kl (type 1) 0 0 3 Option
B08 Kl (type 1) 0 0 3
B09 (#2 CT-VISION (MASTER)) Kl (type 1) 0 0 3 Option
B10 X Kl (type 1) 0 0
Bll RMST (RTRU) Kl (type 1) 0 0 4
B12 (RSLx(RTRU)) Kl (type 1) 0 0 4 ‘Option
B13 -.- Kl (type 1) 0 0
B14 (IP2 10) Kl (type 1) 0 0 Option
B15 AP3 Kl (type 1) 0 0
B16 Kl (type 1) 0 0

X: Slots in which no PWBs can be inserted

- 370 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

Host

The host system comprises the system manager (SM), BC & ADP (BCA) or SMEX, and image
memory (IM). It controls the entire system.

1.1 System manager (SM)

The specifications of the system manager (SM) are given below:

Microprocessor I 68030/68040
Address spade I 4 Gbytes (on-board and off-board)
Bus structure VME Bus (32-bit address [A32], 32-bit data [D32], A24 and D16
are supported.)
I/O port Serial : Four RS232C ports
Parallel: One Centronics printer port
Ethernet
On-board memory 8MBl32MB (DRAM)
8MB : MVME147-012
32 MB : MVME 147-O 14 (using Ethernet online)
Operation clock I 25 MHz/33 MHz

--_-
---

- 371-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

(1) External views

MVME147SA

IE
MVhll
1147%
IFAIl
0
I ULf
0
I UJN

4sai

!I

=_ Icl
F IESEl

-I 4 1

I t8 SE1

--_-
---

- 372 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

(2) Descriptions of the LEDs and switches

MVME147

l DSl [FAIL: red] . ..... ..... .... Indicates the BRDFAIL bit status of the VME chip.
(This lamp lights if a system error occurs.)
l DS2 [HALT: yellow] .......: Lights when the&processor status signal is LOW. (This
lamp lights when the processor is halted.)
l DS3 [RUN: green] ..... ...... Lights when the processor is running the bus cycle.
-= (This lamp blinks during normal operation.)
l DS4 [SCON: green] ... ...... The VME chip is the system controller on the VME
bus. (This lamp lights during normal operation.)
. Sl [ABORT] ...... ...... .... ..... Pushing this switch cancels normal program execution
and returns to DEBUGGER mode.
l S2 [RESET] u..................... Initializes the entire system.

MVME167

l DS 1 [FAIL: red]. .............. Same as for MVME 147

[STAT: yellow] ........ Same as [HALT] for MVME147
l DS2 [RUN : green] .......... Same as for MVME147
[ SCON: green] ......... Same as for MVME147
l DS3 [CAN : green] .... ..... . The LAN chip is the local bus master.
[+ 12V: green] ..... ...... Indicates the status of power supply to the Ethernet
transceiver.
l DS4-[Z!XSI: green] ..... ...... The SCSI chip is the local bus master.
_.--
[VME : green] .... ...... The VME chip is the local bus master or the VME bus
is being used. (AS* signal is effective.)

* If the FAIL lamp is lit, the SM does not function. If this is the case, the SM should
be replaced.

- 373 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

(3) Jumper pin (JP) settings (reference)

JP settings of the SM are described here as reference information. The actual board
may differ from the recorded status; however, it should not be reset. (A faulty board
must be replaced rather than repaired.)

JP setting of MIME147
- .
31 Connect between the following pins.
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
[pin 2 - pin 41 [pin 13 - pin 151
[pin 3 - pin 51 [pin 14 - pin 161
[pin 6 - pin 81

Connect between the following pins.

. 32
2 4 6 a 10 12 14 16 la ’ [pin 2 - pin 41 [pin 13 - pin 151 I
-------e---w-------

pBz#scq * t p@~ b i [pin 3 - pin 51 [pin 14 - pin 161

I I
i [pin 6 - pin 81
f
; qFq* I *pjtj
--------------------.
1 3 5 7 9’ 11 13 15 19

53 Connect between the J5 Connect between the

12 following pins. 2 4 6 following pins.
r----7
L lool
---- : [pin 1 - pin 21 [pin 1 - pin 21

Open between the J6 Connect between the

1 2 following pins. 2 4 6 following pins.
r ---- ----
:* --we #-j
[pin 1 - pin-21 r ;5: [pin 1 - pin 21
1
iI 1 *
----a
I 3 5
Connect between the J9 Connect between the
following pins. following pins.

[pin 2 - pin 31 [pin 1 - pin 21

-374-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

1.1.1 Replacing the SM board

(1) Replacement precautions and tools

The SM contains a BBM (battery backup memory). After replacement, the contents
of the memory should be set correctly. The replacement procedure is as shown
below.

<I> Prepare a terminal (T3 100, etc.) to be connected to the SM.

<2> Replace the SM board.
<3> Setjhe initial values and date.
<4> Test the system.

Tools to be prepared are as follows:

< l> Terminal (T3 100)

<2> Dedicated signal cable (RS232C serial)
<3> Software (serial communication software TERM, etc.)

(2) Initialization of the SM

cl> Connect the T3 100 to the panel on the left of the console.

<2> Replace the SM. Set the T3 100 to terminal mode (mterm) and turn on the
console. After the SM is replaced, there are two possibilities: one is that the self
test is executed (this takes about 6 minutes), and the other is that 147-Bug is
executed. When the self test is executed, the following is displayed:

MIME147 Monitor/Debugger Release X.X - YY/MIM/DD

FPC passed test
MMU passed test
CC&D Start
--
ylY-..... Test.. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ..Running ----> PASSED

x.x : Debugger version No.

YY/MM/DD : Debugger release date

The self test can be fully executed, or it can be halted by pressing the [Fl] key
of the T3 100 several times.” When the self test is completed, the following
message is displayed:

SCC 28530 Functionality Test ,.. .. Running ----> PASSED

Testing Complete
Autoboot in progress . .. To abort hit <BREAK> m
! !Break! !

- 375 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

<3> Press the [Fl] key several times, and the self test will stop and the followi,ng
menu will be displayed:

1) Continue System Start-up

2) Select Alternate Boot Device
3) Go to System Debugger
4) Initiate Service Call
5) Display System Test Errors
6) Dump Memory to Tape
Enter Menu #: 3 [Enter1
147-Diag>
__
<4> Set ihe environment in the debugger mode.

117-Diag>env [Enter1
Bug or System environment [B$J = S? b [Enter1
SYSTEM V/68 or VERSAdos operating system [S,Vj = S? JEnter]
Execute/Bypass Bug Self Test [E,B] = B? IEnter{
Set VME Chip:
Board ID [0-FF] = $OO?IEnter
GCSR base address [O-OF] = $Of? JEnterl
Utility Interrupt Mask [O-FE] = $OO?JEnterl
Utility Interrupt Vector number(def is 60)[8-F8] = $60? JEnt.erl
VME bus interrupt Mask(def is FE)[O-FE] = $FE? JEnterl
Requestr Le\rel(def is O)[O-3] = $3? JEnterl
Release(def is ROR)[ROR,RWD:NVR] = ROR? JEnterl

MVME147 Monitor/Debugger Release X.X - YY/MM/DD

FPC passed test

MMU passed test
COLD start
Onboard RAM start = $00000000, stop = $OlFFFFFF
147-Bug>

- 376 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

<5> Store the peripheral equipment currently connected in the BBM of the SM.
(This takes about 2 minutes.)

147-Bug>iot:t [Enter1

Scanning system for available disk/tape controllers.. . ..

Disk Controllers Available

LUN TYPe Address # dev

0 vME147 $FFFE-tOOO 1 SCSI Addr = 0 - CDC 9418145
1 vME147 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr = 5 - TEAC FC-1 GF
-e vMEl47 $FFFE4000 * SCSI Addr = 7

Align LUNs to SCSI addresses [Y:NJ N? v [Enter1

Disk Controllers Available

LUN Type Address # dev

0 vMEl47 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr
= 0 - CDC 94181-15
1 vME147 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr
= 1
2 vME147 $FFFEJOOO 1 SCSI Addr
=2
3 vMEl47 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr
=3
4 vME147 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr
= 4 +- Streamer tape is displayed
when connected.
5 vME147 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr = 5 - TEAC FC-1 GF t Must be a
3.5” FDD.
6 vME147 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr = 6 t RECHO is displayed when
an MOD is connected.
vME147 $FFFEJOOO * SCSI Addr = 7

Salve map in NVRAM [Y:N] N? y IEnter

147-Bug>

<6> AC-cessthe disk to confirm the connection and disk number.

--- --
147-Bug>iop [Enter] l I
Controller LUN = OO?IEnter
Read/Write/Format = R? JEnterl
Memory Address = 00004000? IEnter
Starting Block = OOOOOOOO? IEnter
Number of Blocks= 0002? IEnter
Address Modifier = OO?JEnter]
147-Bug>

When [Enter] is pressed for Address Modifier, the LED of the system disk lights
momentarily.

- 377 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

<7> Set the system startup mode.

147-Bug>ab [Enteri
Controller LUN = OO? [Enter]
Device LUN = OO?[Enter]
Default string = . .. ... .. .?/stand/swV68 [Enter1
Boot at power-up only or any board reset [P:RJ P? IEnter

At poxer-up only:
Auto Boot from Controller 0: Delice OF/stand sysV68
147-Bug>

(3) Setting tke date

When the SM is replaced, the set date is not correct; therefore, set the correct date in
the system. Reinstall the system soRware before starting this operation.

cl> Select the system selection mode.

147-Bug>mm 73 100000 [Enter-l

73 100000 xxxx 5 [Enter-l
73 100002 xxxx . [Enter1
147-Bug>

<2> Select the system.

147-Bug>bo [Enter1

NICS BOOT SYSTEM

1. DIAG SYSTEM
4. SYSTEM GENERATION
5. NICS SYSTEM
6. ACT SYSTEM
7.tiIN.K SYSTEM
---
SELECT SYSTEM? 4 [Enter1

*** Generation System (Version XXX) ***

3. Set date and time

cl. Quit

Enter the menu number = 3 [Enter-l

- 378 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER) .

<3> Set the date.

Set the time zone.

current time and time zone is :OO:OOJST

change the time zone? (y,n,?,q) Y [Enter-l

Available time zone are...

1 Greenwich (GMT)

11 Japan (JST)
Enter zone number = 11 [Enter1

Set the daylight-savings time.

Does your time zone use Daylight Saving Time during year?
(y,n,?,q) m
Time zone changed.

Change the date:

current date and time: Sun lo/W89 17:00

change the date and time (y,n,?,q) 7’ [Enter-l

Month default is 10 (1-12) : input month [Enter-l

Day default is 15 (l-3 1) : input day [Enter1
Year default is 89 (79-99) : input year [Enter-l
Hour default is 0 (O-23) : input hour [Enter1
Minute default is 0 (O-59) : input minute [Enter1

Date and time will be set to : 8/15/93 0O:OOOK?

(ynq) y [Enter1

SunAug 15 0O:OO:OOJST 1993

ThZdate and time are now changed.

<4> The screen returns to the initial menu.

When the “NICS BOOT SYSTEM” menu is restored, set the boot status.

NICS BOOT SYSTEM ~

1. DIAG SYSTEM
4. SYSTEM GENERATION
5. NICS SYSTEM
6. ACT SYSTEM
7. XLINK SYSTEM

SELECT SYSTEM? quitmenu [Enter1

-379-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

When the [DEL] key is pressed several times, the prompt # is displayed.

#sync ‘Enter_
#sync Enter_
#sync Enter1
#off [Enter1

<5> Turn OFF the power.

(4) Operational check after board replacement

Start the.jystem and confirm that scanning operations and clock and calendar are
normal.

1.1.2 Replacement of BBM of SM

(1) Malfunctions due to expiration of battery life

The SM (MVME147SA-1, MVME147SC-1, MVME147-012, MVME147-014) is

equipped with a battery backup memory (BBM) which utilizes a primary battery.
This battery must be replaced when it dies. Generally, it should be replaced
periodically once every two years. However, if the following warning messages are
displayed or the malfunctions described below occur during the battery capacity check
performed periodically by the system, the battery should be replaced:

(A) A warning message requesting the replacement of the BBM of the SM is

displayed:

Failed Power-up Confidence test

. .. . .Battery low (date may be corrupted)

This message is displayed on the terminal, such as the T3 100, connected, to the
SM.3 power ON.
--- - _.
(B) The FALL lamp on the,front panel of the SM lights in red when the power is
turned ON.

(c) The clock malfunctions. The normal clock error is about 1 minute per month.

- 380 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

(2) BBM replacement procedure

The BBM of the SM is a battery-operated memory with a clock and calendar, and it
stores the setting, day, and time of the system disk. When the BBM is replaced, they
should be reset.

For MVME147SA-1 and MVME147SC-1 \

BBM drawing No. : TOSHIBA drawing No. BSX74-0839 (from SGS Thomson,
MK48T02B-25)

For MVME147-012 and MVME147-014

BBM drawing No. : TOSHIBA drawing No. AVYOOS-0 1

Replacement procedure: The battery can be removed and remounted without tools.
(Refer to the following figure.)

Replace only this part.

Mounted on the PWB.

Caution: Incorrect battery replacement may result in an explosion.

-l-Do not use a battery other than those specified. Discard used batteries in
-.- -laccordance with all applicable laws, rules, and regulations for the
installation site.

<1: > Replace the BBM mounted on the IC socket of the SM. Record the Ethernet
address on the seal attached to the back of the front panel of the SM board.

08003E 2xxxxx
ETHERNET ADDRESS

XXXXX: To reset the BBM, record the five low-order digits.

- 381 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

<2> Perform either <a> or <b> according to the firmware version written on the
label attached to the ROM.

For firmware version 2.3 or earlier (Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, etc.) <a>
For firmware version 2.42 or later (Ver. 2.42, etc.) <b>

* No firmware boards with versionsbetween Wer. 2,.3 and Ver. 2.42 are
available on the market.

<a>- For firmware version 2.3 or earlier

-2
-After turning ON the power of the system, perform the following
procedure:

Effective address: FFFEOOOO

Effectitre address: FFFEO7FF

147-Bug>

l Press the reset switch and the abort switch located on the front panel of
the SM board at the same time. I

l Release the reset switch first and then release the abort switch.
,
(By performing the above operation, the required information is saved in
the BBRAM.)
--
-_-..
_-
--A-fter confirming that the prompt “147-Bug>” is displayed on the terminal
screen, perform the following procedures:

147-Bug>mdClfffe07aOJ
FFFE07AO XXXX XXXX XXXX 0700 0000 XXXX XXXX XXXX
147-Bug>

* If data of the -- part underlined with the wavy line (address

FFFE07A6) is not 0700, repeat the above procedures until it is set to
0700 and then continue with <3>.

- 382 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

I <b> For firmware version 2.42 or later

After turning ON the power of the system, perform the following

procedures:

Effective address: FFFEOOOO

Effective address: FFFE07FF
-a
147-Bug>enxd J

I: lpdate with Auto-Configuration Defaults

11lpdate Non-Volatile RAM [Y/N] = N? y 4

C:PU clock frequency [ 16, 20, 25, 321 = XX’? J

R.eset System [Y/N] = N? y.-J

147-Bug>

<3> Perform the following procedures. (These steps must be performed regardless
of the firmware version.)

<a> Enter the underlined parts to register the system configuration.

147-Bug>iot;t J

Scanning svstem for available disMtape controllers. ..

Disk Controller Available
.

Align LUNs to SCSI addresses [Y: N]N? u

Disk Controller Available

Salve map in NVRAM[Y,N]N? y+.J

147-Bug>

- 383 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SM (SYSTEM MANAGER)

<b> Enter the underlined parts to set the Ethernet address.

147-BugXsad J
LAN Station Address = $08003E200000
To set the Station Address :
Enter the code located on the back of the front panel $ XXXXX J
LAN Station Address = $08003E2XXXXX
147-Bug>

* XXXXX: Enter the last five digits of the address recorded in <l>.

<cF Enter the underlined parts to set the auto boot mode.

I147-Bug>ad
I
J

Controller LUN = XX? 00 J

Device LUN = XX? 00 +J
Default string = ? /stand/sysV68 J
Boot at pan-er-up only or any board Reset [P.R] = ? pCr
T
The display differs for firmware Ver. 2.2 or earlier.
Boot at power-up only [Y:N] ? yCr
I - I
147-E&g> norb J
147-Bug>

cd> Enter the underlined parts to set the clock.

147-Bug>@
Friday XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX
Present calibration value = -0
-Enter date as MM/DD/YY
&M/DD/YY (Example: 12/l/95)
Enter Calibration value +/-(0 to 3 1)
-0
Enter time as HH:MM:SS (24 hour clock)
HH:MM:ss (Example: 15:30:00)
147-Bug>

<e> Turn OFF the power of the system.

(3) Operation check after BBM replacement

Start the system and confirm that the scanning operation and clock and calendar are
normal.

- 384 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: 347BUG
Outline: The 147Bug debugger is located on a ROM on the SM PWB. Below is a list of typical
147Bug debugger commands. For details of the 147Bug debugger commands, refer to
the software service manual.

147Bug debugger command list

Command Outline of function

name

l AB : This command starts the auto-boot function.

l NOAB -, : This command disables the auto-boot function.
. BC : This command compares the memory block.
. BF --: This command embeds entered data in the memory block.
l BI : This command initializes the parity memory.
. BO : This command reads the operating system.
. BV : This command compares entered data with the memory data.
l ENV : This command sets the environment of BUG.
43E : This command displays the HELP screen.
l IOP : This command accesses the disk physically.
. IOT : This command sets the composition of the peripheral equipment in BUG.
@MD : This command displays the data in memory.
*MM : This command modifies the data in memory.
l SD : This command changes the debugger mode.

AUTOBOOT ENABLE

(a) Function

This command puts the auto-boot function into start status. It automatically boots
(starts upj?lhe system when the system is turned ON.

It sets the controller LUN, device LUN, and default string. Whether to start the auto-
boot function at the time of power-up or at the time of board resetting can be selected,

(b) Example of-use

147-Bug>ab [CR1
Controller LUN =OO? [CR]
Device LUN =OO? [CR]
Default string =. . .. . ?/stand /s~W68 [CR1
Boot at power-up only [Y,N] ? Y ml t Set to power-up only normally.
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
147-Bug>

- 385 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: 147BUG
(2) NO&B

AUTOBOOT DISABLE

Used to start/up...when the boot signal is received from another source. The MDS systems of
Xpeed and/Xforce)use this setting.

(a) Function

This command disables the auto-boot function.

(b) Example ofuse

-.
147-Bupnoab ICRl
.,.............*...*..*.......
147-Bug>

(3) BF
BLOCK OF MEMORY FILL

(a) Format

BF 1) [Start address, Stop address] [Data; Data size]

2) [Start address:Count] [Data; Data size]
3) [Start address] [End address] [Initial value] [Increment value]

(b) Function

This command fills the memory in the specified address range with the entered data
pattern.

Option: B-r-Byte
-JV’ Word
L - Longword

(c) Example of use

147-Bug>BF 20000,200~lF 4E7 1,[CR{

Effective address: 00020000
Effective address: 000200 1F
147-BugWD 20000:30:B [CR1
000200004E 71 4E 71 4E 71 4E 71 4E 71 4E 71 4E 71 4E 71
000200104E 71 4E 71 4E 71 4E 71 GE 71 4E 71 4E 71 4E 71
0002002000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
147-Bug>

The BF command should be regarded as one for simple memory test. It can be used to
determine whether the IM is defective.

Example: BF A0000000 A3FFFFFF 0 1;W +J

- 386 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: 147BUG
(4) IOP

I/O PHYSICAL (DIRECT DISK ACCESS)

(a) Function \

This command reads data from or writes data to a connected disk or tape device or
formats it.

(b) Example of use

147-BugXOP-[CR1
Controller LUN =OO? 1[CR1 (“0” means SYSTEM DISK.)
DeGce LUN =OO? m
Read/Write/Format =R? ICRI
Memory Address =00001000? m
Starting Block =OOOOOOOO?ICRI
Number of Blocks =0002? [CR1
Address Modifier =OO? JCRI
147-Bug>

To format the system disk when the system disk is replaced or system generation is
performed, enter “w” in response to “Read/Write/Format” above. When the same data
as above is entered for the inquiries subsequent to “Memory Address” and system
generation is performed, the system disk is formatted when system software is loaded.

- .-.
- --:
_.
_ --

- 387 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: 147BUG
(5) IOT

I/O “TEACH” FOR CONFIGURING DISK CONTROLLER

0a Function

This command detects the currently connected peripheral equipment to create a usable-
equipment configuration. (This fkction applies to ROM version V2:O and subsequent
releases.)

@I Example of-suse
147-Bug>iot:t [CR]

Scanning system for available disk/tape controllers.. .

Disk Controllers Available

LUN Type Address # de\

0 VME147 $FFFEJOOO 1 SCSI Addr = 0 - CDC 94171-9
1 VME147 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr = 1
2 VME327 $FFFFAGOO 2
VME147 $FFFE4000 * SCSI Addr = 7

Align LUNs to SCSI addresses [Y:N] N? y [CR1

Disk Controllers Available HP2247 or HP3323 is displayed for Xvision.

LUN Type Address # de1 1

0 VMEl47 $FFFE-tOOO 1 SCSI Addr = 0 - CDC 94171-9
1 VI’vIE147 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr = 1 TWREN IV
2 VME147 $FFFEJOOO 1 SCSI Addr = 2 181 for WREN V Conventional
3 VME147 $FFFE4000 1 SCSIAddr=3 3.5FDD 19lforWRENVI i X series
4 VMl+7 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr = 4 Streamer drive
5 VME!47 $FFFEJOOO 1 SCSI Addr = 5
G VMl%l7 $FFFE4000 1 SCSI Addr = 6 OD or MOD. However, OD and MOD are
8 VME327 $FFFFA600 2 connected to “327”.
VME147 $FFFE4000 * SCSI Addr = 7

Sal-e map in NVRAM [Y:N] N? y [CR1

- 388 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: 147BUG
(6) MM
MEMORY MODIFY

(a) Format

MM [Address (;Data size)]

(b) Function

This command modifies the data at the specified address. The modification of data is
terminated-by entering ‘I[. 1”.

Option: B - Byte
W - Word
L - Longword

(c) Example of use

147-Bug>mm 10000 [CR]
000100000000?1234[CR]
000100020000?5678[CR]
000100010000?9abc[CR]
00010006 OOOO?432 1. [CR]
147-Bug>

- --
-_--:
I ---

- 389 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SMEX
Outline: SMEX has the following three roles:

(1) It acts as an extender which permits the SM PWB to be mounted in the Kl slot.
(2) It acts as a BC (Battery Back-up Memory & CommonMemory).
(3) It acts as an ADP (Adapter).

(1) Extender for the SM PWB

The SM PWB is of the VME size and cannot be mounted as is in slot B, which is of the KI
size, Therefore, the SMEZX accommodates the SM PWB, which is connected via the
SMCNN PWB,.and allows the SM PWB to be mounted in slot B (Kl size).

:.:.:.: -
.:.:.:.
:::::::
;$$I
i&i:!
I :::::::
:::::::
:::::::
.:.:.:.
$fli$
:::::::
:::::::
:.:.:.:
.:.:.:.
:::::::
:::::::
:::::::
:.:.:.:
SM PWB :::::::
.:.:.:.
:::;:::
:::::::
:::::::
:::::::
:::::::
:::;:::
:::::::
:*:.:.:
:::::::
.:*:.:.
:::::::
:::::::
:::::::
:::::::
:::::::
;~$;Izi
gg;i
:::::::
i$i$j -
SMEX PWB

SMCNN PWB

- 390 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SMEX
(2) BC (Battery Back-up Memory & CommonMemory)

The BC section of SMEX is provided with memories called BBM and CommonMemory. In
these memories, parameters which are very important for the system are stored and referred
to at all times. Therefore, if the data in the memory is destroyed, the system may not start up
normally or may not operate normally after startup.

When the system is started up, the SM refers to address 98 100000 in BBM on the SMEX.
When “0” is found in address 98 100000, the system is started up normally. If ” 1234” is
written in address 98 100006, SM determines that the most recent system shutdown was
performed abnor-mally and that reconfiguration of the system should be performed.

Checking the addresses

Connect a terminal to the service port and enter “147bug>mm 98100000” in 147bug to
check the contents below.

(For the mm command, refer to the SM.)

98100000 0 for normal system. 1, 2, and 5 for startup of system generation

98100002 0000

98100004 0000

98100006 abed t normal shutdown. 1234 for abnormal shutdown

Note: When the system is booted, the SV manager is started up first and then various
other processes are activated. During these sessions, each process performs
initialization while referring to BBM and CommonMemory and informs the SV
manager-of normal completion of initialization. Then the SV manager displays the
following
--- message on the terminal.

XXXprocessTerminated

If correct data are not written in these memories, the processes cannot complete
initialization normally and the SV manager displays the message
“XXXprocessWaiting .. .” on the terminal. If this is the case, attempt BBMinit or
set IM again.

- 391-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SMEX
(3) ADP (Adapter) section

The ADP provides connection ports to SM and SS/PRE. The following types of ports are
available.

Signal communicating with SM : RS232C (for terminal connection)

Ethernet (used for image online transmission)
SCSI (used for connection to the SYSTEM DISK)

Communication with SS/PRE : RS422 reset signal

Communication-with SOIF : Used to control the gantry (RS232C is used for

communication with the gantry and RS422 is used for
communication with the XC.)

That is, the ADP section of SMEX has the conventional BCA function integrated with the
contents of the DIF-ADP PWB. (For conceptual understanding, compare the system block
diagram for the conventional type of Xvision with that for the current Xvision.)

The termination PWBs for VT1 A and VT2, which were provided on the motherboard of the
conventional type of Xvision series, are also included in SMEX.

-.--:
_ --.

- 392 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SMEX
Setting the rotary switches, shorting plugs, and the DIP switches

SMJIX internal Ethernet power

address setting supply setting

z 7 (Not supplied)
SW1 SW2 SW9 Battery
connection setting

@@ ’ jp6 EEL? ’ (Supplied)

SW3 SW4 ’ SW5

SW7

)ODOOOOOOION For debugging use

SW
8(MODEM)
Serial port mode setting

SW
9(TERM
I NAL)

_ --
_-:
-- ---

SWlO(MODEM)
pi=tEzqON
1 J

SW11
(TERM1
NAL)

Figure l-l SMEX switch status

- 393 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SMEX
l Replacing the SMEX board

(1) Replacement precautions and tools

The SMEX contains a BBM (battery backup memory). After replacement, the contents of
the memory should be set correctly. The batteries mounted to the SMEX are secondary
batteries and should be replaced every 2 years. The board replacement procedure is outlined
below.

1) Prepare a terminal (T3 100, etc.) to be connected to the SM.

2) Check the system status.
3) Replace the SMEX board.
4) Initialize the BBM or system.
5) Check the system operation.

Tools to be prepared are as follows:

1) Terminal (T3 100)

2) Dedicated signal cable (RS232C serial)
3) Software (Serial communication software TERM, etc.)

(2) System status check

cl> To check the operation after replacement, make a note of the number of files of raw
data and image data before replacement. Display and record the number of files of
raw data and image data listed in the system status display menu.

Caution: If the operation cannot be terminated normally after the system status is
checked, initialize the system. Since the files will be initialized, save the
necessary raw data and image data beforehand.

<2> Make sure that the system operation terminates normally as specified below.

Connect the terminal to the SM and check the message after operation termination.

NICS System Shutdown step-4

NICS System Shutdown step-5
Umounted/dey/usr
Umounted/dev/nics

NICS SYSTEM Shutdown Please Power Off

Press the [DEL] key. There are two possible initialization procedures after the board
or batteries are replaced, according to the displayed message.

- 394 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: SMEX
<a> When # is displayed

Since the operation is terminated normally, enter “off’ and then turn the power .
OFF after the following message is displayed.

#off /Enter] 0
NOTICE: System Halt Requested (0)
NOTICE: System secured for powering down.

After-the board or batteries are replaced, initialize the BBM and check the system
operation.

<b> If a message other than # or the following message is displayed

SV-mgr shutdown i&O300 gpid[3][ l] = 65536:JOB_ID=0003

pname=FS-mgr

Here, if the message displayed is other than JOB-ID=0003 and pname=FS-mgr,

it means that the operation is terminated normally. Execute the steps outlined in
item <a>.

When JOB-ID=0003 and pname=FS-mgr are displayed, it means that the

operation is terminated abnormally. Turn the power OFF, replace the board or
batteries, and initialize the system.

(3) Replacement of the board

Turn the system OFF and replace the board.

Caution: When replacing the SMEX board, take particular care to avoid discharge caused
by shoiting of the batteries. The batteries on the board are charged at factory
b&i% shipment. If they are discharged for some reason, supply an electric
current to the board for 8 hours. This_vilLr_echargethe batteries. For details of
the batteries, see the item “Reqlac%nent of SMEX ba*es”.
---_-- ---_n___-
-- ._.^_.___
Test the charge of the batteries of the board to be replaced briefly and execute one of the
two initialization procedures depending on the result.

When the board is replaced, connect the terminal (T3 100) to SIO on the maintenance panel
of the console, set the terminal in the terminal mode (mterm), and turn the console ON.

- 395 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SMEX
147-Bug>md 98 100000 [Enter1
981OOOOOx?tx?t.u;u?txxx?<xxx?cx-

147-Bug> + (A) 0000,0001~ or 0005 : Since the batteries of the SMBX board are
normal: initialize the BBM as specified in item
w.

(B) Other than 0000,0001~ and 0005: - In this case the batteries of the SMEX board are
considered to be discharged. Initialize the system
as specified in item (5) and supply an electric
current to the board for 8 hours or longer to
a- charge the batteries.

(4) BBM initialization and system operation check

I
When normal termination of the system is confirmed and the batteries status is considered to
be normal, perform the following operation.

147-Bug>mm 98 100000 [Enter1

98100000 xxxx 5 [Enter-l
98100002 sxxx . IEnter
147-Bug>bo [Enter1

NICS BOOT SYSTEM

4. SYSTEM GENERATION

SELECT SYSTEM? 4 [Enter1

*** Generation System (yersion XXX) ***

2. Initialize and Maintenance

_ -.-.
.-__
q. Quit __:---

Enter the menu number = 2 [Enter1

System Initialize and Maintenance

12. BBM init

Enter the menu number = 12 [Enter1

complete The BBM is initialized.

Normal termination message of initialization

- 396 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SMEX
Quit the menu screens one by one and return to the initial screen,

NICS BOOT SYSTEM

4. SYSTEM GENERATION

SELECT SYSTEM? quitmenu [EnterI

When the [DEL] key is pressed several times, the prompt “#” is displayed.

#sync -Enter _
#sync ‘Enter‘. _
#sync -Enter _ -
#off [Enter1

Turn the power OFF and then turn it ON again. Set the SMEX operation flag again at the
“147-Bug>” prompt and start the system.

147-Bug>mm 98 100000 [Enter1

98 100000 xxxx 0 [Enter1
98100002 xxxx . [Enter1
137-Bug>bo [Enter1

When the system is started, display the number of files of raw data and image data on the
system status display and check whether there is a difference between the number of files
found-before and after the board exchange. Execute scanning several times. If the scanning
operation and image display are normal, the operation is complete.

(5) System initialization

When the system cannot be terminated normally, when the normal status of the batteries
cannot be verified, or when the batteries are replaced, perform the following operation.

Caution: Sin&&e file system is initialized when the system is initialized, the stored raw data
and image data are lost.

147-Bug>mm 98 100000 [Enter1

98100000 xxxx 5 [Enter1
98100002 xxxx . [Enter1
147-Bug>bo [Enter1 -

NICS BOOT SYSTEM

4. SYSTEM GENERATION

SELECT SYSTEM? 4 [Enter1

- 397 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SMEX
*** Generation System (Version XXX) ***

2. Initialize and Maintenance

Enter the menu number = 2 [Enter1

System Initialize and Maintenance

3. File System Initialize

Enter the menu number = 3 [Enter1

The file system and BBM are initialized.

NICS BOOT SYSTEM

4. SYSTEM GENERATION

SELECT SYSTEM? quitmenu [Enter]

When the [DEL] key is pressed several times, the prompt “#” is displayed.

#sync [Enter_
#sync ‘Enter-
#sync Enter1
#off [Enter1

Turn the power OFF and then turn it ON again. Set the SMEX operation flag again at the
“147-Bug>” prompt and start the system.

137-Bug>mm 98 100000 [Enter1

98 100000 xxxx 0 [Enter1
98100002 xxxx . [Enter]
147-Bug>bo [Enter1

When the syste.m:isstarted, the files are initialized. Therefore, it is not possible to check the
number of filei before and after replacement of the board or batteries. Scan several slices
and display images to confirm normal operation. If the batteries are not charged sufficiently,
supply an electric current to the system. Charging the batteries for 8 hours guarantees a
backup time of about 10 days. Determine the required charging time using the above as a
guideline.

- 398 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SMEX
l Replacement of SMEX batteries

(1) Replacement precautions and tools

The batteries on the SMEX board are secondary batteries which have charging/discharging ,
functions. The life span of the batteries is about 2 years and they should therefore be
replaced every 2 years. New batteries are charged at factory before shipment. Even if they
are discharged, the supply of electric current to the system for 8 hours after battery
replacement guarantees back up of BBM data for about 10 days thereafter even if the system
is not turned on.

The SMBX batteries are charged for 50 hours at the factory before shipment so as to
guarantee the BBM data for 2 months.

Battery type : Lithium battery

Battery model No. : AxBOO2*3350 (Matsushita Battery Industrial Co., Ltd.,

VL233O/lHF)

No. of batteries required : 2

Battery mounting locations : B 1, B2

The battery replacement procedure is as follows:

1) Prepare a terminal (T3 100, etc.) to be connected to the SM.

2) Check the system status.
3) Replace the batteries of the SMEX board.
4) Initialize the BBM or system.
5) Check the system operation.

Tools to be prepared are as follows:

__--
1) Terminal (T3 100)
2) Dedicated signal cable (RS232C serial)
3) Software (Serial communication software TERM, etc.)

(2) System status check

Check whether the system has terminated normally or, abnormally according to the procedure
described in item (2) “Replacing the SMEX board”. When the system has terminated
normally, replace the batteries of the SMEX board and initialize the BBM. When the system
has terminated abnormally, replace the batteries of the SMBX board and initialize the system.

- 399 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM DISK

Outline of the SYSTEM DISK

The system disk of the TSX series contains management information such as system programs,
constants, PAS information, correction data (water, air, NRA, FSMC), image data files (raw data,
reconstruction data, light, MOD, etc.).

Since installation of the system software, replacement of the DISK, etc. cause the above data to
be lost, it is necessary to acquire backups. (For backup acquisition, refer to the section on
generation.)

Type of DRIVE

One of the following disks is used as the system disk. The capacity is approximately 1 GB and
they are compatible with each other as long as the version of the system software is V4.8C or
later. (This is because the DRIVER software is different.)

When replacing the DISK, be sure to check the settings. The settings for the short pins of the
DISK below are the same as before. However, check the settings to make sure that they are
correct.

To confirm the current SYSTEM DISK, use the “iot;t” command of 147bug. (For 147bug, refer
to the explanations on the SM PWB.)

HPC2247 (drawing No. : BSX60-2795)

HPC3323 (drawing No.: BSXSl-1680)

Connection to the SM

The SM is not connected to the SYSTEM DISK directly, but SMEX serves as a DISK I/F that
employs SCSI standards.
_-

VME-BUS

I”“““” I
I CI 1
-\
I ’ ‘* : I
1 ‘.-# . - #‘ I
I I
.--0-0-----
Streamer drke

1 Caution: Termination of the SCSI must be performed in the FDD. 1

- 400 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM DISK .

Settings of optional pins

l- Write protect : Open

2 - Unit attention: Short
3 - SDTR : Open
Terminator resistor enable (open)
4 - Parity : Short
Reserved pins must.be,open.l , 5 - Auto.spin up : Short
7 Synchronized : Short
SCSI-l/SCSI-Z (short& 8- spindle : Open
10 : Open
11 - SCSI address : Open
12 : Open

connector

\ I I /
SCSI CO1nnector'
---T I /
u

. Power connector
I
Front view Rear view

Figure 1

(3) LED

The LED is turned on at the SEEK, READ and WRITE operations.

-4Ol-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SS/Pf?E
Outline : SS/PRE is a PWB consisting of an SS (ScanSequencer) unit for
controlling scanning and a PRE (PREprocessor) unit for acquiring
data from the DAS.

Composition of the board : The SS unit controls the gantry and patient couch (SGTS), X-rays
(XC), data acquisition (PM), audio interfaces (AD1 or ADI2), and
operation interfaces (OPI or SSB). The PRE unit is connected to
the DAS via SOIF and performs preprocessing on acquired data.
A reconstruction synchronizing signal links the PRE unit to the high-
speed reconstruction unit RTRU.

HS bus -bus FI IopIl .

or or
AD12 SSB

‘: Y

p-* GTS control

D b XC control

.- .- -

I D IM

- 402 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: SWPRE
Specification: SS unit connection

l mu : 68000 (10 MHz)

l Memory : DRAM (1 MB), ROM (128 MB), DPRAM (8 KB)
l SIO : RS232C x 5 channels, RS422 x 1 channel
e Timer : 1

PRE unit composition

l Preprocessing ASIC : PRE

l HS bus ASIC : BHSD (data section), BHSC (address section)
l Sequencer : SAM, PRESEQ

Outline of operations: When the system is started, programs are downloaded from the SM into
the SS unit via the VME bus. The SS/PRE board is a slave of the SM
and is controlled from the SM via the VME bus . Communication is
performed via the DPRAM (2-port RAM).

The SS unit uses serial communication to control all operations of the

gantry and patient couch, data acquisition, and autovoice. The control
signals for voice are sent to AD1 or AD12 via the RS232C interface and
those for operation are sent to the OPI or SSB via the RS232C interface.
The control signals for the gantry, couch, and X rays are sent from the
backplane to the SMEX and SOIF via the RS422 interface.

The PRE unit preprocesses DAS data (including water calibration, log
conversion, and data replacement) sent through the gantry SOIF on the
fly (consecutive incoming data are processed successively without storing
them in memory). Then, the PRE unit writes the processed raw data to
the IM via the HS bus. The calibration data and coefficients required for -
- - preprocessing are transferred from the. IM to the PRE unit via the HS bus.

- 403 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SWPRE
External appearance, connectors and settings of the board

For debugging
1 Jl

Reserved
1 J2

TO/FROM OPI 1-J J31-1 SW1

TO/FROM AD1 1 J4
J5
FROM DAS
(SOIF)

t
IO J6
TO RTRU
--I-

. SW1 (boot register switch)

1 2-3 4 5 6 7 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ON
OFF

l J,l (RS232C po& for debugging)

l J2 (Spare RS232C port)
l J3 (RS232C port for OPI)
l J4 (RS232C port for AD1 and AD12)
l J5 (RS422 port for SOIF)
l J6 (Port for RTRU)

- 404 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: SS/PRE
Connection to the SGTS and XC

For the CKCN-OOGB/2, 3 (provided with 10 B slots), the GTS and XC are connected to the
connectors on the SMEX.

Caution: Although the GTS and XC appear in the figure below, the actual destination is SOIF:!.

S422)

cable

For the CKCN-006BI4 (console provided with both A and B slots), the GTS and XC are
connected using the connectors on the rear of the backplane PWB on which SS/PRE is mounted.

II Internal cable GTS, XC (RS422)

console <- ___3 Inter-unit

cable

- 405 -
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: SWPRE
VME bus

SOIF (DAS) _ PRE ( -c

ASIC
I
\ I
BHSD BHSC
ASIC * ASIC -
n 4

ris bus

Figure I

- 406 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SSIPRE
The system software is used to test the SS/PRE board.

1. Connect the serial port of the serial

terminal to Jl of the SS/PRE PWB (slot’
B02) in the console.
----_---__------------- --- 1
rPress the [Enter] key of the serial I
( terminal and check the diqlay--------mm
---------__------ of the SS. i
----_----_---------------- J 1
i”‘~....““~“..“...........~...............~..~.~......~......~.~.~...................~.~..~~...........~.......~

FEnter E, N, and D from the serial I f [SS] end ;

I
( terminal.
--------___------------- ---a I sx!!&-?.~ger............end
...................................-................--.-.....................~

2. Select SSPRETST of System Maintenance l The system maintenance menu is

on the interaction screen of the console. displayed.
----_----__---------------
fPress the right mouse button, drag the 1
I
I mouse to the System Maintenance I
‘position
----r------------------and release the button. --- :
----------------------- 4, --- 1
rMove the mouse cursor to the System I
1Maintenance position in the menu and (
Lclick the left mouse button.
---------__--------------- 1
_-----_----__--------- 4. ---- 1
FEnter the password. I l The detailed system maintenance menu is
I I
I
---------_____-----_--------
I displayed.
\1
--------------------------,
rMove the mouse cursor to the I

( SSPRETST position in the menu and 1

I
I--------------------------we
click the left mouse button. I

V )-..............................................................................--.................-................,

3, The message on the right is displayed on i *** SS/PRE test program (V1.0) *** ;
i: -test select -
the serial terminal. Enter 1. ;
i 1. memory test
i 2. data process test (NA)
i 3. SWRE debugger (NOT USE) i
Caution: Since 2 and 3 are not mounted, do 1 9. end
not enter these numbers. i <select> ;
).....................................................................................“~,..........-...............,
I
Continued on the next page

- 407 -
 No. SD20 l -322ED

SlBJECT: SSIPRE
,........-...__..._..............-...........-.......--......-......,..............--.........--....................
4. The message on the right is displayed. i- mode select - ;
Specify mode 1 or mode 2. i 1. manual mode
1 2. loop mode
i 9. end
f <select>
~...........+.........................~~...~....................*.~........-...--..-...-...-.-......-..............,
Manual mode : The test mode of the item
selected from the items
indicated below is
executed.
Loop mode : The test modes indicated
below are executed until
the ESC key is pressed.
V i”“*..““..““~‘............................~..................~...........................*.~
5. The message on the right is displayed. i- memory test select -
Enter the test number to be executed from t 1. address test
i 2. 5/A test
among test modes 1 to 6. / 3. address noise test
i 4. data noise test
i 5. marching test
i 6. all test
i 9. end
i <select>
,.............._..........................................-..-.............-...............-..................-....

I
6. The message on the right is displayed.
All test : Test modes 1 to 5 are all
executed.
..........................~.....................................................-....................
- memo5 select-
Enter the memory number to be tested 1. dblbuf-A
2. dblbuf-B
from among memories 1 to 11. 3. adctab
4. offtab
5. lbstab
6. ldttab
7. caltab
8. xchtab
9. offbuf
10. stkbuf
11. all memory
99. end
<select>
...........................................................-............*............-.........-...............
All memory : Memories 1 to 10 are all
tested.

7. The specified test program is executed. I

- 408 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SSIPRE
Caution: When an error occurs, the following message is displayed.
----------------------------
l- 1
; ADRS +---- ANSWER +---- RESULT 1
1 18007: fe 00 I
I
I continue y/n ? I
l- -------------------------w--J

l For the “continue” prompt shown above

If Y is entered: The test is continued.

If N is entered: The test is interrupted and the program is returned to item 6.

l Since the read value is 00 (RESULT) and the right answer is fe (ANSWER), the
message indicates that an error is caused.

When the program terminates normally, the program is automatically returned to

the memory selection mode in item 6.

Note: The test time for each memory is shown below. A value of 0 seconds indicates a time of
less than 1 second.

On-board memo ies GIG ml :mories.

ws are

dblbuf-A I dblbuf-A ‘1 adctab I offtab I lbstab I ldttab I caltab I xchtab stkbuf

Address 2048
test
WA test 5 I 5 I 11 I 5 I 0 I 48 1 768 1 0 6 10240
Address
noise test
*Data noise
OI ol”/ololol
2 / 2 1 4 / 2 j 0 j 19 /
O/O
304 / 0
0

2 4096
0

test
*Marching 87 j 87 / 95 j 75 / 2 / 634 / 10144 / 2 144 178176
test
(Unit: Set)

Tests marked * are time consuming and are therefore not normally executed.

- 409 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SWPRE
BOARD MODE SEL TEST SEL MEMORY SELECT-
SWRE memory test

E
data process test (NA) r manual mode -
loop mode
address test - dblbuf-A
dblbuf-B
-

SS/FRE debugger (NOTUSE) address noise test adctab

data noise test offtab
lbstab
ldttab
caltab
*: This test is
normal13 xchtab
oftbuf
executed.
stkbuf
i all memorj
Test execution example:
-----------------------me-

rdblbuf-A address test complete : 1 set i

; dblbuf-A S/A test complete : 5 set
i
I dblbuf-A address noise test complete : 0 set I
1 dblbuf-A data noise test complete : 2 set i
1 dblbuf-A marching test complete : 87 set f
--------------------------m.

- 410 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: IM
Outline: As the name indicates, this is an image memory board which stores image data and raw
data temporarily. It is provided with two ports (an I/F for VME-BUS and HS-BUS is
provided) and the standard Xvision and GX use 64 MB of IM. (For configurations
provided with the optional 3D function, the IM may be increased to 128 MB; but the
functions remain the same.)

HS BUS
+

VME BUS
A A
..

V . V V
AD FIFb TX/RX
A

FIFO/SELECTOR
HS I/F L 3 ADDRESS GEN
1
I I I I I A

.
! , 3
CK ‘GEN MEMORY
CONTROL * 3
I4

Description of each block

AD FIFO : First-in/first-out for HS bus address

ADDRESS GEN : Memory chip address generator

CK GEN : Synchronization clock for the HS bus and memory access clock
generator

CONTROL : Control signal generator for memory and gate array

FIFO/SELECTOR: Data first-in/first-out and selector

HS I/F HS bus monitor and control

MEMORY : Memory array (The basic configuration unit is 8 Mbytes.)

TX/RX Bus driver

-4ll-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: IM
Outline of operation: As shown in the data flowchart for the RTRU, all data pass through IM.
The flow of data is explained below taking S&V as an example.

1) Pure raw data comes to the SS/PRE from SOIF2.

2) The pure raw data, which has been preprocessed in the PRE, is
processed to raw data and stored in the IM via the HS-BUS.

3) The raw data stored in IM is sent to the RTRU via the HS-BUS and is
concurrently stored in the data DISK by the PSI.

---4) In the RTRU, raw data is processed to image data through image
reconstruction and is stored in the IM via the HS-BUS.

5) The image data in the IM passes through the HS-BUS, CT-VISION is

displayed on the CRT, and the PSI stores the image data on the data
DISK via the HS-BUS.

As described above, all data must pass through the HS-BUS and IM.
Therefore, a defective IM may cause abnormal images. Similarly, a
defective SYPRE, RTRU, CT-VISION, or PSI will also cause abnormal
images.

The example above applies to situations in which data is to be stored in a

device (DISK, etc.) in the console. Explanations for cases when image and
raw data are to be stored on an OD or MOD are given below.

1) Data on the data DISK is stored in the IM via the PSI and the
HS-BUS.

2) The data stored in the IM is stored in the memory of the SM via the
VME-BUS.

3) The data stored in this memory is written onto the OD or MOD by the
SFI. In this case, the data pass through the HS-BUS and VME-BUS
as well as the IM.

Thus; the IMis a an extremely important PWB: in which *all data are stored
at least once. In addition to data, various other files and commands of the
system and PWBs such as the RTRU use the IM as a working area.

- 412 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SL!BJECT: IM
(1) Operation

0a HS bus access

64 bits x 4 ways/320 nanoseconds

Go VME bus access

Byte, word, longword access

0C Refresh
_.
Auto-refresh of CAS-before&IS

(d) Memory access

During memory access, read/modify/write processing is always
performed for both read and write operations.

0e Competition between the HS bus and the VME bus and between
the HS bus and the refresh cycle

Signal STPCLK* of the HS bus is output to delay the timing of

occurrence of MSYNC* and MCLK.

(0 Competition between the VME bus and the refresh cycle

The assert timing of the VME bus DTACK* signal is delayed.

- 413 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: IM
LEDs and DIP SWs <I> Lights in green when the VME bus is accessed.

<2> Lights in green when the HS bus is accessed.

<3> Sets the DRAM refresh start timing.

<4> Sets the mapping addresses:

A0000000 to A3FFFFFF
(For 64 MB memory: CKCN-006B/2,3)
A0000000 to A7FFFFFF
(For 128 MB memory (1st bank): CKCN-006B/4
and optional 3D function incorporated)
A8000000 to AFFFFFFF
(For 128 MB memory (2nd bank): CKCN-006B/4
and FP incorporated)

<2>Lights in green
when the HS bus
4Il HS SEL

is accessed.
Cl> Lights in green
when the VME
---4-l VME SEL

bus is accessed.

Start address End address

<3> Sets the DRAM (OxAOOO0000) (OxA3FF FFFF)
refresh start timing

SW1 SW3

)OOOOOg0019;F
p=T$FF
87654321 87654321
I 1
I
4> Sets the mapping addresses. ’

SW1 and SW3 are switches used to determine the start and end addresses which are set by
converting the first two digits of each address,

- 414 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI
1. Outline
The PSI, which stands for parallel SCSI interface, is a new interface to the data disk and
replaces the PDI (parallel disk interface) used for older models (Xforce series, Xvigor
series, and old Xvision series). This PWB permits high-speed data transmission in
accordance with the SCSI-2 standards.

The PSI, as indicated by the name, permits the DISK to be connected in parallel. It is
provided with two channels in the standard configuration. For the Xvision, Xvision/GX,
and XvisionKP, however, only one channel is used because they use only one data DISK.
In the XvisioriReal, which has two data DISKS, two channels are used.

I;1 Outline of operation

Commands issued from the SM board are stored in the VME “mail box” memory cl> and
interpreted by the disk system controller <2? Data is sent/received to/from the G-RAM
(disk cash memory) <4> via the BHSUBHSD <5>. When the disk system controller <2>
writes the start address of the transmission program which is stored in G-RAM <4>into
the SCSI I/O processor <3>, the SCSI I/O processor <3> executes the transmission
program in G-RAM <4> to read/write the disk through G-RAM <4>.

- 415 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI

HSB VME

<5> c4>

6,4 BHSC,’ 37 3;2 G-RAM

/ )c BHSD / ,*

<2> <3>
1

ROM firm- Disk system ’ SCSI I/O

ware is - controller processor
mounted. (MC68EC030) 4 (NCR53C710-1) 4 ,‘j
. c

e-
I

1 3/2
/

x-7.

rlgure l-l PSI block diagram

- 416 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI
Jumper pin connection

SW1 to 8 {normally OFF)

4
LED1 to14. Setting the 3rd bit from top to ON permits 2 channels to be used.
\

500PIN CONNECTOR

/.
CH2 CONNECTOR:- Not used
(64 PIN CONNECTOR)

If this LED is not lit, there

is some abnormality. +‘LED Dl
I---j
CHI CONNECTOR
(64 PIN CONNECTOR)

LED DZ-

,Front view)

Figure l-2 PWB layout

(1) LED indication

The LEDs on the PSI board indicate operation of the DSC, SCSI I/O processor, and
BHSC/BHSD. Check whether or not they are normal according to the blinking
status when the power is turned ON and during system operation. The status of the
LEDs at the time of normal startup are shown below.

(a) When power is turned ON, LEDs 1 to 9 light. Immediately after this, LEDs 1
and 13 blink, LED9 dims and LED 11 lights. t Firmware is downloaded from
the ROM in the PSI to the CPU‘on the PSI:

(b) Aver a while, the LEDs other than LEDs 10, 12, and 14 light momentarily, then
immediately LED1 blinks and LEDs 4, 9, and 11 light. t Firmware is
downloaded from the system into the CPU on the PSI.

-417-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI
The status of some of the LEDs allow identification of defective sections,

LED4 : Indicates the status of processing of the commands from the SM

board. If this LED does not light as described in item (b) above, some
failure in the exchange of commands with the SM board is suggested. .

LEDlO: Indicates the status of data transmission in the PSI. An illumination

(even a flash) of this LED indicates some failure in exchange of data
in the PSI.

LED14: Indicates the status of data transmission to/from the HS bus. An

-_
illumination of this LED during disk read/write operation suggests a
problem in the interface with the BHSCYBHSD.

1.2 Error log

If an error occurs in the PSI, the corresponding error code is reported. The error code is
recorded in the error log. To learn the details of an error, refer to the error log.

(1) Referring to the error log

The error log is displayed as shown below. PSI error codes are recorded on lines on
which the JOB ID is FMS (file manager system) and the DEV ID is PDI. (Note that
the DEV ID is not PSI but PDI due to the system specifications).

r DATE TIME JOB ID DEV ID ERR CODE TYPE MAJOR ST COMMAND RPT
INFl INF2 INF3 INF4

95/08/19 17:59:24 AP AP b-t 14OcOG Ob XOPEN 0000

00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

95/08/O-t 15:11:14 SSSTAT SS c4008 110 oc UNIX 0000

OOOlOOOd 00010000 00000000 00000000

95/08/O-C 15: 11:09 FMS PDI 87101705 08 UNIX 0012 <

02208000 fffffef0 00000000 00002458
Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5

95/08/O-l 15:01:05 FMS PDI 87101405 08 UNIX 0002 (

1002 800( )009 00000000 00000001
Code 0 Code 1
T T

PSI command
PSI status
The pair of values 00 12 and 0002 together constitute an error
indication in the error log.

- 418 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI
(2) Meaning of error codes

(a) PSI command

This indicates the type of command when an error has occurred. For example,
“20000001” indicates the disk read command and “20000002” indicates the disk
write command.

(b) PSI status

This indicates the status when an error has occurred. For example, “80000009”
indicates a disk-related error and “8000000a” indicates a controller-related error.

(c) Other codes

The other codes indicate the parameters accompanying commands. For example,
if a disk-related error occurs during a disk read/write operation, the meanings of
the codes are as described below.

Code 0: Error log number

Code 1: Error drive number (00000001 for this system)
Code 2: Controller status
Code 3: SCRIPT status
Code 4: SCSI status
Code 5: Error block address (address on the disk at which the error has
occurred.)

1.3 Checking an acquired bad track

As the disk ages, bad tracks may be generated. If a hardware error occurs, check bad
tracks.

To check bad tracks generated after shipment, refer to the PSI error codes in the error log.
If there are errors of the type described below, register the track numbers recorded in the
corresponding error codes as new bad tracks according to the bad track registration
procedure of the PSI monitor program.

For instructions on viewing the error log, see ” 1.2 Error log”.

(a) Confirming bad tracks generated after shipment

PSI command code: 20000001,20000002

PSI status command: 80000009

If the combination of the above errors occurs several times in the same block address,
the block address is assumed to have become bad after shipment. Register it as a bad
track with PSM.

- 419 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI
(b) Disk drive handling

Be extremely careful when handling the disk drive, because it is sensitive to vibration
and shock. Be particularly careful not to subject it to shock when holding it and
placing it on a working table, etc.

Note: 1. Check of bad tracks using ebad of PSI-monitor at the time of shipment
from the factory normally shows zero bad tracks. It is recommended that
the disk be replaced if the number of bad tracks exceeds 10 after use of
the system. Although there are no hardware or software limitations on
---.the number of bad tracks which can be registered using PSI-monitor, in
general PSI-monitor should not be used if there are several tens of bad
tracks.

2. If track 0 is bad, the disk must be replaced. Track 0 contains the

management information of the disk, and the drive cannot be managed if
track 0 is defective.

1.4 Troubleshooting
The VME interface can be checked using ” 147-BUG” (or ” 167-Bug”) before NICS starts.
Perform the following.

This value always appears immediately after the power is turned bN.

147-Bug(or 167-Bug) d 87000000; 1

87000000 r400000000 FFFFFFFF 020 12904 FFFFFFFF .... ......). .. ,.
870000 10 FFBBFBFF 0200 1000 00480219 FFFFFFFF ..{ s.....H . .....

a) In the above operations, the 1st 4 bytes from 87000000 must be 00000000 as shown
in the figure. Otherwise, the VME interface malfunctions.

b) When the entered addresses are 87000040, 87000080, 870000~0, and 87000100 in the
above operations, the 1st 4 bytes of each address must be 00000000. Otherwise, the
VME interface malfunctions.

c) If a bus error occurs in the above operation, the VME interface malfunctions.

Note: When the error “data disk write error” or “data I/O error” is generated,
immediately request the user to protect the data and to avoid accessing the disk.
At the time of service visit to the site, perform the error logging and reproduction
test to check the bad blocks, and perform alternate track processing.

- 420 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI
l Replacement procedures for the DISK and PSI

The replacement procedures for the SCSI type DATA-DISK and the PSI PWB are described
here. For the PDI-SYSTEM, time-consuming work such as registration of p-confg, e-bad, etc.
was required to write the management information onto the DISK. For the SCSI type PSI-
SYSTEM, however, this work is not required.

1) Replacing the DISK

Perform hardware setting of the DISK.

Startup PSI-Monitor and execute firmware download “download”.
Execute “m-select”. For one-disk systems, enter 000 for DriveNo, and for two-disk
systems, enter 0 10.
Perform FORMAT of the DISK.
Perform initialization of FileSystem (image/raw data).
Reboot the system and perform the operational check.

2) Replacing the PSI

Check the setting of the PSI PWB.

In the PSI-SYSTEM, one-unit systems are differentiated from two-unit systems by the
setting of the Dip-SW on the PSI PWB. When replacing the PWB, check the Dip-SW of
the original PWB and the setting of the replacement before replacing the PWB.

3) When both the PWB and the DISK are replaced

Perform items 1) and 2) above.

-421 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: DATA-DISK
1. Outline
The PSI and-the DATA-DISK perform data transfer between IM and DISK at high speed.
When the system uses only one DISK, the maximum transfer speed is 4 MB/set. When .
the system uses two DISKS, the maximum transfer speed is 8 MB/set.

The transfer rate is 16 KB for-the- single-disk system: For the two-disk: system, the /
transfer rate is 8 KB per DISK and 16 KB in total.

The DATA-DISK stores raw data and image data. However, image-related information is
stored in the SYSTEM-DISK. That is, the DATA-DISK stores data only, and directory
management is performed by the SYSTEM-DISK.

Therefore, if the SYSTEM-DISK becomes defective, image data and raw data cannot be
retrieved.

The systems in the new Xvision series (TSX-002A/4 and later) employ SCSI-type DISKS.
(The older Xvision series models used ESDI-type DISKS.)

The SCSI-type DISKS are manufactured by HP and have a memory capacity of

approximately 2 GB.

One of advantages of SCSI-type DISKS is that they automatically use other tracks when a
bad track is generated (mode select must be ON in the PDM).

2. Specifications
(1) Manufacturer : HP

(2) Name : HPC3325A (Drawing number: BSX17-8635)

(3) Memory capacity : Approx. 2.16 GB after formatting

- 422 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: DATA-DISK
3. Precautions
The DISK is very delicate. Do not subject it to any shocks during replacement, etc. This
precaution is applicable to all DISKS.

HS-BUS

11 VME-BUS

IM

1 PSI

I
I
I

I
e- -J-e-
I 2
I --__-- I
I I
I I
I -,---,I
c e5
-q--e-

DISK 0 DISK I

- 423 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: DATA-DISK
4. DATA-DISK Settings
The settings of the hard disk are as shown below.

r-( \
Ir U
-0 0 -

f B Bottom .
F 2

J4
Terminator enable
Must be left open (reserved)
Terminator power

Standard of the synchronous spindle signal

Slave synchronous signal Master synchronous signal

q&&y-/J JJy:

11.112rt.002 mSEC

Figure 1 Jumper setting in the hard disk (disk for PSI)

- 424 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: DATA-DISK
Table 1 Address and optional connector pin assignment of the hard disk (disk for PSI)

Note: The settings below are given assuming that the PCA component side faces up and pairs of
pins are viewed from the side. For the positions of the pairs of pins, refer to the setup
illustration.

Pin
number
r Function
Lower
T
Setting
Upper
position position
1 Gnd Write’Protect Open : The drive operates based on the mode, page,
(right) and header. “NOT write protect” is set as the
default.
Short : The drive enters the Write Protect mode
forcibly.
2 SCSI-l/2 Reserved. When the SCSI-l/2 pin is active and SCSI mode is
‘a
This pin (only required, the jumper must be set sideways. For details,
one) must refer to figure 1.
always be When SCSI-l/2 pin is active:
open.
Open : The drive refers to MODE page 09H, byte 8,
bit 4 and responds accordingly. SCSI-2 is set
as the default.
Short : The drive is forcibly operated as a SCSI-l
device.
3 Gnd SDTRKJA Whether SDTRKJA pin is active or not is determined
by MODE SELECT page 23H.
If it is active, the pin function, SDTR or Unit
Attention, is determined by MODE SELECT page
23H.
When SDTR is active:
Open : Drive initiation of SDTR message is inhibited.
Short : Drive initiation of SDTR message is enabled
at the time of power ON and resetting.
When Unit Attention is active:
Open : Unit Attention is enabled.
Short : Unit Attention is inhibited.
4 +5v LED driver An LED requiring a maximum of 10 mA can be
(Pull-up) connected to the pair of pins numbered 4.
Continued on the next page

- 425 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: DATA-DISK
Table 1 (continued from the previous page)

Note: The settings below are given assuming that the PCA component side faces up and pairs of
pins are viewed from the side. For the positions of the pairs of pins, refer to the setup
illustration.

Pin Function l-
number Upper Lower Setting
position position
5 Gnd Auto Open : The drive does not spin until the initiator
Spin-Up sends the START UNIT command.
Short : The drive automatically spins when power is
supplied.
6 Key: No pin
7 Gnd SCSI pin 29 Note: When the synchronous spindle mode is set to
“disable”, pin numbers 7 and 8 have no effect.
8 . SCSI pin 29 Sync Spindle
Refer to MODE page 04H.
7 = open, 8 = open : Not permitted
7 = open, 8 = shorted : Connect the synchronous
spindle cable to SCSI pin
29. When pin number 8 is
shorted, pin number 7 must
be open.
7 = shorted, 8 = open : Connect SCSI pin 29 to the
ground. The upper pin of
the pair of pins numbered 7
is for synchronous output
in master mode or for
synchronous input in slave
mode. When pin number 7
is shorted, pin number 8
must be open.
7 = shorted; 8 = shorted, : Not permitted:
9 Key: No pin
Continued on the next page

- 426 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: DATA-DISK
Table 1 (continued from the previous page)

Note: The settings below are given assuming that the PCA component side faces up and pairs of
pins are viewed from the side. For the positions of the pairs of pins, refer to the setup
illustration.

Pin Function
number Lower Setting
Upper
position position
SCSI address pin
10 Gnd I Unit Select3 0 = open, S = short
SCSI address 0: 12 = 0, 11 = 0, 10 = 0
11 Gnd I Unit Select2 SCSIaddress 1: 12= S, 11 = 0, lO= 0
12 Gnd Unit Select 1 SCSI address 2: 12 = 0, 11 = S, 10 = 0
SCSIaddress3: 12=S, ll= S, lO= 0
SCSI address 4: 12 = 0, 11 = 0, 10 = S
SCSI address 5: 12 = S, 11 = 0, 10 = S
SCSI address 6: 12 = 0, 11 = S, 10 = S
SCSI address 7: 12 = S, 11 = S, 10 = S

- 427 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: DATA-DISK
Table 2

Note: To connect the active terminator to the SCSI connector, a jumper with a terminating
resistor enable must be installed.
II Terminator enable = open H The on-board active terminator is disabled. The
terminator is not connected to the SCSI connector.
n Terminator enable = shorted w The on-board active terminator is enabled and is
connected to the SCSI bus. The TermPwr source is
determined by mounting the pin setting jumper of the
terminator power.
R Terminator power = open n TermPwr of the on-board terminator is supplied only to
the drive.
Drive TermPwr is not connected to SCSI connector
pin 26.
n Terminator power = shorted m TermPwr of the on-board terminator is also supplied to
the drive, and drive TermPwr is also connected to
SCSI connector pin 26,

- 428 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: RTRU
1. Outline
The real time reconstruction unit (hereinafter referred to as RTRU) is composed of two
PWBs; RMST (ReconstructionMaster) and RSLV (ReconstructionSlave). The RMST
can operate independently but the RSLV cannot.

The Xvision/Real system employs both the RMST~ and RSLV (one, each). Other systems
in the Xvision series employ only the standard RMST PWB to perform image
reconstruction. When the RMST PWB is used, image reconstruction can be performed in
5 seconds, image reconstruction using a function with BHC processing in approximately 6
seconds, and helical reconstruction in approximately 8 seconds.

The RMST includes two channels, a controller, interfaces for the VME bus and HS .bus,
and a frame buffer. The RSLV includes four channels and an interface for the VME bus.
However, the interface for the VME bus in the RSLV is used only when malfunction
diagnosis is performed by the RSLV alone.

The RMST and RSLV can be used in combination by connecting them using two front-
edge connector PWBs. Signals between the two PWBs are transmitted through the front-
edge connector PWBs. When both PWBs are installed, the front-edge connectors must be
connected before turning the power ON.

K:Bu, RSLV PWB

IL-

-7

,,VMEbusi/F ---)
dlaanaslic USB OIIIYa + + Channel 0
*
I to/from
RMST
RSLV

-- 'ME bus VME bus

ISE

Figure l-l RMST PWB Figure l-2 RSLV PWB

- 429 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: RTRU
2. Outline of Operation
The raw data acquired by the DAS is preprocessed at the SS/PRE and transferred to the
IM. The data is then transferred to the RTRU and reconstructed into image data. The
image data is returned to the IM and displayed on the monitor by the CT-VISION.

VME-BUS HS-BUS
,
r
SWPRE.!
I + SOIF (DAS) data
I

IM
+

CT-VISION
I B

- 430 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: RTRU
3. Hardware Configuration
The hardware configuration and the outlines of some of the functions of some of the
components of the RMST are given below.

(1) Channels

Data processing is performed by two channels which operate in parallel. Each

channel consists of the channel processor, local RAJM, two gate arrays for back
projection (BPGAs), etc.

The channel processor performs FFT (Fast Fourier Transform), etc. and the BPGAs
perform back projection in the reconstruction process. In addition, there is a
controller channel which performs communication with the external units and controls
the entire RTRU. This controller channel does not have any BPGAs.

(2) Frame buffer

The frame buffer is used to temporarily store the image data during back projection at
the time of reconstruction.

(3) External interfaces

The interfaces for the VME bus and the HS bus are installed on the RMST.

(4) Internal interfaces

Components in the RTRU are linked by the buses; LBUS, DBUS, CBUS, PBUS, etc.
The PBUS is a 32-bit bus which links the BPGA in each channel in a daisy chain.
During back projection at the time of reconstruction, the data distributed to each
channel through all BPGAs of the RTRU is added to the data read out from one of
the two banks of the frame buffer. The data is then written to the other bank.

-431-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT:. RTRU

CBUS
PBUS ‘I
DBL’

Figure 3- 1 Internal configuration of a channel

L + . . . I

BPCA , BPCA BPGA I BPGA

so #I 12 13 ’ r
+ , , v b b
\ 4

r------- -- T------- +
I I DBUS
I v w
I
lur BUS
Exchange Exchange
.

Figure 3-2 PBUS

- 432 -
 \
No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: RTRU
(5) LEDs on the RMST PWB

The LEDs on the RMST PWB indicate the following:

Dl (red) : System reset

D2 (yellow) / : Interrupt from the VME bus

D3 (green) : Access to the VME bus

D4 to D6 (green) : Controller control

D7 (green) : Control of master PWB channel 1

D8 (green) : Control of master PWB channel 0

D9 (green) : DMA transfer

D 10 (green) : High-speed bus transfer

D 11 (yellow) : DBUS access to the frame buffer

D 12 (yellow) : PBUS access to the frame buffer

- 433 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: RTRU
4. Operating Principles
(1) Outline

The data read out from the memory through the HSB is distributed to each channel.
Correction, convolution, and centering are performed at the channel processor. The
data is sent to the BPGA and backtprojection is performed. In back projection, each
BPGA of each channel is in charge of one view of data; the data is added to the data
read out from one frame buffer and written to the other frame buffer. Then, the data
is read out from the frame buffer, the data at both channels is added to it, and it is
written to the first frame buffer. The image data is created in the frame buffer by
repeating this procedure as many times as specified by the mode. This image data is
transferred to the memory from the HSB through the DBUS. (Refer to figure 4- 1.)

Ch.0 Ch.1
DBUS t t r

. V

Chrnw I
Procassor

V l
\L
1

BPGA BPGA
,

. DBUS
.

Figure 4- 1 Operation during reconstruction

- 434 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECZT: RTRU
The data is processed at the channel processor except for back projection, and is
processed in the order shown in figure 4-2.

Raw data

V V
Helical
Overlap interpola- Half
tion

v V V V

Convolution
Centering

Image data

Figure 4-2

-435 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: RTRU
(2) Flow of data

The flow of data in the three reconstruction modes (S & V, S & S, and batch) is
shown below.

(a) S&V

<2> Raw data

HSB

IM3 RTRU < - SS/PRE

DISK
View
number
Raw data
<2> and <3> progress
simultaneously.
DAS

* Reconstruction starts at the same time during data acquisition.

Figure 4-3

(b) S & S

<3> Raw data

DISK

Raw data

DAS

Figure 4-4

- 436 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: RTRU
(c) Batch (reconstruction retry)

HSB

DISK

Figure 4-5

- 437 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: RTRU
5. Flow of Processing in the RTRU (for reference)
(1) For Normal and Q/Q

Raw data r

FSMC
CHEX
EXPD
I SCAN0
I
Interpolation (HALF, PMC, HELl , HEL2)
STACK

Normal Q/Q N-Q/Q

RJXON RECON

SCALE SCALE

BHC

IMAGE IMAGE

Image data
4 4

-438 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: RTRU
(2) Image processing (3) Real-time reconstruction

Image data Raw data

Filter FSMC
CHEX
EXPD
IMAGE
I
RECON

SCALE
ROI calculation
IMAGE

Image data

Note: In real-time reconstruction, images are reconstructed using a 256 x 256 matrix and
correction is omitted if possible in order to reduce calculation time.

The number of views differs depending on the type of reconstruction as shown in the
table below.

Number of *1 Number of raw Number of Reconstruction

acquisition views data views reconstruction views mode
S&S, Batdh S&V
Full 1.5 set 900 (99oy 900 (990) 900 0 0
2 set 1200 (1320) 1200 (1320) 1200
4 set 2100 1200 1200 0 0
6 set 3600 1200 1200
Half 574 574 900 0 0

Offset 900 900 900 0 0

1200 1200 1200
Scanogram S field

* 1: Number of acquisition views sent from DAS to PRE (pure raw data)
*2: Number of views with overlapping acquisition
*3 : Maximum number of views

-439-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CT-VISION
1. Outline
The CT-VISION is the board managing the display unit. It displays CT images as well as
characters and graphics on the CRT monitor, In addition, it has the function of receiving
input from devices such as the keyboard, touch panel, and window controller on the
Naviport, and the mouse.

The CT-VISION consists of a master board and an optional daughter board for auto
filming. The master board consists of a VME interface for data communication with the
SM, a controller for controlling the entire image display unit, a DMA for inputting or
outputting image data, a display unit for displaying images, characters and graphics on the
CRT monitor, a display unit for displaying data on the EL panel, an interface for various
input devices, and a disp1a.ybus interface for the daughter board.

The daughter board includes a display unit for the imager.

VME--BUS

HS-BUS

I
r

SS/PRE

J ’
, I
I - AD12
I I SSB
c --m------- I
I I
I I
I
; IMAGER i 15” monitor I I
I I
I I I I

I
I I
I
L---------- I Mouse
I

r-
I
I

I IMAGER
I
I
I I
I I
L.. -0

- 440 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: CT-VISION
2. Board Setting
The settings of the CT-VISION depend on whether or not the daughter board and the
Xlink 30 are used. Refer to the service manual for details. In this section, only notes for
setting are given.

Bit 1 of SW2 is used for setting whether or not a back;port for auto filming is available.
With the standard configuration, the back port cannot be used and this bit should be set to
OFF. When the daughter board is mounted to perform auto filming, this bit should be set
to ON.

Bits 2 to 5 of SW2 are used for setting the monitor type. The current software supports
the standard 15” monitor only, and these bits should be set to OFF.

Bit 6 of SW2 is used for setting whether or not data should be displayed on the EL panel
The Naviport uses EL display and this bit should be set to ON.

Bits 7 and 8 of SW2 are used for setting whether or not the Xlink 30 is used. For the
standard configuration, both bits should be set to OFF. To use the Xlink 30, set bit 7 to
ON and bit 8 to OFF.

Bit 3 of SW3 is used for selecting the type of touch panel; optical or pressure sensitive.
This bit should be set to OFF since only the pressure-sensitive type of touch panel is
supported.

Bit 4 of SW3 is used for setting whether or not the screen saver function is enabled. A
screen saver function is provided as standard and this bit should be set to OFF. If it is set *
to ON, the screen saver function is disabled.

Bit 8 of SW3 is used for setting whether or not a boot signal should be output to the SM.
This bit should be set to ON to prevent a boot signal from being output to the SM. If this
is set to OFF, the error message “SYSTEM BOOT ERROR” will appear on the screen.

3. Test Program
A test program is installed as standard in the master board of the CT-VISION. When this
test program is started, a series of patterns, etc. appears on the monitor and the EL panel
indicating that the test program is running. (With test programs of other boards, there is
no indication that the test program is running until the results are displayed on the
terminal, etc.)

Refer to the service manual for the procedure for starting the test program.

The test program will complete in approximately five minutes even when all the tests are
executed.

-441-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: CT-VISION
4. Other Information
The’Xlink 30 system is also provided with a CT-VISION, and performs image display,
image processing, and filming independent of the CT-VISION of the CT system.

For the option sett ng in the software, WS 1 indicates the CT-VISION of the CT system
and WS2 indicatestheCT-VISION in the*eXlink 3*0. ’ *

5. External View of CT-VISION

(1) CT-VISION (master board)

El JPl

3l <. CNNl

I--
BE
CNNE

CNNC

Figure l-l

- 442 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CTMSION
(2) CT-VISION (daughter board)

This is optional for performing auto filming.

i--------a
: 8:8
:
iCNN4 1
: ::
:
, :-------:
I
:
[CNN~ ;
I: I;
‘L- __-- -2

I JIHACE
c -jOCLOCH
-- q UHl c

Figure l-2

- 443 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CT-!!ISION
(3) Front view of CT-VISLON

-&- Reset
Debug
switch
port
(SWl)
( CNN~)

OPI interface for

OPI or SSB (CNNl)
- 0

z”
Imager control -
1
L
OO

interface (CNNE) Oo

For outputting the

control signal to
the imager during
auto filming (RS232C)

CT-VISION- CT-VISION (daughter board)

(master board) Optional board for auto
filming

0
OO
OO

EL interface for - z”
0
Back port VIDEO2
OPI or SSB (CNNC) OO Imager output
E”
C B (Composite
1
synchronous video)

Imager output (DCLK)

VR for imager output

Video output (R)- l(J) level adjustment
Vide o output (G + composite
V IDE01
sync hronous video)
Video output (B)

Figure l-3

- 444 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBdECT: CT-VISION
Related Information

Failure determination procedure

(Extract from Xvigor service training material used in Japan (September 5, 1994))

I. CT-VISION
(1) Noise in the displayed images

(a) The position of the noise changes as a result of window conversion (encoder).

+ Any of the Kl boards may be faulty.

(b) The position of the noise does not change but density changes as a result of
window conversion (encoder).

--+ IM3 or PDI-2 may be faulty. CT-VISION is not responsible.

(c) Neither the position of the noise nor the density change as a result of window
conversion (encoder).

+ CT-VISION (IM3 in a very few cases) may be faulty.

(2) Image distortion

(a) The distortion type changes as a result of window conversion (encoder).

-+ Any of the Kl boards may be faulty.

(b) The distortion type does not change as a result of window conversion (encoder).

-+ IM3 or PDI-2 may be faulty. CT-VISION is not responsible.

- 445 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CT-VISION
(3) Noise or display distortion on the EL panel or menu window

(a) Pop-up menus appear normally.

--+ Any of the Kl boards may be faulty.

(b) Pop-up menus do not appear normally.

--+ CT-VISION may be faulty.

(c) Nothing is displayed on the EL panel

+ The EL device, ELI/F, or EL power supply may be faulty.

(d) A vertical or horizontal line continuously appears on the EL panel

--+ The EL device may be faulty.

(4) Malfunctioning mouse

(a) The mouse does not function at all.

-+ The OPI (includes jumper pin setting) or CT-VISION may be faulty.

(b) Mouse pointer does not move smoothly.

---+ The OPI or CT-VISION may be faulty.

(5) Disabled window conversion (encoder) or key entry (except start, abort/STOP,
gantry/couch, move, and talk keys)

-+ The OPI or CT-VISION may be faulty.

(6) Unresponsive touch panel

(a) Both the red and orange LEDs at the center of the OPI are lit.

-+ If the touch panel operation is not recovered even after turning OFF/ON the
power, the cable between the CT-VISION and OPI or the OPI itself may be
faulty.

(b) If not (a)

-+ The OPI or touch panel itself may be faulty.

- 446 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: MOUSE
1. Outline
This is a mechanical mouse provided with a silicon-coated ball.

I
Bottom
TOP

o O\
Le ft o
T-T-
Bottom cover

button, button Dsub-9

connector 8 Ball

(female
tYPeI &
Figure l-l

This mouse uses a serial interface. The specifications of the interface are given below:

(RS-232C)

l Pin assignment

Table l-l

lPin No. 1Fiignal name

3 TXD l***. Fixed to -12 V

4 DTR .**.. Fixed to +12 V
5 SG
7 RTS l **.* Fixed to +12 V
6, 8, 9 Not used

- 447 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MOUSE
l Output data (RXD line)

Format : Compatible with Microsoft format

Baud rate : 1200 bps

Output format : Start bit : 1 bit

Data bit : 7 bit’
Stop bit : 2 bit
Parity bit : None

2. Video Signal
l Data format

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Dl DO
1st byte 1 L R Y7 Y6 X7 X6
2nd byte 0 x5 x4 x3 x2 Xl x0
3rd byte 0 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Yl YO
L: LEFT R: RIGHT

LEFT : Switch 1 ON=1 OFF=0

RIGHT : Switch 2 ON=1 OFF=0

x7-x0 : g-bit, two’s complement

LEFT direction = -, RIGHT direction = +

Y7-YO : s-bit, two’s complement

DOWN direction = -, UP direction = +

l Output timing

A data block is issued each time the. mouse .is.mo.ved or. a mouse button is pressed.

- 448 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MOUSE
3. Troubleshooting the Mouse
When the mouse cursor on the screen won’t move, the mouse may be defective.
Troubleshoot in the following order:

(1) Check supply voltage f 12 V.

(2) Check the connection of the mouse.

(3) Replace the mouse.

If the mouse cursor is still inactive, the CT-VISION may be defective. Check the
CT-VISION.

* If the mouse has become faulty, the mouse of a personal computer can be used as
a replacement.

- 449 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: NAVIPORT
1. Outline
The Naviport consists of keys, an encoder, a touch panel, and a cover.

Cable

TOSHIBA OMODIP

0-

w l

- 450 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: NAVIPORT
2. New Naviport
The new Naviport consists of the touch panel, keyboard, window, microphone, EL,’ and
their control PWB (NCB PWB).

The system block diagram of the new Naviport is shown in figure 2-l.

2.1 Outline of operation

(1) Touch panel/Keyboard

The position where the touch panel or the keyboard is pressed is detected and the
position signal is converted into the corresponding code. The code is then
transferred to SS/PRE or CT-VISION via SSB.

(2) Keyboard LED/Buzzer

The code transferred from CT-VISION via SSB is decoded and the keyboard LED
or the keyboard buzzer is controlled according to the code.

(3) [[TALK]] key on the keyboard

When the [[TALK]] key is pressed, the signal is transferred to AD1 using the
dedicated signal line (TALK) without coding.

When this signal is set to active, AD1 outputs the amplified microphone signal to the
gantry speaker.

(4) Window

Pulses sent from the window encoder are counted, weighting is performed for the
pulse signal, and then the signal is transferred to CT-VISION via SSB.

(5) Microphone

The microphone signal is transferred to AD1 via SSB as it is.

(6) X-RAY LED/Buzzer

When the signal line (X-RAY ON) sent from SS/PRE is set to active, the LED lights
and a buzzer sounds.

-451-
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: NAVIPORT

TM68HCOO

ROM

[WL ENCODER] WL COUNTER

1
>

[WW ENCODER1 WW COUNTER

CNNlO SIO-0
*_-__ - 1 CNNl
o- INT TXD
?a
TO SS/PRE
-___I: RXD /FROM
p?j?mzEj fl > Q cl
KEYBOARD CONTROL CIRCUIT
SIO-1 CNNl

VISION

PIO-0

KEYBOARD LED CONTROL

IKEYBoARD LEDI CNN2 * CIRCUIT
..
..
- <

.
l

.KEYBOARD BUZZER CONTROL CIRCUI'I

1-
[KEYBOARD BUZZER]

rl CNN6 CNNl
---
-+P -+I-- Xl TOAD1
[X-RAYI- CNN2 CNN 1
---
a------- _________+7 FROM SS/PRE

Figure 2-l New Naviport system block diagram

- 452 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: NAVIPORT

The block diagram of the EL control circuit is shown in figure 2-2.

EL data sent from CT-VISION is stored in the frame memory.

The data is read from the frame memory at the time when EL display is performed
and sent to the EL screen.

The frame memory is a double-buffer type and the timing of data reading/writing is
controlled so that one buffer is used for reading while the other is used for writing.

OUTPUT SELECT
FRAME DATA DATA DATA
MEMORY//O LATCH SELECTORi? LATCHgO
ELDO-3. ELD f ELD '
CNN1 lo-1,3 20,22 CNN5
FROM CT-VISIOND / I ) ELD30
/ /) / 3 .-----em TO EL
c , 4 J -

SELECT
FRAME DATA DATA
MEMORYjfl SELECTOR]/1 LATCH#/l
. 1

,E t CNN5
\,I) /
/ IELD31
)
>a TO EL
ELD
21, 23- a L

WRITE
TIMING GEN. TIMING
1 SELECTOR
CNN1 HSYN/VSYN/DCK l 4
FRAME MEMORY//O
FROM CT-VISION q 3 3 >TIMING SIGNAL
L-J

I”-
FRAME MEMORYfl
TIMING SIGNAL
READ
TIMING GEN
CLOCK GEN VSYN
' ELCK ELHD/ELVD/ELCK CNN5
a TO EL

Figure 2-2 EL control circuit

- 453 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: NAVIPORT
2.2 LEDslSwitches
Figure 2-3 shows the layout of the LEDs and switches on the NCB.

When LED 1 is blinking, the CPU operates normally.

LED 2 indicates that the [[TALK]] key has been pressed.

SW 1: CPU reset switch

SW2: Not used

LED I
f2

LED2
SWI /

o #?a’
•3 SW2

7
TMP68301AF12

Figure 2-3 Layout of the LEDs and switches on the NCB

- 454 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: SSB
I. SSB PWB (For the New Naviport)
This PWB is used to transfer/distribute signals between the Naviport, the mouse, and the
console (SS/PRE, CT-VISION, and ADI).
(The PWB is mounted instead of the existing OPI PWB when the new Naviport is used.)
The connection block diagram is shown in figure l-l.

Signals output from the mouse are converted from the RS-232C level to the RS-422 level
at the SSB PWB.

EL data is converted from the TTL level to the RS-422 level at the SSB PWB.

Other signals are not converted and are transferred as it is.

- 455 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SSB

New
Naviport SS/PRE
CNN 'IN9 CNNl J3
RS-23X serial
communication .

--_----- .X-RAY BUSY.

1
CT-VISZON

RS-422 serial
CNNl
. communication 7

l-l-
RS232C RS-422 serial
communication
I
c- 3 r)
RS422

CNNC
EL data
I

AD1
.
f
'fIC SIG/TALK I
MIC SIG CNN6
I
w------u-- 3
i
NNlb TALK CNN7

RS-232C serial (I
communication
(transmission
I
L I Mouse
only >

Figure l-l SSB PWB connection block diagram

- 456 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: AD12
1. Outline
AD12 (Audio Interface 2) generates audio signals that are output to the speaker.
According to the exam Plan, the audio data registered in the RAM of AD12 are output
from the speaker at the request of the SS/PRE. When audio output is completed, the
END status is sent to the SS/PRE.
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: AD12
1.1 Flow of operation
(1) Communication

The communication specification is shown below:

l Communication protocol : RS-232C

l Transfer rate : 9,600 bps

l Character length : 7 bits

a Stop bit : 1 bit

l Parity : Even

The flow of operation is shown below:

Receive a command from the

SSIPRE.

Analyze the command.

Is command processing N
possible?
Y V
1

Send the ACK signal Send the NAK signal

(affirmative response) to the (negative response) to the
s S/PRE. 1 SS/PRE.
I
&
Execute command
processing.
.
Send the END status to the
SSIPRE.

End (to enable next

command reception).

- 458 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: AD12
(2) Audio synthesis

The flow of operation when the RECORD or REPRODUCE command is received

from the SS/PRE is shown below:

Flow of operation when RECORD is received

Enter audio to the audio synthesizer unit IC (MSM6258)

from the console microphone via the microphone
amplifier.

Convert audio entered in the MCM6258 to S-bit audio

-data using the AD PCM method. 4.
.-
/--

Store audio data in the SRAM.

Store audio data in the FRAM for audio data. *1

- 459 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: AD12
Flow of operation when REPRODUCE is received

IRead out audio data from the FRAM for audio data. I

I Read out audio data from the RAM.

Audio-synthesize with the MCM625 8.

Audio output from the speaker via power amplifier

(HA1384).
.-..
* 1: Memory management data is transferred between the SRAM and the FRAM’as
well as audio data. (During recording and erasing)

Note: If power is forcibly turned OFF during audio data recording or erasing, data
in the FRAM may be damaged,% /‘----_*
If data is d3maged, refer to f’, 5.2 “Deletion” and’ 1.5 ,;! ItWriting audio data” of
subsection’ 1.5 “Communication, between AD12 a&l%3 100”.

(3) Interphone

Maximum power rating: 3 W (speaker input impedance: 8 ohms)

The interphone section operates independently of the audio synthesizer section except
during RECORD or REPRODUCE processing.

- 460 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: IP-210M

(1) Outline
,,I-^...
IP2 1OMS is a processor for performing the three-dimensional image processing and
high-speed MPR processing for slice images after image reconstruction.

(2) Function

(a) Three-dimensional image processing

The three-dimensional image processing function performs binary-coding for

multiple sets of slice image data and performs operations such as surface display,
shading, cutting, separation, and rotation.

(b) High-speed MPR processing _--

The high-speed MPR processing function displays sagittal, coronal, or oblique

images using multiple sets of axial slice image data and measures the distance
between two points on an MPR image at high speed.

-461 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: IP-210M
(3) Connection

The VME bus can be connected to IP2 10 for control and the HS bus for image data.

VME bus

HS bus

(4) Bus and data

(a) The VME bus is a slave and loading of firmware from the SM and processing
start are controlled.

(b) The HS bus is a master and inputs or outputs data from or to the IM. Data is
processed mostly by the IM.

Data disk *+ PDI + IM: Slice image reading

IM t IPZlOMS t IM: Slice image compression and I
three-dimensional image processing
IM + CT-vision -+ CRT
monitor: Three-dimensional
image display
IM + PDI -+ Data disk: Three-dimensional
image file

Conceptional diagram of data transfer during three-dimensional processing

- 462 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: IP-210M
(5) Composition

(a) Board: Kl size, 1 (Double-sided PWB)

8‘* JP4

Front connector

QJPI
i J
09
R!l JP5
01

L
El 08

024
I

f J
~ SW2

SJO
El
JTAO
4
mJP3

(b) Circuit composition

See figure l-l, “Block diagram of IP2<lS”.

IP210MS is broadly divided into three blocks, a control unit, arithmetic unit, and
data transfer unit. The control unit is a 32-bit MPU (68020). It controls the
entire board and communicates with the SM. The arithmetic unit consists of a
32-bit DSP (ADSP2 1020) and three-dimensional address unit(AU2 10) and
performs image processing arithmetic. The data transfer unit generates the HS
bus address in the 16-bit DSP (ADSP2 111) and also performs data input-output
with the IM via the HS bus.

- 463 -
 VME bus
1
I HS bus

Control unit I
k Data transfer unit
t * I
VME I
.
I/F I
I r
nhlrl f 1 68020 f I I TTrn A p I
r-T
I+ I

& Debugger f- SJO

I
P

-m-w- -ws- -----

I-

Arithmetic unit

n PM
256K.3
I
Emulator

Figure&l -4 Block diagram of IPhOMP

:LLJ
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE

SYSTEM
I . General Description
1.1 Operating system
This system uses Motorola V68 as an operating system. This operating system (OS) uses
the UNIX operating system V developed by AT&T which is incorporated in the Motorola
CPU MVME16?j /
‘\
1.2 System operating environment

This system sets a different operating environment for each application because the
operating environment differs for routine operation and maintenance.

Currently available operating environments are as follows:

(1) JOB system : For routine operation

(2) Generation system : For software development or running service tools

(3) Diagnostic system : For operating the hardware diagnostic program

(4) Others : For special applications

Remarks: The system is set so that the JOB system is automatically started when power
is turned ON. To start another system, therefore, a special operation is
required as described later.

- 465 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE

SYSTEM
2. File Management
2.1 Division ofdisk area
The standard configuration system consists of three disk drives; the area of each drive is
divided as follows:

<DISK#O>

I Operating system and application area I

I System constant area I
File system area (1)
(Optical disk, online image data/raw data, additional information area)

<DISK#l, #2>

File system area (2)

(Image data, raw data)

2.2 File management

This system uses a standard UNIX file system and an original file system. The latter file
system is outlined below.

The file system has a two-layer hierarchical structure comprising a study layer and an
image data layer as shown below.

Study layer

Image data layer

Note: To allow the system to use a common directory operation, the raw data file and
the optical disk directory file use the same file structure. In this case, the image
data layer is a raw data layer for the raw data files and an image directory data
layer for the optical disk directory files.

- 466 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE

SYSTEM
2.3 Image file attributes and data Iidentification
Each image file has the following attributes:

Study number : Serial number of each study (Automatically assigned by

(Study#) the system)
Same as EXAM numbers

Series number : Serial number of each group assigned when continuous

(SER#) scans are repeated several times in one study (Before or
after contrast enhancement, planned scans, etc.)

Acquisition number : Number of acquisitions ordered in a group (scan number)

(ACQ#)
Image number : Serial number of images reconstructed using the same
(IMG#) acquired data (When a reconstructed image is subject to
image processing, the image number is left unchanged.)

File number : Serial number of images in a study

(File#)

Note: 1. The image files of this system are based on the ACR-NEMA standard. The
study number, series number, scan number, and image number mentioned
above conform to the ACR-NEMA standard.

2. The study number is unique to the system and the file number is unique to the
study. Therefore, by specifying the study number and file number, image data
created by the system can be uniquely identified.

* ACR-NEMA : American College of Radiology and National Electrical

Manufacturers Association
(Communication rules and regulations concerning digital image data
for medical applications)

- 467 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE

SYSTEM
2.4 Image file operation
The following operations can be performed for the image file system.

(1) File deletion

The specified image files are deleted. When a study is specified, all images in the
study are deleted, except protected images.

(2) File protection

Thespecified files are protected. When an image file is protected, the study
containing the image is also automatically protected.

(3) Protection cancel

Protection of the specified image files is canceled. When a study is specified, the
protection of all image files in the study is canceled.

(4) File sorting

The image files are sorted using a portion of the image related information as a key.

3. Maintenance Software
3.1 Software composition
JOB JOB NICS DIAG GEN
system system q-stern system system
(ACT) (ACT)
Boot system
147 Bug UNIX (OS)
I Hardware

NICS : Nasu Innovation Computer System

ACT : Advanced CT
147 Bug : ROM-based debugger (CPU board)
DIAG : Diagnostic
’ GEN : Generation

- 468 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE

SYSTEM
3.2 Configuration of the maintenance software

I Maintenance software 1

Peripheral equipment diagnosis

(Hard disk, 3.5” floppy disk)

On-board RAM test

,
- JOB system

I
- System maintenance
DCA
ALIGNMENT
. ....
Boot system

L System maintenance

- DIAG system
Board diagnostic program (Function test)

Generation ‘system
Error log
System backup generation
System initialization
Data setting such as date, time, hospital, etc.

- 469 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM LOADING

1‘ System Loading
II. Preparation
(1) Prepare two generation tapes for volumes 1 and 2.

(2) Connect the dedicated communication cable to the RS-232C port on the system
manager PWB.

(3) Prepare user key (for the 3.5” floppy disk).

1.2 Operating procedures

(1) Set the VOL 1 tape and perform interactive processing as follows:

(2) System loading

Enter the underlined parts below for system loading:

147-Bug> bf 4000 800000 0 [CR-l

(Enter “bf 4000 2000000 0 [CR]” when the CPU board is used as SC-l J
147-Bug> bo 4,,sysV68.tape [CR]
147-Bug> iot;t[CR] ,----A
---___m.__-
y[CRl Refer to section 4.4.1 (l,lj) for these entries.
__________y[CRl 1

RAM address from VMEbus = $00000000

Booting from: VME147, Controller 4, Device 0

Loading file: sysV68. tape

Volume: V/6 8

IPL loaded at: $OOOF1800

MVMETAPE IPL Version 1.O
*****************~********~*******************************~* .

System V/68 Release R3V5 M68030 Version 88 103 1

Real mem = 2097152

Avail men = 1261568
Buffers = 20
****************~*************~*******************~*********

- 470 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM LOADING

INIT: SINGLE USER MODE

Automatic Installation in progress

skip formatting disk, drive 0

ERROR on MME 147 cte 1, drive 0, slice 0

Command Byte: 8 Status Byte 1: 12

ERROR on MME 147 cte 1, drive 0, slice 0

Physical Block: 0x0 (0) Command Byte: 0 Status Byte 1: E

formatting disk drive 1

ERROR on MME 147 cte 1, drive 0, slice 0

Command Byte: 8 Status Byte 1: 12

ERROR on MME 147 cte 1, drive 0, slice 0

Physical Block: 0x0(0) Command Byte: 0 Status Byte 1: E

ERROR on MME 147 cte 1, drive 0, slice 0

Command Byte: 8 Status Byte 1: 12
dinit: can’t set configuration information

not connect disk drive 1

writing slice table
making file system . . . . . . . . . . .
labeling file system . . . . . . . . . .
installing boot loader
mounting root file system
making directories
mounting file systems
making lost+found directory

-471-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM LOADING

Reserving 224 entries

Reserving 480 entries

Reserving 352 entries

Reserving 352 entries

installing system
XXXXX blocks
XXXX blocks
***** Set MT (Vol. 2) and Hit return JCR]

Note: The above error message is displayed when only one system disk is set;
however, this is not a problem.

(3) Dismount the VOL 1 tape and set the VOL 2 tape.

(4) Press the [CR] key to continue system loading.

(5) When all the loading processes have been completed, the following message is then
displayed:

unmounting file systems

****** System Installation completed *****

Reset the system

(6) Dismount the VOL 2 tape and reset the system (by the INIT switch).

(7) Insert the 3.5” floppy disk (FD) prepared as the user key into the disk drive.

Remarks: The system can be booted using the maintenance key; however, the
protect status is not released.

- 472 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM LOADING

(8) Enter the underlined parts from the interactive display.

147-Bug>mm 72 lOOOOO[CRl
72 100000 XXXX? 8OICRl
72 100002 XXXX? [CR1
72 100004 XXXX? ICRI
72 100006 XXXX? abcdFCR]
72 100008 XXXX? .[CR1
147-Bug>boFCRl

* After the BCA PWB is connected, the BBM will have a different address.

147-Bug>mm 73 1OOOOO[CR~ .
73 100000 XXXX? 8O[CR[
73 100002 XXXX? [CR1
73 100004 XXXX? [CR1
73 100006 XXXX? abcd[CRl
73 100008 XXXX? .[CRl
***
erase = ## kill = intr = DEL quit = 1
***

. . . . . . ..*...........
. ..*.....*.*....*...
initialize the system ? (y/n)
VrcRl
System Initialization start.
Device Driver Installation

. . .. ..*.....*.......
. . . . . ..a............

- 473 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM LOADING

PDI (Parallel Disk Interface) Device Intia

Input channel number of PDI (1 or 2, 4) --+

Enter the configuration of the high-speed disk connected with V3.9 and later.

l For the high-speed 1CH type 1[CR1

l For the high-speed 2CH type (Existing type) 2l’CRl

l For the high-speed 4CH type 4[CRl

After checking the disk configuration, enter the proper number.

nits version set

msgrand
scrndfinit
od 12inz
bquejnz
fd8jnit
nwrawint
OQinit

Select one of the three types. The three selections are; the existing type connecting a
3.5” floppy disk device from V3.6 to SFI, the 1.44MB (CFD06A) type connecting to
the SM board, or 1.2 MB type connecting to the SM board.

Existing type MVMEZ327-FDC FD

1.44 MB type FD-235HF (for IBM ps/2) Model
1.2 MB type FD-235GF (for T-3 100) Model

3.5 inch FDD connect to MVME147-SCSI ? (y/n)

For the existing type For 1.44 MB or 1.2 MB type

n WY Y ECRI

MVME327-FDC FD
FD-23 5GF (for T-3 100) Model ? (y/n)
For 1.2 MB type For 1.44 MB type
Y [CR1 n PI
FD-235GF FD-23 5HF
(for T-3 100) Model (for IBM ps/2) Model

IM32 memory size change.

abcprobe
bbminit

- 474 -
 No. SD20 l -322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM LOADING

Note: The dialog to enter the system name was added from V3.2. Enter “Xfo@ )
when helical option is supported for the Xpress.

FSMAKE
********** configurations **********
System name # comment
Xpeed # Xpeed version 3 .O (WR-mgr)
Xforce # Xforce [Xpress] (PDI manager)
Xlink # Xlink version 1.O (WR-mgr)
Xpeed FLASH # Xpeed/FLASH [Xpeed II] version 3.O (WR-mgr)
XforceH # Xforce [Xpress] (PDI manager) raw=200 img=l400 Version
XforceD # Xforce [Xpress] (PDI simulator) Disk Version
XforceM # Xforce [Xpress] (PDI simulator) IM Version
XforceSH # XforceSH (PDI manager)
Xvigor # Xvigor (PDI manager)
NICS # Nits standard system (development)
DXpeed # development system by Xpeed (WR-mgr)
DXforce # development system by Xforce (PDI manager)
DXlink # development system by Xlink (WR-mgr)
DXpeedFLASH # development system by Xpeed/FLASH (WR-mgr)
DXforceD # development system by Xforce (PDI sim) Disk Version
DXforceM # development system by Xforce (PDI sim) IM Version
DXforceSHD # development system by Xforce (PDI sim) IM Version
DXvigorD # development system by Xforce (PDI sim) IM Version
DNICS # development system by Nits standard system
************************************

Select file system configuration name :

Xvigor
l---+Xforce/[Xpress] ...... Xforce
Xpeed ...... Xpeed
Xpeed/FLASH[Xpeed II] . ..... Xpeed FLASH
Xlink-5 0 .... .. Xlink
Xforce/SH[Xpress/HS l] .... .. XforceSH
Xvigor[Xpress/SX] ...... Xvigor

Enter ‘Xforce’ for TSX-01 IA or TSX-01 lA/20, ‘XforceH’ for systems with the helical
scan kit, ‘Xpeed/FLASH’ for TSX-00 1A/20, ‘Xpeed’ for TSX-00 1A, or ‘Xlink’ for
TXL-50A.

- 475 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM LOADING

select system =
crvfinit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . ...*...
roifinit

. . . . . . . . . . ..a*......

copy screen file

copy manager file
copy configuration file
copy reconstruction file
xcomset
System version set
System name set
change sysptb 1

System Name > Xvision Use an upper case “X” and lower case Ietters
for “vision”.

select system = Xvision

Hardware Setting

Default
US&-size (2.64MB)
PDIch (1. lch)
3S’FD (lMVME147(J3100))
CTV-MDS (1. CTvision(VA))
CH-BNDL (1 *Yes)
ALPHA (1.15)
Power-Source (1.50Hz)

OK?(y/n) > n

IM-size (2.64MB)
l.l28MB, 2.64MB, >2 For a system supporting 3D scan, enter “1”
(128 MB)

PDIch (1. lch) ’

1.1ch, 22ch, 3.4ch, > 1 For GX, enter “2” (2 ch).

3.5”FD (lMVME147(J3 100))

lMVME147(J3 100),2.MVME147(IBM), >1

Drive LED Green: 1.2 MB Enter ” 1”.

Orange: 1.44 MB Enter “2”.

- 476 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM LOADING

CTV-MDS (1 .CTvision(VA))
1.CTvision(VA),2.CTvision,3.MDS, >I
Enter ” 1” for the PX74-04700 Naviport.
Otherwise: enter “2”.

CH-BNDL( 1*Yes)
1.Yes,2.No, > 1 Whether or not channel bundling is used.

ALPHA (1.15)
1.152.20, > 1 Enter ” 1” for the 1.5-second scanner.
Enter “2” for the 2.0-second scanner.

Power-Source (1.50Hz)
1.50Hz,2.60Hz, > 1 Depends on the region.

* Entries for system initialization are now complete. The system will be initialized
automatically.

(9) The message [XvisionVer:VX.X] appears on the console and then disappears when
system initialization and start-up have been completed. Remove the user key.

(10) When the initialization process has been completed normally, JOB system is started
automatically.

- 477 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

I. Outline
This system is maintenance software for facilitating system maintenance. This system
permits system program backup (copy), system initialization, date setting, and equipment
configuration setting.

2. Operating Procedure
2.1 Start and end
Start the CPU port debugger and enter the following underlined parts.

167bug> mm 98 100000 [CR1

98 100000 XXXX 1[CR1 Boot system start
98100002 XXXX .[CR[

167bug> bo ICRl

The system is started and the system menu is displayed on the terminal screen.

NICS BOOT SYSTEM

1. DIAG SYSTEM

4. GENERATION SYSTEM

5. NICS SYSTEM

6. ACT SYSTEM

7. XLINK SYSTEM

SELECT SYSTEM ? 4 [CR1

- 478 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

When 4 is selected, this system is started and the following message is displayed on the
terminal screen.

* * * Generation System (version 2.00) * * *

1. Create System Tape

2. Initialize and Maintenance

3. Set Date and Time

4. Protect the System

5. Option Select

6. Error Log

7. File System Utility

8. Tape Utility

9. PDI/PSI system Utility

10. Online Setup

q. Quit

Enter the menu number =

When “q” is entered for the above prompt, the system is terminated.

To execute one of the functions, enter the menu number indicated on the left of the
function. The functions are outlined below. (For further details, see subsection 2.2 and
subsequent sections.)

The version number displayed after the main menu title is a version number of the
Generation System, not that of the system.

- 479 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

(0 Create system tape

Creates a copy (backup) of the system software on a tape cartridge.

(2) Initialize and maintenance

Initializes the system.

(3) Set date and time

Sets the date and time.

(4) Protect the system

Creates a user maintenance key.

(5) Option select

Sets the system configuration and hospital name.

(6) Error log

Displays error log information.

(7) File system utility

Initializes, recovers, or verifies the file system.

(8) Tape utility

Exchanges image file data (image data, raw data) between the hard disk and the tape
cartridge.

(9 PDI/PSI system utility

Maintains the PDI/PSI system.

(10) Online setup

Online option setup is performed.

- 480 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

2.2 Details of functions
(1) Create system tape

This function creates a copy of the system software on a tape cartridge. (A backup
tape is created.)

Note: When executing this function, the tape cartridge drive must be connected to
the equipment. Otherwise, an error occurs. Turn the power switch of the
main unit OFF, connect the drive to the equipment, and restart the system.

Confirm that the cartridge tape is not write protected. If it is, release the
write protect mode.

(a) Operating procedure

1) When this menu is selected, the following message is displayed. Set volume I
of the backup tape, and press the [CR] key. To terminate processing, enter

set tape vol. 1 then hit any key (‘q’ is quit) JCR]

The system software is automatically copied.

2) When volume 1 is finished, the following message is displayed. Set the

volume 2 tape and press the [CR] key.

set tape vol.2 then hit any key (‘4’ is quit) ]CR]

3) When the processing is finished, the screen returns to the initial menu.

-481 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

(2) Initialize and maintenance

This f?.mction initializes the system, initializes and checks the file system, or initializes
the PAS conditions or calibration data.

(a) Operating procedure I

1) When this menu is started, the following submenu is displayed. Enter the
number of the function to be started. To terminate this menu, enter [q]. The
menu functions are described below.

System Initialize and Maintenance

1. System Initialize

2. System Initialize (except 3, 4 and 5)

3. File System Initialize

4. PAS initialize

5. Calib data initialize

6. Get study number

7. Set study number

8. Fd patch

9. Mt patch

10. Fd Dump

ll.MtDump

12. BBM init

13. Rebuild operating system

14. Other Utility

q. Quit

Enter the menu number = q l-CR]

- 482 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

(b) Description of functions

System initialize

Initializes the entire system.

System initialize (except 3, 4, and 5)

Initializes systems other than the file system, PAS, and calibration data. (The
OD mount information and reconstruction queue are erased. EL registration
of the PAS is initialized.)

File system initialize

Initializes the file system. (Both image data and raw data)

PAS initialize

Initializes the PAS conditions.

Calib data initialize

Initializes the calibration data.

Get study number

Retrieves the latest study number.

Study number = XXXX

Set study number

Sets the study number. (Enter the underlined parts.)

New study number (q to quit) = Studv number [CR-l

New study number XXXX

Are you sure? (y/n) ylCR1

Changed.

Fd patch

See item 9.

- 483 -
 No. SD20b322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

9) Mt patch

Loads the program from the 3.5” floppy disk or streamer tape. When the
program is started, the following menu is displayed. To execute processing,
press the [CR] key. To continue without executing processing, press the [q]
and [CR] keys.

Set the tape or floppy, then hit return key

(q to quit) JCR]

When processing is finished, the screen is returned to the menu in 1).

10) Fd Dump
See item 11.

11) Mt Dump

This function saves data in the 3.5” floppy disk or streamer tape. When the
program is started, the following menu is displayed. To execute processing,
press the [CR] key. To continue without executing processing, press the [q]
and [CR] keys.

set the tape or floppy, then hit return key

(q to quit) JCR]

12) BBM imt

BBM (Battery Backup Memory) is initialized. When the following display

appears after selecting this item, the task ends normally.

The display is restored to the menu of 1).

... ...... .
complete

- 484 -
 No. SD2W322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

13) Rebuild operating system

This reconstructs the operating system (OS).

When this task is initiated, the following auxiliary menu is displayed. Enter
the number of the menu item to be initiated.

Rebuild operating system

1. Attach online driver (for Xlink).

2. Detach online driver (for Xseries)

q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

Enter 1 to construct the online OS (Ethernet).

This entry is mandatory for Xlink-50 online system

The following menu screen is displayed after the task has been initiated. Type
y and press [CR] to execute or type n or press [CR] to cancel.

Xlk-stand
Rebuild the operating system ? (y/n).

When the task ends normally,.return to the menu display of 1).

Enter 2 to reconstruct the basic operating system.

When the task is initiated, the following menu screen is displayed. The
operating procedures are identical to those for initiating menu display of 1).

Enter q to quit menu display and return to the menu display of 1).

- 485 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

14) Other utility

Performs environment settings.

When this task is initiated, the following auxiliary selection menu appears.
Enter a desired number from the selection menu.

Type “q” to quit this task. The menu display of <I> will then be restored.

For Xpress/SX, Xpress/HS 1 For Xvision series

***** Other Utility ***** **** Other Utility ****
1. EM-Change 1. IM-Change
2. Version-Ch 2. Version-Ch
3. Timeout-Ch 3. Timeout-Ch
4. TUBE-S elect 4. TUBE-Select
5. FD-S elect 5. FD-Select
6. PDI-Channel-Select 6. PDI-ChannelSelect
7. Scanner-Option 7. Scanner-Option
q. Quit 8. IP-Select
9. Data Disk-Select
Enter Menu Number = cl. Qui t

Enter Menu Number =

When 1 is entered, the IIvI board memory size is set.

This setting is mandatory during a memory size modification to the IM board.
Enter the desired number from the IM memory size selection menu. Type “q”
to quit this task. The Other Utility menu will then be restored.

IM size change
1. IM size 32 M (standard)
2. IM size 64 M
3. IM size 128 M ....... ..... Basic system
4. IM size 256 M
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

- 486 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

When 2 is entered, the software version and/or level is changed. When this
task is initiated, the system waits for version and/or level entry.

Version Change
Current Version VO.OX
new version = V

Enter a new version and/or level. The entered version and/or level is then
displayed for confirmation. Type “y” and press [CR] to execute change, or
type “n” and press [CR] to quit. After the typing, the Other Utility menu is
restored.

new version = VO.OX%XXXX (CR)

May I change a version from VO.OX to VO.OX%XXXX ? (y/n)

When 3 is entered, the imager timeout is set.

Select a desired number for the timeout from the imager timeout selection
menu.

Just type “q” to quit this task. The Other Utility menu will then be restored.

Imager timeout change

1. Change original timeout (60 sec.)

2. Change long timeout (180 sec.)
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

When 4 is entered, X-ray tube capacity and the HFG type can be specified.

To exit the processing, enter “q”. The system will return to the Other Utility
menu.

- 487 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

<Xpress/SX> <Xvision series>
TUBE/HFG Select (for Xpress/SX) TUBE/HFG Select
1. 2.0 MHU/24kW-HFG (Single) 1. 2.0 MHU/36kW+IFG (OLP-90%)
2. 2.0 MHU/24kW-HFG (Double) 2. 2.0 MIIU/36kW-HFG (OLP-100%)
3. 2.0 MHU/36kW-HFG 3. 3.5 MHU/36kW-HFG (OLP-90%)
4. 3.5 MHU/36kW-HFG 4. 3.5 MHU/36kW-HFG (OLP-100%)
5. 3.5 MHU/48kW-HFG q. Quit
6. 6.5 MHU/48kW-HFG
10. 3.5 MIIU/48kW-HFG Enter Menu Number =
(V5.O/V5.1-)
11. 6.5 MHU/48kW-HFG
(V5.O/V5.1-)
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

<Xpress/HS l>
TUBE-Select
1. 2.0 MIIU/24kW-HFG (Single)
2. 2.0 MHU/24kW-HFG (Double)
3. 2.0 MHU/36kW-HFG
4. 3.5 MHU/36kW-HFG
q. Quit

Enter Menu number =

When “5” is entered, it is used to change the type of the 3.5” floppy disk.

Existing type MVME327-FDC FD : Connect to the SF1

1.44MB type FD-325HF

(for IBM ps/2) Model : Connect to the SM PWB

1.2MB type FD-235GF

(for T-3 100) Model : Connect to the SM PWB

3.5 inch FDD connect to MVME 167-SCSI? (y/n)

- 488 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

For the existing type

n [CR1
MVME327-FDC FD

For the 1.44MB or 1.2MB type

FD235GF (for T-3 100) Model? (y/n)

For 1.2MB

FD235GF (for T-3 100) Model

For 1.44MB

FD-235HF (for IMB ps/2) Model

When “6” is entered, it is used to change the configuration of the high-speed

disk (1CH or 2CH). Select “2. 2CH” for the high-speed disk 2CH type and
” 1. 1CH” for the 1CH type by entering the number. To quit, enter “q”.
Return to the menu for Other Utility.

PDI Channel Select

1. 1CH
2.2CH
(3. 3CH)
4.4CH
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

When “7” is entered, it is used to change the configuration of the hardware.

When this menu is started up, the following sub menu is displayed.
Enter the number to be started up.
To quit this menu, enter “q”.

- 489 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

Select (for Xforce/XforceSH/Xvigor/Xpress)
1. Tube change [3.5 MHU/48kW-HFG]
2. SS mode change [SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change WDI
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
7. 30 mA kit change
q. Quit
Enter Menu Number =

a. Tube change

This is used to change the X-ray tube capacity and the type of HFG.
Enter “q” to quit this command.

Tube/HFG Select (for Xvigor) Tube/JYIFG Select

1. 2.0 MHU/24kW-HFG (Single) (for Xvision series)
2. 2.0 MHU/24kW-HFG 1. 2.0 MHU/36kW-HFG (OLP-90%)
(Double) 2. 2.0 MHU/36kW-HFG (OLP-100%)
3. 2.0 MHU/36kW-HFG 3. 3.5 MHU/36kW-HFG (OLP-90%)
4. 3.5 MHW3 6kW-HFG 4. 3.5 MHU/36kW-HFG (OLP-100%)
5. 3.5 MHU/48kW-HF+G q Quit
6. 6.5 MHU/48kW-HFG
10. 3.5 MHU/48kW-HFG Enter Menu Number =
(V5.O/V5.1-)
11. 6.5 MHU/48kW-HFG
(V5.OIV5.1-)
9. Qui t

Enter Menu Number =

b. SS mode change

This is’used to change the type of SS board.

Enter “q” to quit this command.

SS Mode Change Now [SS/PRE]

1. ss (for SS board)
2. SSIPRE (for SS/PRE board)
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

- 490 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

c. Reconstruct Unit change ’

This is used to change the type of FRU (fast reconstruction unit).

Enter “q” to quit this command.

<Xpress/SX>

Reconstruct Unit Change Now [RTRU]

1. AFRU (when the existing reconstruction unit is selected)

2. RTRU (when the VIP is selected)
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

<Xvision series>

Reconstruct Unit Change Now [RTRU]

1. AFRU
2. RTRU (M+S) 1.O set
3. RTRU (M) 1.0 set
4. RTRU (M+S) 1.5 set
5. RTRU (M) 1.5 set
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

d. Detector change

This is used to change the type of detector.

Enter “q” to quit this command.

Detector Change Now [SSD]

1. Xe-detector (when the Xe detector is selected)

2. SSD (when the solid detector is selected)
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

-491-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

e. Thinslice change

This is used to make it possible to set the scan conditions of field L, slice
thickness 2 mm and field LL, slice thickness 5 mm. Enter “q” to quit this
command.

Select Slice width (for Xforce/Xpress) I

1. OFF (for making it impossible to set the

above conditions)

2. ON (for making it possible to set the

above conditions)

q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

f. BBDC change

This is used to select whether the BBDC (Battery Backup Disk Cache) is
connected or not. Enter “q” to quit this command.

BBDC Change

1. BBDC ON (when the BBDC is connected)

2. BBDC OFF (when the BBDC is not connected)
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

g. 30 mA change kit

This is used to select whether to permit setting a tube current of 30 mA.

KIT-30 mA Select
[3.5 MIIU/36kW-HFG] Mode [OFF]
.
1. 30 mA OFF
2. 30mAON
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

- 492 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

When 8 is entered, it is used to set the type of the three-dimensional
image processing unit (IP). To quit, enter “q”. The system returns to the
menu for Other Utility.

IP2 10 change

1. IP210
2. IP21OM/S
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

When 9 is entered, it is used to set the type of the high-speed disk. To

quit, enter “q”. The screen is returned to the menu for Other Utility.

Data Disk change

1. PSI (Parallel SCSI Disk Interface)

2. PDI (Parallel Disk Interface)
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number =

- 493 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

(3) Set date and time

Date is set.

(a) Operating procedures

1) Set the time zone. Enter the underlined parts as shown below.

current time and time zone is : 0O:OOJST

change the time zone? (y, n, ?, q) y(CR)

Available time zone are ....

1. Greenwich (GMT)
2. Atlantic WV
3. Eastern (EST & EDT)
4. Central (CST & CDT)
5. Mountain (MST & MDT)
6. Pacific (PST & PDT)
7. Yukon (YST & YDT)
8. Alaska (AST & ADT)
9. Bering (BST & BDT)
10. Hawaii WV
11. Japan (JW
Enter zone number = 1l&R)

2) Set daylight saving time. Enter the underlined part.

Does your time zone use Daylight Saving Time during year ?
[Y,n,?ql nrCRl

Time zone changed. (The change is complete.)

- 494 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

3) Set the date. Enter the underlined parts.

current date and time: Sun 10/15/89 17:OO

change the date and time [y,n,?,q] yICR]

Month default is 10 (l-12) : Enter the month. lCR]

Day default is 15 (l-3 1) : Enter the dav. 1CRl
Year default is 89 (70-99) : Enter the vear. [CR]
Hour default is 0 (O-23) : Enter the hour. l-CR]
Minute default is 0 (O-59) : Enter the minute. [CR-I

Date and time will be set to: 10/l 5/89 0O:OOOK?

EYAql vFcRl
Sun Ott 15 0O:OO:OOJST 1989
The date and time are now changed.

4) When the processing is finished, the screen is returned to the main menu.

(4) Protect the system

This function creates a user-protect cancellation key for system protection, and limits
the system start count to 50.

INote: This menu can be executed only in the SUPER USER mode. I

(a) Operating procedure

1) Insert a 3.5” floppy diskette into the drive to create a user-protect

cancellation key. Before insertion, confirm that the floppy diskette is not
write protected. If it is, release the write protect lock.

2) Enter the protect keyword. Enter the underlined parts.

Enter System type Serial Number

System type [ ] = Equipment model name 1CRl
Serial number [ ] = Serial number [CR]

System type [Equipment model name]

Serial Number [Serial number]
Are you sure? (y/n) v[CR]

When the data entry is correct, enter [y]. If the entered data is incorrect,
enter [n]. When [n] is entered, the screen is returned to the previous menu.

3) When processing is finished, the screen is returned to the main menu.

- 495 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

Option select

Defines the system configuration and hospital name.

(a) Operating procedure

1) See section 7.3, “Option selection program”.

2) When processing is finished, the screen is returned to the main menu.

Error log

Displays the error log information.

(a) Operating procedure

- _. ^,_.__,,
_-^,I1y.I-I,-
“At”--I’.*l-b-l%
- _
..
1) S&section 7.4, “Error log operation!‘.

2) When processing is finished, the screen is returned to the main menu.

File system utility

Initializes, recovers, or verifies the file system.

(a) Operating procedure

When this menu is started, the following submenu is displayed.

File system Utility

1. File system Initialize

2. File system Check
3. File system Recover
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = q[CRl

- 496 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

Select the function to be executed. To terminate processing, press the [q] and
[CR] keys. The submenu is described below.

1. File system Initialize

Initializes the file system.

2. File system Check

Checks the file system.

3. File system Recover

Recovers an error of the file system.

Enter the menu item number, and select the object file system number. Enter the
number or q indicated on the left of the object function. When 0 is entered, the
entire file system is processed.

0 : All file system

1 : Image Data file system
2 : Raw Data file system
3 : Optical Disk file system
4 : Online file system
,.,......,.*.....*...........
q : Quit

Select file system no = q[CR]

When processing is finished, the screen is returned to the submenu.

- 497 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

(8) Tape utility

Exchanges image file data (image data, raw data) between the hard disk and the
cartridge tape.

(a) Operating procedure

When this menu is started, the following submenu is displayed.

Tape Utility

1. Archive image from disk to cartridge tape

2. Retrieve image from cartridge tape to disk
3. Get tape directory
4. Get disk directory
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = q[CR]

Select the function to be executed. To terminate processing, press the [cl] and
[CR] keys. The submenu is described below.

1. Archive image from disk to cartridge tape

This function saves the image file from the hard disk onto a tape. Set the file
to be saved. To terminate processing, enter 000.

Exit: Input No. = 000

Input No. : fsysid study image = F S I [CR]
F: File system number
S: Study number
I: Image number

The study and image numbers can be omitted. When they are omitted,
specify 0.

- 498 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

1) Saving a specific file

Enter the tape capacity, file system number, study number, and image
number.

Tape capacity (60/80/150/320)[60] = 150 lCR]

Exit: Input No = 000

Input No. : fsysid study filen = 123 [CR]

Input No. : fsysid study filen = 1 10 3 1 [CR]

Input No.: fsysid study filen = 0 0 0 [CR]

Saving file = l-2.3

Saving file = l-10.3 1

2 files saved

Normal End.
2) Saving image files with the same study number

Input the tape capacity, file system number and study number 0.
Tape capacity (60/80/150/320)[60] = 150 ICR]

Exit: Input No = 0 0 0

Input No. : fsysid study frlen = 1 2 0 [CR]

Input No.: fsysid study filen = 1 10 0 ICR]

Input No.: fsysid study filen = 0 0 0 ICR]

Saving file = l-2.1

Saving file = l-2.2

Saving file = l-2.3

*........**...,.,..

Saving file = l-10.1

Saving file = l-10.4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I..

XX files saved

Normal End.

- 499 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

3) Saving all file system images

Input tape capacity and file system number 00

Tape capacity (60/80/150/320)[60] = 150 ICR]

Exit : Input No = 0 0 0

Input No : fsysid study filen = 1 0 0 [CR]

Input No : fsysid study filen = 0 0 0 [CR]

Saving file = 1-1.1

Saving file = l-l.2

Saving file = l-l .3

Saving file = l-35.1

Saving file = l-35.4

XXX files saved

Normal End.

2. Retrieve image from cartridge tape to disk

This function loads the image file from the tape to the hard disk. Set the file
to be loaded. To terminate processing, enter 000.

Exit: Input No. = 000

Input No.: fsysid study image = F S I [CR]

F: File system number

S: Study number
I: Image number

The study and image numbers can be omitted. When they are omitted,
specie 0.

- 500 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

1) Loading a specific file

Enter the file system number, study number, and image number as
follows:

Exit: Input No = 0 0 0

Input No. : fsysid study filen = 1 2 3 [CR1

Input No. : fsysid study filen = 1 10 3 1 [CR]

Input No. : fsysid study filen = 0 0 0 [CR1

Loading file = l-2.3

Create file = 1:2.10

Loading file = l-10.3 1

Create file = 1:5-l

2 files loaded

Normal End.

2) Loading image files with the same study number

Enter the file system number and study number 0.

Exit: Input No = 0 0 0

Input No. : fsysid study filen = 1 2 0 /CR-l

Input No. : fsysid study filen = 1 10 0 [CR1

Input No.: fsysid study filen = 0 0 0 lCR1

Loading file = l-2.1

Create file = 1:2.10

Loading file = l-2.2

Create file = 1:2.11

-5Ol-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

Loading file = l-10.1

Create file = 1:5.1

Loading file = l-10.4

Create file = 1:5.2

. ...... ........ .....

XX files loaded

Normal End.

3) Loading all images of file system 1

Enter file system number 00.

Exit: InputNo=OOO

Input No.: fsysid study filen = 1 0 0 [CR1

Input No.: fsysid study filen = 0 0 0 [CR1

Loading file = 1- 1.1

Create file = l:l.lO

Loading file = l-l .2

Createfile= l:l.ll

.*.*...............,

Loading file = l-3 5.1

Create file = 1: 12.1

Loading file = l-35.4

Create file = 1: 12.2

*.*..,...,*...,.....

XXX files loaded

Normal End.

- 502 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

3. Get tape directory

This function outputs an image file list of the files stored on the tape.

4. Get disk directory

This function outputs an image file list of the files stored on the hard disk.

Enter the menu number = l[CRl

Enter the file system number to be output.

When processing is finished, the screen is returned to the submenu.

(b) Error messages

Message Description
Bad Tape format!! Invalid data format

Cannot Create file. The file cannot be created.

Cannot Get directory! ! The directory cannot be acquired.

X:Y:Z Cannot Open. The file (X:Y:Z) cannot be opened.

Disk Full. No free space exists in disk.

File Not Found. The file cannot be found.

Illegal Version! ! The version is not valid.

Image Full. Image area is full and an additional image

number cannot be generated.

Insufficient tape space! ! The free area is too small.

Load ERROR! 1.. A load error occurs.

No Data!! . No data exists.

Read ERROR! ! A read error occurs.

Save ERROR! ! The save error occurs.

Tape Not Ready! ! The tape is not ready.

Undefined filesystem. The specified file system does not exist.

Undefined study number. The specified study number does not exist.

Undefined image number, The specified image number does not exist.

- 503 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

(9) PDI/PSI utility

This f%nction maintains the PDI and PSI systems.

(a) Operating procedure

When this menu is started, the terminal setting menu is displayed.

current terminal (“rtux”)

If you change the terminal, type the terminal name.
You can specify the following terminal:

rtux = TOSHIBA KANJI terminal

j3 100 = TOSHIBA LAPTOP computer (J/T3 100 series)
vds = Vititor Display System
vtlO0 = DEC VT-l 00 terminal

Type new terminal (If you don’t change, push return key.) =

Enter the name of the currently connected terminal. The initial value of the
system is “rtux”.

When the terminal name does not need to be changed, press the [ENTER] key.

When setting is completed, the following submenu is displayed.

PDI/PSI Utility

1. PDI utility
2. PDI monitor
3. PSI utility
4. PSI monitor
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = q(ENTER)

- 504 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM GENERATION

Enter the function to be executed. To terminate processing, press the [q] and
[ENTER] keys. The submenu is described below.

1. PDI utility

Refer to 7.2.3 “PDI utmty?

Y . . __.N -”
2. PDI monitor
,.,--.,-_^I...------‘I-- .___
__--
-.
Refer to:7124 “Description of%DI monitor operation”.
--- .-___._
_.A-
-%-WV-+- 6..1
3. PSI utility
_“_...-I--.- -. ._ ._ _ _,_

Refer to ‘@y; “Description’ofPSI utility (PSU) operation”.

--.._ -.._l_. ,,‘”
, ”___.
e- _/.,.-- -.
“...-‘*
4. PSI monitor
_,,.=.--,,,-
I r - -.-ll.--.l__LI<__
Refer to 7j2.6
\. “Description of PSI m,onitor operation”.
I*- -me.
When processing is completed, the screen is returned to the submenu.,

(10) Online setup

Performs setup of online connections and data storage to the system.

(a) Operating procedures

1) Select Online setup. The console monitor will display the corresponding
interactive screen.

Refer to the section “Software Setup” in the relevant installation manual for
details of the online options.

2) Quit processing. The Main menu will then be restored.

- 505 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

1. Items Required
(1) Computer terminal (T-3 100 or RTUX) and connection cables

(2) Operation manual describing GENERATION SYSTEM.

2. Connection
(1) Connect the computer terminal to the maintenance panel.

3. Start-up
When the power is turned ON, the prompt (147-Bug>) will appear.

If this prompt does not appear, proceed as follows according to the terminal type.

l For RTUX

Press the [CR] or [BREAK] key several times.

l For T-3 100

Check that ‘term’ is activated.

* If it is not activated, enter “term corn1 : 9600,
* n, 8, 1, f’.

If ‘term’ is activated, press the [CR] or the [Fl] key.

-506-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

4. Procedure for Starting GENERATION SYSTEM
(1) Perform the interaction shown below. (Enter the underlined parts.)

147-Bug>mm 98 100000 ( u indicates a space.)

981000000000?_1
98 100002 OOOO?,

147-Bug&

(2) The UNIX system is activated and the terminal displays the following selection menu.
Enter “4” to activate GENERATION SYSTEM.

NICS BOOT
, SYSTEM [V3.22]
1 : DIAG SYSTEM
4 : SYSTEM GENERATION
5 : NICS SYSTEM
6 : ACT SYSTEM
7 : XLINK SYSTEM

SYSTEM>4
NICS System Initialize step-3
NICS System Initialize step-4
NICS System Initialize step-5

Mounted/dev/nics on/nits
Mount ed/dev/act on/act
Mounted/dev/usr on/usr

pid:4 1 /nics/process/mgr/ERLOG-mgr
pid 42 /nics/process/mgr/SG-mgr
pid 43 /nics/process/mgr/OT~mgr/dev/mdsOO/dev/mds 1O/nics/config/output/gscl-tab
board not connect.
/nics/process/mgr/OT_mgr:error 8002068 1
pid:44 /nics/process/mgr/INLOG-mgr/dev/null 10
pid:45 /nics/process/mgrkN~mgr l/dev/mds002/dev/mdslO e
board not connect.
pid:46 /nics/process/mgr/EV-mgr 1/dev/mdsOO
pid:47 /nics/process/mgr/GEN-mgr
SV-mgr process name get

- 507 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

* * * Generation System (version 2.00) * * *

1. Create backup tape.

2. Initialize and Maintenance.
3. Set date and time
4. Protect the system.
5. Opt,ion Select.
6. Error Log.
’ 7. File System Utility
8. Tape Utility.
9. PDI/PSI system utility.
10. Online setup.
q. Quit- Enter Menu Number = 2

System Initialize and Maintenance

1. System Initialize. The entire system will be initialized.

2. System Initialize (Except 3, 4 and 5) The OD mount information, EL registration,
and reconstruction queue n-ill be initialized.
3. File System Initialize Both the image data and raw data n-ill be initialized.
4. PAS initialize. The PAS conditions (EP display) v-ill be initialized.
5. Calib Data Initialize. The Calib (NRA) data will be initialized.
6. Get study number.
7. Set study number.
8. Fd patch.
9. Mt patch.
10. Fd dump.
11. Mt dump.
12. BBM init.
13. Other Utility.
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 13

***** Other Utility. *****

1. IM-Change
2. Version:Ch
3. Timeout-Ch
4. TUBE-Select
5. FD-Select
6. PDI-C hannel-Select
7. Scanner-option
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 1

-508-
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

IM size change

1. IM size 32M Neyer select this. The system will not s’tart.
2. IM size 64M Standard
3. IM size 128M 3D option, etc.
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 2

***** Other Utility. *****

1. IM-Change
2. Version-Ch
3. Timeout-Ch
4. TUBE-Select
5. FD-Select
6. PDI-Channel-Select
7. Scanner-option
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 2

Version Change
Current Version V4.8D%TLK
c Enter the actual version name.
new version = V4.8D%TLKF
Change version from V4.8D%TLK to V4.8d%TLK.okT (y/n) y

***** Other Utility. *****

1. IM-Change
2. Version-Ch
3. Timeout-Ch
4. TUBE-Select
5. FD-S elect
6. PDI_Channel_Select
7. Scanner-option
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 3

Imager timeout change.

1. Change original timeout (60sec.). For imagers other than Fuji

2. Change long timeout (180sec.). For Fuji
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 1

- 509 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

***** Other Utility. *****

1. IM-Change
2. Version-Ch
3. Timeout-Ch
4. TUBE-Select
5. FD Select
6. PDT-Channel-S elect
7. Scanner-option
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 4 (When “4” is selected, NRA data will be lost.)

TUBE/HFG Select (for Xvision)

1.2.OMHU/36kw-HFG(OLP-90%) TSX-002A/l-3
2. 2.OMHU/36kw-HFG(OLP-100%) sx-002A/4-6
3.3.5MHU/36kw-HFG(OLP-90%)
4.3.5MHU/36kw-HFG(OLP-100%) TSX-002A/ *A-+1 or 2
5. 2.OMHW3 6kw-HFG(High-Land) *B-+3 or 4
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 2

***** Other Utility. *****

1. IM-Change e
2. Version-Ch
3. Timeout-Ch
4. TUBE-Select
5. FD-S elect
6. PDI-C hannel-Select
7. Scanner-option
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 5.

3.5 inch FDD connect to MVME147-SCSI? (y/n) y

MVME147-SCSI FD

FD-235GF (for J-3 100) Model?(y/n) y FD-23 5GF (for J-3 100) Model

-510-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

***** Other Utility. *****

1. IM-Change
2. Version-Ch
3. Timeout-Ch
4. TUBE-Select
5. FD-S elect
6. PDI-Channel-Select
7. Scanner-option
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 6

PDI Channel Select.

1. 1CH For TSX-002A/l and 3, enter “1” (1CH).

2.2CH
(3.3CH)
4.4CH
q. quit

Enter Menu Number = h. For GX, enter “2” (2CH).

***** Other Utility. *****

1. IM-Change
2. Version-Ch
3. Timeout-C h
4. TUBE-Select
5. FD-S elect
6. PDI-C hannel-S elect
7. Scanner-option
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = z (For confirming and changing the settings)

-5ll-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

Select (for Xforce/XforceSWXvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [3 .SMHU/36kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change EXe1
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. Ail? select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 1

TUBEHFG Select (for Xvision)

1.2.OMHU/36kw-HFG(OLP-90%)
2. 2.OMHU/36kw-HFG(OLP-100%)
3. 3.5MHU/3 6kw-HFG(OLP-90%)
4. 3.5MHU/36kw-HFG(OLP-100%) TSX-002A/ “A-+1,2 (2M)
5. 2.OMHU/3 6kw-HFG(High-Land) *B-+3:4 (3SM)
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 2

Select (for Xforce/XforceSH/Xvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [3.5MHU/3 GkW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change [X e1
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change *
9. AP select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 2

-512-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

SS Mode Change Now [SS/PRE]

1. ss
2. SSIPRE
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 2 Enter “2” (SWPRE) for all Xvision systems.

Select (for Xforce/XforceSH/Xvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [3. SMHU/36kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change LXe1
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. AP select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
4. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 3

Reconstruct Unit Change Now [RTRU]

1. AFRU
2. RTRU (M + S) 1.0 set
3. RTRU (M) 1.O set
4. RTRU (M + S) 1.5 set
5. RTRU (M) 1.5 set
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 5 Enter “3 ” for GX.

Enter “2” or “4” for OP,

- 513 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

Select (for Xforce/XforceSWXvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [3 .SMHU/36kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change , LXe1
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. AP select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = fl

Detector Change Now [Xe]

1. Xe-detector
2. SSD
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = _I For SP (002Ai7) and Real (002AB), enter “2”.

Select (for Xforce/XforceSWXvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [3.5MHU/36kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change ix eI
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. AP select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 5.

-514-
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

Select Slice Width (for Xforce/Xpress)

1. OFF
2. ON
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = q For Xhion, “q” must not be ,entered.

Select (for Xforce/XforceSWXvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [35MHU/36kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change IX eI
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. AP select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 6

BBDC Change

1. BBDC ON
2. BBDC OFF
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 2 For Xvision, “2” (OFF) must be entered.

- 515 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

Select (for Xforce/XforceSWXvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [35MHU/36kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [ SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change LX e1
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. AP select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 8

IP change

1. IP210
2. IP21OMS
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 2 If 3D scan is supported, enter “2”.

Conhn the type of II? board.

Select (for Xforce/XforceSWXvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [3.5MHU/3 6kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change , [X e1
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. AP select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
’ q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 9

- 516 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

AP select

l.AP(ON)
2. AP (OFF)
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 2 Enter “2” AP (OFF) because the AP board is not
currently used.

Select (for Xforce/XforceSH/Xvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [3SMHU/36kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change [X e1
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. AP select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select ’
12. Driver Configuration
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 10

Select DAS type (for Xvision/Xvision20)

1. M-DAS Channel bundling is not used.

2. GX-MDAS Channel bundling is used.
3. CWI-DAS DAS/Xe detector integrated unit is used.
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 1

- 517 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

Select (for Xforce/XforceSWXvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [3 .SMHU/36kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [ SS/PRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change Exe1
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. AP select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = JJ

Data Disk Manager change

1. PSI (Parallel SCSI Disk Interface) Manager -3 5”

2. PDI (Parallel Disk Interface) Manager -5”
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = L

Select (for Xforce/XforceSH/Xvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [3.5MHU/36kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [ SS/PRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change [X e1
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. AJ? select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = 12 The driver is configured with the system.

- 518 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

Driver ConfIguration

AP (1 .exist, 2.NoAP) > 2

IP (l.IP210, 2.IP210MS, 3.No IP) > 3 If 3D scan is supported, enter “2”.
DATA DISK (1 .PSI, 2.PDI) > 1 (In some cases ” 1” should be selected.)
ONLINE (1 .exist, 2.No ONLINE) > 2. If online communication is supported: enter
OK? (y/n/q) > y ” 1”. (Example: Xtension)

Select (for Xforce/XforceSH/Xvigor/Xpress/Xvision)

1. Tube change [3.5MKu/3 6kW-HFG]

2. SS mode change [SSIPRE]
3. Reconstruct Unit change [RTRU]
4. Detector change [x e1
5. Thinslice change
6. BBDC change
8. IP change
9. AP select
10. DAS type select
11. Data Disk Manager select
12. Driver Configuration
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = CJ The previous menu is displayed.

***** Other Utility. *****

1. IM-Change
2. Version-Ch
3. Timeout-Ch
4. TUBE-Select
5. FD-Select
6. PDI_Channel_Select
7. Scanner-option
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = CJ The previous menu is displayed.

- 519 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

System Initialize and Maintenance

1. System Initialize.
2. System Initialize (Except 3,4 and 5)
3. File System Initialize.
4. PAS Initialize.
5. Calib Data Initialize.
6. Get study number.
7. Set study number.
8. Fd patch.
9. Mt patch.
10. Fd dump.
11. Mt dump.
12. BBM init.
13. Other Utility.
q. Quit

Enter Menu Number = g The previous menu is displayed.

* ** Generation System (version 2.00) ***

1. Create backup tape.

2. Initialize and Maintenance.
3. Set date and time
4. Protect the system.
5. Option Select, .
6. Error Log.
7. File System Utility
8. Tape Utility.
9. PDI/PSI system utility.
10. Online setup.
cl. Quit

Enter Menu Number = CJ The prelious menu is displayed.

- 520 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SETTING

NICS BOOT SYSTEM [V3.22]

1 : DIAG SYSTEM
4 : SYSTEM GENERATION
5 : NICS SYSTEM
6 : ACT SYSTEM
7 : XLINK SYSTEM 4

SYSTEM > quitmenu

# umountall (Press the [Del] key to type W.)
# synC’-
# sync -.
# sync
# off

INIT: SINGLE USER MODE

***
erase = ^h kill = *u intr = DEL quit = “1
***

NOTICE: System Halt Requested (0)

NOTICE: System secured for powering down.

147-Bug>mm 98 1OOOOOJ
98100000 OOOl? &J
9‘s 1’00002 OOOO?j-J
98100004 OOOO?J
98100006 ABCD? d
98 1oooq OOOO?J
147B&%oJ --

ITurn tne power OFF then start the system again. 1

-521-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTION

1. Option Selection Program Operating Procedure
1.I Outline
The option selection program is a program for setting the system operating environment.

1.2 Start and, end

This section describes the starting and ending procedures.

(1) Start

When the program is started, the initial screen shown in figure l-l is displayed on the
CRT. The prompt “Password” for entering a password is displayed on the upper left
of the screen. The password can be entered or the quit key or next page key can be
pressed.

(a) Password entry

The password can be entered via the EL panel or the T-3 100. When the screen is
as shown in figure l-l, the password can be entered via the EL panel. When the
T-3 100 key is clicked by the mouse, the screen shown in figure l-2 appears, and
the password can be entered via the T-3 100.

Enter the password for the prompt “Password”. The password is not displayed
on the screen.

When the predetermined password is entered, the data entry screen shown in
figure l-3 is displayed. In this state, the data items can be changed. Even if no
password is entered (only the [RET] key, the next page key, or the [Enter] key
(via the T-3 100) is pressed), the data entry screen appears in the same way.
However, the data items which can be changed are limited. When an incorrect
password is entered, the warning message shown below is displayed on the
screen for 2 or 3 seconds, and the screen is returned to the password entry
screen.

IWarning: Incorrect password entered. I

To enter the correct password, delete the incorrect password with the [Delete]
key (or the [t-l key) beforehand.

When an incorrect password is entered twice or more, the data entry screen
appears as if no password was entered.

“password” = NICS (capital letters)

- 522 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTION

Option selection

T-3100 switching key

,--Quit key

I
Next -page key

Figure l-l Figure l-2

(2) Quit key

The quit key is always available. When the quit key is clicked with the mouse after
editing, the following message is displayed on the screen.

When the [Store] key is clicked, the changed data is stored and processing is
terminated. When the [Quit] key is clicked, processing is terminated without the data
being stored.

(3) T-3 100 key

When the T-3 100 key on the lower left of the screen is clicked with the mouse, T-
3 100 entry mode is selected. If this occurs, data can be entered via the T-3 100. (For
further details, see subsection 1.3 (2) (b), “Data entry from the T-3 loo”.)

- 523 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTION

1.3 Data editing
This section describes the data entry and soft key data editing procedures.

Option selection
. 1
Site name TOSHIBA M&C
(Alphabetical characters)
__-.-------_---_- .- - ----. - - _- --- .._ .--- "_.____----.------. -._.._-_ -
Site name TOSHIBA MEC '.
,
Site name TOSHIBA NASU _'
c I..-.CLa-YI
.._."_I_-x-m."
_-..,..l~_..e.-.-----^'
-- '.-+'_-----.-^-'-
. -- 1-w-.-
--.l -1-1
.-.-.^-
.___,_ __ -___,____- _ _-_*--
_ _.,~
Network
Station ID 000001
System name Xpress
System serial No. 0001
Test department name
Operator ID
No. of WSs
No. of AP boards
No. of IPs
No. of optical disks ;,
No. of 8" FDs

Figure l-3. Entry screen;

- 524 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTlON

(1) Data entry screen

The data entry screen allows a character string to be entered as shown in (1) and
selection of a soft key with the mouse as shown in (2).

Data can be entered via either the EL panel or the T-3 100. When no password is
entered, some item names may be shaded. The shaded item data cannot be changed.
(See figure l-4.)

Option selection
......... .....I.....
. ..y..>:.:.:..
......ii.........
...‘.i....s’...~.~...:.:.: ...................,.,.&....
.....A....
.:.~.~.~.~.:.f:.:.:.:
:::~::~...“.........~..........~............................ .........................A..
....,._
...n........................................
...i..i..............i,.~.~.~.~.....~.~.~...~.~.
.................A.................
;:;;g*.
$$@S it e name :;::::*
.+:.;.:.: TOSHIBA MEC
~~(Alphabetical ... .cha,racte-~~,.!;:~ “_ _--jl--i m.-,---.e*v___ ---;rr-
...:::
:::.“““““““““..............:::‘.....
::::m
.....y..:,;.> ...a ........................~..‘....................~.~.~.
‘:‘~.:.:‘:‘;;;:........:.:.:.:.:.~.:.~.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:,:.:.:.:.:
..................:.:.:.......A.................................
.:,..:.:+: ... ...s...:.:
....:.,.,.,.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.,.,.~.~.
......,.,.,.,...,.,._n.,
.._.,... ..., ......................
.
,Y-STte name TOSHIBA MEC 1“$
:
\\ Site name TOSHIBA NASU/'
..- _ ____... I _- ".__,^._. ___ _ --; -- _-.____.."
..--..-
-------
Network-
Station. .... ::.: ID
.....h.............................. ..:.~.~.:.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.
... .. ....~.~.~. .. 000001
~:~.:::::::::::::::~::::::::::::::?..:.~.~.~.~..~..: ........................y. ::::::'* $.:F.:$
....a
.
##System
..:..A.. ...........'...S....................'...
...'.....
....vi....
...A..
:::::$, ...name
.................................i,.~.,.,.i~.if~.i,.,.~...~..
........,..:...:.~...
............_.........:...._.....A *:::::::
....A....
Xpress
..?:.~:.:,~.~:.~.:.:.~:.:.~.:::.::::::::::::::::::
...... ......t:..A.
.....~:~::
....
....s..........................
.....:.r......;
@System serial ;:3>.:.
No.,: . . ..;:.:.:.: ::::::::::
5--'.:-:.~~.>
..............iif........
......:.:.:.:.:.:.: ,..:.:.:
...
..:.:.:.:... 0001
:.:.:.:fs
.A........
-....A. ..................:.:.:~:::~.::::::::::::.:::::::~:::~.:~.:::::::::::~
..................
Test department name
Operator
.. ... . ... ... ID
.. ....,...,..
:::~.~.~:.:,:.~..:.~:.:.:.:.~..:.:.:.:.:.:.:.~.:.:.~.:.:.:.~
....
&No. of wss......:...:: @
~.:.:.:.:.:::.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.~,:.~..:.:.:.:.:
...p...........
No. of AP boards
No. of IPS
No. of optical disks
No. of 8" FDs -.

Figure l-4 Example of shaded item names

- 525 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTION

(2) Character item entry

(a) Data entry from the EL panel

Data can be changed for the highlighted entry item. The default value is
displayed for each item.

When rewriting data, delete the default value with the [DELETE] key, enter a
new character string, and press the [RET] key.

When only the [RET] key is pressed, the item data is not changed. (Item skip)

When characters other than the specified character type are entered, the following
message is displayed on the screen.

IWarning: This item requires entry of only alphanumeric characters. I

To move to an item, press the [RET] key to skip other items or select the item
name with the mouse.

The cursor movement range varies for each item. (The maximum movement
range is limited to the inside of the item frame.)

(b) Data entry from the T-3 100

Move the cursor to the data item to be entered from the T-3 100. When the T-
3 100 key is clicked with the mouse, T-3 100 entry mode is selected.

In T-3 1Ob entry mode, data can only be entered from the T-3 100. The title of an
entry item is displayed on the screen of the T-3 100. To quit T-3 100 entry mode,
press the [Enter] key.

When rewriting data, enter a character string on the title field of the item, and
press the [Enter] key. When only the [Enter] key is pressed, the item data is not
changed.

When characters other than the specified character type are entered, the following
error message is displayed on the screen.

Warning: This item requires entry of only alphabetic characters.

- 526 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTION

(c) Previous page and next page keys

Each data entry screen consists of more than two pages. To change the screen to
the previous page, click the [Previous page] key with the mouse. To change the
screen to the next page, click the [Next page] key with the mouse.

The page previous to page 1 is the last page. The page subsequent to the last
page is page 1. (See figure l-5.) .

.
.
I

Option selection

No. of AI's rl I
C
t
Option selection

Calibration data ' q Air •I Water

HFG type q 24 kW (Single) Q 24 kW (Double)
q 36 kW
Body movement correction q on pJ off <n>

4/4 OT3100
<2>
-
<l>

Figure l-5

- 527 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTION

I
1.4 Floppy disk save and load
This function saves or loads the data set by option selection to or from the 3.5-inch floppy disk.
(1) Floppy disk display
The floppy disk display shown in figure l-7 appears on the screen when the [FD] key
is clicked on the display shown in figure l-6.
Click [Save] to save data to the floppy disk.
Click [Load] to load data from the floppy disk.
Click [Cancel] to clear the floppy disk display.
*: Before clicking [Save], format the floppy disk to be used (image file).

- (1) Character string

input field
DRll @pe q quad-l 1 q dual-l 1
q Commercial
Ethernet connection q on q off
DRl 1 connection q on f%JOff

EC system date type q YY/MM/DD q MM/DI - (2) Soft-key

q DD/MMYY selection field

*: Before clicking
[Save]: format the
floppy disk to be
used (itiage file).

Page [End] key [Page Up] [Page Down] FD key

key key
T-3 100 switchitig key

Figure l-6

Figure 1-7

- 528 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTION

(2) Error message screen

If an error occurs during processing, the corresponding error message is displayed on

the screen shown in figure l-8.

When the [OK] key is clicked, the error message screen is cleared.

Error message display I

Figure l-8

One of the error messages shown below is displayed.

Error messages Description and countermeasures

FLOPPY DISK IS NOT INSERTED. Displayed when the floppy disk is not inserted
in the correct drive. Check that the disk is
inserted correctly.

FLOPPY DISK IS NOT INITIALIZED. Displayed when the floppy disk is not
formatted or is not formatted correctly.

FLOPPY DISK IS FULL. I Displayed when the disk is full. In this

I situation, data cannot be saved.

DATA CANNOT BE READ. Displayed when invalid file data is stored in

the floppy disk.

DIFFERENT VERSION Displayed when a different version of the

option selection utility is specified.

Note : Both the X-ray tube capacity and the HFG type items are deleted in and after
V4.0. To change those items, start the GENERATION SYSTEM and set it
with TUBE-Select in Other Utility

- 529 -
 .
No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTION

Item identification Item description Settings
Site name (alphabetic For site name entry Example: TOSHIBA MEC
letters)
Network (for further LAN extension) None. This entry is reserved
for further LAN extension.
Station ID For 1Dlentr-y during network %f r 00000 1ti
construction
System name _ For system name entry (Xvision)
System serial number Serial number of the manufactured Entered at shipment from the
system (entered at shipment from factory
the factory) 0001 (4 digits)
Test department name For entry of test department Set at the customer’s site
(optional)
Operator ID For entry of the initials or name of Entered at the customer’s site
the X-ray technician (optional)
Number of work- For entering the number of MDS
stations “2” is entered when the Xlink-
30 is connected.
Number of AP boards For entering the number of AP Not connected ... 0
boards to be connected Connected ... 1
Number of IPs For entering the number of IPs to Not connected ... 0
be connected Connected ... 1 (For IPs
with 3D: set
this to “l”.)
Number of optical disks For entering the number of optical Not connected.. . 0
disks to be connected Connected ... 1
Number of magneto- For entering the number of Not connected ... 0
optical disks magneto-optical disks to be I Connected ... 1
connected
Number of 8” floppy For entering the number of 8” Not connected.. . 0
disks floppy disks to be connected Connected ... 1
Monitor display disable For setting the time that the Default: 10
time monitor display is disabled (unit:
minutes)

- 530 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTION

Item identification Item description Settings
Number of DRl 1s For entering the number of DRl 1s 0
Type of DRll For entering the type of DRl 1 None
Ethernet connection For specifying whether connection OFF
to Ethernet is performed
DRl 1 connection For specifying whether DRl 1 is OFF
connected
EC system data type TCT-700s None
3D high-quality image For specifying whether the 3D “OFF” is usually set.
surface display high-quality image surface display
is performed
Dental For specifying whether the dental “OFF” is usually set.
analysis software is supported
MIP For specifying whether NIP OFF
processing is performed
IS&C format Magneto-optical disk format OFF (This can be set to ON
with the option connected.)
IS&C security Magneto-optical disk security OFF (“OFF” is always set.)
Imager type For setting the imager type CRT-IMGR
(This is set even when a laser
imager is provided.)
Imager connected For specifying the workstation to Xvision main body side : WS 1
workstation which the imager is connected Xlink-3 0 side : ws2
Not connected : None
EC date type TCT-600HQ None
Gantry/couch position For specifying the positional To be specified at the
display relationship between the gantry and customer’s site
the couch
Xe-Study For specifying whether the system “NO” is usually set.
supports Xe-study software
Quantitative analysis of For specifying whether the system “NO” is usually set.
bone mineral content supports the software for
quantitative analysis of bone
mineral content
Stereotactics For specifying whether the system “NO” is usually set.
supports stereotaxy
Simplified operation For specifying whether the system “Yes” is usually set.
supports simplified operation

-531-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: OPTION SELECTION

Item identification Item description Settings
TOSRIM connection For specifying whether the system “NO” is usually set.
supports TOSRIM connection
Date input format For specifying the input format of
year, month, and day
Scan plan enlargement For specifying the enlargement I * * Xvision: ?”lx!’ is usually set.
ratio ratio when a scanogram is
displayed during scan plan
Calibration data For entering calibration data type Xvision: Air
Voice For setting whether auto voice is ON . .. Broadcast
(control-room) broadcast to the control room OFF ... Not broadcast
ACQ number Sets whether the ACQ number is Usually it is started at 1.
started at 1 again or continued
Scan time sort Sets ascending order or descending Usually ascending order
order to change the scanning time
for the scan stop screen, etc.
Scanning field sort Sets ascending order or descending Usually descending order
order to change the scanning field
for the scan stop screen, etc.
Scanogram sort Sets ascending order or descending Usually descending order
order to change the scanning field
for the scanogram stop screen, etc.
Buzzer (full keyboard) Sets whether or not the buzzer is Usually ON
made sound for the input from the m .. . Sound
full keyboard OFF ... No sound
Helical raw protect Sets whether raw data of helical ON . .. Protect
scan is protected OFF ... Not protected
(V4.8D%TLK)

- 532 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: BACK-UP DATA

Save back-up data when the system is installed, when the software is upgraded, or when the disk
is replaced.

(1) System software back-up

Select “Create System Tape” in SYSTEM GENERATION to save back-up data of the
system software to a streamer tape.

(2) Calibration data

Select “STOCK DATA & NRA DATA” of “NRA tools” in the system maintenance menu to
save calibration data to a streamer tape.

(3) exam Plan

Select “EPCONV” in the system maintenance menu to save exam Plan data. At this time,
the data must be saved alone in a floppy disk.

In addition to data saving by “EPCONV”, save the data to a floppy disk using the archive
function in “Preset”.

There is a bug with the EPCONV program. Thereby, the program allows saving an exam
Plan which has no content. In addition, EPCONV saves data up to the Plan’s position on the
EL panel, whereas the archive function in “Preset” saves only the contents of the exam Plan
without saving the position data. Therefore, be sure to record the Plan position before saving
data using the archive function in “Preset”.

(4) Left/right alignment correction value

Select EPCONV from the system maintenance menu and save the left/right alignment
correction value. At this time, the data must be saved alone on a floppy disk.

(5) Patient examination appointment data, patient default data, and patient preset sort
information

Select “EPCONV” from the system maintenance menu to save the data. At this time, use a
floppy disk as the storage media.

(6) SCRENDEF (option in scan planning)

Select “SCRENDEF” from the system maintenance menu to save the data. At this time, the
data must be saved alone on a floppy disk.

INote: Only “All” can be selected from the selection screen. I

- 533 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: BACK-UP DATA

(7) Detailed scan conditions in auto-filming interaction

Record the data because it cannot be saved to a floppy disk, tape, etc.

(8) Option

Select “OPTION” from the system maintenance menu to save system option data on a floppy
disk.

(9) Image filter (user filter)

Record the data because it cannot be saved to a floppy disk, tape, etc.

(10) On-line settings

Select Online setup in GENERATION SYSTEM to save the data after setting on a floppy
disk.

(11) ROI information

Record the data of the preference function of Statistical Calculation (key).

(12) Stack scan weighting coefficient

Save the data on a floppy disk.

(13) Study number

Record the data.

- 534 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

1. Error Log Analysis Program -
I .I Outline
(1) Purpose

The main purpose-of thissoftware is to providethe following% functions.

(a) Error log area initialization

(b) Error log area display

(c) Error code analysis

(2) Features

(a) The error log contents can be displayed on both the console and the MDS.

(b) The error log contents can be searched and displayed under the conditions
indicated below.

l Period specification

l By job identification

l By device identification

l By error occurrence circuit count

(c) The error log information can be stored on a 3.5inch floppy disk or the stored
information can be displayed. This storage format is the MS-DOS text file
format, and data can be displayed by the T-3 100. (The storage format is the text
file format which is the same as the console display format.)

(d) For error code analysis, an entered error code is searched for in each field, and a
main category code, job or device code, and definition symbols of the major
status and substatus, and comments are displayed.

(e) The error definition information used in the error log analysis program is created
by the “error definition information creation tool” from the header file “errorh”.
Therefore, the error codes can be updated in the future by updating the “err0r.h”
file and recreating the definition information by the “error definition information
creation tool”. (The header file should be described according to the rules
described later.)

- 535 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

1.2 Configuration
(1) Hardware configuration

The hardware components for this software are given below:

SM . TTY

DISK

SF1 MDS Monitor

I
(option) -Mouse

Optional 3.5” FDD

(2) Software configuration

0a errlog

Error log analysis program

@I defmake
Error definition information created from “error. h”

(3) File required

Error definition information file

errdef [file extension for each language]

1.3 Activation and deactivation

(1) Activation

Press the [CR] key from the TTY (T-3 100 computer) to display the UNIX prompt
“#“. After the prompt “#” appears, type as follows:

“errlog”
or
“errlog” and an <error code>

If only “errlog” is typed, the system waits for errlog command entry.
The error code is set using eight hexadecimal digits and displayed in detail.

- 536 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

(2) Termination

When only errlog is specified, type [e] or [cl] to terminate. When the <error code> is
specified, ‘I#” is restored after the detailed display.

1.4 Functional description

Enter as follows during command entry:

>[command] u [option[option[. ..]]I u : Space

Options are specified with hyphens (-).

A brief description of individual commands and options is given below:

Command Option Description

h Lists commands and describes how to handle them.
Z Initializes an error log area.
-h 1Initializes a hardware area.
I -S I Initializes a software area.
I -a I Initializes all areas.
d Displays an error log message.
-Outputs error log area data to the monitor display (shared with
another option).
I -t 1Permits conditional entry of date and time.
1~~:i I Permits conditional entry of a job ID.
I -d IP ermits conditional entry of a device ID.
I 1Permits conditional
-C entry of error counts.
-f Specifies an input source.
f I 1Outputs error logs to the 3 S-inch floppy disk.
I -t 1Permits conditional entry of date and time.
I -i I Permits conditionalentry of a job ID.<
I -d I Permits conditional entry of a device ID.
I -C I Permits conditional entry of error counts.
I -f I Specifies an input source.
xxxxxxxx I 1 Permits listing of error codes (eight hexadecimal digits).

0 e, cl Ends processing.

- 537 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

Only one command can be entered after the corresponding prompt has appeared.
All required options must be specified in advance.

Two or more options can be specified at a time. ex. “d I I -f 1 I -t” ( u : space)

(Source and time are specified.)

(1) Error log ,area initialization m’ G c ’

(a) General description

This program permits the NICS system error log areas to be initialized.

(b) Input format

>z [option]

1) Option

-S : Initializes a software error log area.

-h : Initializes a hardware error log area.

-a, all : Initializes both software and hardware error log areas.

Omission of an option specification causes an option error.

(c) Functional description

The z command initializes an error log area.

Specification of which area is to be initialized is required.

When the option [-h -s] is specified, the results are the same as when [-a] or [-all]
is specified.

(d) Example

Only a software error log ,area is initialized.

>z -s

- 538 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

(e) Error messages

usage z-s = Soft log area initialize.

z-h = Hard log area initialize.

z-a = Soft & Hard log area initialize.

z-all = Soft & Hard log area initialize.

errlog: illegal option ! !

(fj’ Related options of other commands

[-fJ option of the d command

[-fl option of the f command

(g) Remarks

The z command initializes the management section of error logs,

(2) Error log message display

(a) General description

This program permits error log area data to be output to the console or the
monitor.

(b) Input format

>d [option]

1) Option

-M: Outputs error log area data on the monitor (shared with another option).

-t: Permits conditional entry of date and time.

-j: Permits conditional entry of a job ID.

-d: Permits conditional entry of a device ID.

-c: Permits conditional entry of error counts.

-f Specifies an input source.

If an option is not specified, all hardware log data is displayed on the console.

- 539 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

(c) Functional description

The d command permits error log area data to be displayed.

A detailed description of each option is given on the following pages.

(d) Example

Displays software error log information by conditional entry of date and time and
job ID.

>d -r -j

(e) Error messages

errlog: [-] is unknown option.

An invalid display command option is specified.

(f) Related options of other commands

defmake: Error definition information creation tool

(3) Displaying error log information on the monitor

(a) Input format

>d -M

(b) Functional description

The following functions are operable using the mouse:

1) Scroll-up and scroll-down error log information

Line scroll-up and scroll-down is possible by clicking on the scroll-bar [‘/‘I and
PI.
Screen scroll-up and scroll-down is possible by clicking [Prev page] or [Next
PWI.
2) Detailed display of error information

The data line highlighted in the “scroll” window can be displayed in the
“detail” window by clicking [detail].

3) Ending the monitor display

The monitor display is cleared by clicking [end].

- 540 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

(4) Conditional entry of date and time

(a) Input format

>d -t
date & time (yy.mm.dd:hh:mm:ss)
from date & time ?
to date & time ?
Input format for date and time
yy: Lower two digits of the calendar year (e.g., 1989=89 or 200 l=O 1)
mm: Month (e.g., January=Ol)
dd: Day (e.g., First=0 1)
The following entries can be omitted and are made as required.
The default value is 0.
hh: Hour (one hour=0 1)
mm: Minute (one minute=0 1)
ss: Second (one second=0 1)
Slash ‘Y, hyphen “-‘I, colon “:” or period Y’ is used as the separator of
each item. I
(b) Error messages

usage input format = <yy.mm.dd>[:hh[:mm[:ss]]]

(yy.mm.dd=must be input. default is 0 value.)
errlog : illegal format char.
The input format is invalid.

- 541 -
 No, SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

(5) Conditional entry of Job ID

(a) Input format

>d -j _
job id?

To-be entered in four hexadecimal’digits (Oxhh) or symbols (excluding

Am3
C-L
(b) Error messages

usage Oxhh [CR] = job ID in hexadecimal.

XXXXXXXX [CR] = job ID withou

errlog: [Oxhh] is not hex number ! !

The entries are not hexadecimal.

errlog: [----I job name is not found !!

The entries are not defined as symbols in the error definition file.

(6) Conditional entry of device ID

(a) Input format

>d -d
dev id ?

To be entered in four hexadecimal digits (Oxhh) or symbols (excluding

“DV-“)
.A---
(b) Error messages _,, A-
, _,’
usag _ &x&R] = device ID number in hexadecimal.
0 XXXXXXXX [CR] = device ID without ’

errlog: [Oxhh] is not hex number ! !

The entries are not hexadecimal.

errlog: [----I device name is not found ! !

The entries are not defined as symbols in the error definition file.

- 542 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

(7) Conditional entry of error occurrences

(a) Input format

>d -c
repetition ?

Enter error occurrences in decimal notation.

One or more errors which occurred more frequently than the specified
limit are displayed.
(b) Error messages

usage input decimal number.

errlog: [nnnn] is not decimal number ! !

The entries are not decimal.

(8) Input source specification

(a) Input format

>d -f

source select ?

One of the following values is entered.

s: Specifies a software error log as an input source.
h: Specifies a hardware error log as an input source.
f Specifies a 3S-inch floppy disk file as an input source.
When f is entered, the message ,

“3.5 FDD path name (default: hwlog.txt)?” is displayed.

Enter a 3.5-inch floppy disk file path (when only [CR] is entered, the
default path is specified).

- 543 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

(9) Screen display when an error log is displayed

(a) Error log display on the TTY screen (e.g., T-3 100)

If a hardware error occurs

# errlog (To display V”, press the [CR] key of the TTY.)

** Error log analysis program. **

(if you need help, input h [CR]

>h- Command list display

-
** Error log analysis program command usage **

l h = this help command.

l z = log area initialize.
: -h = hard log area init.
: -s = sofir log area init.
: -a (11) = hard & soft area init.
l d = error log data display.
: -M = display MDS display. (add other options)
*. -t = DATA & TIME input.
: -j = JOB ID input.
: -d = Device ID input.
: -c = Error count input.
: -f = Source file select.
l f = Error log data output to 3.5 FD.
.- -t = DATA & TIME input.
: -j = JOB ID input. “Ctrl” + ‘5” + Stops the display.
: -d = Device ID input. “Ctrl” + “Q” -+ Returns to “>‘I.
: -c = Error count input.
*. -f = Source file select.
l e = terminate program.
l q = terminate program.
l XXXXXXXX = Error code analysis display.

( u : Space) Command d
>du-fu-t Option -f (input source specification)
Option -t (time specification)
source select ? h Specification of hardware

date & time (yy/mm/dd. hh:mm:ss) Enter the range to be output. Only
from date & time ?96/02/20 .the month and date are entered here.
to date & time ?96/02/26 The time can be specified as required.

- 544 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

These fo,ur digits are the error message code, which identifies the ”
GTS PWJ3 -error” from theLtable ‘on’the next ‘page.

96/02/26 11:34:37 SCANEX SS c40082eO Oc UNIX 0000 0 <2>

00010002000000000000000000000000

96/02/26 11: lo:41 SCANEX SS ~4008136 Oc UNIX 0000 0 <3>

000100020000525204005544103ffo00

96/02/26 11:09:52 AP AP b4140c06 Ob XOPEN 0000 0 AP

00000000000000000000000000000000 err.

96/02/26 10:56:24 AP AP b414Oc06 Ob XOPEN 0000 0 AP

00000000000000000000000000000000 err.

96/02/26 10:52:50 SSSTAT SS ~4008210 Oc UNIX 0000 0 <4>

OOOlOOOd000152520082000000000000

96/02/26 10:50:40 SSSTAT SS ~4008710 Oc UNIX 0000 0 <5>

OOOlOOOd000052520082000000000000

96/02/26 10:50: 14 AP AP b4140c06 Ob XOPEN 0000 0 AP

00000000000000000000000000000000 err.

96/02/23 15:37: 10 AP AP b4140c06 Ob XOPEN 0000 0 AP

00000000000000000000000000000000 err.

96/02/23 13:41:37 AP AP b4140c06 Ob XOPEN 0000 0 AP

00000000000000000000000000000000 err.

96/02/23 13 :02:49 AP AP b4140c06 Ob XOPEN 0000 0 AP

00000000000000000000000000000000 err.

96102122 11:56:37, RECBG SS 8a038320.08.. OVF. 0000 0 RTRU

0000001200000553 0000001100000001 err.

- 545 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

- more - The next information is displayed by
pressing the [CR] key of the TTY.

DATE TIME JOB ID DEVID ERRCODE TYPE MAJORST COMMAND RPT

INFl INF2 INF3 INF4

96/02/22 11:43: 17 AP AP b4140c06 Ob XOPEN 0000 0

00000000 00000000’00000000‘ 00000000 llJ (

Terminates error log display.

*: To save the displayed contents of the TTY on a floppy disk, enter as follows:
@RF u A:errlog.txt
(R e1ease = @NJ-W
(10) Error message codes and error messages

Message Error Description Possible cause

No. code
8001 8010 SS failure. Contact service personnel. ss, PRE PWB
failure
8002 ’ 8110 GTS failure. Contact service personnel, GTS PWB,
communication
system failure
8003 8210 XC failure. Contact service personnel. xc PwE3,
communication
system failure
8004 8310 FRU failure. Contact service personnel.
8005 8410 OPI failure. Contact service personnel. OPI PWB,
communication
system failure
8006 8510 AD1 failure. Contact service personnel. AD1 PWB
communication
system failure
8007 8120 Unstable wedge operation. Contact
service personnel.
8008 8121 Unstable shift operation. Contact service
personnel.
8009 8122 Unstable slit operation. Contact service
personnel.

-546-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

Message Error Description Possible cause
No. code
800a 8123 Unstable beam trimmer operation. Call
service personnel.
800b 8124 Unstable projector operation. Contact
service personnel.
8OOc 8125 Unstable gantry tilt operation. Contact
service personnel.
sood 8126 Unstable gantry rotation. Contact service
personnel.
800e 8127 Unstable couch top slide operation. Call
service personnel.
800f 8128 Unstable couch vertical operation. Contact
service personnel.
8010 8129 Unstable DAS/XC operation. Call service
personnel.
8011 8130 Wedge operation error. Contact service
personnel.
8012 8131 Shift operation error. Contact service
personnel.
8013 8132 Slit operation error. Contact service
personnel.
8014 8133 Beam trimmer operation error. Call
service personnel.
8015 8134 Projector operation error. Contact service
personnel.
8016 8135 Gantry tilt operation error. Contact service
personnel.
8017 8136 Gantry rotation error. Contact service
personnel.
8019- 8138 Couchvertical-operation error, Contact.
service personnel.
801a 8139 DAS/XE operation error. Contact service
personnel.

-547-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

Message Error Description Possible cause
No. code
801b 81fo GTS timeout error. GTS PWB,
communication
system failure
8Olc 8lf.l Shift operation timeout.. Retry shifting.
801d 81f2 Slit operation timeout. Retry slit
operation.
Sole 81f3 Beam trimmer operation timeout. Retry
trimmer operation.
801f 81f4 Projector operation timeout. Retry
projector operation.
8020 81f5 Tilt operation timeout. Retry tilt
operation.
8021 81f6 Gantry rotation timeout. Retry gantry
rotation.
8022 81f7 Couch top slide timeout. Retry couch top
sliding.
8023 81f8 Couch vertical operation timeout. Retry
vertical operation.
8024 81f!J DAS/XC operation timeout. Retry
operation.
8025 8260 Overcurrent. Reset XC and retry.
8026 8261 Over kV. Reset XC and retry.
8027 8262 Over mA. Reset XC and retry.
8028 8263 XC exposure time is exceeded. Call
service personnel.
8029 8230 XC interlock. Change scan condition.
802a 8250 Inoperable XC. Contact service personnel.
8030 8 140- Patient’sbody. comes int.o,contactwith mat.
8050 823 1 Door is opened during X-ray exposure.
8051 8150 This request is unacceptable during
gantry/couch movement.
8052 81eO Gantry and couch is in LOCAL.
8053 82eO XC is in LOCAL. XC local SW ON
8054 83fQ FRU timeout. Retry operation.

- 548 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

Message Error Description Possible cause
No. code
806d 8163 Tilt angle is at the +limit position.
806e 8164 Tilt angle is at the -limit position.
806f 8168 OUT limit
8070 8167 IN limit
8071 8166 UP limit
8072 8165 DOWN limit
80b7 8040 SS operation error. Call service personnel.
80b8 8630 PRE operation error. Retry PRE
operation.
8100 8610 PRE failure. Contact service personnel.
8101 813a GTS main task failure. Contact service GTS PWB failure
personnel.
8102 813f Gantry power is not supplied. Gantry breaker,
communication
system error
8103 86fo PRE timeout. Retry operation.
8104 8181 Error occurred during offset acquisition.
Retry acquisition.
8105 8264 XC failure. Reset XC and retry.
80af 82f;o XC timeout. Retry operation. xc PWB,
communication
system failure
8106 85f0 AD1 timeout. Retry operation. AD1 PWB,
communication
system failure
8107 8550 AD1 communication system operation AD1 PWB,
error. Retry operation. communication
system failure
80bO 8030 Scan system error occurred (retry
operation or contact service personnel).
80b2 855f Recording time exceeded 30 seconds.
8108 8fl.f No gas is contained in the gas cylinder.
Contact service personnel.

- 549 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: ERROR LOG

Message Error Description Possible cause
No. code
80b9 813b GNS task failure. Contact service GNS PWB,
personnel. communication
system failure
8Obc 816f Acquisition is impossible at this position.
Move the couch top to the gantry side.
8018 8137 Couch stopped at an incorrect position.
Move it to the correct position.

822a 8080 SM and SS communication protocol error

822b 8710 Data transmission inside the gantry fails. MUDAT system
Contact service personnel. failure
822c 8790 Data transmission LED fails.
8233 X-ray shutter has not opened. Contact Shutter, shutter
service personnel. sensor failure

- 550 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONITOR

1.1 PSI monitor program (PSM)
This section describes the monitor program which facilitates various PSI operations.’

Using this program, operations such as reading/writing, formatting, bad track registration,
mode selection, firmware down-loading, etc. can be performed.

(1) Start-up

(a) Select 4. “SYSTEM GENERATION” from the system start-up menu as shown in
figure l-l and enter 4.

(b) SYSTEM GENERATION is started up, several messages are displayed, and then
the menu shown in figure l-2 is displayed.

NICS BOOT SYSTEM [V*.**]

1 : DIAG SYSTEM
4 : SYSTEM GENERATION
5 : NICS SYSTEM
6 : ACT SYSTEM
7 : XLINK SYSTEM

SYSTEM > 4

Figure l-l System start-up menu

** * Generation System (version *.**) ***

1 : Create backup tape.

2 : Initialize and maintenance.
3 : Set date and time.
4 : Protect the system.
5 : Option select.
6 : Error Log.
7 : File System Utility.
8 : Tape Utility.
9 : PDI/PSI system utility.
10 : Online setup
q : Quit.

Enter the menu number = 9

NICS System Ready
.
Figure l-2 Generation System menu

-551-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONITOR

(c) Select 9. “PDI/PSI system utility” from the menu shown in figure l-2 and enter 9.

(d) The terminal selection menu is displayed. The terminal name currently set is
displayed in the “current terminal” column. If a change is required, check the
name of the terminal to be used on the menu and enter the name for “New
terminal name=“. If not required, press the [Enter] key without entering
anything.

current terminal (“j3 100 “)

if you change the terminal type, type the terminal name.
You can specify the following terminal:

rtux =
TOSHIBA KANJI terminal:
j3100 =
TOSHIBA LAP-TOP computer.(J/T3 100 series)
vds =
Victor Display System.
vtlO0 =
DEC VT-l 00 terminal.
ex.
New Terminal name (If you don’t change, push return key.) = j3 100

Figure l-3 Terminal selection menu

(e) When a terminal is selected, the PSI is reset and after a time (about 50 seconds)
the menu shown in figure l-4 is displayed. Here, enter 4 to select 4. “PSI
monitor”. The PSM program is started up and the PSM main menu shown in
figure l-5 is displayed.

PDUPSI utility.

1. PDI utility.
2. PDI monitor. Note: Do not use 1. “PDI
3. PSI utility. utility” .and 3. “PSI
4. PSI monitor utility”.
q. Quit.

Enter MenuNumber =4

Figure l-4 PSI monitor selection menu

PDI = Parallel Disk Interface

PSI = Parallel SCSI Disk Interface
PSM = --PSI -Monitor

- 552 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONITOR

PSM - Parallel SCSI Disk Interface Monitor - Main Menu
* Device Driver Commands *
@g@g dpram driver kill qmode numclr dvrinf
set- tout read-tout set-start read-stat
* Logical Commands *
read write d-read d-write msg-read msg-write waitany
format ebad elog req-sense
* Image Memory Support *
fixed incr noise dump compare search
* Physical/Diagnostic/Process/Firm Commands *
PhYS diag* startup shutdown reset ldownloadl set- time

(This can be selected by pressing [k], [h], and [h].)

Figure l-5

- 553 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONfTOR

(2) Downloading the firmware

After resetting the PSI, download the firmware and reset the firmware time.

(a) Move the cursor to “download” on the PSM main menu screen and press the
[Enter] key.

(b) When resetting, firmware downloading, and resetting of the firmware time are
completed, the message “download command was successful” is displayed
(figure l-6).

Note: T-3 100 cursor keys Keys other than the keys
“h” = Moves the cursor to the left. on the left function as
“j” = Moves the cursor downward. the “ESC” key.
“k” = Moves the cursor upward.
“1” = Moves the cursor to the right.

PSM - Parallel SCSI Disk Interface Monitor - Main Menu

* Device Driver Commands *
trace dpram driver kill qmode numclr dvrinf
I

set-tout read-tout set-stat read-stat

* Physical/Diagnostic/Process/Firm Commands *
PhYS diag* startup shutdown reset download set-time
download command was successful 2

Figure l-6

- 554 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONITOR

(3) Termination procedure

Terminate the PSM screen following the procedure below to return to the previous
menu screen.

Press the [ESC] key at the PSM main menu.

-I--
The system returns to the*IPSI monitor selection! menu shown in-figure l-4.
On this menu screen, enter ‘q’.
\1
The system returns to the Generation System menu shown in figure 1-2.
If you want to execute some item in this menu, enter the corresponding number.
If you have no item to be executed, enter ‘q’.
4.
When ‘q’ is entered, the system returns to the system start-up menu shown in figure
l-l. For other cases, processing corresponding to, the entered number is performed.

1.2 Checking an acquired bad track

An bad track may occur as the disk is used over a period of time. Therefore, perform the
check for an acquired bad track if required when a hardware error occurs.
To check whether an bad track has resulted, refer to the PSI error code in the error log.
If an error satisfying the following requirements has occurred, register the track number
recorded in the PSI error code as the bad track using the bad track registration function of
the PSI monitor program.

Bad track investigation procedure

Register the bad track using PSM when a “data disk write error” has occurred and when
periodic inspection is performed, referring to the error log.
If a data disk error has occurred, the error is displayed in the following format.
When the PSI command in the error log is 20000002 and the PSI status is 80000009,
register the value of the error block address as the bad track.

DATE TIME JOB ID DEVID ERRCODE TYPE MAJORST COMMAND RPT

NFl INF2 INF3 INF4

95/08/04 15: lb09 FMS PDI 87101705 08 UNIX 0012+

02208000 fffffcm 00000000.00Q03458

PSI (system specification) Error block a!i dress

\1
95/08/04 15: 11:09 FMS PDI 87101405 08 UNIX 0002 f---
20000002800000090000000000000001

PSI command PSI status Two error logs identified

1‘ 1‘ by values OO1u2and 0002
2000000 1 (read) 0009 (drive) of ‘INF 4’ are used as
20000002 (write) OOOa(interface) a pair-to show the error
information.

- 555 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONITOR

1.3 Formatting the disk drive
(1) Mode selection

To format the disk drive, it is necessary to select a mode using the PSI monitor
program (PSM).

Procedure:

(a) Move the cursor to “diag*” (possible by the entry of [K] and [L]) in the main
menu and press the [return] key.

(b) The diagnostic menu is displayed as shown in figure l-7. Move the cursor to
“m-select” and press the [return] key.

PSM - Parallel SCSI Disk Interface Monitor - Diagnostic Menu

* Diagnostic Informations *
.......I . ..
$sc~~ inquiry
. capacity NCR menread memwrite
* Diagnostic Tests *
m-sense /m_select] nop
* Control *
reassign rezero

Figure l-7

(c) As shown in figure 1-8, the drive select window is opened. Enter 000 here.

IDrive Select Window

------------------------------
I
Enter drive # . 000
(including leadingeros)

Figure l-8

(d) When processing is completed normally, the message “mode select command was
successful” is displayed.

(e) Press the [ESC] key to return to the main menu screen.

- 556 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONITOR

(2) Procedure for formatting the disk

(a) Move the cursor to “format” in the main menu screen and press the [Return] key.
The format window shown in figure l-9 is displayed.

(b) To specify the disk to be formatted, move the cursor to column ‘drive 0’ of row
‘channel 0’ of ‘board 0’ and enter ‘f (format).
(In the default status, the cursor is located at the position shown in figure 1-9;
therefore, it is not necessary to move the cursor.)

Format Window

Select drive : 000

board 0 configuration board 1 configuration

channel drive 0 drive 1 channel drive 0 drive 1

40 + $$
:.:.,;.:::: U 0 U U

i U U 1 U U

2 U U 2 U U

3 U U 3 U U

Cursor -*
rrgure l-9

- 557 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONITOR

(c) The windows as shown in figures l-10 and l-l 1 are opened and the system asks
the operator to set the parameters. In both settings, move the cursor to ‘item ‘0’
and press the [Return] key. (In the default status, the cursor is located at the
position shown in figures 1- 10 and l-l 1; therefore, it is not necessary to move
the cursor.)

Complete Data I
------------------------------
~~~~~~~~~~~~~
:.:.:.:..
........:.:.:.:.I.
......... : .:...
...:_
....................:...:.
1 - clear Glist

Figure l-10

Disable Certification

~~~~~~~~ :....... .,.

... t...‘.:.:.:.:.>:.:.’ ,._.,...,.,.
......I..._.::i.
. :.............._.....................
._.......i..... . ... . . ::..
1 - disable check

Figure l-l 1

(d) Here, the system displays the message “DO you wish to format all the drives
[CMPDTA:O. DTRT:O] (y/n) ?” to ask whether or not formatting should be
performed. Enter ‘y’ to perform formatting. Formatting starts as soon as ‘y’ is
entered.

(e) When formatting is started, the LED on the hard disk lights.

(f) When formatting is completed, the LED on the hard disk goes out.

(g) Press the [ESC] key to return to the main menu screen.

(h) Time required for formatting

Disk formatting takes about fifteen minutes.

- 558 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONITOR

1.4 Bad track processing
Bad track registration/deletion procedures

(a) Move the cursor to ‘ebad’ (possible by the entering [J], [J], [J], and [L]) in the main
menu screen and press the [Return] key.

(b) The bad track window opens and the system asks the operator to specify the drive.
Enter “000” and press the [Return] key. The addresses of the bad tracks currently
registered are displayed. (Figure 1-12. Note that no addresses are displayed at the
time of initial registration.)

# bad tracks : 5 EBAD Display Window Drive # 000

--------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------
I
0000: 00000063 00000123 00000234 00000334
0004: 00000534

Figure 1-12

(c) If there are too many bad tracks to be displayed on one screen, use the cursor keys to
display the remaining bad tracks. To return to the main menu after performing only
bad track display, press the [ESC] key. The system displays the following message:
“Do you want to write the bad track table to the system (y/n) ?‘I. Here, enter ‘n’ to
return to the main menu.

(d) ‘When bad track registration is to be performed, press the [+] key here. Then, enter
the address to be registered and press the [Return] key.

When several bad tracks are registered, repeat step (d) as many times as required.

(e) When registration or deletion of a bad track is performed, the bad track table is
displayed again as shown in figure 1-12. When registration is performed, the
processed address-is added to the table: When deletionis performed; the processed
address is deleted from the table.

(f) After registration or deletion is completed, when the [ESC] key is pressed, the
message “Do you want to write the bad track table to the system (y/n) ?I’ is ‘displayed
to ask whether or not the bad track table for which registration or deletion was
performed is to be re-written in the disk. When ‘y’ is entered here, the processed bad
track table is re-rewritten in the disk. After completion of the processing, the system
returns to the main menu screen.

- 559 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONITOR

1.5 Troubleshooting
The VME interface section can be checked at the “147-Bug>” (or 167-Bug>) prompt
before start-up of NICS.

Perform as follows.

147-Bug (or 167-Bug)>md 87000000;l

87000000 020 12904 FFFFFFFF .... ......). .. .,
87000010 tiF9BFBFF 02001000 00480219 FFFFFFFF ..{...H......
immediately after the power is turned ON.

0a In the above operation, the first four bytes from 87000000 must be 00000000 as
shown in the above figure. If any other value is displayed, the VME interface section
is not operating normally.

09 In the above operation, when the input addresses are 87000040, 87000080,
870000~0, and 87000100, the first four bytes from each address must be 00000000.
If any other value is displayed, the VME interface section is not operating normally.

0C In the above operation, if a bus error occurs, the VME interface section is not
operating normally.

- 560 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PSI MONITOR

Note: Check the above on the actual system. I

147-Bug>Autoboot in progress.. . To abort hit <BREAK> (Press the [Fl] key.)

Autoboot aborted! ! !
147-Bug>md 87OOOOOO;l
87000000 00000000 FFFFFFFF FE400FOO FFFFFFFF ........-e ......
870000 10 OOFEFFFF FF402300 FF005000 FFFFFFFF .-...@#...P ... ..
147-Bug>md 8700004O;l
87000040 00000000 FF009100 FF000800 OOFFFFDF . . . . . . . . . . . . ._

87000050 OOFFFFFF FF240000 FF08D400 OOFFCCFF .. ...$a...T...L.

147-Bug>md 8700008O;l
87000080 00000000 FF000301 FFOOOGOO OOFFFFFF ................

87000090 OOFEF7FF FF004610 FF000400 OOFF77FF .-w...F ...... .w.

147-Bug>md 87OOOOcO:1
87ooooco 00000000 FF004800 FFOOOOOO OOFDBBFF ......H ........ 1;.
870000D0 OOFFFFFF FF005428 FFOOOFOO OlFFF7FF .. ..T( .... ..w.
147-Bug>md 87000 1OO;l
87000100 00000000 FF000900 FF000600 OOFFFFFF
87000110 80FFFFFF FFOOOCOO FFOOOlOO OOFFFFFF

- 561 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST

FILE SYSTEM DAMAGE
File system damage is a problem which occurs when the information in the system disk
does not match the information in the data disk.

The possible causes are as follows:

(1) System disk failure .

The disk is defective.

A file is damaged (damaged chain file, damaged directory information).

(2) Data disk failure

The disk is defective.

A file is damaged.

(3) BBM (on the SMEX) is damaged.

Countermeasures are as follows:

(1) Execution of BBMinit

If the management information of the disk on BBM is damaged for some reason,
perform initialization using BBMinit for recovery. For this method, data is not
deleted.

(2) File initialization

If the chain file connecting the system disk information and the data disk information
is damaged, start up File System Utility in the Generation System menu and perform
‘check’, ‘init’, and ‘Recovery’ in order to perform file recovery. For this method, data
is not deleted.

(3) When the file system damage is not recovered even if (1) and (2) are performed,
initialize the system. For this method, all data is deleted.

(4) Disk replacement

When the disk is defective, recovery cannot be made without replacing the disk. In
this case, all data is deleted.

- 562 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PROCEDURES FOR OUTPUTTING

THE CORE FILE TO A FLOPPY DISK
The following are the procedures for outputting the file which is important for analysis
when the system hangs up.

Connect the terminal to the console and perform the following operations from the
terminal with the system started up completely.

Procedures for output to a floppy disk

# 1 s-l /core t Check whether the core file exists.

# mount /usr
# fdformat /dev/rfdO t Floppy disk formatting
# tar -cvf /dev/rfdO /core

*: The core file is generated when abnormal termination occurs. The program killed by
the OS at that time can be identified when the system is started up. The program with
“9” at the end of the number (as shown below) is the killed program.

pid= llO(ws=O jid= lb) is Terminate (00000009)

*: The Xstamp file also becomes important when the system hangs up as well as the core
file does. This file logs the contents of scanning. To display the contents, perform the
following operations using the terminal with the system started up.

# /act/bin/backup/Xstamp
option>d ---- -------> Display

option>q ----------+ Termination

To output the contents to a floppy disk, display them by entering ‘d’ and output them
using the @r-f function of the term program (this is the easiest way).

Note: If you want to perform MS-DOS formatting at the console. enter as follows:

#msmount
#msformat

- 563 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SU!%BECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEM

START-UP
Copyright Motorola Inc. 1988, 1989, 1990, 199 1, 1992 All Rights Reserved

MVME 147 Monitor/Debugger Release 2.43 - 6/3 O/92

CPU running at 2.5 MHz

FPC passed test -

MMU passed test

COLD Start

Onboard RAM start = $00000000, stop = $007FFFFF

147-Bug>Autoboot in progress.. . To abort hit <BREAK>

147-Bug>BO

RAM address from VMEbus = $00000000

Booting from: VME147: Controller 0, Device 0 OS loading from the system disk
P
Loading File: /stand/sysV68

Volume:

IPL loaded at: $OOlFOOOO

VME Disk IPL Version 35.4
PSI driver 1.00 : board 0 : address = 0x87000000
IP21OMS: not exist. IP210MS PWB check
RTRUDriver V 1.0 RTRU PWB check
RTR # 0 config : Controller & 2 Channels : CCCHMap[4000003] One RTRU PWB exits.
RTR # 1 NOT FOUND : CCCHMap[O] ’ There are no additional RTRU PWBs.
RTR # 2 NOT FOUND : CCCHMap[O] There are no additional RTRU PWBs.
RTR # 3 NOT FOUND : CCCHMap[O] There are no additional RTRU PWBs.
XVinit.. . .found;Xvision O[OxFFFFEOO l] CTvision PWB check: One PWB exists.
could not find:Xvision 1[OxFFFFEQ4 I] . A second PWB does not exist.
Found 1 XV board(s). A second PWB does not exist.

NICS system driver version 1.10 1990.05.25

- 564 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEM

START-UP
***********************************************************

System V/68 Release R3V5 M68030 Version 960215

Real mem = 8388608

Avail mem= 5722112
Buffers = 1024

***

erase = # kill = @ intr = DEL quit =“l

***

fsstat: root file system needs checking

The root file system (/dev/root) is being checked automatically.

/dev/root
File System: root Volume: R3 root file system check

** Phase 1 - Check Blocks and Sizes

** Phase 2 - Check Pathnames
** Phase 3 - Check Connectivity
** Phase 4 - Check Reference Counts
** Phase 5 - Check Free List
FILE SYSTEM STATE SET TO OKAY
2422 files 34 170 blocks 44576 free

*** ROOT FILE SYSTEM WAS MODIFIED ***,

*** ROOT REMOUNTED ***

INIT: SINGLE USER MODE

***
erase = *h kill = % intr = DEL quit = *I
***
increase of swap space : base = 29 16 1 block = 30838
IOCTL error RWK
NICS System Initialize step- 1
shutdown timer is 180 Sec.

- 565 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEM

START-UP
NICS System Initialize step-2
board not connect.

IOCTL error RWK

/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/~check.out CTvision
. .. firmware dowloading
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/~checkj.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/[email protected]
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/[email protected]
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/glb.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/ --r man.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/ --r manj .out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/abs_gra.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/abs_gra-.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoacl/agdc.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/agdcjmp.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoacl/blink.out
NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadlinkjm.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/brows.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadrowsjm.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/cine.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadcinejmp.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadenc_drv.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadenc_drv_.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadexcl.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadexcljmp.out
NICSBOOTICTV/vaload/ext~rct.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadext~rct-.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoacUflkey.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/flkeyjm.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadfhkey.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadf%rkeyjm.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/geomet.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/geometj .out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/glb.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/gscl.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/gseljmp.out
/JYICSBOOT/CTV/valoadimager.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/imagerj, .out

- 566 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES !lURING SYSTEM

START-UP
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadimg~dsp.out *

/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadimg~dsp~.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadinp~lib.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/inp_Iib~.out
NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/mem.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoademjmp.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadisc.out
NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadiscjnp.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/mouse.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadmousejm.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/msinp.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadsinpjm.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadcode 1 .out
NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadcode2.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/out~cmd.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/out-cmd-.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/roi~man.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadroi_man~.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadscroll.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/scrollj .out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/seri.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/serijmp.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadouch.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadouchjm.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/tstqro.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadst~ro-.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/vpm.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/vpmjn~p.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadvpt.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/vpt_gra.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/vaload/vpt_gra-.out
/NICSBOOT/CTV/valoadvptjmp.out /
NICS System Initialize step-3
NICS System Initialize step-4
NICS System Initialize step-5

- 567 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEM

START-UP
Mounted /dev/nics on /nits
Mounted /dev/act on /act
pid:43 /nicpid:44 /nit***
erase = *h kill = “u intr = DEL quit = “1
***

# pid = 43 (ws = 0 jid = 00) is Terminate (00000000)

pid:5 7 /nics/process/mgr/SG_mgr Start-up of the IM control manager
mgrid: 02 nics/process/mgr/SG_mgr Waiting ...
pid: 58 /nics/process/mgr/OLS-loader /nics/config/online/ols .def
/nics/process/mgr/OLSJoader : read error (2)
OLSJoader is terminating (- 1)
OLS-loader (pid = 58) is terminating (0)
pid: 5 9 /nics/process/mgr/OT_mmgr/dev/mdsOO/dev/mds 10
/nics/config/output/gscl-tab Start-up of the request-to-CTvision control program
\ board not connect.
/nics/process/mgr/OT-mgr : error 8002068 1 This error message is always displayed.
pid:60 /nics/process/mgr/AP_mgr/nics/config/ap/OO -Start-up of the AP control manager
pid: 6 1 /nics/process/mgr/INLOG_mgr/dev/null 10 -Start-up of the request-from-CTvision reception program
pid: 62 /nics/process/mgr/IN-mgr l/dev/mdsOO 2ldevfmds 10 -Start-up of the request-fi-om-CTvision reception progra
board not connect.
pid:63 /nics/process/mgr/EV-mgr l/dev/mdsOO -Start-up of the program controlling events such as mouse
pid: 64 /nics/process/mgr/VS-init/nics/config/vs/vs .def-exec-nomem -Start-up of the system status dispIay program
pid:68 /nics/process/mgr/FS_mgr Start-up of the NICS file system
ema arg = 0x98 100000
BBM addon. The battery back-up memory (BBM) is normal.
mgrid: 03 /nics/process/mgr/FS_mgr Waiting.. .
FS-mgr PDXwait call.
3

- 568 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEM

START-UP
auxiliary I/O manager start. version l.O2/06Sep. 1990 Start-up of the PSI system
status = 00000000
PSI status = 00000000
status = 00000000
PSI status = 00000000
/nics/bin/backup/PSnumclr:comp-num=OxO: exec-num=Oxl
Dev 0:status = 00000000
Dev 1 :status = 00000000
Dev 3:status = 00000000
PSstime() status = 0 (0x00000000)
PSI status = 0x00000000 (EPS-NORMAL)
PDImgr:forked PDB-mgr & PDE-mgr
/nics/process/mgr/PDB_nlgr:cmd=OxO: status=0
FS-mgr PDXwait end.
File manager start -

pid: 8 1 /nics/process/mgr/IMGDSP-mgr 1 Start-up of the image display manager

pid: 82 /act/process/mgr/SSsimu 1 Start-up of the SS simulator (usually terminated soon)
mgrid:3c /act/process/mgr/SSsimu Waiting.. .
Not SS simulate mode
pid: 83 /act/process/mgr/rec/mgr 1 Start-up of the reconstruction manager
pid: 84 /act/process/mgr/ss-rev 1 Start-up of the request-from-SS reception program
pid: 87 /act/process/appl/ssinz 1 Transmitting the initial information to SS
pid: 8 8 /act/process/appl/sysinz 1 Initialization of the acquisition system environment (memory, etc.)
pid: 89 /nics/process/mgr/BG_INIT 1
pid:90 lnicslprocesslmgrlmdssave 1
pid:9 1 /act/process/mgr/xbque 0 1 196 Start-up of the reconstruction queue control manager
mgrid: 3 1 /act/process/mgr/ubque Waiting ... -
****RTRU Recent1 Start **** RTRU firmware (including the table, etc.) downloading
mgrid: 3 1 /act/process/mgr/xbque Waiting.. .
IMGDSP-mgr:sinf-size = 8 192
IMGDSP-mgr:ssg-adr = Oxa3f80000
MDS mon time [lo]
/nics/process/mgr/PDB_mgr:cmd=OxO, status=0
pid=90 (ws=O jid=OO) is Terminate (00000000)
pid=89 (ws=O jid=OO) is Terminate (00000000)
Gen_scncns():krcbnd=9

- 569 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEi’M

START-UP
****RTRU RecProc Start ****
pid:96 /nics/process/mgr/DIR_mgr l/nics/const/directory Start-up of the directon? manager
pid:97 /nics/process/mgr/XFR-mgr ----- Start-up of the related-infomlation conversion program
(required when data is transmitted to/received from other devices)
pid:98 /act/process/mgr/ISAC-mgr 1 Start-up of the MOD control manager
mgrid: 12 /act/process/mgr/ISAC_mgr Waiting.. .
mgrid: 12 /act/process/mgr/I.SAC-mgr Waiting.. ,
mgrid: 12 /act/process/mgr/ISAC_mgr Waiting.. .
MOD Not Connected ISAC-mgr Process End
pid: 99 /nics/process/mgr/MOD5 QUEP-mgr 13 116 Start-up of the MOD control manager
MOD SBQUE-mgr No MO device.. . . ..QUIT Terminated because no MOD is connected.
que-main.. . .que-inz ERROR exit ()
SSpretab:imadr = a013aOOO
SSpretab:adctab imadr=aO 13aOOO
SSpretab:ldttab imadr=a013bOOO
SSpretab:lbstab imadr=aO 13fO40
SSpretabxchtab imadr=a013fO80
pid=87 (ws=O jid=OO) is Terminate (00000000)

pid: 100 /nics/process/mgr/OD 12QUEP-mgr 1352 Start-up of the OD control manager

pid: 10 1 /nics/process/mgr/OQ_mgr 92 1 Start-up of the online queue control manager
pid: 102 /nics/process/mgr/OQ_mgr 96 1
pid: 103 /bin/sl~~~ics/process/mgr/ethemet/NICSBOOT/config/nra~v-tbl Start-up of the online program
pid: 104 act/process/mgr/film-bque 13 18 8 Start-up of the program controlling the imager queue
pid: 105 /act/process/appl/imager/sequ 1 Start-up of the program controlling the imager queue
pid: 106 /act/process/mgr/ERR-mgr Start-up of the error display manager
mgrid:22 /act/process/mgr/ERR_mgr Waiting:. .
mgrid:22 /act/process/mgr/ERR-mgr Waiting.. .
mgrid:22 /act/process/mgr/ERR-mgr Waiting.. .
mgrid:22 /act/process/mgr/ERR-mgr Waiting.. .
pid: 110 /act/process/mgr/stat_mgr 1
***** afghoto start *****
mgrid::! 1 /act/process/mgr/stat-mgr Waiting.. .
OD12IMGP SYSTEM COMMON OD12’s 0 Judges that no optical disk is connected.
OD 12IMGP common OD 12 is ZERO
mgrid: 2 1 /act/process/mgr/stat_mgr Waiting.. .
pid: 112 /act/process/mgr/scan_mgr 1 Start-up of the scan control program

- 570 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEM

START-UP
mgrid:24 /act/process/mgr/scan_mgr Waiting.. .
pid: 113 /act/process/mgr/SCcond 1 Start-up of the program transmitting the acquisition conditions to SS
mgrid:37 /act/process/mgr/SCcond Waiting.. .
mgrid:37 /act/process/mgr/SCcond Waiting.. .
ETHERNET flag is OFF Judges that no online option is proTided.
pid=103 (ws=O jid=OO) is Terminate (00000000)
mgrid:37 /act/process/mgr/SCcond Waiting.. .
pid=SS (ws=O jid=OO) is Terminate (00000000)
pid: 114 /act/process/mgr/save-mgr 1 Start-up of the program saving the reconstructed image to the disk
LOGJOB OK( 1)
pid: 115 /act/process/mgr/FSreg 1
pid: 116 /act/process/mgr/warmup 1 Start-up of the warm-up time control program
mgrid:36 /act/process/mgr/warmup Waiting.. .
mgrid:36 /act/process/mgr/warmup Waiting.. .
OD12BQUE~mgr No OD device . . . . .. . QUIT
que-main.. . .que-inz ERROR exit ()
pid: 117 /act/process/mgr/dlg_mgr 13 Start-up of the scan control program (mainly EL interaction)
pid: 118 /act/process/mgr/scex-mgr 1 Start-up of the scan control program
mgrid: 25 /act/process/mgr/scex-mgr Waiting.. .
pid: 119 /act/process/mgr/tosrim 1 Start-up of the TOSRIM-related programs
pid: 120 /act/process/mgr/xeonline 1 !
pid: 12 1 /nics/process/mgr/APPL-mgr 1 0 /nics/config/appl/mnc_menul /nics/config/appl/func-tab1
9
/nics/config/appl/hdkey-tab1 Start-up of the program controlling the pop-up menu: etc.
mgrid: 09 /nics/process/mgr/APPL_mgr
pid=120 (ws=O jid=OO) is Terminate (00000000)
[TOSRIM mgr start]
mgrid: 09 /nics/process/mgr/APPL_mgr Waiting.. .
mgrid: 09 /nics/process/mgr/APPL_mgr Waiting.. .
dIg_mgr:/dev/BBDC open error
TOSRIM process exit sig-no=0
[tosrimS C-EP-EXEC=O]
[TOSRIM terminate.. .]
pid=ll9 (ws=O jid=38) is Terminate (00000000)
mgrid: 09 /nics/process/mgr/APPL-mgr Waiting.. .
**** RTRU RecProc Ready ****
NAVIINIT():pid=[ 1251

- 571-
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEM

START-UP
mgrid: 09 /nics/process/mgr/APPL-mgr Waiting.. .
O@@@@
d’dddd4’4 SCicon - mask{) 06X?J@@
ddLJdd.Jkd
OT-scmctl() wait start
@@@ZJ&@@ SCicon-load0 GX$@G%Z@@
dL2d’dddd
mgrid: 09 /nics/process/mgr/APPLlmgr Waiting. :. +
pid=98 (ws=O jid=12) is Terminate (00000000)
mgrid: 09 /nics/process/mgr/APPL_mgr Waiting.. .
pid=99 (ws=O jid=ld) is Terminate (00000000)
mgrid: 09 /nics/process/mgr/APPL_mgr Waiting.. .
mgrid: 09 /nics/process/mgr/APPL_mgr Waiting.. .
pid: 129 /nics/process/mgr/IP2 1Omgr/nics/IP2 1O/conf-ip Start-up of the IP control manager
IP2lOMS

SV-mgr process na!ne get Completion of start-up of the system

@@@@@@3 SCicon - erase0 @@@@@@
navijnp exit start*****
dev-del: IN-init start w-id= 1 vpjd= 127
dev-del:IN-init NORMAL end
navijnp exit end* * * * *
fXiXZG$~C@
LP.Jdd4.J.J SCicon-load0 @@@@@@ZJ
NICS System Read)

APPLYmgr get hdk code K-OK(Ox07)

- 572 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEM

SHUTDOWN
NICS System Shutdo1v-n step-0
NICS System Shutdowr step-l
pid=12 1 (ws=l jid=O9) is Terminate (0000 1000)
122 RAW SAVE process terminate.
pid=42 (ws=O jid=OO) is ‘Terminate (00000009) .I c
pid: 118 kill(O) pid: 118 not killed
123 RAW PDI process terminate.
.. . . . . scan-ex terminate . .. . . .
pid=ll8 (ws=O jid=25) is Terminate (00000100)
pid: 117 kill(O) pid: 117 not killed
@@@@@@ SCicon - erase0 @@@@@@J
dlg~elb:IN~msgcom~dlg()/msgrcv() error
dig-stat:sig-catch0 start
dlg~elb:IN_msgcom~dlg()/msgrcv() interrupt
dig-stat:terminate end
pid: 117 kill(O) pid: 117 not killed
pid=58 (ws=O jid=Of) is Terminate (00000000)
pid: 117 kill(O) pid: 117 not killed
pid=ll7 (ws=O jid=26) is Terminate (00000000)
pid: 104 kill(O) pid: 104 not killed
pid=104 (ws=O jid=2f) is Terminate (00000000)
pid=lO 1 (ws=O jid=17) is Terminate (00000000)
pid: 102 kill(O) pid: 102 not killed
pid=102 (ws=O jid=l8) is Terminate (00000000)
pid:8 1 kill(O) pid: 8 1 not killed
pid=8 1 (ws=O jid=Oa) is Terminate (00000010)
NICS System Shutdowr step-2
NICS System Shutdow step-3
pid: 112 kill(O) pid: 112 kill SIGUSRl
pid=ll2 (ws=O jid=24) is Terminate (00000 100)
pid:91 kill(O) pid:91 kill SIGUSRl
pid=91 (ws=O jid=3 1) is Terminate (00000000)
pid: 13 1 kill(O) pid: 13 1 kill SIGUSRl
pid:96 kill(O) pid:96 kill SIGUSRl
pid: 116 kill(O) pid: 116 kill SIGUSRl
pid: 110 kill(O) pid: 110 kill SIGUSRl
pid= 110 (ws=O jid=2 1) is Terminate (00000 100)

- 573 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEM

SHUTDOWN
pid: 113 kill(O) pid: 113 kill SIGUSRl
pid=96 (ws= 1 jid=O4) is Terminate (00000 100)
pid=l13 (ws=O jid=37) is Terminate (00000100)
pid:83 kill(O) pid:83 kill SIGUSRl
pid=I 16 (ws=O jid=36) is Terminate (00000100)~~ 5%
pid: 115 kill(O) pid: 115 kill SIGUSRl
pid=l15 (ws=O jid=2a) isTerminate (00000100)
pid: 114 kill(O) pid: 114 kill SIGUSRl
pid=ll4 (ws=O jid=27) is Terminate (00000 100)
pid: 105 kill(O) pid: 105 kill SIGUSRl
pid=105 (ws=O jid=30) is Terminate (00000100)
pid:84 kill(O) pid:84 kill SIGUSRI
pid=84 (ws=O jid=20) is Terminate (00000 100)
**** RTRU RecProc_ End ****
**** RTRU RecCntl End ****
pid=83 (ws=O jid=2b) is Terminate (00001000)
pid: 106 kill(O) pid: 106 kill SIGUSRl
pid=106 (ws=O jid=22) is Terminate (00000100)
pid:97 kill(O) pid:97 kill SIGUSRl
pid=97 (ws=O jid=13) is Terminate (000000 IO)
pid:68 kill(O) pid:68 kill SIGUSRI
/nics/process/mgr/PDB-mgr:Normal shutdown.
/nics/process/mgr/PDE-mgr:Norrnal shutdown.
FSmgr shutdown process start.
pid=68 (ws=O jid=03) is Terminate (00000000)
pid:64 kill(O) pid:64 kill SIGUSRl
65 is terminated 00000000
67 is terminated 0000 1000
66 is terminated 000000 10
pid=64 (ws=O jid=la) is Terminate (00000000)
pid:63 kill(O) pid:63 kill SIGUSRl
pid=63 (ws=l jid=OS) is Terminate (00001000)
pid:62 kill(O) pid:62 kill SIGUSRl
pid=62 (ws=O jid=07) is Terminate (00001000)
pid:6 1 kill(O) pid:6 1 kill SIGUSRl
pid=6 1 (ws=O jid=06) is Terminate (0000 1000)
pid:59 kill(O) pid:59 kill SIGUSRl
pid=59 (ws=O jid=O5) is Terminate (00000100)

- 574 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: MESSAGES DURING SYSTEM

SHUTDOWN
pid:46 kill(O) pid:46 kill SIGUSRl
pid=46 (ws=O jid=02) is Terminate (00000200)
pid:44 kill(O) pid:44 kill SIGUSRl
pid=44 (ws=O jid=Ol) is Terminate (00000200)
NICS System Shutdown step-4.
pid: 13 1 kill(O) pid: 13 1 KILL SIGKILL
pid= 13 1 (ws=O jid= 1b) is Terminate (00000009)
NICS System Shutdow step-5
Unmounted/dev/act
Unmounted/dev/nics

NICS SYSTEM Shutdown Please Power Off

- 575 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJECT: MEMORY MAP

Address viewed from SM

0 32 Mbytes
0x0200,0000
224 Mbytes
ox 1ooo,oooo
4 Mbytes
0x1040,0000

Reserved

764 Mbytes
ox4ooo;oooo

Image Memory

MAX 896 Mbytes

0X7200,0000 BC VME memory and BBM
MAX 128 Mbytes
IP210 #I
32 Mbytes
CTvision #l-4
32 Mbytes
0X8400,0000 1 Mbyte
OX84 10,OOOO 1 Mbyte
OX84~000 -

LX-IF #l (Communication board) 1 Mbyte -2-

0X8430,0000 LX-IF #2 (Communication board) 1 Mbyte

0X8440,0000 IDRll #I (DRll) 16 Mbytes
0X8540,0000 IDRll#2 (DRll) 16 Mbytes
0X8640,0000
Empty

0x8800,0000 IP210-MS #1 64 Mbytes

OX8CO0,OOOO IP2 1O-MS Reserved #2 64 Mbytes
ox9ooo,oooc IP210 #2 32 Mbytes
ox92oo,oooc BBDC 16 Mbytes
ox93oo,oooc
Empty
-

-576-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: MEMORY MAP

0X9800,0000 BBM, CM (167+R3V7) 128 Mbytes
OXA000,0000 [M (167+R3V7) 5 12 Mbytes
oxcooo,oooo

OXEEOO,OOOO RTRU-S #l-6, RTRU-M

32 Mbytes
oxFooo,oooo Reserved
16 Mbytes
OXF 1oo,oooo ss
2 Mbytes
_.~-
oXF12o,oooo PRE
4 Mbytes
om 160,0000 / FI
2 Mbytes
OXFl80,OOOO LMHC 2 Mbytes
OXF+lAO,OOOO

OXF800,OOOO Reserved 2 Mbytes

OXF820,OOOO MIX #l 2 Mbytes
OXF840,OOOO MDS #2 2 Mbytes
0XF86c@000 MDS #3 2 Mbytes
0XF880,0000 MDS #4 2 Mbytes ,
OXJ!8A0,0000 AP#l 2 Mbytes
OXF8C0,OOOO AP #2 2 Mbytes
OXF8E0,0000 PDI 2 Mbytes
oXF9oo,oooo ACR-NEMA #l-4 8 Mbytes
OXF980,OOOO FCR-I/F #l-2 10 Mbytes
oxFA2o,oooo
OXFA80,0000
OXFBOO,OOOO
OXFB80,0000
OXFF80,OOOO
OXFFFF,OPOO Motorola reserve (MVME32 1 or others)

- 577 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: MEMORY MAP :

OXFFFF, 1000 MVMEOSO

OXFFFF,3000 MVME33 1
MVME335

OXFFFF,SAOO FDDI 5 12 bytes

OXFFFF,6000 MVME332

OXFFFFJ-000 MVME328 #0
MVME328 #I
MVME328 #2
MVME328 #3
MVME328 #4
MVME328 #5
OXFFFF,AOOO MVME327 or others

OXFFFF,BOOO MVME320 or others

OXFFFF,B800 MIME328 #O
OXFFFF,COOO NICS Reserve 1

NICS Reserve 2
--
---

- 578 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM PROTECT

I Before using the system I

(Software license agreement)

For some software (licensed software) used in the system, all rights, including the copyright, are
held by Toshiba. For the other software, Toshiba is granted permission to use all rights, including
the copyright, by a third party. The software used in the system is licensed to the customer,
granting the customer the right to use the software. For this reason, customers who use the
software in the system must observe the following restrictions.

1. Definition
The term “licensed software” (hereinafter referred to as “this software”) refers to all
computer software used in the system and all related documents.

2. License Agreement
(1) The intellectual property rights for this software are not transferred to the customer.

(2) This software shall be used only in the system that the customer has purchased.

(3) The customer shall not copy this software.

(4) The customer shall not modify all or part of this software.

(5) The customer shall not transfer or rent this software to a third party, nor permit a
third
* party to use this software. ---
(6) This software may be subject to the export administration laws and regulations of
Japan, the U.S., and other country and export or re-export of this software either fully
or in part is restricted unless properly authorized by the government of Japan, the
U.S., and the other country.

(7) The customer shall’not recompile or reassemble this software.

Toshiba Medical Corporation

3-26-5 Hongo, Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo

- 579 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: SYSTEM PROTECT

I How to unprotect the system software 1

The software of this system is protected and cannot be used without releasing the protection. To
use the system normally, unprotect the system software following the procedures described
below.

Step 1 : Before turning ON the power of the system, insert the “system software protection
release disk” provided with the system in the floppy disk drive.

Step 2 : Turn ON the power of the system. (Turn ON the power of the console.)

Step 3 : After confirming that the system is started up normally, remove the floppy disk.
This completes releasing the protection of the system software.

When the protection status is released once, the protection release status continues even after the
power is turned OFF.
Therefore, the above steps are not required at the time of next start-up of the system.

Note: Release of the protect status is required in the same manner as the above when the
system software is upgraded in the future.
Keep the “protection release disk” with great care because it is also used in the future.
If the “protection release disk” is lost or damaged for some reason, contact Toshiba
service personnel.

--
---

- 580 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SlJBJtiT: X-RAY TUBE WARM-UP --

‘hlaga fila capacity Gantrykouch

K-ray iub capadty

CE Function

Warm up the X-ray tube.

Urgent Recon
It takes approximately 5 minutes
to complete warming up.

Vari Area
To halt warming up in an emergency, press
[ABORT].

Note: The warm-up is necessary to protect

the life of the X-ray tube.
If the warm-up is not performed, the
tube life may be reduced.

For this system, OLP is controlled by the X-ray high-voltage generator and the prompt for warm-
up is automatically displayed on the flat display if X-rays have not been generated for more than
three hours.

-i- --

-581 -
 No. SD201 -322ED

SUBJECT: GANTRY/PATIENT COUCH 2

CONTROL
For systems in the X series, the gantry and the patient couch can be moved from the console by
remote control.

[Operation]

When the [GANTRY/COUCH] key on the console is pressed, the window shown below is
displayed on the EL panel.

.-+ 0.0 + 0.0 + 0.0 O

mm mm

r
Couch slid Cur pos + 0.0 mm
... . .. ..... .. 1.. ..... ............................................
~~~~~~~
,, o c,r l, ??%&.y E 1;

r? --- -
[I~]I

- 582 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GANTRY/PATIENT COUCH .‘

CONTROL
(1) Entry for longitudinal movement of the couch top

(a) Entry of the target position

Click ‘Tar pas’, confirm the current position, and then enter the target position.
The movement distance (‘Pos chg’) is automatically calculated and displayed.

(b) Entry of the position change

Click ‘Pas chg’ and enter the movement distance (with the - (minus) sign if the couch
top is to be moved in the minus direction).
.--
Input range of the position change: Within k200 mm (A value outside this range is not
accepted.)

If the position change calculated from the input target position exceeds 200 mm, an
interactive window is displayed requesting confirmation.

(c) Resetting couch top position value (zero (0) clear)

Clicking [[0 clr]] resets the current couch top position value to 0.

(2) Entry for gantry tilt

Entry is the same as for longitudinal movement of the couch top.

Input range: Within k3.5”

If the position change calculated from the input target position exceeds 3.5”, an interactive
window&$&splayed requesting confirmation. ------

(3) Entry for vertical movement of the patient couch

For vertical movement of the patient couch, the system does not accept entry of a target
position.

Enter only the sign of the movement distance.

(4) Default display

Once a value is entered, the system stores it. When the [GANTRY/COUCH] key is pressed
a second time, the previously entered value is displayed as a default value. Press the d
L-l
key to use this value. To change it, delete the default value using the a
new value.
0 key and enter a

- 583 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: GANTRY/PATIENT COUCH :

CONTROL
(5) Moving the patient couch or the gantry

Hold down the [MOVE] key to move the patient couch or the gantry.

Release the [MOVE] key to stop the patient couch or the gantry.
Press the [MOVE] key again to restart movement.

(6) Ending operation

Press the [QUIT] key or click the [[QUIT]] key using the mouse to end the current
processing.

---

- 584 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: HOW TO USE THE [SCAN PLAN]:

KEY
Use the [Scan Plan] key to make and perform an additional scan plan using the scanogram for the
same ‘STUDY# (study number)’ (same patient). At this time, any ‘scanogram’ element contained
in the exam Plan used is ignored.

<Procedure>

(1) A series of scans is terminated (completion of the exam Plan).

(2) Press the [Scan Plan] key.

(3) When the message “Select an exam Plan” is displayed, select the exam Plan containing the
scan conditions to be added.

(4) The Scan Plan screen appears. Here, make a scan plan.

(5) (The subsequent procedures are the same as for normal scanning.)

Note: When scanning is performed using the [Scan Plan] key, the ‘SER# (serial number)’ is
updated (+l) because the system judges that another exam Plan is used for the scanning.

---

- 585 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CONTRAST MEDIUM SETTING --

Contrast medium setting

1 Starting up the [CE Function] program 1 Contrast medium setting functions I

1. Entering contrast medium

Entering contrast medium parameters information
Contrast medium name,
‘)I , density, quantity
Setting the patient couch position
I 2. Determining the scanning

Scanning

[Start-up]

(1) Touch [CE Function] on the touch panel.

Imagm Al. cllpecity G~trykOUCh

:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:~;.:.:.~..................~
~~1:;:
.x+x.. .‘.....-..f. ::.:.:.y.:: ...
+ 0.0 mm 1 1
X-ray tuba capstity OLP:
J-y---J o?h -----

199311 o/o9 13:33

Plan Test
Test 1 sas

Plan Test
sav

Head Abdominal Dynamic Others

Section Section

- 586 -
 No. SD20L322ED

SUBJECT: CONTRAST MEDIUM SETTING .-

(2) The window for entering contrast medium information is displayed.

First contrast medium : Contrast medium name or CE (alphanumeric characters)

Density . Enter the density in % (numeric characters).

Injection quantity : Enter the injection volume in cc (numeric characters).

Auto mode Switch for determining whether to automatically duplicate the

scan of the previous exam Plan.

-11 1
Density I[ % Quantity I[ cc

2nd Contrast I]

Density -1 % Quantity -J cc

In Auto mode

--- --

- 587 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: CONTRAST MEDIUM SETTING .-

(3) The patient couch positions for the CT images acquired in the previous exam Plan are listed.

Number : Numbers are issued for the scans which have been executed in the
order executed.

Identification : Display of asterisks (*) for the same patient couch position
Display of S&S or S&V
Grouping identifiers 119991

Patient couch position : Shows the patient couch position for the previously acquired
image.

Tilt angle : Shows the tilt angle for the previous scan.

............
:x.:.:.:-:.x.. ................................
............................ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : *.=:::.:.:::.::.-q.:.: . ..:::y ... y.y$~~~~~~. .. ..~.~...~q...:x~...~~ .........................................................
~
:.:.:.:: ..................................
.................. .................................................
..................................................................
........... . . . . .. ..: .:. .... :...:.~.::::::..~:.~ ...........................
......... . . ... i.4 : : ::.55’
......................................... . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::i.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.: .: ... .............. . . ... :: ..:. ............................................ .... : : : : : . : ..

Sort

py=zq

pzzq

[I]

Status of sort
None

---

l Select the Jatient couch position using the mouse.

l Grouped items are performed continuously by pressing the [START] button once. To use
the grouping function, click [[Group]] and then set the target range.
l Click [[All]] to specify all patient positions.
0 [[Ascending]] or [[Descending]] permits the patient couch position to be sorted in
ascending or descending order, respectively. [[None]] permits scanning from the
previously executed sequence.
l When [[OK]] is clicked, if the parameter settings are set so that scanning is performed at
the same couch position, the confirmation message “The same patient couch position is
set. OK to continue?” is displayed.

- 588 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: CONTRAST MEDIUM SETTING .-

(4) Start button setting

‘Only once’ : Permits batch grouping of all the specified scan images.
‘Each time’ : Permits grouping per scan images.

(5) Couch position check

C[QUITlI: Restores the interactive screen for couch position setting.

[[WI : Changes the display to the interactive screen for couch movement.

The same position will be

scanned more than once.

(6) Interactive F&

screen for couch movement
2% -
[[QUIT]]7. Couch movement is not performed (the interactive screen for couch po&n
setting is restored).
Ew=PlI : Displays or quits the help screen.
EWII : Moves the patient couch to the first scan position.
(If the movement distance is too long, the movement stops and the interactive
screen will be restored.)

The couch top is moved to

the slice position to be
scanned first.

- 589 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJET: POP-UP MENU LIST _-

((Pop-up menu)) (For V2.0)

- (Patient) Appointment

- Image Display Image Display

Multiframe Image Processing

Cine Display

INSET Display
-E Auto-view Control

L- Image Processing - - Image Displa!

- ROI Setting

- Image Convert Enlargement

Rotation

Reversal

Filtering

- Image Analysis Statistical Calculation

- Histogram

- Profile
- Distance Between 2 Points

- CT Number

- Scale
-- Grid

- Other Function v Add/Subtract

- Comment Input

- Non-linear Window

- 590 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: POP-UP MENU LIST _-

((Pop-up menu)) (For V2.0)

- Image File - Directory Display

- Directory Operation Sort

Search

Protect

Cancel Protection

Delete

- Information Change

[FD image]
- 3.5” FD Floppy Formatting

- FD Directory Display

- Hard Disk to Flopper

- Floppy to Hard Disk

- Image Display from Floppy

- Storing to Floppy

[OD image]
- 12” OD OD Directory Display

- Mount
- Auto Archive

- Archive

-- Retrieve

Dismount

Image Display from Optical Disk

Forced Mount _-- -

t Recovery

- ScanoKT
- Clinical Applications
Volume Calculation

- 591-
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: POP-UP MENU LIST .-

((Pop-up menu)) (For V2.0)

Auto Filming I Photography

Pause
Restart
Delete Item
Image Displa!

- Raw Data Process Reconstruction Retry

Zooming Reconstruction

Protect/Cancel
1 Reconstruction Cancel

- Preset (exam Plan)

- System Maintenance Warming-up

- Reconstruction Restart
- Reconstruction Queue Initialization

- Cal Data Acquisition

- Patient Registration K&y Setting

- Message Registration

- Menu Item Editing

- System Backup
(for service maintenance)

- Exam Summary
- Image TransQr
* --- --
- System Status -Display
- Shutdown

- 592 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJET: EXAM PLAN --

Element editor

. . ......... ...... ................... . .... ... .............. ................. ...... ........... . .... ................. . ............. . ..............................................................
............... .: ..
,~~~~~~.~~~~:’
.:.:.:.:.:.w.- ........................................ . . ..................
. ............ .: ... . ..... :...:...:.:...: .:. ......... .: . ..>. ................. . . . . ....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ........ . .. .
. .................
. . . . . . . . :.:.:.:.:.:.~:
. . . . . . ..............................
. . . . . . .................. .... ...... .... .. .......
. . ....
. . . .. ......
. . . . .. ............................... . . . . . . . . . .........................................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... . . ..... . .... ......... ...... . ..... ... .... . . .... ...... ...

1 2 1Scan Plan f

I 11 Edit Comments 11
cl0 Overwrib3
I

0n Insert I -1
I

m--B L -------m-m
-1 1~1 pq

-0-

- 593 -
 No. SD201-322ED

, .-
SUBJECT: EXAM PLAN
Parameter editor

1
\l
BOX times

1
I-I-M&d kv
mA Scan Sljc Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ VFH/
Fld Thck Mssg Mssg Move ture F.F VFF
+180.0 120 150 L 10 00 00 +OOOO.C SU HF VFF
I I I
2

cln Overwrite

0cl Insert

1
\
i3OX FC
Full/ Image 2nd
Part Filter Recon
1 FClO FL NO NO 0100 +006q 0100 +008C 0100 -14100NON NO NO.

cln Overwrite

clcl Insert

- 594 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: TOUCH PANEL SCREEN

STRUCTURE

O-01 O-02 O-03 O-04

O-05 O-06 O-07 O-08

O-09 O-10 O-11 o-12

w
I I

4-01 4-02 4-o: 3 4-04

l-05 l-06 l-07 l-08 4-05 4-06 4-07 4-08

I l-09 1 l-10 1 l-11 1

j:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
1-12
.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.x.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.
.......................................................................................................
. ..
1-15 ~~~~
1-13 1-14 .............::...::
...:........::...:
.:
:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::R:::::::::::::

I 2-01 II 2-02 II 2-03 1I 2-04 --14 3-01 3-02 3-03 3-04

I
2-05 2-06 2-07 2-08

I 2-09 1 2-10 1 2-11 1

.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:,:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.
2-12
i... . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. ...i........................
.... .... .... ... .... .... ....
2- 1 5 ~~~~~~
x..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..i..................

2-13 z&14
,+- c+: ..... :. .. ..... :..2:
.‘.:.:.:.:.:.~.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.~
......‘i.‘.....................‘.......’.......
L-- _

- 595 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: HOW TO EXPLAIN X-SERIES .

SYSTEM OPERATIONS
General steps of explaining X-series system operations are as follows:

(1) Basic operations

Turning ON the power supply

X-ray tube warm-up procedure
Mouse operation
Explanation of terms (flat display, pop-up menu, etc.)
Gantry/couch operating panel operation
[GANTRY/COUCH] key operation
Procedure for registering a new patient
Example of general head scanning and explanation
Example of general abdomen scanning and explanation
CT number calculation
Explanation of ‘image file’ (sorting, deletion, image transfer, etc.)
Explanation of filming (automatic filming)
Explanation of ‘reconstruction’ (function conversion, zooming, etc.)
Explanation of ‘contrast medium setting’
Introducing other functions
Turning OFF the power supply
sg$
*
(2) Generating an exam Plan

(3) Procedure for acquiring water calibration data

(4) Countermeasures against problems with the Xpeed

(5) Special instructions to prevent problems

and actual operation by the operator in front of the instructor.

(6) Other

l UNIX protect

- 596 -
 No SDZOl-322ED

SUBJECT: GENERAL COUNTERMEASURES

AGAINST PROBLEMS WITH THE
X-SERIES SYSTEM
(ADDITIONAL INFORMATION)
(1) Points when you handle problems over the telephone

Check the time that the abnormality occurred (this becomes important when the error log
is checked)
Contents of operation when the abnormality occurred
Contents of the exam Plan when the abnormality occurred
Error message check
Check of communication on the flat display (gantry, patient couch, OLP, number of files)
Check of occurrence of an error in the X-ray system
Check of the tube position in the gantry
(The position can be checked easily by lighting the inside lamp.)
Changes made when the power is turned ON again
(At this time, the error may not be released because it takes time before the power of the
X-ray system is turned OFF due to OLP control. In this case, release the error using the
“RESET” switch.)
(If the X-ray tube position in the gantry is not correct, it may take one or two minutes for
the “Start” lamp to light because the X-ray tube is automatically returned to the start point
when the system is restarted and the exam Plan is selected; however, this is not
abnormal .)

(2) Checking*e
- . error log --- -
l While paying attention to the time when, the abnormality occurred, investigate whether an
error occurred and the contents of the error.
Save data related to the error to a floppy disk as required.

(3) Checking the SM messages

. during start-up of the system (when the system is not started up)
0’ Check which process halts the system, referring to the messages for normal operation and
identify the cause.

(4) Check by the test program

- 597 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PRACTICING WITH EXAM PLANS

<<Practice how the system operates in the following cases:>>

(1) Executing [0 clr]

l Pressing [ABORT] after three slices are acquired by the exam Plan indicated by example
1 below

l Changing the slice thickness to 2 mm and the movement distance to +2 mm

l Continuing scanning using [Repeat Scan/Scano]

l What are the slice thickness of the seventh slice and the couch-top position at that time?

exam Plan contents description sheet Example 1 s/c;1991

i i ; ; i ; ; ; i ; i i
i: Ii *i . : . : : : . . . . : . Generated by:

Scan0 parameters

2:” kV mA Scan Slit Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ VFH/

~=F Filter
Fld Thck hlssg hBsg Move ture F.F

S 85 V/S & S parameters (element 1)

Sc3c; kV mA :;T Slit Pre Post Couch Pos- H.Fl \-FHl Scan
BOX .$; FL EF WV WL.1 2. A/F ze;f
Thck hlssg Mssg hIove ture F.F \‘FF Time
Intersal

1 5 4 133 110 S 5 4 5 +5 XT HF \FF 0 - F la, xf NI NJ No

2 , 5, 4 ,lD,llO, S, 10, 4, 5 ,+lO,QI,W,/Ij/ 0 ,-,F,lCD,~,NJ,ND,IW,

S & V/S & S parameters (element 2)

:v;; kV d g;~ Slit Pre Post c0uc11 Pos- H.F/ \-FHI Fuz
BOX g; FL g-pF wwl n-L,1 2. AF zc;;;
Thck hIssg hlssg hIove ture F.F \.-FF _
Interval

IIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIlII
Point: How does the system operate when the conditions are changed halfway?

- 598 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PRACTICING WITH EXAM PLANS

(2) It is assumed that before performing scanning using the eXam Plan of example 2 below, you
noticed that the value for the “Couch Move” parameter in the “S & V” element was the
opposite sign (you want to perform scanning at +lO mm).

Use the following three methods and confirm that the system operates normally in each
method. I

<I> After selecting the exam Plan, edit the exam Plan by the number of studies without
quitting the exam Plan and then perform scanning.

<2> Change the couch movement direction to the direction opposite to the current one in
Scan Planning mode and perform scanning.

<3> Paying attention to only the first slice position, move the couch top to the first slice
position, press [ABORT], reverse the movement direction on the “Abort” screen, and
then perform scanning.

exam Plan contents description sheet Example 2 %‘Gl1991

: ; : i ; i i i i i ; ;
. : . i: .i :i . . . * , : . . . Generated by:

Scan0 parameters

p’zre kiT mA $3 Slit Pre Post C0uc11 Pos- H.Fl \,-FHf

BOX 2; ~=F Filter
Thck hlssg hhsg hIove ture F.F

1 1 0” 120 110 hf 2 1 5 300 SU HF VSR 2

S & V/S & S parameters (element 1)

‘OS LOUCIl YOS- H.P/

vrH’ Time FL z
,Issg hIove ture
F’F “l;F Interval

5 -10 XT HF \FF 0 - F 150 x) KD N.X -

S & V/S & S parameters (element 2)

.
i33;; kV mA Scan Slit Pre Post COUCll Pos- H.F/ VFH/ ;:;; urgent -
BOX ;l?; FL kF WI.1 WL1 FE, IVF
Fld Tllck hfssg hIssg hIove ture F.F I*-FF Recon
Internal

Point: Method for changing the movement direction in “S & V” mode

- 599 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJECT: PRACTICING WITH EXAM PLANS

(3) If “S & V” is replaced with element “S & S” of the exam Plan described in example 2

Check whether the system can operate normally using the same three methods as in (2).

Point: Method for changing the movement direction in “S & S” mode

(4) It is assumed that you want to perform scanning for three images during a single breath hold,
and also want to set a pause time of 5 seconds after the post-scan voice message and then
start to output the pre-scan voice message for the next scan.
(It is assumed that “Audio code 3” is used and the recording time is 8 seconds for the pre-
scan voice message, and “Audio code 5” is used and the recording time is 5 seconds for the
post-scan voice message.)

Fill in the blanks of the exam Plan sheet given in example 3 below and try to execute the
exam Plan.

When executing “Additional scan” after this, what will the voice message be? What will the
scan mode be (S & S or S & V)? Check the results.

Further, think how to output both a pre-scan voice message and a post-scan voice message.

exam Plan contents description sheet Example 3 s/611991

: i i i i i i i . : i :
i .: .: : : I i . : i : i :i ii ii Generated by:

Scan0 parameters

Pre Post COUCil Pos- H.F/ \.7W Filter

BOX ;l?;
Thck hl.ssg hQsg Move ture F.F 1.73

Additional Scan 1

S & V/S & S parmeters (element 1)

.

Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ \,-FH/ ;;; L@llt

FL EF WWl WLl Ev A/F
Tllck hlssg hIssg hfove tore F.F 1.75-F Recon
Interval

1 1 ?7
L. IX 110 hl 10 -10 s-1 HF VF -F3X)30N3K,N3

2 1 2.7 13l 110 hl 10 -10 s2 fF 1.F -FJX,30NJNINI

3 1 2.7 12l 110 h1 10 -10 s-1 1% \FF -FSO;J)I4INIh0

k
4 1 2.7 123 110 hI 10

5 -10 s-1 HF \FF

Point: How to set a pause time and an audio code

- 600 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PRACTICING WITH EXAM PLANS

(5) It is assumed that you want to scan the lumbar region using the exam Plan described in
example 4.

Although the number of images specified for elements “S & V 1” and “S & V 2” is 1, you
want to perform image acquisition for two or three images while observing images using
“Additional Scan”.

Check whether the couch top moves to the scan plan position of the first image specified in
element “S & V 2” if the position is far.

exam Plan contents description sheet Example -l 8:611991

i i i i i i i i i ; i i ; i i
: . i : : . : : : : : : : : : Generated by:

Scan0 parameters
EKZ kV mA Scan Slit Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ WHI
BOX ;I;: \FF Filter
Fld Thck hbsg h&g hlove ture F.F

1 1 250” 120 110 s 2 4 5 250 SU HF VSN 2

S & V/S & S parameters (element 1)

Additional Scan

IE

1 1
SC;;

4
kV

Lo
mA

142
Scan
Fld

s
Slit
Thck

5
Pre
hfssg

4
Post
hIssg

5
Couch
hIove

-5
Pos-
ture

SI
H.F/
F.F

HF
VFHI
VFF

WF
scan
Time
Interval

0
FL

-
EF

F
wwl

8Jl
WLl

@II
IT3
Arcv

N-3
A!F

NI
urgent
Rccan

S & V/S & S parameters (element 2)

Scan I ,-X1 I _ I I Scan I Slit I Pre I Post I ~oucb I ~os- I H.F/ I \mi I 2:;~: I c,
BOX ;;; F,F \;‘FF ‘J.u’~
Time Kv “u+ Fld Thck hfssg hlssg hfove ture Interval

1 1 4 I 3014J s 5 4 5 -5 3.. HF W 0 - F 83 830 ND NJ -

Point: Can scanning be performed at the planned position?

401”
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PRACTICING WITH EXAM PLANS

(6) The assumptions are as follows: execute the exam Plan described in example 5 below and
check the patient scan position on the image using “S & V 1” and “Additional Scan 1”.
(Use these elements as scan position check elements.)
After this, perform scanning for three images during a single breath hold using “S & S”.
(This is performed assuming a contrast study.)

It is also assumed that you want to resume scanning from a scan position that is -10 mm away
from the last slice position of “Additional Scan 1” for the first image of element “S & S”.

Add three images at “Additional Scan 1” and actually perform scanning using “S & S” to
check whether the scanned position is correct using “Scano/CT”.

exam Plan contents description sheet Example 5 S/6/1991

; i i . i i
* i . . : . .i i: i: i i i *i ii ii Generated by

Scan0 parameters

t--l-
~~~~~~~~ ,I .e BOx No. Tube kV mA Scan Slit Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ t?J?$ Filter
Slit Pos Fld Thck hlssg hlssg hfove ture F.F
Scanoscopp
, 1 , 1 , 0” , 120,110, hi , 2 , 3 , 5 , 300 , SU , HF , VSR , 2 , ,
Scan Plan I I I I I I

1 S&V1 1 S & V/S & S parameters (element 1)

Additional Scan 1
Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ VFH/ F?== Urgerl~
BOX g; Recon
Thck hfssg hfssg hiove ture
F.F VFF Interval FL

1 1 2.1 133 110 M 10 3 5 -10 Xl BF WF 0 -

S & V/S & S parameters (element 2)

SC%; kV mA Scan Slit Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ VFHI ;re
BOX ;;;
Fld Thck hIssg hJ&g hIove ture F.F \.‘FF
Internal

1 1 2.1 1;x) 110 hl 10 3 0 -10 SI HF WF 0 - F 31) 3I NJ No IXI

2 1 2.1 l;x) 110 hl 10 0 0 -10 zu HF UT 0 - F SD 30 NZ NI NI

3 1 2.7 IJ) 110 hl 10 0 5 -10 iW HF \FF 0 - F 3cD 30 N-3 m x3

S & V/S & S parameters (element 1)

Fc; kV mA g;y Slit Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ \‘FHI Fhy FL
BOX f,?;
Thck hIssg hIssg hfove ture F.F \‘FF
Iutenal

1 1 2.7 IJ) 110 hl 10 3 5 -10 SJ HF w!? 0 -

Point: Can elements “S & V 1” and “Additional Scan 1” be used for checking the scan position?

- 602 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: PRACTICING WITH EXAM PLANS

(7) It is assumed that you want to perform scanning for the same purpose as in (6).

Using the following two methods, execute the exam Plan after editing it and check the
operation,

<I> Perform scan position check in the same manner as in (6).

Then, paying attention to the “couch-top position” of the image, move the couch top to
the first slice position of “Scan & Scan” using the [GANTRY/COUCH] key when the
[START] lamp for “S & S” lights and perform scanning.

<2> Delete element “S & S” and subsequent settings of the exam Plan in example 5 and set
this exam Plan as that for position check. Then, use the [Scan Plan] key to perform
scanning using the exam Plan generated in example 3.
(At this time, “Scan line segment” in “Option” of “Scano/CT” must be set to ON.)

Point: Method for position check before performing S & S

(8) It is assumed that you want to perform scanning in example 1 in order to acquire images one
by one each time the [Start] button is pressed.

Change the exam Plan and perform check.

Point: It is troublesome to make this change during scanning! Let’s make preparations in
advance.

(9) It is assumed that you want to change to three images the parameter “number of images” of
elements “S & V 1” and “S & V 2” in the exam Plan of example 4 and perform vari-area
scanning using the target tracking function.

Is it possible to perform scanning if an enlargement ratio is specified during “Scan Plan”?

Z&
1%. -
In additiz-check whether the procedures for existing models are available. - --
...... ....... ..... (It should be simple.)

Point: None (Just additional information)

- 603 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: EXERCISE: EXAMPLE OF EXAM-

PLAN
(((Comprehension test)))

<exam Plan and operating procedure>

(1) It is assumed that you would like to perform scanoscopy and scan the head in S & V mode
to acquire 6 slices from the OM line with the scan conditions of scan filed S and slice
thickness 5 mm and then the scan conditions of scan field S and slice thickness 10 mm, and
perform additional scanning for several slices as required.

Make an exam Plan for this case so that 440 mAs is set for the slice thickness of 10 mm and
560 mAs for the slice thickness of 5 mm. (Set the first slice in the plan without performing
zero clear using the gantry operating panel.)

(2) It is assumed that you would like to scan the chest to acquire 15 slices with the scan
conditions of scan field M and slice thickness 10 mm after scanoscopy and then perform
reconstruction under the conditions for both mediastinum and lung field.

Make an exam Plan for this case so that it contains additional scanning in 300 mAs.

(3) If it becomes necessary to perform detailed examination by acquiring about 4 slices of the
intermediate region with the scan conditions of scan field M and slice thickness 5 mm after
the scanning in (2) study what kind of operation is appropriate.
(Assuming the Xpeed is used)

(4) It is assumed that you would like to scan 6 slices in total with 3 slices for a single breath hold
in S & S mode.

Make an exam Plan for this case so that a 5-second pause time is placed between the post-
scan voic-Fessage and the pre-scan voice message.
-+ - _-- -

Post-scan
Scan Pause Pre-scan voice message Scan
Ivoice message
/ /
---
3s 5s 7s

- 604 -
 n
-
L--l CD
exam Plan contents description sheet Date: cz
. : I Generated by: UJ
c
m
Post Couch Pos- H.F/ VFHI t-,*
Fld Thck Mssg Mssg Move ture F.F VFF -I
88
S & V/S & S parameters mm
rx
Box
No.
‘&
Scan . Scan Slit Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ VFH/ ScanTime
-j-he kv n-i/l Fld Thck Mssg Mssg Move ture F.F VFF Interval
FULL
l?f~ J-+,&F wl ihki hg Urgent
A/F Recon
Dm
Arcv
z;a
c)
tn
m
88
m
X
D
3
Point of generation Remarks -u
r
m
0
n
m
X
D
s
exam Plan contents description sheet Date:
I ; ; , i . i i .
. * . I . . i . . : : . : i ; Generated by:

Scan0 parameters
Post Couch Pos- H.F/ VF’H/
Filter
Fld Thck Mssg M&g Move ture F.F VF’F

S & V/S & S parameters

No. Scan Scan Slit Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ VFH/ Scan Time FULL I% Urgent
BOX sfic Time kv IIlA Fld Thck Mssg Mssg Move ture F.F VFF Interval m, HALF ml ml Arcv A/F Recon

Point of generation Remarks

exam Plan contents description sheet Date:
. ; i
. * * : : * :*i ’:.i i* : . . . i I Generated by:

Scan0 parameters
No. Tube Post Couch Pos- H.F/ WW
kV mA Filter
BoX slit Pos Fld Thck Mssg Mssg Move tu-e F.F VFF

S & V/S & S parameters

BOX N$; f3Se kv‘ mA Scan Slit Pre Post Couch Pos- H.F/ VEX/ ScanTi FULL Jw? Urgent
me FL J-$,JJ-f w1 ml AE Recon
Fld Thck Mssg Mssp; Move ture F.F VFF Interval AIYCV

Point of generation Remarks

 No. SD20L322ED
SUBJECT: EXERCISE: EXAMPLE OF EXAM
PLAN
PI
. .
p”
-d
3
. . 2
u 2
El 8
.......
.......
.......
-
.......
.......
.......
-
.......
.......
.......
-
.......
.......
m..m* . .
-
.......
.......
--
-0-
.......
- 608 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJECT: XVISION RECONSTRUCTION .-

FUNCTIONS
Xvision V4 system reconstruction fhction table

(- : Standard fix&on)
-
Reconstruction Applicable region
function
FCOl to With BHC processing FCOl
for abdomen
FClO to Abdomen FClO FCll FC12
FC20 to With BHC processing FCOS FCOG
for head
FC30 to 1 Inner ear, bone IFC30I I
FCXO to 1 Head 1 FC20 1 FC21 1 FC22
FC50 to 1 Lung field 1 FC50 1 FC51 I

FC70 to Is vstem maintenance 1 FC70 1 1

FCSO to High definition FCSO FC82
FC90 to High definition FC90
(for evaluation)

Xvision V5 system reconstruction fkction table

(- : Standard fhction)
Reconstruction Applicable region
function
FCOl to With BHC processing FCOl FC02 FC03 FCO-S
for abdomen
FClO to gbdomen FClO FCll FC12 FC13
-
FC20 to -%ith BHC processing FC20 FC21 FC22 FC23 FC24 FC25 - -- -
for head
FC30 to Inner ear, bone FC30
FC-40 to Head FC40 FCU FC42 FC43 FC44 FC45 FUG FC47 FC48
FC50 Lung field FC50 FC51 FC52 FC53

FC70 to System maintenance FC70

FC80 to High definition FCSO FC81 FC82 FC83 FC8-t FC85
FC90 to High definition FC90
(for evaluation)

- 609 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: XVISION RECONSTRUCTION .-

FUNCTIONS
* * * FCOl to FC04 : Reconstruction fknctions with beam hardening correction processing
for abdomen (applicable to regions other than the head -> Cervical
region, shoulder, pelvis, limbs, etc.)

FC20 to FC25 : Reconstruction functions with beam hardening correction processing

for head (FC23 : Recommended low-contrast enhancement function)

FCSO and FC81: High definition mode for auditory ossicle. These functions cannot be
used for helical scan.

FC82 to FC85 : High resolution functions for lung field (particularly effective in CT
scanning under the conditions of slice thickness 2 mm in HR mode) ->
These functions cannot be used for helical scan.

FC90 High definition mode for phantom performance evaluation -> This
function cannot be used for helical scan.

-0-

- 610 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJET: V4 SYSTEM FUNCTION GUIDE .-

Xvision reconstruction function selection guide

1. Functions for Abdomen

FCOl: Function with BHC processing for abdomen, shoulder, pelvis, mediastinum, and
limbs. Use this function for a region at which prominent artifacts from bones
occur.

FClO: Standard function for abdomen, shoulder, pelvis, mediastinum, and limbs.

FCll: This function reduces the noise and the granularity on the image more than FClO.
Use this when a large object is scanned at the scan field of size “MY

FC12: This function reduces the noise and the granularity on the image more than FC 11.
This is appropriate for scanning an abdomen for which the scan field is L. For
zooming reconstruction, however, use FC 10 or FC 11.

FC13: This function reduces the noise and the granularity on the image more than FC12.
This is appropriate for scanning an abdomen for which the scan field is LL. For
zooming reconstruction, however, use any of FC 10 to FC 12.

l The functions described below are new functions introduced from V4.6B.

FC 14: This function makes the granularity on the image lower than that of FCl 1 and
reduces the noise. The image SD is somewhere between those of FCl 1 and
FC12.

FC 15: Like FC 14, the granularity on the image is made lower and the noise is reduced.
This function makes the image smoother than FC14. The image SD is almost the
I;_Jsameas that of FC 12.
-2%
-= -0---
FC02: The BHC processing is applied to FC 14.

FC03 : The BHC processing is applied to FC 15.

2. Functions for Lung Field

FC50: This function makes the image smoother than FC5 1. Use this when noise is
conspicuous.

FC5 1: This function makes the image sharper than FC50. This is a standard function for
lung field, and can also be used for thin slice or for zooming reconstruction.

-611 -
 No. SD20 l-3 22ED

SUBJEkT: V4 SYSTEM FUNCTION GUIDE --

l The functions described below are new functions introduced in V46B. The
reconstruction time is a little longer than that of other normal functions because of the
high-resolution processing.

l In the old version, high-definition functions could be used only for bones because
enhancement was too high. However, functions with low enhancement processing are
also introduced from V4.6B, permitting the functions to be used for the lung field.

FC82: Lung-field function applying the high-resolution processing

FC83: This function reduces undershoot due to greater edge enhancement than FC82.
This is appropriate for single-lung zooming for thin slice, etc.

FC84: This function reduces undershoot more than FC83. The image becomes
smoother than that by FC83.

FC85: This function reduces undershoot more than FC84. The image becomes
smoother than that by FC84.

3. Functions for the Head

l The functions described below are the new functions introduced in V4.6B. These
functions enhance the low contrast and the sharpness due to the granularity. All the
functions apply BHC processing.

l The enhancement of granularity and low contrast is stronger as the function number
becomes larger.

FC04:sThis function provides coarse granularity and low contrast which is almostke
same as that of FC05 and FC06.

FC07: A comparatively smooth image with low noise is obtained.

FC08: Between FC07 and FC09.

FC09: The granularity and the low contrast are enhanced most strongly. The blood
vessel image acquired by contrast medium injection is clearly enhanced.

l The functions described below are the same as before.

[Head functions with BHC processing]

FC05: A smooth image with the fine granularity is obtained.

This is a standard head function.

FC06: A comparatively sharp image is obtained.

- 612 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: V4 SYSTEM FUNCTION GUIDE --

[Head functions without BHC processing]

FC20: Head function to apply the fine granularity.

FC21: This function has coarse granularity. The obtained image is considerably smooth.

FC22: The shading (artifact that the image becomes whitish at the margin of the brain)
at the margin of the bone is corrected more than by FC20. The area around the
bone does not become white even for a patient whose bone is hard, permitting the
image to be observed until around the parietal bone under the almost-constant
window conditions.

FC23: This function provides shading correction as well as FC22, and makes the
granularity for the cerebral parenchyma finer than FC22.

FC24: This function provides shading correction as well as FC22, and makes the
granularity for the cerebral parenchyma finer than FC23.

FC25: Head function for the solid state detector. The obtained image is somewhat
sharp.

FC40: Use this function to scan a child head when FC23 is used to scan the adult head.

FC41: Use this function to scan a child head when FC24 is used to scan the adult head.

4. Functions for internal Ear and Bone

FC30: Standard function for the internal ear and the bone
222
FC8O?%Jsed for regions such as the auditory ossicles, the spine, etc. which requii%%igh
resolution.
The reconstruction time is a little longer than that of other functions because of
the high-resolution processing.

5. Functions for a Xe-Study

FC6O: Xe-Study function. This is also useful when a functional image is generated in
dynamic study.

- 613 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: V4 SYSTEM FUNCTION GUIDE --

6. Functions for System Maintenance
FC70: Basic fbnction for system maintenance and check. This is used when a phantom
is scanned, etc.

FC90: Functions for spatial resolution evaluation. Because of the high-resolution

processing, this function takes a little longer than the other fbnctions to complete
reconstruction.

-
-c-

- 614 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: V5 SYSTEM FUNCTION GUIDE --

V5 .O reconstruction functions selection guide

1. Functions for Abdomen

For abdomen tinctions, there are two types: functions with BHC processing and those
without BHC processing, as described in the table below.

It is recommended that a function with BHC processing be used for scanning regions such
as pelvic cavity, limbs, shoulder (apex of a lung), etc., in which the bone artifact is
conspicuous.

The features and the applicable conditions of each function are as follows:

Without BHC With BHC Feature

FClO FCOl Standard function for abdomen, shoulder, pelvis,
mediastinum, and limbs
FCll FC02 This function reduces the noise and the granularity on the
image more than FClO. Use this when a large object is
scanned at the scan field of “size M”.
FC12 FC03 This function reduces the noise and the granularity on the
image more than FC 11. This is appropriate for scanning an
abdomen for which the scan field is L. For zooming
reconstruction, however, use FC 10 or FC 11.
FC13 FC04 This function reduces the noise and the granularity on the
image more than FC12. This is appropriate for scanning an
abdomen for which the scan field is LL. For zooming
reconstruction, however, use any of FC 10 to FC 12..
FC-2j FC05 This function makes the granularity on the image lower than
- -
that by FCl 1 and reduces the noise. The image SD-icT
somewhere between those of FC 11 and FC 12.
FC15 FC06 Like FC 14, the granularity on the image is made lower and
the noise is reduced. This function makes the image
smoother than FC14. The image SD is almost the same as
that of FC 12.

- 615 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJEiZT: V5 SYSTEM FUNCTION GUIDE --

2. Function for Lung Field
FC50: Standard function for lung field. This can also be used for thin slice or for
zooming reconstruction.

FC51: This function reduces undershoot due to edge enhancement more than FC50.
Use this with an image filter (e.g. “enhance [UEO]“). The image filter can be
included in an exam Plan to specify that filtering be applied when scanning is
performed.

FC52: This function reduces undershoot more than FC5 1. It is also recommended that
this be used with an image filter.

FC53: This function makes the image smoother than FC50, FC51, and FC52. Use this
when noise is conspicuous.

The functions described below are all high-definition functions. These functions are
appropriate for single-lung zooming for thin slice, etc. The image becomes smoother as
the function number (FC82, FC83, FC84, and FC85) increases. The reconstruction time is
a little longer than that of other functions because of the high-resolution processing.

FC82: Lung-field function applying the high-resolution processing

FC83: This function reduces undershoot due to edge enhancement more than FC82.
This is appropriate for single-lung zooming for thin slice, etc.

FC84: This function reduces undershoot more than FC83.

FC85: This function reduces undershoot more than FC84.

2:s
--3=2 _----

3. Functions for the Head

For functions for the head, the functions in the 20’s (FC20 to FC25) apply BHC
processing and those of the 40’s (FC40 to FC48) do not.

[With BHC processing]

By applying BHC processing, adverse effects due to the cranial bones are compensated
for, reducing the bridge artifact of the skull base. The CT numbers are almost constant
until the parietal bone, permitting filming without changing the window level.

FC20: A smooth image with fine granularity is obtained.

FC2 1: A comparatively sharp image is obtained. This is a standard head function.

FC22: A smooth image with coarse granularity is obtained.

- 616 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: V5 SYSTEM FUNCTION GUIDE --

The functions described below are the functions enhancing the low contrast and the
sharpness due to the granularity.

The enhancement of granularity and low contrast is stronger as the function number
becomes larger.

FC23: A comparatively smooth image with low noise is obtained.

FC24: Between FC23 and FC25.

FC25: The granularity and the low contrast are enhanced most strongly. The blood
vessel image acquired by contrast medium injection is clearly enhanced.

[Head functions without the BHC processing]

FC40: Head function to apply fine granularity. Use this function for a child’s head when
FC44 is used for an adult’s head.

FC41: This function has coarse granularity. The obtained image is considerably smooth.

FC42: The shading (artifact that the image becomes whitish at the margin of the brain)
at the margin of the bone is corrected more than by FC20. The area around the
bone does not become white even for a patient whose bone is hard, permitting the
image to be observed until around the parietal bone under the almost-constant
window conditions.

FC43: This function provides shading correction as well as FC42, and makes the
granularity for the cerebral parenchyma finer than FC42.

FC44: This function provides shading correction as well as FC42, and makes the
-3ranularity for the cerebral parenchyma finer than FC43.
---- -
FC45: Head function for the solid state detector. The obtained image is somewhat
sharp.

FC46: Use this function to scan a child head when FC43 is used to scan the adult head.

FC47: Function for the infant head. Use this function if bone is softer than child’s bone
and shading occurs even using the child function. This provides fine granularity.

FC48: Function for the infant head. This provides comparatively coarse granularity.

- 617 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: V5 SYSTEM FUNCTION GUIDE .-

Functions for Internal Ear and Bone
FC30: Standard function for the internal ear and the bone

FC52: This is a lung-field function but can also be used as a function for internal ear and
bone when undershoot due to an internal ear or a bone is conspicuous. Use an
image filter simultaneously.

Because of the high-resolution processing, it takes the functions described below a little
longer to complete reconstruction than the other functions.

FCSO: Used for regions such as the auditory ossicles, the spine, etc. which require high
resolution.

FC8 1: This function suppresses undershoot due to enhancement more than FC80.

5. Function for a Xe-Study

FC60: Xe-Study function. This is also useful when a functional image is generated in
dynamic study.

6. Functions for System Maintenance

FC70: Basic function for system maintenance and check

FC90: &nctions for system performance evaluation. Because of the high-resolution

=+ocessing, this function takes a little longer than the other functions to cor@Aete
reconstruction.

- 618 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: XVlSlONlSP (3.5M) EXAM PLAN

Xvision/SP 3. SM exam Plan

n Hierarchy

[Head] [233A 233A 462C 375B 49741 * Characters in brackets

[Chest] [233A233A363B 233A4974] indicate JIS codes.
[Abdomen] [233A233A4A22 233A4974] .
[Other] [233A 233 A 2431) 244E 423E-J

Scan0 WWIWL 1. ww:200 WI&:50

2. 150 70
3. 300 50

n Head Plan

1. Head S & S jI462C 4974 2353 2175 23531 S/5 + 10

Rapid: 120 kV/200 mA/1.5 set/S/3 mm x 2 = 5 mm stack/FC2 1 ------ 7 slices

120 kV/25 0 mA/ 1.5 set/S/ 10 mm/ 1.5 sec/FC2 1 ----------------- 8 slices

2. Head S & S S/9 + 10

Rapid: 120 kV/200 rnN1.5 set/S/3 mm x 3 = 9 mm stack/FC21 ------ 4 slices

120 kW25 0 mA/ 1.5 set/S/l 0 mm/ 1.5 sec/FC2 1----------------- 8 slices

3. Head S & V [462C 4974 2353 2175 23561 S/5*25

Rapid: 120 kV/250 mA/l .5 set/S/S mm/l. 5 sec/FC2 1 ------------------ 25 slices

4. Head helical S/3 100 mm [462C 4974 2558 256A 252B- 256B]

Helical: 120 kV/150 mA/l .O set/S/3 mm - 3 mm/rot/FC2 1 -------------- 100 mm

5. Head helical S/2 60 mm

Helical: 120 kW150 mA/l .O set/S/2 mm - 2 mrn/rot/FC21 -------------- 60 mm

6. Head helical S/l 40 mm

Helical: 120 kV/150 mA/l .O set/S/l mm - 1 mm/rot/FC2 1 -------------- 40 mm/INTERP-l

Head WW/WL 1. WW:80 WL:40

2. 100 40
3. 2000 400

- 619 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJE-CT: XVlSlONlSP (3.5M) EXAM PLAN --

a Cervical region Plan

1. Cervical region S & S [375B 4974 2353 2175 23531 S/5 x 25

Rapid: 120 kW250 mA/l .O set/S/S mm/FCO 1 __--_____----_--___-------- 15 slices

2. Cervical region helical [375B 4974 2558 256A 252B 256B] S/5 180 mm

Helical: 120 kW200 mA/l .O set/S/S mm - 5 mrn/rot/FCOl -------------- 180 mm

Cervical region WW/WL 1. I&W:250 WL:40

2. 300 50
3. 2000 400

n Chest Plan

1. Chest S & S M/IO R5*6 [363B 4974 2353 2175 23531

Rapid: 120 kW150 mA/l .O sec/M/lO mrn/FClO, 50 Multiple reconstruction

(5 slices from the apex of a lung: FCO 1, 50)

2. Chest S & S M./lOR3*10

Rapid: 120 kW150 mA0.0 sec/MIlO mm/FClO, 50 Multiple reconstruction

(6 slices from the apex of a lung: FCO 1, 50)

3. Chest S & S M/2 R5*4

Rapid: 120 kW150 mAI1.0 se&I/=! mrnLFC83

4. Chest helical Ml0 300 mm [363B 4974 2558 256A 252B 256B]
* - --.---
Helical: i20 kW150 mAll.0 se&l/10 mm - 10 mm/rot/FClO, 50 -Y
Multiple reconstruction -------------------------------------------- 300 mm

5. Chest helical Ml0 100 mm*3

Helical: 120 kW150 m.A/l.O sec/M/lO mm - 10 mrn/rot/FClO, 50

Multiple reconstruction -------------------------------------------- 100 mm

6. Chest helical M/240 mm

Helical: 120 kW150 mA/l .O set/M/2 mm - 2 mrn/rot/FCSO ------------- 40 mm

(Mediastinum FC 10) (Chest FC50)

Chest WWWL 1. WW250 W-L:35 1. WW:1500 WL:-600
2. 350 35 2. 2000 -500
3. 1600 -600 3. 1000 -700

- 620 -
 No. SD201-322ED

SUBJECT: XVlSlONlSP (3.5M) EXAM PLAN --

n Abdomen

1. Abdomen S & S M/10 R5*5 [4A22 4974 2353 2175 23531

Rapid: 120 kW200 mA/l .O set/M/ 10 mrn/FC 10 ------------------------- 20 slices

2. Abdomen helical MI10 220 mm [4A22 4974 2558 256A 252B 256B]

Helical: 120 kW250 mA/l .O sec/M/lO mm - 10 mm/rot/FC 10 ---------- 250 mm

3. Abdomen helical M/7 250 mm

Helical: 120 kW250 mA/l .O set/M/7 mm - 7 mrn/rot/FC 10 ------------- 200 mm

4. Abdomen helical M/5 120 mm

Helical: 120 kW250 mA/l .O set/M/S mm - 5 mm/rot/Fe 10 ------------- 120 mm

5. Abdomen helical M/3 90 mm

Helical: 120 kW250 mA/l .O set/M/3 mm - 3 mm/rot/FC 14 ------------- 90 mm

6. Abdomen Go & Go M/10 180 mm [4A22 4974 2347 236F 2175 2347 236F]

Helical: 120 kV/200 mA/l .O se&I/l 0 mm - 10 mrn/rot/FC 10 ---------- 180 mm

7. Abdomen Go & Go M/7 160 mm

Helical: 120 kV/220 mA/l .O set/M/7 mm - 7 mm/rot/FC 14 ------------- 160 mm

8. Abdomen Go & Go M/5 100 mm

Z&
-2s
Helicz%%O kV/220 mA/l .O set/M/S mm - 5 mm/rot/FC 14 ------------- 100 mm - zT

Abdomen WWIWL 1. I&W:250 WL:50

2. 300 35
3. 1600 -600
.
I Liver to pelvis

1. Liver-to-pelvis S & S MI10 R5*5 [344E 2141 397C 4857 2353 2175 23531

Rapid: 120 kW200 mN 1.0 set/M/ 10 mm/FC 10 ------------------------- 35 slices

2. Liver/pelvis helical IWO 90 x 4 [344E 397C 4857 2558 256A 252B 256B]

Helical: 120 kV/200 mA/l .O set/M/l 0 mm - 10 mm/rot/FC 10 ---------- 90 mm x 4

-621 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJE-CT: XVlSION/SP (3.5M) EXAM PLAN --

n Spine

1. Spines&S M/5x20

Rapid: 120 kW300 mA/l .O see/M/S mm/FCO 1, 30 + UEO------------- 20 slices

2. Spine S & V Ml5 3*5 [4054 4447 2353 2175 23561

S & V: 120 kW250 mA/1.5 see/M/S mm/FCOl __________________________

15 slices

3. Spine S &V M/3 3*5

S & V: 120 kVl270 mA/1.5 secM3 mm/FC02 -------------------------- 15 slices

Spine WWNirL 1. w-w:80 wL:40

2. 100 40
3. 2000 400

1 Auditory ossicle

1. Auditory ossicle S & V S/l*30 [3C2A 3E2E 397C 2353 2175 23561

S & V: 130 kW200 mA11.5 see/M/l mm/FC81 -------------------------- 30 slices

Head II: 400 mAs

Abdomen 1200 to 250 mAs
Chest 2: 150 mAs

- 622 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

SUBJE-CT: NRA _-
(NOISE REDUCTION ALGORITHM-)
NRA
Noise Reduction Algorithm
<Flow of image generation>

Scan data

Raw data Image data

Pre-processing p Image reconstruction p

<Image noise>

1/ (Scan data noise)2 + (Calibration data noise)2

<Calibration data>

I- Existing calibration data Calibration data by NRA

Sensitivity correction between the detectors Sensitivity correction between the

and displacement correction in the detectors is performed using water-
projection direction are performed using phantom data and displacement
water-phantom data. correction in the projection direction is
performed using air-calibration data.
+ Channel direction Water-phantom data
y$:::::?
.i.*...-:..i.-. ...........................................’
..... ___..:.:.:.: ._. ....:::g$$ ...
.:..::. ... .-.- ..-ii...
........:..:.:
.....:.: ..._..............................
........._...........................................~.~...~
........ --
.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:
.. - .. ..... .............................‘A..-.:
. . . .. ..._.iii..i......i
............. . ._ --+ Channel direction ---
-f-...........................
........................--=i
....-..:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:
. . . . . . . .... ... . . .. . ..................................-...:...
. -..
.i.......-::~.:.:.:.: ......-::..::.:.: .......................~...............
..................:.:.: .....:.:.:
Projection . .. ....--.:.:
‘...
~~~-~:~~:: . i.......................... .:.:.:............ ...... x
direction .:-:+X-:-X
......i. Cahbratlon ~2
..-...-..i...
..-.-.---iii \1
E:z. data .:..::.lii
.:iii.-ii
...:i..:.....
................::.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:
.-..:..................... ..........-..................
.............................................:.:.
.. .. . . ..ii............................. . .. Projection Calibration
‘.‘::.‘.‘.‘.‘.~::::.~.:
.;;.....:.-:...:.:.:
....i.-..::..::...: ._.......................... _ ,.s::::: Air-calibration
i...... -:.-.-... .. . . . . . ... . .. ... ... .
.. . .. .. .. .~.iii...................., . . .. . . . ...:...:.:.:.:.:,
... _._. direction ..:.:+y
‘.:.:.:.:.
.is:.-..-
......:. :.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.: .. ..y...............:.:.
.. .. .. . .. .................................................._....:.:.:.: :.:
.__ data .5.....-.. data
.-.-ii..
....... .-ii:::.:.:.:,:.:
......>:.:
..- .....-..:.:
.:.:‘:‘:‘:‘:‘: ....................................................‘:.:...
...............:.:.:
...............
.........
........ ::... . .. ..:ii..:.:-.‘.:................i...........
...............................................................

The noise element applied on water- Eli

phantom data becomes the noise element of The noise element of water-phantom data
calibration data without any changes. is suppressed.

When NRA processing is performed

Calibration data noise is reduced. Image noise is reduced.

- 623 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

SUBJET: NRA .-
(NOISE REDUCTION ALGORITHM-)
Effect
(1) The image noise is reduced.

Reduction rate
Head region I 5 to 10%
Abdominal region 1 5 to 20%

The density resolution (low contrast) is improved.

(2) The tendency of noise (such as that the noise running in the circumferential direction) is
eliminated. The uniformity is improved.

Organs such as the liver are imaged more clearly.

(3) Deterioration of calibration data over time can be corrected by scanning air-calibration data.

<Image quality of the X-ray CT system>

(1) Low-contrast resolution

Image noise

(2) High-contrast resolution

Thickness of X-ray beams, sampling pitch

-
(3) Time resostion ---

Scan time, scan cycle time

(4) CT number reliability

(5) Artifact-less .

- 624 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

SUBJECT: BHC (BEAM HARDENING --

CORRECTION)
<Beam hardening correction (BHC >>
(1) Substances should be separated spatially. Part where only
Substances can be discriminated by the CT water exists
number at every location and separated.
’ Part where only a
(2) The absorption coefficient p(E) of the substance
bone exists. ,
is known.
The spectrum I(E) of incident X-rays is kno\vn.

Object

BHC image

Correction method

f cnlwiation of fhe I After the image is onece reconstructect~sel!;

correction processing is performed and then the
image is reconstructed again (2 path method).

Error calculat
of projection aat proces

I Original image
I

Calculation of the
s path length of the
water

- 625 -
 No. SD20 I-322ED

TOSHtBA

Xpress/SX, Xpress/GX
HELICAL SCAN
APPLICATION MANUAL

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

- 626 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

Xpress/SX, kpress/GX HELICAL SCAN

CONTENTS

1. Helical Scan System ~~~-~~~~~_~~~~~~~~__~---~~~~~~~~~~~~~

_____-_~~~~-~~~~~~~________________________
628

1.1 What is Helical Scan? ----------------__----------------------------------------------------- 628

1.2 Advantages of Helical Scan -------__-----------____________________------------------------ 630

1.3 Characteristics of a Helical CT Scanner -------------------------------------------------- 631

--

_ _A---

- 627 -
 No. SD201-322ED

XpresdSX, ipress/GX HELICAL SCAN

I. Helical Scan System

1.1 What is Helical Scan?

In the Helical Scan method, as shown in Figure l-l, raw data is acquired by rotating the
X-ray tube and detectors continuously while the patient is moved through the gantry at
constant speed. Thus, the tube traces a helical path relative to the patient’s body.

In Xpress series, Helical Scan is performed by continuously rotating the X-ray tube and
detectors while the couchtop is shifted in the axial direction (i.e., along the patient’s body
axis).

Thus, images are reconstructed from continuous raw data.

It should be noted, however, that the slice position cannot be specified because the
couchtop is shifted during scanning. Furthermore, strong artifacts result if conventional
image reconstruction processing is employed. To overcome these problems, raw data are
compensated and images are reconstructed from raw data generated at the desired slice
position (Figure l-2).

Gantry

Cay tube

y X-ray tube rotation

Patient couch

Figure 1-I Principle of Helical Scan

- 628 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

XpresdSX, Xpress/GX HELICAL SCAN

.-

Heiical path traced

by the X-ray tube

b Patient couch

Raw data for one rotation is extracted from continuous raw data

Figure l-2 Outline of Helical Scan

- 629 -
 No. SD20 1-322ED

XpresdSX, %press/GX HELlCAL SCAN

1.2 Advantages of Helical Scan

The major advantage of Helical Scan is that a wide range in the axial direction can be
scanned at high-speed within a short time.

The major advantages of Helical Scan in practical clinical use are as follows:

(1) The target region can be scanned during a single breath hold, permitting continuous
images unaffected by respiratory motion artifacts to be obtained.

(2) Continuous images can be acquired without loss of data caused by shifting of internal
organs because data is acquired in helical manner. Moreover, images can be
reconstructed at any desired slice position after scanning has been completed.

(3) In contrast studies, scanning can be completed while the target region is strongly
enhanced, improving diagnostic accuracy and minimizing the amount of contrast
medium required.

(4) Thanks to the above features, continuous Helical Scan data permits more precise
multiplanar reconstruction (MPR) or three-dimensional (3D) images to be generated
more easily compared with conventional CT scanning.

(5) Compared with the conventional scanning method, Helical Scan permits examinations
to be completed in a shorter time, minimizing patient discomfort.

(6) In Helical Scan, the couchtop is moved during scanning, reducing the radiation dose
compared with the conventional scanning method.

(7) The same operating procedures are adopted for Helical Scan in the X-Series as for
the conventional scanning method.
za
-.z
-= ---

- 630 -
 No. SD201-322ED

Xpress/SX, Xpress/GX HELlCAL SCAN

1.3 Characteristics of a Helical CT Scanner

The system requirements for Helical Scan are outlined below:

(1) Gantrykouchtop control

In Helical Scan studies, the couchtop must be shifted at constant speed during
scanning, with a higher degree of precision than required for scanoscope. The
couchtop sliding speed should be selectable.

(2) Data processing

Helical CT scanners must be provided with a large-capacity memory or storage

system because a large amount of data is acquired within a short time.

Furthermore, a new reconstruction algorithm is required because severe artifacts are

generated if Helical Scan data is reconstructed using the conventional method.

(3) Software

Dedicated Helical Scan software is required. The software must be able to control
various functions such as interactive operation of Helical Scan, dedicated
reconstruction algorithms (interpolated reconstruction) for Helical Scan images,
gantrykouchtop control, etc.

-631 -
 No. SD201-322ED

d
XpresdSX, XjoresdGX HELlCAL SCAN
-
[Chest/abdomen B] Designed for examinations of the chest and abdomen, this is used for
scanning a range of 450 mm or more within an M area (320 mm).
The target area can be covered with a single scan (30 s).

exam Plan

No. nPe Scanning parameters

1 Scanoscope 120 kV, 100 mA: 500 mm, X-ray tube angle: 0”
2 Scan plan
3 Helical Scan 120 kV, 150 mA. M. 10 mm. FcOl - 03, FclO -
Total scanning time: 30 s
Couchtop movement speed: 15 mm/s
Couchtop movement direction: IN
Relati1.e sliding distance: -10 mm
Helical Scan conditions (reconstruction range): 450 mm
Image reconstruction pause: lo-mm interval
Voice: Specified
-# Additional
scanning

Purpose: Used for routine examination of the region from the lung apex to the retroperitoneal
organs in a single scan. Scanning should be synchronized with contrast medium
injection. .-..

Parameter Editor:

BOX 1 Fc FcO 1
No. of images 1 Full/Half Full
Reconstruction range 450 Image filter 1 NO
Couchtop movement speed: mm/rotation 15 Ele image reconstruction 1g
Couchtop movement speed: mm/s 15
IN/OUT -3 IN

mA 150 wL2 +0040

Area M ww3 1500
Slice thickness 10 WL3 I 300
Prescannina voice 01
Postscanning voice 05 --
Relative sliding distance -10 mm
Patient position su To execute ima e reconstruction
Insertion direction HF Internolation method I 3.
Display direction VFF Method to execute image reconstruction First/last
Susnension time oo:oo.o Reconstruction interval (mm) 10.0

Notes: * The scanning area can be changed depending on the size of the target area.
* If the patient cannot be hold his/her breath for 30 s, the breath holding time can be
extended by oxygen inhalation at 3 atm. pressure.
* High-quality images can be obtained by using a high voltage since the X-ray tube load
is reduced.

- 632 -
 No. SD201-322ED

TOSHikBA
Internal educational
material I

EXAMPLES OF
CONTRAST STUDY USING
1.5 SEC. HELICAL SCAN
a

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

-633 -
 No. SD20L322ED

ELKAL SCAlV

CONTENTS

1. Before performing contrast study ____________________---~---- -___-__----------___--- ______________

63 5

Preprocessing _-_______-_____-------
----------------------------------------------------------------- 635

2. Helical scan parameters --_---__-------------------------------------------------------------------- 636

3. Examples of contrast study -----_----_-------_------------------------ ---_------------------------- 637

\
Head --------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------------- 637

Others __________________________
-_____________-
- _______
---------------------------------------------638

- 634 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

f. BEFoR~~PERFORMlNG CONTRAST STUDY HELICAL SCAN

Preprocessing
1, Washing the intestinal tract : If a contrast study for the digestive tract has been performed,
the remaining barium, etc., may cause an-artifact. Therefore,
establish a proper interval between the digestive tract contrast
study and the CT study. If there is no time for an interval, give
a purgative on the previous day or wash the intestine to
discharge the barium.

2. Meal before study : On condition that a normal contrast study is to be performed,

instruct the patient not to have a meal before the CT study.
Particularly, when the abdomen or pelvis is scanned, the
contents of the digestive tract or gas due to the ingest will cause
an artifact, preventing easy diagnosis.

3. Wearing a hospital gown : Make the patient wear a hospital gown to prevent the patient’s
clothes being soiled by the contrast medium, etc., as well as to
avoid the occurrence of an artifact due to a clothes button or a
necklace.

4. Reserving a vein When contrast medium is to be used, reserve a vein in advance.

This is for injecting the contrast medium and taking quick
action if a side effect of the contrast medium occurs.

-635 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

2. HELlCAL SCAN PARAMETERS (-6&i&dEL,CAL SCAN

1. Slice thickness (1, 2, 3, 5, 7, and 10 mm)

2. Couch feed speed (0.5 to 30 mm/rot)

3. X-ray tube voltage (120, 130 kV)

4. X-ray tube current (50 to 300 mA)

5. Image reconstruction interpolation function (Interp-0, -1, and -2)

6. Reconstruction functions (FcOl to Fc99)

1) BHC processing : (radiation-quality change artifact elimination software for head and
abdomen)

FcOl to Fc03: For abdomen

Fc04 to Fc09: For head

2) RASP processing: (file-artifact reduction and noise reduction software for shoulder and
pelvis)

3) OVA processing : (radiation-quality change artifact elimination software, FOV

protrusion processing included)

- 636 -
 No. SD201-322ED

Head
I. Target: Cerebrovascular disease (aneurysm,
stenosis, etc.)
1) Scan conditions:

Tube voltage (kV) Tube current (m/I) Scan time (s) Slice thickness (mm) Couch feed speed (mm/r) Interpolation
120, 130 100 to 150 1.5 2 1.5 to 2.0 Jnterp-1, 2
Image reconstruction function Image reconstruction interval (mm) Total scan time (s) Total scan range (mm)
Fc05 0.5 30 to 50 30 to 66

2) Contrast medium conditions: Iodine content : 300 mg/ml

21G wing needle or 20G
indwelling needle when the
contrast medium rate is high
Contrast medium rate : 2 to 3 ml/s (100 ml)
Total 100 ml
Delay . 25 to 35 s

3) Scan method:
.

1 Scanning 1
ON
I ’
Start of injection of the contrast medium
2 to 3 ml/s (100 ml)
delay 25 to 35 s :.

[+z
1
+
5q-p---
I J

4) Reference: l When a cerebrovascular disease is scanned as a target, use a slice

thickness of 2 mm to reduce the partial volume effect as much as
possible.

l When Zooming Reconstruction is performed only for the circle of

Willis, finer blood vessels (AICA, PICA, etc.) can also be imaged.

l When reconstruction function Fe05 or Fc06 is used, the image quality

is improved due to BHC.

l When scanning is to be performed for the purpose of generating three-

dimensional images, set the reconstruction interval to less than half the
slice thickness.

l Take the image S/N into account for proper use of Interp- 1.
-637-
 No. SD20 I-322ED

(‘-6&q HELlCAL SCAN

Others
I. Target: Lung to pelvic organs
1) Scan conditions:

Tube voltage (kV) Tube current (n-A) Scan time (s) Slice thiclwess (mm) Couch feed speed (mm/r) Interpolation
120, 130 100 to 150 1.5 10 15 Interp-2
Imagereconstructionfunction Imagereconstructioninterval (mm) Total scantime (s) Total scanrange(mm)
FcOl, 10 10 50 500

2) Contrast medium conditions: Iodine content : 300 to 370 mg/ml

2 1G wing needle or 20G
indwelling needle when the
contrast medium rate is high
Contrast medium rate : 2 to 2.5 ml/s (60 ml) + 0.5 to
0.7 ml/s (40 ml)
Total : 100 to 150ml
Delay : 30s

3) Scan method:

Start of injection of the contrastmedium

1.5 to 2.0 ml/s (60 ml>+ 0.5 to 0.7 ml/s (40 ml>’
delay 35 s :
:
10 mm, 15 mm/r

-638-
 No. SD201-322ED

/f---.5 sec.;HELiCAL SCAN

4) Reference: l Perform scanning from the apex of a lung to the pelvic organs.

l Scan the pelvic organ at the second-phase contrast enhancement while

keeping the effect of contrast enhancement.

l This method is also optimal for emergency study.

l This method can be used for patients who cannot hold their breath.

l This method can be used for both a simple study and a contrast
enhancement study.

0 Use FcOl for the pelvic region. (The image quality is improved due to
BHC.)
(When RASP is set to ON, artifacts can further be reduced, providing
smoother images.)

- 639 -
 No. SD20 l-322ED

TOSHhA
( Intern~;~iiona/ J

EXAMPLES OF
CONTRAST STUDY USING
LICAL SCAN
l

‘-----+------

‘4-Y
-----.+

------------

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

- 640 -
 No. SDZOl-322ED

CONTENTS

1. Before performing contrast study ----------------------------- --_---------------__---------------- 642

Preprocessing ____________---____------------~------_------3----------------------------------------- 642

2. Helical scan parameters ---- -- --- ---- - --- - -----------------_--____________________----------- 643

3. Examples of contrast study -------------------- ------------------_--------------------------------- 644

Head ____________________------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 644

Others ------------------------------------ ---------------------------- ------I------------------------- 646

-641 -
 No. SD201-322ED

1. BEFORE PERFORMING CONTRAST STUDY HELlCAL SCAN

Preprocessing
1. Washing the intestinal tract : If a contrast study for the digestive tract has been performed,
the remaining barium, etc., may cause an artifact. Therefore,
establish a proper interval between the digestive tract contrast
study and the CT study. If there is no time for an interval, give
a purgative on the previous day or wash the intestine to
discharge the barium. ’

2. Meal before study On condition that a normal contrast study is to be performed,

instruct the patient not to have a meal before the CT study.
Particularly, when the abdomen or pelvis is scanned, the
contents of the digestive tract or gas due to the ingest will cause
an artifact, preventing easy diagnosis.

3. Wearing a hospital gown Make the patient wear a hospital gown to prevent the patient’s
clothes being soiled by the contrast medium, etc., as well as to
avoid the occurrence of an artifact due to a clothes button or a
necklace.

4. Reserving a vein When contrast medium is to be used, reserve a vein in advance.

This is for injecting the contrast medium and taking quick
action if a side effect of the contrast medium occurs.

- 642 -
 No. SD201-322ED

2. - HELICAL-.SCAN PARAMETERS HELlCAL SCAN

1. Slice thickness (1, 2, 3, 5, 7, and 10 mm)

2. Couch feed speed (0.5 to 30 mm/rot)

3. X-ray tube voltage ([80, 1001, 120, 130, [135] kV)

4. X-ray tube current (50 to 300, [400] mA)

5. Image reconstruction interpolation function (Interp-0, -1, and -2)

6. Reconstruction fin&ions (FcOl to Fc99)

1) BHC processing : (radiation-quality change artifact elimination software for head and
abdomen)

FcOl to Fc04 <FcOl to Fc03>: For abdomen

Fc20 to Fc25 <Fc04 to Fc09>: For head

2) RASP processing: (file-artifact reduction and noise reduction software for shoulder and
pelvis)

3) OVA processing : (radiation-quality change artifact elimination software, FOV

protrusion processing included)

l Figures described above in brackets [ ] are for the Xpress/SX.

l Figures described above in brackets < > are for the Xvision/GX.

- 643 -
 No. SD201-322ED

HELICAL SCAN

Head
I. Target: Cerebrovascular disease (aneurysm,
stenosis, etc.)
1) Scan conditions: .

Tube voltage (kV) Tube current (mA) Scan time (s) Slice thickness (mm) Couch feed speed (mm/r) Interpolation
120,130 (135) 200 to 250 1 1 1.0 to 1.5 Interp-1,2
~- -~
Image reconstruction function Image reconstruction interval (mm) Total scan time (s) Total scan range (mm)
Fc20 (Fc2 1) 0.5 30 I 30 to 45

The characters in parentheses are for the Xpress/SX.

2) Contrast medium conditions: Iodine content : 300 mg/ml

2 1G wing needle or 20G
indwelling needle when the
contrast medium rate is high
Contrast medium rate : 2 to 3 ml/s (100 ml)
Total : 100ml
Delay : 25 to35 s

3) Scan method:

Start of injection of the contrast medium

2 to 3 ml/s (100 ml)
delay 25 to 35 s

- 644 -
 No. SD20L322ED

4) Reference: l When a cerebrovascular disease is scanned as a target, use a slice

thickness of 1 mm to reduce the partial volume effect as much as
possible.

l When the scanning field is wide, use a couch feed speed of 1.5 mm or 2
mm/r and a slice thickness of 2 mm.

l When Zooming Reconstruction is performed only for the circle of

Willis, finer blood vessels (AICA, PICA, etc.) can also be imaged.

l When reconstruction function Fc20 or Fc21 is used, the image quality

is improved due to BHC.

l When scanning is to be performed for the purpose of generating three-

dimensional images, set the reconstruction interval to less than half the
slice thickness.

l Take the image S/N into account for proper use of Interp-1 .

- 645 -
 No. SD201-322ED

Others
I. Target: Lung to pelvic organs
1) Scan conditions:

Tube voltage (kV) Tube current (rnA) Scan time (s) Slice thickness (mm) Couch feed speed (rmn/r) Interpolation

120,130 (135) 150 to 200 1 10 15 Interp-2

Image reconstruction function Image reconstruction interval (mm) Total scan time (s) Total scan range (mm)

FcOl, 10 10 40 600

The characters in parentheses are for the Xpress/SX.

2) Contrast medium conditions: Iodine content : 300 to 370 mg/ml

21G wing needle or 20G
indwelling needle when the
contrast medium rate is high
Contrast medium rate : 2 to 2.5 ml/s (60 ml) + 0.5 to
0.7 ml/s (40 ml)
Total : 100 to 150 ml
Delay 35 s
3) Scan method:

Start of injection of the contrast medium

1.5 to 2.0 ml/s (GO ml) + 0.5 to 0.7 ml/s (40 ml>
*.
delay 30 s
; 10 mm, 15 mm/r
I b

- 646 -
 tie. SD2W322ED
b

4) Reference: 0 Perform scanning from the apex of a lung to the pelvic organs.

l Scan the pelvic organ at the second-phase contrast enhancement while

keeping the effect of contrast enhancement.

8 This method is also optimal for emergency study.

l This method can be used forpatients who cannot hold their breath.

l This method can be used for both a simple study and a contrast
enhancement study.

l Use any of FcOl to Fc04 for the pelvic region. (The image quality is
improved due to BHC.)
(When RASP is set to ON, artifacts can further be reduced, providing
smoother images.)

- 647 -